instrumentation › ... › 2019 › instrumentation.pdf3. gendreau, michel and jean-yves potvin...

INSTRUMENTATION

ENGINEERING

INSTRUMENTATION ENGINEERING

LIST OF NEW COURSES

S.No. Course

Code

Name of the Course L:T:P Credits

1. 19EI3001 Embedded System for Smart Appliances and Energy

Management

3:0:0 3

2. 19EI3002 Embedded Systems and IoT in Health Care 3:0:0 3

3. 19EI3003 Metaheuristic Techniques for Optimization 3:0:0 3

Course Objectives:

1. To study the fundamentals of smart energy management system

2. To know the power requirements for home appliances

3. To study the basics of energy auditing

Course Outcomes:

The Student will be able to

1. Understand the fundamental concepts of Demand –Response management

2. Outline the concepts of Intelligent small scale decentralized energy system

3. Summarize the concept of Smart Energy management systems

4. Understand the power supply consideration for home appliances

5. Develop program for embedded based smart energy meter.

6. Categorize various energy auditing services

Module 1: Demand –Response management for dependable power grids: ( 8 hrs)

Energy market considerations- principles, challenge, new roles for customers, consumer classification,

demand response management activities, grid economy versus grid stability, functional assets of demand

response systems,

Module 2: Intelligent small scale decentralized energy system: ( 8 hrs)

Decentralized energy system -working, strength in using a decentralized system, challenges to using a

decentralized energy system, implementing strategies.

Module 3: Smart Energy management systems: ( 8 hrs)

home automation and energy management, environmental emissions reduction, smart home energy

management systems – goal, challenges and possible solutions, models for Energy management system

scheduling, different approaches related to appliance scheduling

Module 4: Power supplies for low power smart appliances: ( 8 hrs)

Power supply consideration for home appliances, safety and reliability, direct current power feeding

technology and its interfaces.

Module 5: Energy measurement techniques for smart metering: ( 8 hrs)

Smart grid and smart energy infrastructure- power generating subsection, transmission and distribution

utilities, customer section utilities. Smart measurement and metering- Embedded based smart metering and

smart measurement, smart distribution and utilization systems.

Module 6:Energy Auditing: ( 8 hrs)

Energy Auditing Services, Basic Components of an Energy Audit, Specialized Audit Tools, Industrial Audits,

Commercial Audits, Residential Audits, Indoor Air Quality

Reference Books::

1. Christoph, Grimm, Peter Neumann, Stefan Mahlknecht, Embedded System for Smart Appliances

and Energy Management, springer 2013

2. Wayne C. Turner, Steve Doty, Energy Management Handbook, CRC press 2007

3. Barney L. Cape hart, Wayne C. Turner, William J. Kennedy, Guide to Energy Management, By

CRC Press 2008.

4. AmlanChakrabarthy, Energy Engineering and Management, PHI. 2018.

5. Daniel Thalmann, N Subhashini, K. Mohanaprasad, “Ïntelligent Embedded Systems”, Springer,

2018.

19EI3001 EMBEDDED SYSTEM FOR SMART APPLIANCES

AND ENERGY MANAGEMENT

L T P C

3 0 0 3


Course Objectives: 1. To teach the internet concepts and design methodology

2. To teach fundamentals of embedded system

3. To teach importance of embedded and IOT in health care.

Course Outcomes::

At the end of the course, students will be able to:

1. Acquire the knowledge & concepts of IOT.

2. Understand the basic concepts of IOT Protocols.

3. Applies the concepts of embedded system for health care applications.

4. Analyze the importance of digital health

5. Understand the ethical issues in health care

6. Develop an application based on IOT in health care

Module 1: Internet Concepts and Infrastructure: ( 8 hrs) Broad Band Transmission facilities –Open

Interconnection standards –Local Area Networks – Wide Area Networks –Network management – Network

Security – Cluster computers. Internet concepts - Capabilities and limitations of the internet -– Interfacing

Internet server applications to corporate databases HTML and XML Web page design through

programming and the use of active components.

Module 2: Design Methodology and Protocols: ( 8 hrs) Introduction-Characteristics-Physical design - Protocols – Logical design – Enabling technologies – IoT

Levels – Domain Specific IoTs – IoT vs M2M. IOT design methodology -IoT systems management – IoT

Design Methodology – Specifications Integration and Application Development.

Module 3: Embedded Systems in Health Care: ( 8 hrs) Generic Embedded Systems Structure-

Components of Embedded Systems- Sensors and Actuators-importance of Analog/Digital Conversion-

Embedded system based physiological monitoring system- Health care innovations using embedded system.

Module 4: Digital Health : ( 8 hrs) Evolution of digital health- challenges and opportunities of digital health- importance of digital health.

Module 5: Ethical Issues in Health Care: ( 8 hrs) ethical implications of digital health technologies- privacy, confidentiality and security of

personal health data-ethical framework and guidelines in digital health – principles of biomedical ethics.

Module 6: IoT in Health Care Applications: ( 8 hrs) IOT based health care- physiological parameter monitoring system- future challenges

in health care- health care echo system with IOT- IOT for personalized healthcare- wearable device

characteristics-analysis of power aware protocols and standards for critical e-health applications social

network analysis in health care, embedded health care system for senior resident using IOT

Reference Books:: 1. Eugene C. Nelson, Paul B. Batalden, Marjorie M. Godfrey, “Quality By Design: A Clinical

Microsystems Approach”, John Wiley& sons 2007

2. Samuel A. Fricker, Christoph Thuemmler, Anastasius Gavras, “Requirements Engineering for

Digital Health”, Springer 2015.

3. Klaus Pohl, Harald Hönninger, Reinhold Achatz, Manfred Broy, “Model-Based Engineering of

Embedded Systems: The SPES 2020 Methodology”, Springer 2012

4. Adrian Mc Ewen, Hakim Cassimally, “Designing the Internet of Things”, Wiely, 2013.

5. Andrew S Tanenbaum, “Computer Networks”, Pearson Education Pvt Ltd, New Delhi, 4th Edition.

6. Stallings, William, “Data and computer communications”, Pearson Education Pvt. Ltd, New Delhi,

2007.

19EI3002 EMBEDDED SYSTEMS AND IoT IN HEALTH CARE L T P C

3 0 0 3


Course Objectives:

1. To provide an overview of the metaheuristic techniques and its structure.

2. Introduce the different classes of metaheuristic techniques

3. Provide an Overview of the optimization techniques with case studies.

Course Outcomes::

The Student will be able to

1. Discuss about the structure of metaheuristic algorithms and their efficiency.

2. Comment on the different types of Trajectory Based Metaheuristic Techniques.

3. Analyze the structure of population based metaheuristic techniques.

4. Describe the concepts of difference based algorithms.

5. Compare the multi-objective optimization algorithms.

6. Comment on the applications of metaheuristic techniques with the help of case studies.

Module 1: Introduction: ( 8 hrs)

Classes of Metaheuristics- Overall Structure of Metaheuristic Algorithms – Efficiency of Metaheuristics

Module 2: Trajectory Based Metaheuristics: ( 8 hrs)

Deterministic Local Search - Random Local search – Global Search: Simulated Annealing, Variable

Neighborhood search, Tabu Search.

Module 3: Population Based Metaheuristics: ( 8 hrs)

Structure – Genetic Algorithm – Particle Swarm Optimization – Ant Colony Optimization.

Module 4: Difference Based Algorithms: ( 8 hrs)

Differential Evolution - Bayesian Optimization Algorithms - Scalability of Metaheuristic Algorithms.

Module 5:Multi-objective Optimization: ( 8 hrs)

Multi-objective optimization problem, non-dominance, weighted sum methods, evolutionary multi-objective

optimization - Techniques for dynamic optimization.

Module 6: Applications and Case Studies: ( 8 hrs)

Neural networks design, data mining, scheduling.

Reference Books::

1. El-Ghazali Talbi, ‘Metaheuristics - From Design to Implementation’, Wiley, 2009.

2. Sean Luke, ‘Essentials of Metaheuristics’, Lulu, Second Edition, 2013

3. Gendreau, Michel and Jean-Yves Potvin (eds), ‘Handbook of Metaheuristics’. Springer, 2012

4. K. Deb: ‘Multiobjective optimization using Evolutionary Algorithms’, Wiley, 2001

5. Bastien Chopard, Marco Tomassini , “An Introduction to Metaheuristics for Optimization”, Springer,

2018.

19EI3003 METAHEURISTIC TECHNIQUES FOR

OPTIMIZATION

L T P C

3 0 0 3

https://www.google.co.in/search?hl=en&tbm=bks&tbm=bks&q=inauthor:%22Bastien+Chopard%22&sa=X&ved=0ahUKEwj6zaKw4_7hAhWkV3wKHef1BhIQ9AgIKjAA

https://www.google.co.in/search?hl=en&tbm=bks&tbm=bks&q=inauthor:%22Marco+Tomassini%22&sa=X&ved=0ahUKEwj6zaKw4_7hAhWkV3wKHef1BhIQ9AgIKzAA

INSTRUMENTATION

ENGINEERING

Instrumentation Engineering

LIST OF COURSES

S.No. Course

Code Name of the Course L:T:P Credits

1. 18EI2001 Basic Course in Embedded C 2:0:2 3

2. 18EI2002 Control Systems 3:0:0 3

3. 18EI2003 Control System Laboratory 0:0:2 1

4. 18EI2004 Electronic Measurement Laboratory 0:0:2 1

5. 18EI2005 Measurement and Instrumentation 2:0:2 3

6. 18EI2006 Microcontroller and PLC 3:0:0 3

7. 18EI2007 Process Control for Food Engineers 3:0:0 3

8. 18EI2008 Process Control Laboratory for Food Engineers 3:0:0 3

9. 18EI2009 Instrumentation and Control 0:0:3 1.5

10. 18EI2010 Instrumentation and Control Laboratory 3:0:0 3

11. 18EI2011 Virtual Instrumentation: Theory and Applications 3:0:0 3

12. 18EI2012 Virtual Instrumentation and Data Acquisition Laboratory 0:0:2 1

13. 18EI2013 Microcontroller and PLC Laboratory 0:0:2 1

14. 18EI2014 Modelling and Simulation 3:0:0 3

15. 18EI3001 Advanced Embedded Signal Processors 3:0:0 3

16. 18EI3002 Embedded system and software design 3:0:0 3

17. 18EI3003 Programmable Devices for Industrial Automation 3:0:0 3

18. 18EI3004 Advanced Embedded Processors 3:0:0 3

19. 18EI3005 Embedded Linux 3:0:0 3

20. 18EI3006 Advanced Embedded System Lab 0:0:4 2

21. 18EI3007 Embedded Based Virtual Instrumentation Lab 0:0:4 2

22. 18EI3008 IoT Lab 0:0:4 2

23. 18EI3009 Field programmable Lab 0:0:4 2

24. 18EI3010 Embedded Automotive Systems 3:0:0 3

25. 18EI3011 Distributed Embedded Computing 3:0:0 3

26. 18EI3012 Wireless and Mobile Communication 3:0:0 3

27. 18EI3013 Smart system Design 3:0:0 3

28. 18EI3014 MEMS Technology for Embedded Design 3:0:0 3

29. 18EI3015 Embedded Product Development 3:0:0 3

30. 18EI3016 Embedded based Image Processing Techniques 3:0:0 3

31. 18EI3017 Optimization techniques for Embedded Systems 3:0:0 3

32. 18EI3018 Embedded Android Programming 3:0:0 3

33. 18EI3019 Python programming and Interfacing Techniques 3:0:0 3

34. 18EI3020 Advanced course in Embedded C 3:0:0 3

35. 18EI3021 Real Time Operating System 3:0:0 3

36. 18EI3022 Embedded networking and automation of Electrical

Systems

3:0:0 3

37. 18EI3023 Internet of things and protocols 3:0:0 3

38. 18EI3024 Robotics and Factory Automation 3:0:0 3

39. 18EI3025 Entrepreneurship development for embedded system 3:0:0 3

Course Objectives:

1. To develop skills in C and Embedded C programming

2. To understand the concepts of C program to develop an embedded application code

3. To know the important of library functions in C programming

Course Outcome:

At the end of this course, students will demonstrate the ability to

1. Develop program in Embedded C using operators, data types and flow control loops

2. Elaborate the concepts of arrays and functions.

3. Explain the basic concepts of structures and unions in C programming

4. Develop programming using pointers.

5. Discuss file handling concepts in embedded C programming

18EI2001 BASIC COURSE IN EMBEDDED C L T P C

2 0 2 3


6. Create simple examples with embedded C structure.

Module 1: Programming Fundamentals:

Program – Number system – Binary Information – Memory addressing – Machine language –

Assembly language – Instruction sets – Development of programming languages – Compilers – Cross

development

Module 2: C Program Structure :

Preprocessors directives – Identifier declaration – Statements – Basic data types – Variable data types

– Character data types – Integer data types – Data type modifiers – Real numbers

Module 3: Operators and Expressions :

Arithmetic operators – Comparison operators – Bit level operators – Control structures – Decision

structures – Looping structures – Existing loop.

Module 4: Functions

Executing a function – Function prototype declaration – Function definitions – Function parameters –

Complex data types – Pointers – Arrays – User defined data types – Enumerated data types –

Structures - Unions

Module 5: Storage and Data Type Modifiers

Storage class modifiers – Data type modifiers – C Preprocessors – Conditional source code –

Producing error messages – Defining target hardware – In-line assembly language

Module 6: Libraries

Portable device driver libraries – An example development scenario: SPI Master Slave library –

Asynchronous – SCI – RS232 – Electrical specifications – PIC Implementation: Anatomy of a PC

serial port – On-Chip sets – IRQ – Programming interrupts

Textbooks:

1. First steps with Embedded Systems | Byte craft limited | Waterloo | Ontario | Canada N2L

6H7.

2. Mark Siegesmund | Embedded C Programming: Techniques and Applications of C and PIC

MCUs | 2014.

Reference Books:

1. Warwick A.Smith | C Programming for Embedded Microcontrollers | elector publishers |

2. Kai Qian, David den Haring, Li cao | Embedded Software Development with C | Springer

publishers.

3. Richard H. Barnett, Sarah Cox, Larry O'Cull, “Embedded C Programming and the Atmel

AVR, ”, Cengage Learning, 2009

4. M.Pont, “Embedded C”, Pearson Learning, 2007

Course Objectives:

To impart knowledge on

1. Mathematical representations of systems.

2. Linear models mainly state variable model and Transfer function model from Non Linear

systems.

3. Linear systems in time domain and frequency domain.

Course Outcomes:


1. Develop mathematical model of physical systems

2. Analyze the various linear models in time domain and frequency domain.

3. Outline the basics of state space representation of systems

4. Examine the stability of systems

5. Design appropriate controller for the given specifications.

6. Acquire knowledge on Optimal and Non-linear control.

Module 1: Introduction To Control Problem: (8 Hours)

Industrial Control examples. Mathematical models of physical systems. Control hardware and their

models. Transfer function models of linear time-invariant systems. Feedback Control: Open-Loop and

Closed-loop systems. Benefits of Feedback. Block diagram algebra.

Module 2: Time Response Analysis: (8 Hours) Standard test signals. Time response of first and

second order systems for standard test inputs. Application of initial and final value theorem. Design

specifications for second-order systems based on the time-response. Concept of Stability. Routh-

Hurwitz Criteria. Relative Stability analysis. Root-Locus technique. Construction of Root-loci.

18EI2002 CONTROL SYSTEMS L T P C

3 0 0 3

https://www.google.co.in/search?safe=strict&hl=en&tbm=bks&tbm=bks&q=inauthor:%22Richard+H.+Barnett%22&sa=X&ved=0ahUKEwia1c3rzILcAhUJbo8KHZwzBo4Q9AgIOjAD

https://www.google.co.in/search?safe=strict&hl=en&tbm=bks&tbm=bks&q=inauthor:%22Sarah+Cox%22&sa=X&ved=0ahUKEwia1c3rzILcAhUJbo8KHZwzBo4Q9AgIOzAD

https://www.google.co.in/search?safe=strict&hl=en&tbm=bks&tbm=bks&q=inauthor:%22Larry+O%27Cull%22&sa=X&ved=0ahUKEwia1c3rzILcAhUJbo8KHZwzBo4Q9AgIPDAD

https://books.google.co.in/books?id=jzuFH2DdUWMC&printsec=frontcover&dq=Embedded+C&hl=en&sa=X&ved=0ahUKEwia1c3rzILcAhUJbo8KHZwzBo4Q6AEIODAD

https://books.google.co.in/books?id=jzuFH2DdUWMC&printsec=frontcover&dq=Embedded+C&hl=en&sa=X&ved=0ahUKEwia1c3rzILcAhUJbo8KHZwzBo4Q6AEIODAD


Module 3: Frequency-Response Analysis: (8 Hours)

Relationship between time and frequency response, Polar plots, Bode plots. Nyquist stability criterion.

Relative stability using Nyquist criterion – gain and phase margin. Closed-loop frequency response.

Module 4: Introduction To Controller Design: (8 Hours)

Stability, steady-state accuracy, transient accuracy, disturbance rejection, insensitivity and robustness

of control systems. Root-loci method of feedback controller design. Design specifications in

frequency-domain. Frequency-domain methods of design. Application of Proportional, Integral and

Derivative Controllers, Lead and Lag compensation in designs. Analog and Digital implementation of

controllers.

Module 5:State Variable Analysis: (8 Hours)

Concepts of state variables. State space model. Diagonalization of State Matrix. Solution ofstate

equations. Eigen values and Stability Analysis. Concept of controllability and observability.

Module 6: Introduction To Optimal Control And Nonlinear Control: (5 Hours)

Performance Indices. Regulator problem, Tracking Problem. Nonlinear system–Basic concepts and

analysis.

Textbooks:

1. Richard C.Dorf and Bishop, R.H., “Modern Control Systems”, Education Pearson, 3rd

Impression, 2009.

2. John J.D., Azzo Constantine, H. and HoupisSttuart, N Sheldon, “Linear Control System

Analysis and Design with MATLAB”, CRC Taylor& Francis Reprint 2009.

3. Katsuhiko Ogata, “Modern Control Engineering”, PHI Learning Private Ltd, 5th Edition,

2010.

Reference Books:

1. M. Gopal, “Control Systems: Principles and Design”, McGraw Hill Education, 1997.

2. B. C. Kuo, “Automatic Control System”, Prentice Hall, 1995.

3. K. Ogata, “Modern Control Engineering”, Prentice Hall, 1991.

4. I. J. Nagrath and M. Gopal, “Control Systems Engineering”, New Age International,2009

Course Objectives: 1. To strengthen the knowledge of Feedback control

2. To inculcate the controller design concepts

3. To introduce the concept of Mathematical Modeling

Course Outcomes:


1. Determine the mathematical model of physical systems.

2. Design a suitable controller for a process.

3. Analyze the time domain and frequency domain characteristics of systems.

4. Apply the control system concepts to servomotor, synchro.

5. Design suitable controller parameters for a given system

6. Evaluate the merits and demerits of feedback control systems.

List of Experiments

1. Modeling and Analysis of First order System in Matlab

2. Modeling and Analysis of First Order System using NI Elvis

3. Simulation of P, PI, PD and PID Controllers in Matlab

4. Study of P and I Controllers

5. Closed Loop Control of First order system

6. On-Off Temperature Control System

7. Position Control System

8. Speed Control of DC Motor

9. Stepper Motor Control

10. LabVIEW based Control of Industrial Processes

18EI2003 CONTROL SYSTEM LABORATORY L T P C

0 0 2 1


Course Objectives:


1. Construction of AC and DC Bridge Circuits

2. Signal Conditioning Circuits for measurement systems

3. The fundamental concepts of data acquisition systems

Course Outcomes:

At the end of this course students will demonstrate the ability to

1. Analyze and validate DC and AC bridges

2. Perform Signal acquisition in LabVIEW

3. Design Signal Conditioning Circuits for Sensor Data Acquisition

4. Determine the characteristics of ADC and DAC

5. Perform Regression analysis to study error compensation

6. Interpret the concepts of computerized data acquisition

List of Experiments

1. Calibration of Ammeter and Voltmeter

2. Measurement of Strain using Wheatstone Bridge

3. Measurement of Capacitance

4. Measurement of Temperature using LabVIEW

5. Basic Measurements using DSO.

6. Measurement of Signal parameter using LabVIEW

7. Speed Measurement of DC Motor using LabVIEW

8. Effect of ADC Resolution, Range and Sampling rate on signal acquisition

9. Angular position measurement

10. Error compensation study using Regression analysis in MATLAB

Course Objectives:


1. Construction and application of DC and AC Bridges

2. Analyze the characteristics of measurement systems

3. Basics of data acquisition systems

Course Outcomes: At the end of this course, students will demonstrate the ability to

1. Analyze the dynamic response and the calibration of few instruments.

2. Perform statistical data analysis.

3. Discuss about various measurement devices, their characteristics, their operation and their

limitations.

4. Describe the concept of current and voltage measurement

5. Apply knowledge of digital devices for measurement

6. Describe the fundamental of omputerized data acquisition.

Lectures/Demonstrations:

1. Concepts relating to Measurements: True value, Accuracy, Precision, Resolution, Drift,

Hysteresis, Dead-band, Sensitivity.

2. Errors in Measurements. Basic statistical analysis applied to measurements: Mean, Standard

Deviation, Six-sigma estimation

3. Sensors and Transducers for physical parameters: temperature, pressure, torque, flow. Speed

and Position Sensors.

4. Current and Voltage Measurements. Shunts, Potential Dividers. Instrument Transformers,

Hall Sensors. Measurements of R, L and C.

5. Digital Multi-meter, True RMS meters, Clamp-on meters, Meggers.

6. Digital Storage Oscilloscope.

Experiments

1. Calibration of measuring Instruments

2. Measurement of a batch of resistors and estimating statistical parameters.

3. Measurement of Inductance

18EI2004 ELECTRONIC MEASUREMENT LABORATORY L T P C

0 0 2 1

18EI2005 MEASUREMENT AND INSTRUMENATION L T P C

2 0 2 3


4. Measurement of Capacitance

5. Measurement of Strain

6. Basic Measurements using DSO.

7. Measurement of Signal parameter using LabVIEW

8. Speed Measurement of DC Motor using LabVIEW

9. Current Measurement using Shunt, CT, and Hall Sensor.

10. Measurement of process variables (Temperature and Pressure)

Course Objectives: To impart knowledge on

1. The architecture and functions of 8051 Microcontroller

2. Interfacing concepts using 8051 Microcontroller

3. Fundamentals of PLC and its applications

Course Outcomes:


1. .Compare the different microcontrollers

2. Describe the architecture of 8051

3. Implement timer and counter applications

4. Perform Peripheral Interface with 8051

5. Apply PLC architecture knowledge for specific problems.

6. Develop PLC Ladder diagram for simple applications

Module 1: Fundamentals Of Microprocessor Architecture: (8 Hours) Comparison of 8-bit

microcontrollers, 16-bit and 32-bit microcontrollers. Definition of embedded system and its

characteristics, Role of microcontrollers in embedded Systems. Overview of the 8051 family.

Module 2: The 8051 Architecture: (8 Hours)

Internal Block Diagram, CPU, ALU, address, data and control bus, Working registers, SFRs, Clock

and RESET circuits, Stack and Stack Pointer, Program Counter, I/O ports, Memory Structures, Data

and Program Memory, Instruction Set and Programming

Module 3: Memory And I/O Interfacing: (8 Hours)

Memory and I/O expansion buses, control signals, memory wait states. Interfacing of peripheral

devices such as General Purpose I/O, ADC, DAC, timers, counters, memory devices.

Module 4: External Communication Interface: (8 Hours)

Synchronous and Asynchronous Communication. RS232, SPI, I2C- Stepper motor interfacing, DC

Motor interfacing, sensor interfacing.

Module 5: PLC Introduction:(8 Hours)

Basics of PLC, Advantages, Capabilities of PLC, Architecture of PLC, Scan cycle, Types of PLC,

Types of I/O modules, Power supplies and isolators

Module 6: General PLC Programming Procedures: (5 Hours)

Types of Programming -Programming on-off inputs/outputs- Simple process control programs using

Relay Ladder Logic- PLC Basic Functions - Register basics - Timer functions – Counter- PLC

intermediate functions, Integrated displays, interfacing PLC to HMI.

Textbooks:

1. M. A.Mazidi, J. G. Mazidi and R. D. McKinlay, “The8051Microcontroller and Embedded

Systems: Using Assembly and C”,Pearson Education, 2007.

2. K. J. Ayala, “8051 Microcontroller”, Delmar Cengage Learning,2004.

Reference Books: 1. John W Webb & Ronald A Reis, “Programmable logic controllers: Principles and

Applications”, Prentice Hall India, 2003.

2. Frank D Petruzella “Programmable Logic Controllers ", McGraw Hill Inc, 2005

3. R. Kamal, “Embedded System”, McGraw Hill Education, 2009.

4. R. S. Gaonkar, “, Microprocessor Architecture: Programming and Applications with the

8085”, Penram International Publishing, 1996

18EI2006 MICROCONTROLLER AND PLC L T P C

3 0 0 3


Course Objectives:


1. The fundamentals of sensors and control concepts

2. The concepts of system analysis and control

3. The working of various sensors

Course Outcomes:


1. Represent the mathematical model of a process.

2. Determine the response of different order systems for various test inputs.

3. Analyze the stability of the system.

4. Apply the knowledge of various Measuring Instruments to design a simple Instrumentation

system.

5. Comprehend the concept of sensors in food industry.

6. Analyze and decide suitable instrument for a particular system.

Module 1: Introduction To Process Control:(8 Hours) System – Mathematical Modeling - steady state design – process control block diagram – Control

valve-Construction and working of pneumatically operated valve and spring – diaphragm Actuator

damped and cyclic response- feedback control – transient responses –

Module 2: Control Systems:(8 Hours) Open and closed loop systems, laplace transform –– step function, exponential function, ramp

function and sine function. Signal flow graph – Mason’s Gain formula, Block diagram algebra-servo-

mechanisms, hydraulic and pneumatic control systems, two-way control, proportional control,

differential control and integral control.

Module 3: Stability Analysis:(8 Hours) Stability – concept of stability, definition of stability in a linear system, stability criterion,

characteristic equation, Routh test for stability

Module 4: Pressure And Temperature Sensors For Food Industry:(8 Hours) Pressure measurement – Construction and working of capacitive pressure sensor, Inductive pressure

sensor, strain gauge, pressure sensor, diaphragm, bourdon tube, differential pressure cell Temperature

sensors –Construction and working of RTD, Thermistors, Thermocouples, bimetallic strips

Module 5: Level And Density Sensor: (8 Hours) Simple float systems, capacitive sensing element, radioactive methods (nucleonic level sensing) –

ultrasonic level sensor. Measurement of density – U-type densitometer, Buoyancy meter

Module 6: Analyzing Instruments Used In Food Industry: (5 Hours)

Gas chromatograph, Mass spectrometer Measurement of composition – Electrical conductivity cell,

non-dispersive photometers, pH meter.

Text Books

1. J.F Richardson A D.G.Peacock, Coulson & Richardson’s “ Chemical Engineering”, Volume3,

(Chemical and Biochemical reactors and process control) Butherworth – Heinemann, an

imprint of Elsevier, 2006.

2. Donald R. Coughanowr., “Process System analysis and control” Mc- Graw Hill International

Edition , Second Edition,singapore, S2008.

Reference Books

1. Nagoorkani.A “Control Systems”, RBA publications, 2nd edition, ninteenth reprint 2012

2. S.Baskar,”Instrumentation control system measurements and controls”Anuradha Agencies

Publishers, 2004.

3. Nagrath, M and Gopal, I.J, “Control Systems Engineering”, Wiley Eastern Limited, Third

Edition Reprint 2003.

4. Renganathan, “Transducer engineering, Allied publishers, New Delhi,2003.

5. Patranabis, “Principles of industrial instrumentation”, Printice Hall India, 2004. Patranabis,

D., Second Edition Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Co. Ltd.. New Delhi. 1997, ISBN

0074623346.

6. Curtis D .Johnson, “Process Control Instrumentation Technology ”, Prentice Hall , New

Jersey2006.

18EI2007 PROCESS CONTROL FOR FOOD ENGINEERS L T P C

3 0 0 3


Course Objectives:


1. The basics of sensors and control

2. The signal conditioning circuits for data acquisition and control

3. The characteristics of the control elements in a closed loop control loop.

Course Outcomes:


1. Analyze the characteristics of sensors and transducers.

2. Determine the characteristics of instruments.

3. Design controllers for a given system.

4. Perform stability analysis of a system

5. Comprehend the process system design

6. Analyze various control valve characteristics

List of Experiments

1. Displacement Measurement Using LVDT

2. Displacement Measurement Using Capacitive Transducer

3. Weight Measurement using Strain Gage

4. Temperature Measurement using Temperature Detector

5. Measurement of Pressure

6. Characteristics of Resistive Potentiometer

7. Study of ON-OFF Temperature Control System

8. Study of P& I Controller Responses

9. Stability Analysis Using Root Locus

10. Open Loop And Closed Loop Response of Dc Motor

11. Speed Measurement Using a Tachogenerator

12. Study of Pneumatic Valve Characteristics

Course Objectives:


1. The general Concepts of Mechanical Instrumentation, the sensors for various physical

variables

2. The fundamentals of Feedback Control systems.

3. The concepts of time response of the system.

Course Outcomes:


1. Describe the concept of Mechanical Measurement.

2. Summarize the principle of operation of different types of sensors used in the measurement of

various physical variables.

3. Describe the concept of Viscosity And Force measurement .

4. Recognize the type of the control system and to express the transfer function of the system.

5. Analyse the time response of various order of the system.

6. Analyse the Concept of stability.

Module 1: Introduction to Measurement (6 Hours)

General Concepts of Mechanical Instrumentation, generalized measurement system. Classification of

instruments as indicators, recorders and integrators – their working principles, Precision and accuracy.

Measurement of error .

Module 2: Measurement OF Physical Variables: (8 Hours)

Pressure measurement: bourdon, elastic transducers, strain gauge, pressure cells, measurement of high

and low pressure. Temperature measurement: Bimetallic, resistance thermometer, thermocouples,

pyrometer and thermistors, Hot-wire anemometer, magnetic flow meter, ultrasonic flow meter.

Module 3: Instruments For Viscosity AndForce measurement: (8 Hours)

Viscosity: capillary tube viscometer, efflux viscometer, humidity: absorption hydrometer, dew point

meter. Force measurement: scales and torque measurement: mechanical torsion meter, electrical

torsion meter.

18EI2008 PROCESS CONTROL LABORATORY FOR FOOD

ENGINEERS

L T P C

0 0 3 1.5

18EI2009 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL L T P C

3 0 0 3


Module 4: Introduction to control problem : (8 Hours)

Open and closed systems, servomechanisms, transfer functions, signal flow graphs, block diagram

algebra, and hydraulic and pneumatic control systems, proportional control, differential and integral

control.

Module 5: Time Response Analysis: (8 Hours)

Standard test signals. Time response of first and second order systems for standard test inputs.

Application of initial and final value theorem. Design specifications for second-order systems based

on the time-response.

Module 6: Stability Analysis: (7 Hours)

Concept of stability, necessary condition for stability, routh stability criterion, Relationship between

time and frequency response, Nyquist stability

Text books:

1. Sawhney, A.K., ‘Electrical and Electronics Measurements & Instrumentation’, Dhanpat Rai

& Co., 2005

2. Instrumentation and control systems by W. Bolton, 2nd edition, Newnes, 2000

Reference books:

1. Thomas G. Beckwith, Roy D. Marangoni, John H. LienhardV , Mechanical Measurements

(6th Edition) 6th Edition, Pearson Education India, 2000

2. M. Gopal, “Control Systems: Principles and Design”, McGraw Hill Education, 2002.

3. Thomas G Beckwith, Lewis Buck, N. Roy D. Maragoni, ‘Mechanical Measurements’, Narosa

Publishing House, New Delhi, 1989.

4. Collet, C.V. and Hope, A.D., ‘Engineering Measurements’, 2nd Ed., ELBS.

Course Objective:


1. The practical aspects of various transducers and their characteristics.

2. In measurement of Resistance, Inductance and Capacitance using bridges.

3. Improve the skills in calibrating analog meters.

Course Outcome:


1. Obtain the performance characteristics of various transducers and infer the reasons for the

behavior.

2. Analyse the characteristics of sensors and transducers.

3. Summarize the measurement application and suggest suitable measurement methods.

4. Perform experiment to Calibrate the instruments.

5. Apply the transducers for various applications.

6. Apply controller principles to typical applications.

List of Experiments:

1. Measurement of Strain using Strain Gauge

2. Characteristics of Load cell

3. Measurement of Displacement using LVDT

4. Characteristics of RTD

5. Characteristics of Thermocouple

6. Characteristics of Resistive Potentiometer

7. Characteristics of Torque Measurement System

8. Measurement using Capacitive Sensors

9. Characteristics of Microphone and Loud Speaker

10. Characteristics of Pressure Measurement System

11. Study of ON-OFF Temperature Controller

12. Characteristics of Speed Measurement System

Course Objectives:

1. Familiarize with the VI software and learn programming in VI.

2. Acquire knowledge on Data Acquisition Systems and network interface concepts.

18EI2010 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL

LABORATORY

L T P C

0 0 2 1

18EI2011 VIRTUAL INSTRUMENTATION: THEORY AND

APPLICATIONS

L T P C

3 0 0 3


3. Understand various analysis tools and develop programs for Industrial Applications

Course Outcomes:


1. Understand Virtual Instrument concepts.

2. Create a Virtual Instrument using graphical programming

3. Develop systems for real-time signal acquisition and analysis.

4. Apply concepts of network interface for data communication.

5. Implement and design data acquisition systems for practical applications.

6. Suggest solutions for automation and control applications using virtual instrumentation.

Module 1: Review Of Virtual Instrumentation:

Historical perspective, advantages, Block diagram and Architecture of a Virtual Instrument, Data

Flow Techniques, Graphical programming in data flow, comparison with Conventional programming.

Module 2 : Introduction To LabVIEW:

Advantages of LabVIEW Software Environment-Creating and Saving VI-Controls and Indicators-

Data types. Sub VI: Creating- Opening-Editing-Placing a Sub VI in a block- Creating a Stand Alone

Application

Module 3: Programming Techniques: Loops and charts, arrays, clusters and graphs, case and sequence structures, formula nodes, local and

global variables, string and file I/O

Module 4: Data Acquisition Basics: Signals Handling and Classification – Signal Conditioning - Analog Interfacing (I/O) - Counters &

Timers – Digital (I/O) - DAQ Hardware – DAQ Software Architecture - DAQ Assist

Module 5: Common Instrument Interfaces: GPIB-RS232-Handshaking- RS232/RS485 interfacing, VISA – IVI - PCMCIA – SCXI – VXI -

Networking basics for office & Industrial applications

Module 6: Applications:

Motion Control - Virtual Instrumentation and CAD Tool, Remote Front Panel LabVIEW

Applications, Timed Loop Applications Client–Server Applications – Case Studies

.

Text Books

1. Dr. Sumathi. S and Prof. Surekha. P, “LabVIEW Based Advanced Instrumentation Systems”,

2nd edition, 2007.

2. Jovitha Jerome, “Virtual Instrumentation using LabVIEW”, PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd, New

Delhi, 2010.

3. Gary Johnson, “LabVIEW Graphical Programming”, McGraw Hill, 2006.

Reference Books:

1. Lisa .K, Wells and Jeffrey Travis, “LABVIEW for Everyone”, Prentice Hall, 2009.

2. Skolkoff, “Basic concepts of LABVIEW 4”, PHI, 1998.

3. Gupta. S, Gupta. J.P, “PC Interfacing for Data Acquisition and Process Control”, ISA, 1994.

4. Amy. L.T, “Automation System for Control and Data Acquisition”, ISA, 1992.

Course Objective:


The basics concepts of Virtual Instrumentation.

Programming in LabVIEW using structures, graphs and charts for system monitoring,

processing and controlling

The data acquisition and interfacing concepts using a state-of-the-art software platform such

as National Instrument's LabVIEW.

Course Outcomes:


Create, Edit and Debug Virtual Instruments

Develop Virtual instrumetation systems for practical applications

Apply PC interfacing principles for data acquisition

Understand the usage of Instrument Driver for Computer measurement and control.

Formulate instrumentation and control applications using LabVIEW

Appraise the usefulness of LabVIEW for real time data acquisition and analysis

18EI2012 VIRTUAL INSTRUMENTATION AND DATA

ACQUISITION LABORATORY

L T P C

0 0 2 1


List of Experiments

1. Introduction to LabVIEW

2. Use of SubVI

3. Waveform Generation

4. Frequency Measurement

5. Analog Input and Output Interface

6. Network Interface

7. Thermocouple Interface

8. Stepper Motor

9. Use of NI Elvis

10. Simulation of Tank Process

Course objectives:

To impart knowledge on 1. Fundamentals of Microcontroller Programming

2. Interfacing I/O devices with Microcontroller

3. PLC programming and interfacing.

Course outcomes:

At the end of this course, students will demonstrate the ability to 1. Perform experiment to verify arithmetic operations.

2. Apply the interfacing concept for various applications.

3. Discuss the LCD interfacing issues in microcontroller applications.

4. Analyze the characteristics of PLC.

5. Develop PLC Ladder diagram for simple applications

6. Design a real time system using PLC

List of experiments:

Microcontroller 1. Basic Arithmetic Operations

2. Interfacing DAC

3. Interfacing ADC

4. Interfacing Stepper Motor

5. Interfacing DC Motor

6. Interfacing LCD

PLC 1. Basic programs using Omron PLC

2. Bottle filling System

3. Pneumatic Stamping System

4. Lift control System

5. Simulation using Keyence and Picosoft software

6. Experiments using GEFanuc and STEP7

Course Objective:

To impart knowledge on 1. Fundamentals of System Modeling and Simulation Study

2. Optimization and decision making

3. Statistical analysis for system identification

Course Outcome:

At the end of the course, the student will demonstrate the ability to 1. Describe the components of a system

2. Explain the concepts of random number generation

3. Perform Statistical analysis of data

4. Analyse and validate the system models

5. Identify the characteristics of a system

6. Apply the modelling concepts to simulate mechatronic systems.

18EI2013 MICROCONTROLLER AND PLC LABORATORY L T P C

0 0 2 1

18EI2014 MODELLING AND SIMULATION L T P C

3 0 0 3


Module 1: System and System Environment:

Component of a System – Continuous and discrete systems – Types of model; Steps in

Simulation study; Simulation of an event occurrence using random number table – Single

server queue –two server queues – inventory system.

Module 2: Random number generation:

Properties of random numbers – Generation of Pseudo – random numbers – techniques of

generating pseudo random numbers; Test for random numbers: the Chisquare test-the

kolmogrov Smirnov test – Runs test – Gap test – poker test.

Module 3: Random – Variate Generation:

Inverse transform technique for Exponential, Uniform, triangular, weibull, empirical, uniform

and discrete distribution, Acceptance rejection method for Poisson and gamma distribution;

Direct Transformation for normal distribution.

Module 4: Analysis of simulated Data:

Data collection, identifying the distribution, Parameter estimation, goodness of fit tests,

verification and validation of simulation models.

Module 5: Concepts of System Identification

Identification using normal operating records (Integration method) – Identifiability conditions

– System order determination

Module 6: Modeling of mechatronic systems: Modeling of mechatronic systems and their

application in engineering practice Modeling and simulation and their practical significance

Computer modeling and simulation Simulation of mechatronic systems using simulation

software Creating animations of mechatronic systems

Text Book: 1. Banks J., Carson J.S. and Nelson B.L., “Discrete – Event System Simulation”, 3rd Edition,

Pearson Education, Inc 2004 (ISBN 81-7808-505-4).

Reference Books : 1. Geoffrey Gorden, “System Simulation”, Prentice Hall of India, 2003.

2. Narsingh Deo., “System Simulation with Digital Computer”, Prentice Hall of India, 2003.

3. www.arenasimulation.com

4. www.gpss.co.uk

5. www.caciasl.com

Course objectives:


1. Basic structural and functional elements of human body.

2. Organs and structures involving in system formation and functions.

3. Understand all systems in the human body.

Course outcomes:


1. Recall the basic elements of human body.

2. Compare the major bones and their processes as they relate to each region of the body.

3. Interpret the major organs and components of the respiratory system and understand their

functions.

4. Recognize the major organs and vessels of the cardiovascular system and understand their

functions.

5. Describe briefly the basic components and functions of urinary and special sensing systems.

6. Demonstrate the structure and functions of nervous systems.

Module 1: Basic Elements of Human Body (9 Hours)

Cell: Structure and organelles - Functions of each component in the cell. Cell membrane – transport

across membrane – origin of cell membrane potential – Action potential Tissue: Types – Specialized

tissues – functions, Types of glands.

Module 2: Skeletal and Respiratory System (7 Hours)

Skeletal system: Bone types and functions – Joint - Types of Joint - Cartilage and functions

Module 3: Respiratory System (7 Hours)

18BM2001 HUMAN ANATOMY AND PHYSIOLOGY L T P C

3 0 0 3

http://www.arenasimulation.com/

http://www.gpss.co.uk/

http://www.caciasl.com/


Respiratory System: Components of respiratory system – Respiratory Mechanism. Types of

respiration - Oxygen and carbon dioxide transport and acid base regulation.

Module 4: Circulatory System (8 Hours)

Blood composition - functions of blood – functions of RBC.WBC types and their functions Blood

groups – importance of blood groups – identification of blood groups. Blood vessels - Structure of

heart – Properties of Cardiac muscle – Conducting system of heart -Cardiac cycle – ECG - Heart

sound - Volume and pressure changes and regulation of heart rate –Coronary Circulation. Factors

regulating Blood flow.

Module 5: Urinary and Special Sensory System (7 Hours)

Urinary system: Structure of Kidney and Nephron. Mechanism of Urine formation and acid base

regulation – Urinary reflex – Homeostasis and blood pressure regulation by urinary system. Special

senses: Eye and Ear.

Module 6: Nervous System (7 Hours)

Structure of a Neuron – Types of Neuron. Synapses and types. Conduction of action potential in

neuron Brain – Divisions of brain lobes - Cortical localizations and functions - EEG. Spinal cord –

Tracts of spinal cord - Reflex mechanism – Types of reflex, Autonomic nervous system and its

functions.

Text Books:

1. Elaine.N. Marieb,“Essential of Human Anatomy and Physiology”, Eight edition, Pearson

Education NewDelhi, 2007.

2. Gillian Pocock, Christopher D. Richards, "The Human Body- An introduction for Biomedical

and Health Sciences", Oxford University Press, USA, 2009.

Reference Books:

1. William F. Ganong,"Review of Medical Physiology, 22nd edition, McGraw Hill New Delhi,

2005

2. Eldra Pearl Solomon."Introduction to Human Anatomy and Physiology", W.B.Saunders

Company, 2003.

3. Arthur C. Guyton, "Text book of Medical Physiology", 11 th Edition, Elsevier Saunders, 2006

4. Khandpur. R. S., “Handbook of Biomedical Instrumentation”, Prentice Hall of India,

New Delhi, 2003.

Course Objective:

1. To develop skills for understanding the requirements of the Real Time Digital Signal

Processing Algorithms.

2. To develop skills to comprehend the Digital Signal Processor and FPGA Architectures.

3. To develop skills to implement the signal processing algorithms using the Digital Signal

Processors and FPGA.

Course Outcome:


1. Recall the basic concepts of digital signal processing techniques.

2. Examine the Architectural features of Digital Signal Processors.

3. Understand the Architecture of TMS320C5x and the assembly language for Digital Signal

Processing Algorithms.

4. Understand the Architecture of TMS320C54x and the VLIW Architecture of TMS320C6x.

5. Recall the basic concepts of FPGA.

6. Understand the implementation of Signal Processing Algorithms in FPGA.

Module 1: Overview Of Digital Signal Processing And Applications: (6 Hours)

Signals and their origin– Sampling theorem and discrete time system – Convolution – DSP in the

sample and transform domain– Fast Fourier Transform – Digital Filters – Multi–rate Signal

Processing.

Module 2: Introduction to Programmable DSP: (8 Hours) Multiplier and Multiplier Accumulator – Modified Bus structures and Memory Access schemes in P –

DSPs – Multiple Access Memory – Multi – ported Memory – VLIW Architecture–Pipelining –

Special Addressing Modes in P – DSPs – On – Chip Peripherals

Module 3: Architecture of TMS320C5x :( 8 Hours) Introduction – Bus Structure – Central

Arithmetic Logic Unit – Auxiliary Register ALU – Parallel Logic Unit – Program controller – On

18EI3001 ADVANCED EMBEDDED SIGNAL PROCESSORS L T P C

3 0 0 3


Chip Peripherals – Assembly Language Syntax – Addressing Modes – Normal pipeline operation,

Convolution using MAC, MACD instructions – FIR filter implementation

Module 4: Architecture of TMS320C54x And TMS320C6x :(8 Hours)

Architecture of TMS320C54X- Bus Structure – Data Path - Normal Pipe line operation – FIR filter

implementation – VLIW Architecture of TMS320C6X- Bus Structure – Data path – Normal Pipe line

operation – Serial/Partially Parallel/ Fully Parallel FIR filter implementation.

Module 5: Overview of FPGA: (8 Hours)

FPGA Technology pros and cons behind FPGA and programmable signal processors, FPGA

structure, Implementation of basic MAC Unit.

Module 6: DSP with FPGA :(7 Hours)

FPGA for Digital Signal Processing Applications-Distributed Arithmetic- Digital filter

Implementation in FPGA.

Reference Books

1. Venkataramani B &M.Bhaskar, “Digital Signal Processor”, TMH, New Delhi, 2003.

2. Meyer U – Baese “Digital Signal Processing with Field Programmable GateArrays”, Spinger,

New York, 2003.

3. Michael John Sabastian Smith, “ Application Specific Integrated Circuits”,Pearson

Education,USA,2005.

4. Stephen Brown, ZvonkoVranesic, “Fundamentals of Digital Logic with VHDLDesign”,

McGraw – Hill Higher Education, New Delhi – 2005.

Course Objectives

1. To provide a clear understanding on the basic concepts, building blocks of embedded system

2. To teach the fundamentals of Embedded networking and RTOS

3. To study the basic concepts of Embedded OS

Course outcome:


1. Recall the basic concepts of embedded systems

2. Summarize the concepts of embedded networking and interrupt service mechanisms.

3. Identification of various RTOS features for real time applications

4. Analyze the scope of UML for creating visual models of software-intensive systems.\

5. Explain the basic concepts of embedded OS

6. Design real time embedded systems using the concepts of RTOS.

Module 1: Introduction to Embedded Systems :(6 Hours) Introduction to Embedded Systems – The build process for embedded systems- Structural units in

Embedded processor , selection of processor & memory devices- DMA – Memory

management methods- Timer and Counting devices, Watchdog Timer, Real Time Clock .

Module 2: Embedded Networking and interrupt service mechanism: (8 Hours)

Embedded networking: Introduction, I/O Device Ports & Buses– Serial Bus communication protocols

- RS232 standard – RS485 –USB – Inter Integrated Circuits (I2C) – interrupt sources , Programmed-

I/O busy-wait approach without interrupt service mechanism- ISR concept-– multiple interrupts –

context and periods for context switching, interrupt latency and deadline -Introduction to Basic

Concept Device Drivers.

Module 3:RTOS based Embedded System Design: (8 Hours)

Introduction to basic concepts of RTOS- Task, process & threads, interrupt routines in RTOS,

Multiprocessing and Multitasking, Pre-emptive and non-pre-emptive scheduling, Task

communication- shared memory, message passing-, Inter-process Communication – synchronization

between processes-semaphores, Mailbox, pipes, priority inversion, priority inheritance-comparison of

commercial RTOS features - RTOS Lite, Full RTOS, VxWorks, μC/OS-II, RT Linux

Module 4: Software Development Tools :(8 Hours)

Software Development environment-IDE, assembler, compiler, linker, simulator, debugger, In-circuit

emulator, Target Hardware Debugging, need for Hardware-Software Partitioning and Co-Design.

Overview of UML, Scope of UML modelling, Conceptual model of UML, Architectural, UML basic

elements-Diagram- Modelling techniques - structural, Behavioural, Activity Diagrams.

Module 5: Embedded Operating System: (8 Hours)

Creating embedded operating system: Basis of a simple embedded OS, Introduction to sEOS, Using

Timer 0 and Timer 1, Portability issue, Alternative system architecture, Important design

18EI3002 EMBEDDED SYSTEM AND SOFTWARE DESIGN L T P C

3 0 0 3


considerations when using sEOS- Memory requirements - embedding serial communication &

scheduling data transmission - Case study: Intruder alarm system.

Module 6: Embedded System Application Development: (7 Hours)

Objectives, different Phases & Modelling of the embedded product Development Life Cycle (EDLC),

Case studies on Smart card- Adaptive Cruise control in a Car -Mobile Phone software for key inputs.

References:

1. Rajkamal, ‘Embedded system-Architecute, programming, Design’, TataMcgraw Hill, 2011

2. Peckol, “Embedded System Design”, John wiley & Sons, 2010

3. Shibu,K.V. “Introduction to Embedded Systems”, TataMcgraw Hill, 2009

4. Lyla B Das “Embedded Systems- An Integrated Approach” , pearson 2013

5. Michael J Point, “Embedded C” Pearson Education 2007

6. Steve Oualline, “Practical C Programming” 3rd Edition O’Reilly Media Inc., 2006

Course Objectives

1. To expose the students to the fundamentals of sequential system design, Asynchronous

circuits,

2. To teach Programmable Device architecture and programming

3. To introduce hardware descriptive languages for industrial automation

Course outcome:


1. Analyze and design Sequential digital circuit.

2. Analyze the Asynchronous Sequential Circuit

3. Analyze the FPGA Architectures for process automation.

4. Develop program for real time applications using VHDL descriptive languages.

5. Develop simple programs using concepts in VERILOG descriptive languages

6. Create FPGA programming for industrial automation.

Module 1: Sequential Circuit Design: (6 Hours)

Analysis of Clocked Synchronous Sequential Networks (CSSN) Modelling of CSSN – State Stable

Assignment and Reduction – Design of CSSN – ASM Chart – ASM Realization.

Module 2: Asynchronous Sequential Circuit: (8 Hours)

Analysis of Asynchronous Sequential Circuit (ASC) – Flow Table Reduction – Races in ASC – State

Assignment Problem and the Transition Table – Design of ASC – Static and Dynamic Hazards –

Essential Hazards – Designing Vending Machine Controller.

Module 3: Architecture & Design using Programmable Devices: (8 Hours)

Programming Techniques - Re-Programmable Devices Architecture- Function blocks, I/O blocks,

Interconnects, Realize combinational, Arithmetic, Sequential Circuit with Programmable Logic

Devices. PLDs – Xilinx FPGA – Xilinx 2000, Xilinx 3000, Xilinx 4000- Altera Max – ACT-

implementation of combinational and sequential circuits with FPGA and PLDs. Process automation –

flow, pressure and level control using FPGA

Module 4: High Level Descriptive Languages - VHDL programming: (8 Hours) Design flow

process – Software tools – Data objects – Data types – Data operators – Entities and Architectures –

Component declaration and instantiation. Concurrent signal assignment – conditional signal

assignment – selected signal assignment – concurrent and sequential statements – Data flow,

Behavioural and Structural Modelling - Test bench –simple programming.

Module 5: VERILOG Programming: (8 Hours)

Verilog: Design methodology – Modules – Ports – Basic concepts – Operators – Nos. specification –

Data types – Arrays – Parameters – Gate delays – Operator types – Conditional statements –

Multiway branches - Loops - Switch – Modelling elements- simple examples

Module 6: FPGA for Industrial Automation: (7 Hours)

Motor control- Industrial networking with Xilinx devices- machine vision camera solutions-

Monitoring processes and equipment- Automated system shut-down - Detecting dangerous situations.

References:

1. Charles H. Roth Jr., “Digital Systems design using VHDL”, Cengage Learning, 2010.

2. Samir Palnitkar, “Verilog HDL”, Pearson Publication”, II Edition. 2003.

18EI3003 PROGRAMMABLE DEVICES FOR INDUSTRIAL

AUTOMATION

L T P C

3 0 0 3


3. By Muhammed Abdelati Modern Automation Systems university science press 2009

4. Stephen Brown and Zvonk Vranesic, “Fundamentals of Digital Logic with VHDL Deisgn”,

Tata McGraw Hill, 2002

5. Stephen Brown and Zvonk Vranesic, “Fundamentals of Digital Logic with verilog Deisgn”,

Tata McGraw Hill, 2007

6. Donald G. Givone, “Digital principles and Design”, Tata McGraw Hill 2002.

Course Objective:

1. To Understand architectural overview of 8 and 32 bit Microcontrollers.

2. To acquire the programming skills.

3. To understand the interfacing concepts with embedded processors.

Course Outcome: (CO)


1. Recall the architectural overview of 8 bit processor

2. Discuss interfacing concepts in AVR microcontroller

3. Apply instruction set of ARM processors to create simple embedded programs.

4. Explain interrupts and memory concepts of ARM processor.

5. Create simple C/ASM program with ARM microcontroller

6. Elaborate the integrated Development Environment and programming with Rasbian.

Module 1: 8051 and PIC Microcontroller (6 Hours)

Overview of 8 bit Microcontroller – General Architecture, Selection, On Chip resources, – Memory

Organization–Addressing Modes – Instruction Set – I/O Ports-–Counters and Timers – Interrupt –

UART – Analog to Digital Converter – Relay Interfacing – Temperature Sensor Interfacing.

Module 2:AVR Microcontroller Architecture: (8 Hours)

Architecture – memory organization – addressing modes – I/O Memory – EEPROM – I/O Ports –

SRAM –Timer –UART – Interrupt Structure- Serial Communication with PC – ADC/DAC

Interfacing

Module 3:ARM Architecture AND Programming: (8 Hours) Arcon RISC Machine – Architectural

Inheritance – Core & Architectures -- The ARM Programmer’s model -Registers – Pipeline -

Interrupts – ARM organization - ARM processor family – Co-processors. Instruction set – Thumb

instruction set – Instruction cycle timings

Module 4:ARM Application Development (8 Hours) Introduction to RT implementation with ARM – –Exception Handling – Interrupts – Interrupt

handling schemes- Firmware and bootloader – Free RTOS Embedded Operating Systems concepts –

example on ARM core like ARM9 processor. Memory Protection and Management:Protected

Regions-Initializing MPU, Cache and Write Buffer-MPU to MMU-Virtual Memory-Page Tables-

TLB-Domain and Memory Access Permission-Fast Context Switch Extension.

Module 5:Design with ARM Microcontrollers: (8 Hours)

Assembler Rules and Directives- Simple ASM/C programs- Hamming Code- Division-Negation-

Simple Loops –Look up table- Block copy- subroutines-application.

Module 6:Raspberry PI : (7 Hours)

Onboard Processor – Linux OS - Integrated Development Environment- Programming with Raspbian-

Interfacing: I/O Devices – I2C Device – Sensors – Serial Communication-Case Study: Onboard

Diagnostic System. Simple Interfacing concepts.

References

1. Rajkamal, “Microcontroller Architecture, Programming, Interfacing and Systems Design”,

Pearson. Education India, 2009.

2. Kenneth Ayala, “The 8051 Microcontroller”, Thomson Delmar Learning , New Jersey, 2004.

3. Muhammad Ali Mazidi, “The 8051 Microcontroller and Embedded Systems using Assembly

and C”, Perason Education 2006.

4. Steve Furber, “ARM System On-Chip Architecture”, 2nd Edition, Pearson Education Limited,

2000.

5. Eben Upton, “Raspberry Pi User Guide”, 3rd Edition, 2016

18EI3004 ADVANCED EMBEDDED PROCESSORS L T P C

3 0 0 3


Course Objectives

1. To expose the students to the fundamentals of Linux Operating system, its basic commands

and shell programming

2. To teach the history of embedded Linux, various distributions and basics of GNU Cross

Platform Tool Chain.

3. To study on different Host-Target setup, debug and various memory device, file systems and

performance tuning and to introduce the concept of configuring kernel using the cross-

platform tool chain.

Course Outcomes : After the completion of this course the student will be able to:

1. Outline the fundamentals of LINUX

2. Analyse various distributions and cross platform tool chain

3. Summarize the Host-Target Development setup and overall architecture

4. Create simple application using Eclipse IDE

5. Outline the features of LINUX drivers

6. Build device application using LINUX

Module 1:Fundamentals of LINUX: (6 Hours)

Basic Linux System Concepts: Working with Files and Directories - Introduction to Linux File system

Working with Partitions and File systems - Understanding Linux Permissions; Using Command Line

Tools: Executing Commands from the Command Line - Getting to a Shell - Popular Command-Line

Commands -Working with the Bash Shell

Module 2: Various Distributions and Cross platform Tool Chain: (8 Hours)

Introduction - History of Embedded Linux - Embedded Linux versus Desktop Linux - Commercial

Embedded Linux Distribution - Choosing a distribution - Embedded Linux Distributions -

Architecture of Embedded Linux - Linux Kernel Architecture -Porting Roadmap - GNU Cross

Platform Toolchain

Module 3: HOST-TARGET Setup and overall architecture (8 Hours) Real Life Embedded Linux Systems - Design and Implementation Methodology - Types of

Host/Target Development Setups - Types of Host/Target Debug Setups - Generic Architecture of an

Embedded Linux System - System Startup - Types of Boot Configurations - System Memory Layout -

Processor Architectures - Buses and Interfaces - I/O – Storage

Module 4: KERNEL Configuration :(8 Hours) A Practical Project Workspace - GNU Cross-

Platform Development Toolchain - C Library Alternatives - Other Programming Languages - Eclipse:

An Integrated Development Environment - Terminal Emulators - Selecting a Kernel - Configuring the

Kernel - Compiling the Kernel - Installing the Kernel Basic Root Filesystem Structure - Libraries -

Kernel Modules and Kernel Images - Device Files - Main System Applications - System Initialization

Module 5: LINUX Drivers (8 Hours) Introduction in to basics on Linux drivers, introduction to GNU cross platform Toolchain- Case study

on programming one serial driver for developing application using Linux Driver.

Module 6: DEVICE Applications: (7 Hours)

Asynchronous serial communication interface - parallel port interfacing - USB interfacing - memory

I/O interfacing - using interrupts for timing

References:

1. Karim Yaghmour, Jon Masters, Gilad Ben-Yossef, and Philippe Gerum, ‘Building Embedded

Linux Systems 2nd Edition’, SPD -O’Reilly Publications, 2008

3. P.Raghavan,Amol Lad,Sriram Neelakandan,”EmbeddedLinux System Design &

Development,Auerbach Publications, 2012

4. William von Hagen, ‘Ubuntu Linux Bible 3rd Edition’, Wiley Publishing Inc., 2010

5. Jonathan Corbet, Alessandro Rubini & Greg Kroah-Hartman, ‘Linux Device Drivers 3rd

Edition’, SPD -O’Reilly Publications, 2011

6. Robert Love,”Linux System Programming, SPD -O’Reilly Publications, 2010

18EI3005 EMBEDDED LINUX L T P C

3 0 0 3


Course Objective:

1. To impart the basic knowledge about ATMega Microcntroller and its functions.

2. To understand the concepts of embedded programming.

3. Acquire knowledge in interfacing techniques.

Course Outcomes: After the completion of this course the student will be able to:

1. Identify the IDE for programming

2. Review the architectural overview of AVR microcontroller

3. Recall the embedded C programming structure

4. Create programs using I/O Modules

5. Demonstrate waveform generation using I2C

6. Interpret the concept of RTOS programming

List of Experiments

1. Bit and byte access

2. Timer and counter concepts

3. Concepts on interrupt

4. Interfacing peripherals

5. Interfacing peripherals - 7-segment display

6. ADC Interface

7. Embedded based filter design

8. Waveform generation with I2C

9. Interfacing stepper motor

10. Concepts on RTOS – task creation

11. RTOS – priority based scheduling

12. Miniproject

Course Objective:

1. To strengthen the knowledge of Virtual Instrumentation.

2. To understand the concept of signal processing

3. To introduce the concept of Data Acquisition.


1. Identify virtual instrumentation representation for simple circuits

2. Choose VI to develop real time applications

3. Apply block diagram concept for developing simple digital circuits

4. Design embedded applications using VI

5. Analyze various embedded algorithms and implement the same using VI

6. Specify and develop control system methods using VI

List of experiments:

1. LabVIEW Programming I (LOOP | STRUCTURES | FORMULA NODE)

2. LabVIEW Programming II (ARRAY | CLUSTER | GRAPH | CHART )

3. Waveform Generators

4. Frequency Measurements Using Transition Duration Method

5. Analog Input and Output Interface Using NImyDAQ

6. Network Interface Using TCP/IP Functional Blocks

7. Real-Time Temperature Measurements by Interfacing Thermocouple | LM35

8. Speed and Direction Control for a Stepper Motor

9. Design and Analysis Analog of Filters Using NI-ELVIS Module

10. Embedded Implementation of Digital Filters Using SPEEDY33

11. Speed Control of DC Motor by Interfacing ARDUINO with LabVIEW

12. Development of Digital Voltmeter Using MCB2300 Embedded Board

18EI3006 ADVANCED EMBEDDED SYSTEM LABORATORY L T P C

0 0 4 2

18EI3007 EMBEDDED BASED VIRTUAL INSTRUMENTATION

LABORATORY

L T P C

0 0 4 2


Course Objectives:

1. To learn about the python programming.

2. To introduce the architectural concepts of Raspberry pi module

3. To introduce the concept of embedded applications in Raspberry pi

Course outcome:

The students will be able to

1. Recall the syntax used in python programming

2. Create simple programs using python programming

3. Summarize the architectural overview and downloading procedure of Raspberry pi

4. Develop I/O interfacing with Raspberry pi

5. Create protocols with Raspberry pi

6. Home automation with Thing Speak, GSM Module


1. Introduction to python programming using variables, strings and data operators

2. Examples for python programming using for loop, while loop and if statement

3. Interfacing input output module

4. Monitoring patient body temperature

5. Detection of motion artifact using accelerometer sensor

6. Interfacing motion sensor camera

7. Home automation using MQTT protocol

8. Temperature sensor interfacing with Thing-Speak

9. Brightness control using PWM generation

10. GSM module interfacing

11. Controlling sensor with twitter

12. Mini project

Course Objective:

1. To impart the basic knowledge about FPGA and its functions.

2. To develop digital circuits using XILINX software.

3. Acquire knowledge in interfacing techniques.


1. Identify the IDE for programming

2. Review the architectural overview of FPGA

3. Recall the VHDL/VERILOG programming structure

4. Create programs using I/O Modules

5. Demonstrate ADC and DAC conversion with FPGA kit

6. Create program with ARM microcontroller


1a. Realisation of Half adder, Half subtractor, Full adder and Full subtractor

1b. Realisation of encoder and decoder

2. Realisation of Flip-flop and counters

3. Implementation of IO Module using FPGA kit

4. Implementation of Logic gates using FPGA kit

5. Implementation of multiplexer and de multiplexer using FPGA kit

6. Implementation of ADC

7. Waveform Generation of DAC

8. Interfacing LCD using FPGA kit

9. Interfacing DC Motor using FPGA kit

10. Implementation of communication protocols

11. Interfacing stepper motor

12. Mini project

18EI3008 IoT LAB L T P C

0 0 4 2

18EI3009 FIELD PROGRAMMABLE LAB L T P C

0 0 4 2


Course Objectives

1. To expose the students to the fundamentals and building of Electronic Engine Control

systems.

2. To teach on functional components and circuits for vehicles

3. To discuss on programmable controllers for vehicles and to teach logics of automation &

commercial techniques for vehicle communication


1. Summarize the concepts of electronics in automobile field.

2. Compile the challenges and opportunities of Drive by wire.

3. Categorize various hardware modules of automotive system. Outline the structure of

Electronic ignition systems

4. Create the concepts of automotive embedded systems using recent advancements

5. Discuss the basics of Electronic diagnostics for vehicles

Module 1: Basics of Electronic Engine Control Systems (7 Hours) Motivation ,concept for electronic engine controls and management-Standards; introduction to fuel

economy- automobile sensors-volumetric, thermal, air-fuel ratio, solenoid ,hall effect- exhaust gas

oxygen sensors, Oxidizing catalytic efficiency, emission limits and vehicle performance; advantages

of using Electronic engine controls – open and closed loop fuel control; Block diagram of Electronic

ignition system and Architecture of a EMS with multi point fuel injection system, Direct injection;

programmed ignition- actuators interface to the ECU; starter motors and circuits - sensors interface to

the ECU; Actuators and their characteristics – exhaust gas recirculation.

Module 2: Hardware modules (8 Hours) Basic sensor arrangement, types of sensors such as- oxygen sensors, crank angle position sensors-

Fuel metering vehicle speed sensors and destination sensors, Attitude sensor, Flow sensor, exhaust

temperature, air mass flow sensors. Throttle position sensor, solenoids, stepper motors, relays

Module 3: Fuel cell for automotive power (8 Hours) Fuel cell-Introduction-Proton exchange membrane FC (PEM), Solid oxide fuel cell (SOFC)-

properties of fuel cells for vehicles-power system of an automobile with fuel cell based drive, and

their characteristics

Module 4: Vehicle Management Systems (8 Hours) Electronic Engine Control-engine mapping,air/fuel ratio spark timing control strategy, fuel control,

electronic ignition-Vehicle cruise control- speed control-anti-locking braking system-electronic

suspension - electronic steering , wiper control ; Vehicle system schematic for interfacing with EMS,

ECU. Energy Management system for electric vehicles- for sensors, accelerators, brake-Battery

management, Electric Vehicles-Electrical loads, power management system-electrically assisted

power steering system

Module 5: Automotive Telematics (8 Hours) Role of Bluetooth, CAN, LIN and flex ray communication protocols in automotive applications;

Multiplexed vehicle system architecture for signal and data / parameter exchange between EMS,

ECUs with other vehicle system components and other control systems; Realizing bus interfaces for

diagnostics, dashboard display ,multimedia electronics- Introduction to Society of Automotive

Engineers(SAE). J1850 message with (IFR) in frame response in protocol-Local Interconnect n/w

[LIN], Bluetooth.

Module 6: Electronic Diagnostics for Vehicles (6 Hours) System diagnostic standards and regulation requirements –On board diagnosis of vehicles electronic

units &electric units-Speedometer, oil and temperature gauges, and audio system.

References

1. William B. Ribbens ,”Understanding Automotive Electronics”, Elseiver,2012

2. Ali Emedi, Mehrded ehsani, John M Miller , “Vehicular Electric power system- land, Sea, Air

and Space Vehicles” Marcel Decker, 2004.

3. L.Vlacic,M.Parent,F.Harahima,”Intelligent Vehicl Technologies”,SAE International,2001.

4. Jack Erjavec,Jeff Arias,”Alternate Fuel Technology-Electric ,Hybrid& Fuel Cell

Vehicles”,Cengage ,2012

18EI3010 EMBEDDED AUTOMOTIVE SYSTEMS L T P C

3 0 0 3


Course Objectives

1. To expose the students to the fundamentals of Network, communication technologies and

distributed computing.

2. To teach the fundamentals of Internet

3. To study on Java based Networking and distributed computing


1. Understand the fundamentals of distributed system

2. Comprehend the concepts of software architecture and internet concepts

3. Recall the concepts of embedded JAVA

4. Examine the concepts of distributed computing

5. Analyze security concepts in embedded systems.

6. Apply JAVA programming for home based automation

Module 1: Distributed System (7 Hours) Introduction- Communication in distribution system-Client/Server Model-Synchronization in

distributed system

Module 2: Software Architecture & Internet concepts (8 Hours) Internet protocol- Hardware & software of internet- Internet security- IP addressing- Interfacing

internet server applications to corporate database HTML and XML.

Module 3: Embedded JAVA (8 Hours)

Overview of JAVA – Programs- Multithreaded programming- APPLET programming- I/O streaming

RMI- Introduction to Embedded JAVA

Module 4: Distributed Computing (8 Hours) Definition- Model of distributed computation- Distributed shared memory- Authentication in

distributed system

Module 5: Security in computing (8 Hours) Security meaning- Threads in networks- Network security control- Firewall- Authentication- E-mail

security- Security in web services- Case studies

Module 6: Web based home automation (6 Hours) Components of Distributed Embedded - Protocols & Standards - Hardware/Software selection for

Distributed Embedded –case study: Web based Home Automation

References:

1. Andrew S. Tanenbaum, “Distributed operating systems”, Pearson 2013

2. E Balagurusamy,” Programming with JAVA”, Mc Graw Hill 2013

3. Ajay D Kshemkalyani,Mukesh Singhal, “Distributed Computing” – Principles, Algorithm and

systems, Cambridge university press 2008 4. Charles P. Pfleeger, “Security in Computing”,

Pearson 2009.

Course Objectives:

1. To introduce the fundamentals of wireless and mobile communication technologies.

2. To study the different protocols used in wireless and mobile communication

3. To address the challenges in data transmission security

Outcomes:

1. Student will be able to classify the different medium access methods and illustrate the need

of different medium access methods

2. Student will be able to explain the architecture of different wireless and mobile platforms

3. Student will be able to Investigate the use of different wireless protocols in different

applications

4. Student will be able to describe the concept of routing and discuss the issues in routing

5. Student will be able to express the layered structure and model of different protocols of

transport layer and application layer

6. Student will be able to comprehend the challenges and issues in information security and

suggest different protocols for secure data transmission

18EI3011 DISTRIBUTED EMBEDDED COMPUTING L T P C

3 0 0 3

18EI3012 WIRELESS AND MOBILE COMMUNICATION L T P C

3 0 0 3


Module 1: Introduction (7 Hours) Wireless Transmission – signal propagation – Free space and two ray models – spread spectrum –

Satellite Networks – Capacity Allocation – FDMA –TDMA- SDMA – CDMA

Module 2: Mobile Networks (8 Hours) Cellular Wireless Networks – GSM – Architecture – Protocols – Connection Establishment –

Frequency Allocation – Handover – Security – GPRA.

Module 3: Wireless Networks (8 Hours) Wireless LAN – IEEE 802.11 Standard-Architecture – Services – Hiper LAN, Bluetooth, WiMax,

ZigBee, Software Defined Radio

Module 4: Routing (8 Hours) Mobile IP- SIP – DHCP – AdHoc Networks – Proactive and Reactive Routing Protocols – Multicast

Routing -WSN routing –LEACH- SPIN- PEGASIS

Module 5: Transport and Application Layers (8 Hours) TCP over Adhoc Networks – WAP – Architecture – WWW Programming Model – WDP – WTLS –

WTP–WSP –WAE –WTA Architecture –WML–WML scripts.

Module 6: Mobile and Wireless Security (6 Hours) Security Primer - Creating A Secure Environment - Security Threats - Other Security Measures -

WAP Security Measures - Smart Client Security - Overview of Smart Client Architecture - Mobile

Operating Systems

Reference Books 1. Mobile Cellular Telecommunications — W.C.Y. Lee, Mc Graw Hill, 2nd Edn., 1989.

2. Wireless Communications – Theodore. S. Rapport, Pearson Education, 2nd Edn.2002.

3. Mobile Cellular Communication – Gottapu sashibhushana Rao, Pearson, 2012.

4. Modern Wireless Communications-Simon Haykin, Michael Moher,Pearson Education, 2005.

5. Wireless Communications Theory and Techniques, Asrar U. H .Sheikh, Springer, 2004.

6. Wireless Communications and Networking, Vijay Garg, Elsevier Publications, 2007.

7. Wireless Communications —Andrea Goldsmith, Cambridge University Press, 2005.

Course Objectives

1. To understand about the smart system technologies and its role in real time applications

2. To expose students to different open source platforms and Attributes.

3. To familiarize the design and development of embedded system based system design.


1. Recall the concepts of smart system design and its present developments.

2. Examine the application of mobile based embedded system.

3. Apply the concept of embedded system in home automation.

4. Analyze the application of smart design in energy management system

5. Summarize the concepts of Smart sensors

6. Understand different Robots and developments

Module 1: Introduction (7 Hours)

Overview of smart system design and requirements- Hardware and software selection & co-design

Communications-smart sensors and actuators-Open-source resources for embedded system- android

for embedded system - Embedded system for Ecommerce- Embedded system for Smart card design

and development –Recent trends.

Module 2: SMART Sensors: (8 Hours)

Introduction to Smart Sensors, Integrated Smart sensors and smart systems, MEMS and NEMS

devices, Elastic structures in MEMS and NEMS

Module 3: Mobile Embedded System (8 Hours) Design requirements-Hardware platform- OS and

Software development platform- Mobile Apps development- Applications: heart beat monitoring,

blood pressure monitoring, mobile banking and appliances control.

Module 4: Home Automation: (8 Hours)

Home Automation System Architecture-Essential Components- Linux and Raspberry Pi – design and

real time implementation.

Module 5: Smart Appliances and energy management (8 Hours)

Overview- functional requirements-Embedded and Integrated Platforms for Energy Management

Energy Measurement Techniques for Smart Metering-Smart Embedded Appliances Networks –

Security Considerations.

18EI3013 SMART SYSTEM DESIGN L T P C

3 0 0 3


Module 6: Embedded systems and Robotics (6 Hours) Robots and Controllers-components - Aerial Robotics -Mobile Robot Design- Three-Servo Ant

Robot Autonomous Hex copter System.

References:

1. Thomas Bräunl, Embedded Robotics ,Springer, 2003.

2. Grimm, Christoph, Neumann, Peter, Mahlknech and Stefan, Embedded Systems for Smart

Appliances and Energy Management , Springer 2013.

3. Raj Kamal, Embedded Systems - Architecture, Programming and Design" , McGraw- Hill,

2008

4. Nilanjan Dey, Amartya Mukherjee, Embedded Systems and Robotics with Open Source

Tools, CRC press, 2016.

5. Karim Yaghmour, Embedded Android , O'Reilly, 2013.

6. Steven Goodwin ,Smart Home Automation with Linux and Raspberry Pi, Apress, 2013

7. Robert Faludi,”Wireless Sensor Networks”,O’Reilly,2011.

Course Objectives: 1. To teach the students properties of materials, microstructure and fabrication methods.

2. To teach the design and modeling of Electrostatic sensors and actuators.

3. To teach the characterizing thermal sensors and actuators through design and modeling

4. To teach the fundamentals of piezoelectric sensors and actuators through exposure to different

MEMS and NEMS devices

Course outcomes: 1. Familiar with micro fabrication and materials

2. Compare various sensors and actuators

3. Develop embedded application based on MEMS

4. Explain the features of NEMS device in real time applications

5. Describe various medical application based on MEMS

6. Distinguish various sensors and actuators depending on the application

Module 1: Micro-Fabrication, Materials And Electro-Mechanical Concepts :(7 Hours)

Overview of micro fabrication – Silicon and other material based fabrication processes – Concepts:

Conductivity of semiconductors-Crystal planes and orientation-stress and strain-flexural beam

bending analysis-torsional deflections-Intrinsic stress- resonant frequency and quality factor.

Module 2: Electrostatic Sensors And Actuation :(8 Hours)

Principle, material, design and fabrication of parallel plate capacitors as electrostatic sensors and

actuators-Applications

Module 3: Thermal Sensing And Actuation :(8 Hours)

Principle, material, design and fabrication of thermal couples, thermal bimorph sensors, thermal

resistor sensors-Applications.

Module 4: Piezoelectric Sensing And Actuation : (8 Hours)

Piezoelectric effect-cantilever piezo electric actuator model-properties of piezoelectric materials-

Applications. Piezoresistive sensors, Magnetic actuation

Module 5: Microsystems Design, assembly and packaging : (6 Hours)

Micro system Design - Design consideration, process design, Mechanical design, Mechanical design

using MEMS. Mechanical packaging of Microsystems, Microsystems packaging, interfacings in

Microsystems packaging, packaging technology, selection of packaging materials, signal mapping and

transduction.

Module 6: Case Studies :Micro fluidics applications, Medical applications, Optical MEMS.-NEMS

Devices- multisensor module for embedded design with IOT- web based system

Reference Books 1. Chang Liu, “Foundations of MEMS”, Pearson International Edition, 2006.

2. Marc Madou , “Fundamentals of micro fabrication”,CRC Press, 1997.

3. Boston , “Micromachined Transducers Sourcebook”,WCB McGraw Hill, 1998.

4. M.H.Bao “Micromechanical transducers: Pressure sensors, accelerometers and gyroscopes”,

Elsevier, Newyork, 2000.

18EI3014 MEMS TECHNOLOGY FOR EMBEDDED DESIGN L T P C

3 0 0 3


Course Objectives: 1. To strengthen the knowledge of Virtual Instrumentation.

2. To understand the concept of signal processing

3. To introduce the concept of Data Acquisition.

Course Outcomes: 1. Recall the need and process phase in product development

2. Identify structural approach to concept generation, creativity, selection and testing.

3. Categorize the various approaches in product development

4. Summarize industrial design in product development

5. Analyze the concept of development based on reverse engineering

6. Develop a concept for embedded based product for multi real time applications.

Module 1: Introduction to Product Development: (7 Hours) Need for Product Development-

Generic product Development Process Phases- Product Development Process Flows, Product

Development organization structures-Strategic importance of Product Planning process –Product

Specifications-Target Specifications-Plan and establish product specifications –

Module 2: Concepts on product Development: (8 Hours) Integration of customer, designer, material supplier and process planner, Competitor and customer -

Understanding customer and behaviour analysis. Concept Generation, Five Step Method-Basics of

Concept selection- Creative thinking –creativity and problem solving- creative thinking methods

generating design concepts-systematic methods for designing –functional decomposition – physical

decomposition –Product Architecture--changes - variety – component Standardization –example case

study on Conceptual Design of DeskJet Printer as a product.

Module 3: Introduction To Approaches In Product Development: (8 Hours) Product development management - establishing the architecture - creation - clustering –geometric

layout development - Fundamental and incidental interactions - related system level design issues -

secondary systems -architecture of the chunks - creating detailed interface specifications-Portfolio

Architecture- competitive benchmarking- Approach – Support tools for the benchmarking process,

trend analysis- Setting product specifications- product performance analysis -Industrial Design,

Robust Design – Testing Methodologies.

Module 4: Industrial Design: (8 Hours)

Integrate process design - Managing costs - Robust design –need for Involving CAE, CAD, CAM,

IDE tools –Simulating product performance and manufacturing processes electronically – Estimation

of Manufacturing cost-reducing the component costs and assembly costs – Minimize system

complexity - Prototype basics - Principles of prototyping - Planning for prototypes- Economic & Cost

Analysis - Understanding and representing tasks-baseline project planning -accelerating the project,

project execution.

Module 5: Development Based On Reverse Engineering: (8 Hours) Basics on Data reverse engineering – Three data Reverse engineering strategies – Finding reusable

software components – Recycling real-time embedded software based approach and its logical basics-

Cognitive approach to program understated – Integrating formal and structured methods in reverse

engineering – Incorporating reverse engineering for consumer product development-ethical aspects in

reverse engineering.

Module 6: Developing Embedded Product Design: (6 Hours) Discussions on Creating Embedded System Architecture(with at least one Case study example:

Mobile Phone /Adaptive Cruise Controller/ Robonoid about ) -Architectural Structures- Criteria in

selection of Hardware & Software Components, product design by Performance Testing, Costing,

Benchmarking ,Documentation

Reference Books 1. "Product Design and Development", Karl T.Ulrich and Steven D.Eppinger, McGraw –Hill

International Edns.1999

2. George E.Dieter, Linda C.Schmidt, “Engineering Design”, McGraw-Hill International

Edition,4th Edition, 2009, ISBN 978-007-127189-9

3. "Effective Product Design and Development", Stephen Rosenthal, Business One Orwin,

4. Homewood, 1992,ISBN, 1-55623-603-4

5. Product Design Techniques in Reverse Engineering and New Product Development, KEVIN

OTTO & KRISTIN WOOD, Pearson Education (LPE),2001.

18EI3015 EMBEDDED PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT L T P C

3 0 0 3


6. Kevin Otto, Kristin Wood, “Product Design”, Indian Reprint 2004, Pearson Education, ISBN

9788177588217

7. Yousef Haik, T. M. M. Shahin, “Engineering Design Process”, 2nd Edition Reprint, Cengage

Learning, 2010, ISBN 0495668141

8. Clive L.Dym, Patrick Little, “Engineering Design: A Project-based Introduction”, 3rd

Edition, John Wiley & Sons, 2009.

Course Objectives:

1. To understand the image fundamentals of image processing

2. To understand how image are analysed to extract features of interest.

3. To comprehend the concepts of image registration and image fusion

Course Outcomes: Upon completion of the course, student will be able to

1. Describe various concepts of digital image processing

2. understand the concepts of image enhancement

3. Illustrate the steps involved in processing digital images

4. Recall thee concepts of Wavelets and image compression

5. Summarize the concept of Image representation and recognition

6. Build embedded based image processing applications.

Module 1: Introduction to Image Processing: (6 Hours)

Basic definitions-image formation- Image processing operations- real time image processing-

embedded image processing- serial processing- parallelism- hardware image processing system.

Module 2: Image enhancement: (8 Hours) Image enhancement in spatial domain, Spatial filtering, 2D image transforms :DFT and its property,

Cosine and sine transform, Hadamard and Haar transform, Image enhancement in frequency domain.

Module 3: Morphological Processing: (8 Hours)

Morphological image processing, Erosion and Dilation, Opening and Closing , Edge detection and

model, Active contour, Texture

Module 4: Wavelet: (8 Hours) Wavelet based Segmentation, Localized feature extraction shape, boundary, Moments and Texture

descriptors, Registration –basics, Transformation functions , Resampling, Image fusion – pixel,

Multiresolution and region based fusion

Module 5: Embedded Audio processing (8 Hours) What is sound- audio signals- speech

processing-audio sources and sinks- Background on Audio converters- audio ADCs and Audio

DACs- connecting to audio converters- I2C, SPI,DACs and CODECs- interconnections- dynamic

range and precisions- fixed point and floating point arithmetic.

Module 6: Embedded Applications: (7 Hours)

3D image visualization , 3D Data sets, Volumetric display, Stereo Viewing , Ray tracing , Image

processing in 3D, Measurements on 3D images, embedded based face detection system, child

monitoring system.

Reference Books 1. Rafael C. Gonzales, Richard E. Woods, “Digital Image Processing”, Third Edition, Pearson

Education, 2010.

2. Rafael C. Gonzalez, Richard E. Woods, Steven L. Eddins, “Digital Image Processing Using

Matlab”, Third Edition Tata McGraw Hill Pvt. Ltd., 2011.

3. Anil Jain K. “Fundamentals of Digital Image Processing”, PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd., 2011.

4. William K. Pratt, “Introduction to Digital Image Processing”, CRC Press, 2013.

5. Chris Solomon, Toby Breckon, “Fundamentals of Digital Image Processing – A practical

approach with examples in Matlab”, Wiley-Blackwell, 2010.

6. Jayaraman, “Digital Image Processing”, Tata McGraw Hill Education, 2011.

7. Malay K. Pakhira, “Digital Image Processing and Pattern Recognition”, First Edition, PHI

Learning Pvt. Ltd., 2011.

18EI3016 EMBEDDED BASED IMAGE PROCESSING

TECHNIQUES

L T P C

3 0 0 3


Course Objectives:

The main objectives of this course is to make the students

1. Understand the fundamental concepts of soft computing, artificial neural networks and

optimization techniques

2. Familiarize with recent advancements in artificial neural networks and optimization

techniques.

3. Understand the optimization techniques.

Outcomes:

At the end of the course students will

1. Recall the concepts of neural networks.

2. Apply neural network tool box for embedded applications.

3. Analyze the concept of fuzzy logic and neuro fuzzy systems.

4. Examine various optimization techniques

5. Choose appropriate optimization techniques for engineering applications.

6. Apply genetic algorithm concepts and tool box for embedded applications

Module 1: Introduction to soft computing and neural networks (7 Hours) Introduction to soft

computing: soft computing vs. hard computing – various types of soft computing techniques, from

conventional AI to computational intelligence, applications of soft computing. Fundamentals of neural

network: biological neuron, artificial neuron, activation function, single layer perceptron – limitations.

Multi-layer perceptron –back propagation algorithm.

Module 2: Artificial Neural Networks (8 Hours) Radial basis function networks – reinforcement learning. Hopfield / recurrent network – configuration

– stability constraints, associative memory and characteristics, limitations and applications. Hopfield

vs. Boltzmann machine. Advances in neural networks – convolution neural networks. Familiarization

of Neural network toolbox for embedded applications.

Module 3: Fuzzy Logic and Neuro -Fuzzy Systems (8 Hours)

Fundamentals of fuzzy set theory: fuzzy sets, operations on fuzzy sets, scalar cardinality, union and

intersection, complement, equilibrium points, aggregation, projection, composition. Fuzzy

membership functions. Fundamentals of neuro-fuzzy systems – ANFIS. Familiarization of ANFIS

Toolbox for process industry.

Module 4: Introduction to Optimization Techniques (8 Hours) Classification of optimization problems – classical optimization techniques. Linear programming –

simplex algorithm. Non-linear programming – steepest descent method, augmented Lagrange

multiplier method – equality constrained problems.

Module 5: Advanced optimization techniques (8 Hours) Simple hill climbing algorithm, Steepest ascent hill climbing – algorithm and features. Simulated

annealing – algorithm and features.

Module 6: Genetic algorithm: (6 Hours)

Working principle, fitness function. Familiarization with Optimization Toolbox, genetic algorithm for

embedded applications

Reference Books:

1. Laurene V. Fausett, “Fundamentals of neural networks, architecture, algorithms and

applications, Pearson Education, 2008.

2. Jyh-Shing Roger Jang, Chuen-Tsai Sun, Eiji Mizutani, “Neuro-Fuzzy and soft computing”,

Prentice Hall of India, 2003.

3. Simon Haykin, “Neural Networks – A comprehensive foundation”, Pearson Education, 2005.

4. David E. Goldberg, “Genetic algorithms in search, optimization and machine learning”,

Pearson Education, 2009.

5. Singiresu S. Rao, “Engineering Optimization – Theory and Practice”, 4th edition, John Wiley

& Sons, 2009.

6. Thomas Weise, “Global Optimization algorithms – Theory and applications”, self-published,

2009.

18EI3017 OPTIMIZATION TECHNIQUES FOR EMBEDDED

SYSTEMS

L T P C

3 0 0 3


Course Objectives

1. To teach the fundamental concepts and features of ANDROID

2. To study ANDROID- UI and event handling

3. To study various applications using android

Course outcome:

1. Outline the fundamental features of ANDROID

2. Analyze the resource management in ANDROID.

3. Examine the features of ANDROID- UI and event handling

4. Develop android programming with sensor

5. Analyze features of adapters and widgtes.

6. Create an application using ANDROID programming.

Module 1: ANDROID Overview and Architecture (6 Hours) Introduction to ANDROID, features, applications, environment setup, architecture: LINUX kernel,

libraries, Android runtime, applications component.

Module 2: ANDROID – organizing & accessing the resources (8 Hours) Creating Android application, running the application, organize, alternative resources, accessing

resources, activities, services, broadcast receivers.

Module 3: ANDROID- UI and event handling (8 Hours) Android-intents & Filters, layout types, UI Controls, event handling, styles and themes, Drag and

Drop, notification

Module 4: Developer tools: (8 Hours)

MySQL database, Embedded Android development tools, Graphical Android programming, Sensor

data interfacing, control mechanisms

Module 5:Adapters and widgtes (8 Hours) Adapters:- Array Adapters – Base Adapters – List View and List Activity - Custom list view – Grid

View using adapters - Gallery using adapters

Module 6: Applications (7 Hours)

Audio capture and manager, Bluetooth, camera, GPS module, custom fonts, data backup, sending

EMAIL, sending SMS, making phone calls, exporting Android applications, wifi.

Reference Books:

1. Ronan Schwarz,Phil Dutson, James Steele, Nelson To The Android Developer's Cookbook:

Building Applications with the Android SDK (2nd Edition) (Developer's Library) 2nd Edition

, Addition wesley 2013

2. Camillus Raynaldo Android Programming Painless (Tutorial Book Book), Kindle Edition,

2013

3. Reto Meier Professional Android 4 Application Development 3rd Edition, John wiley and

sons Inc, 2012

4. Bill Phillips,Brian Hardy , Android Programming: The Big Nerd Ranch Guide (Big Nerd

Ranch Guides) 1st Edition Big Nerd Ranch Inc 2013

Course Objectives:

1. To understand and be able to use the basic programming in python

2. To learn how to effectively use Python’s very powerful processing primitives, modelling etc.

3. To implement application programming using python.

Course Outcomes:

1. Understand the basic programming s such as data types, variable, loops

2. Create programming with strings, tuples and dictionaries.

3. Build simple programs using Functions in python

4. Analyze file handling mechanism in Python

5. Recall the features and programming with Raspberry Pi

6. Develop an application with python and Raspberry Pi

18EI3018 EMBEDDED ANDROID PROGRAMMING L T P C

3 0 0 3

18EI3019 PYTHON PROGRAMMING AND INTERFACING

TECHNIQUES

L T P C

3 0 0 3

https://www.amazon.com/Ronan-Schwarz/e/B00E8GNTGO/ref=dp_byline_cont_book_1

https://www.amazon.com/s/ref=dp_byline_sr_book_2?ie=UTF8&text=Phil+Dutson&search-alias=books&field-author=Phil+Dutson&sort=relevancerank

https://www.amazon.com/James-Steele/e/B0040PRVDA/ref=dp_byline_cont_book_3

https://www.amazon.com/Nelson-To/e/B004ETRF56/ref=dp_byline_cont_book_4

https://www.amazon.com/Camilus-Raynaldo/e/B008MZUYBU/ref=dp_byline_cont_ebooks_1

https://www.amazon.com/Reto-Meier/e/B002BMF4OC/ref=dp_byline_cont_book_1

https://www.amazon.com/Bill-Phillips/e/B00C9F7BHE/ref=dp_byline_cont_book_1

https://www.amazon.com/Brian-Hardy/e/B00C9F5OTQ/ref=dp_byline_cont_book_2


Module 1: Introduction to PYTHON (7 Hours) Python overview- setting up python – IDE- basic syntax – variable types- working with numbers,

strings, branching- if statement, else clause, elif clause, creating while loops, avoiding infinite loops –

for loops- simple programs

Module 2: Working with strings, tuples lists and dictionaries (8 Hours)

sequence operators and functions with strings, indexing strings- building a new strings- slicing

strings- creating and using tuples- creating a Lists- indexing lists- slicing Lists- concatenating Lists –

using Dictionaries- creating and accessing dictionary values

Module 3: Functions (8 Hours)

creating functions- using parameters and Return values- using keyword arguments and default

parameters- using global variables and constants-

Module 4: Files and Exceptions (8 Hours) reading the text files- writing to a text files- storing complex data in files - handling exceptions-

Network programming

Module 5: PYTHON AND MCU: (8 Hours)

Introduction to Raspberry Pi - setup-configurations- GPIOs- serial port – SPI interface- interfacing

I/O modules with Rapberry Pi

Module 6: Applications: (6 Hours)

Image processing- sensor interfacing – wifi controlled led- working with ThingSpeak, twitter, home

automation – camera interface

Reference Books:

1. Mark Lutz,”Learning Python,Powerful OOPs,O’reilly,2011

2. Robert Sedgewick,Kevin Wayne ,Robert Dondero,Intr Programming in Python,

Pearson,2016.

3. Mark J.Guzdial,Barbara Ericson,”Introduction to Computing & Programming in Python,4th

Edition Pearson,2015.

4. Budd, Timothy. Exploring Python. McGraw-Hill science,2009.

5. Guttag, John. Introduction to Computation and Programming Using Python. MIT Press, 2013.

6. Zelle, John M. Python Programming: An Introduction to Computer Science. 1st ed. Franklin

Beedle& Associates, 2003

Course Objectives:

1. To develop programming skills in Embedded C

2. To understand array, pointer and sturctures in Embedded C programming

3. To acquire the concepts of file handling in C programming .

Course Outcomes: After completion of the course, students will be able to

1. Develop program in Embedded C using operators, data types and flow control loops

2. Elaborate the concepts of arrays and functions.

3. Explain the basic concepts of structures and unions in C programming

4. Develop programming using pointers.

5. Discuss file handling concepts in embedded C programming

6. Create simple examples with embedded C structure.

Module 1:C Overview and program structure (6 Hours)

Fundamentals of C - Datatypes and Constants -Simple & Formatted I/O - Memory Usage - Operators

& Expressions -Flow Control- Loops.

Module 2: Functions, Arrays: (8 Hours)

Functions: Role of Functions - Pass by value / reference - Returning values from Functions -

Recursive Functions - Call Back Functions -Implications on Stack -Library Vs User defined function -

Passing variable number of arguments Arrays: Defining, initializing and using arrays -Multi

Dimensional Arrays -Arrays of Characters and Strings -Arrays and Pointers -Passing arrays to

functions -String handling with and without library functions. Storage Classes: Scope and Life -

Automatic, Static, External, Register-Memory(CPU / RAM).

Module 3: Structures and Unions: (8 Hours) Structures & Unions: Declaration, initialization-

Accessing like objects -Nested Structures -Array of Structures-Passing structures through functions -

Allocation of memory and holes -Structure Comparison -Structure bit operation -Typedef for

portability –Unions -Overlapping members

18EI3020 ADVANCED COURSE IN EMBEDDED C L T P C

3 0 0 3


Module 4: Pointers and Memory (8 Hours)

Pointers : The purpose of pointers -Defining pointers -The & and * operators -Pointer Assignment -

Pointer Arithmetic -Multiple indirections-Advanced pointer types -Generic and Null Pointer-

Function Pointers- Pointers to Arrays and Strings -Array of Pointers -Pointers to Structure and Union

-Pointers to Dynamic memory -Far, Near and Huge Pointers -Pointer Type Casting: Dynamic

Memory Allocation: Malloc(), Calloc(), Realloc(), Free(), Farmalloc(), Farcalloc()

Module 5: File Handling Concepts :(8 Hours)

Concept of a FILE data type, Inode, FILE structure- File pointer -Character handling routines -

Formatted Data Routines-Raw data Routines -Random Access to FILE preprocessors: #define •

Macros • Precedence • Conditional Compilation • Warnings • #pragma • Predefined Macros

Module 6: Embedded C programming structure: (7 Hours)

Distinguish C and Embedded C, Embedded C programming structure- Embedded software

development process: build process- compiling -linking- locating- downloading- debugging- remote

debuggers- emulators and simulators-declaration of ports and registers- simple examples using

embedded C

Reference Books:

1. Mark Siegesmund Embedded C Programming: Techniques and Applications of C and PIC

MCUS, Elsevier Inc., 2014

2. Michael Barr Programming Embedded Systems in C and C++, O’reilly, 1999

3. Richard H. Barnett, Sarah Cox, Larry O'Cull , Embedded C Programming and the Atmel

AVR, Delmar Cengage learning 2007.

Course Objectives

1. To teach the fundamental concepts of how process are created and controlled with OS.

2. To study on programming logic of modeling Process based on range of OS features

3. To compare types and Functionalities in commercial OS, application development using

RTOS

Course outcome:

1. Contrast the fundamental concepts of real-time operating systems

2. Outline the concepts of RTOS Task and scheduler

3. Categorize real time Semaphores

4. Summarize the concepts of Mailbox, Message Queue

5. Develop program for real time applications

6. Understand the structure of Memory Management

Module 1:Real time system concepts (7 Hours) Foreground/Background systems- resources-shared resources-multitasking- tasks-context switches-

kernels –schedulers-task priorities-dead locks inter task communication- interrupts - μCOS I, II and

III comparison

Module 2 :Kernel structure in μCOS (8 Hours) Tasks-Task states- control blocks-ready list – scheduling –Idle task-statistics Task- Interrupts under

μCOS-II, task management in μCOS- time management in μCOS

Module 3: Semaphores (8 Hours) Event control blocks- semaphore management- creating , deleting a semaphore, waiting on a

semaphore, creating and deleting Mutex, waiting on a mutex, event flag management.

Module 4: Message Mailbox management: (8 Hours) Creating and deleting a mailbox μCOS – waiting for a message at a Mailbox, sending a message to a

Mailbox, getting message without waiting- obtaining the status of a Mailbox, using a Maibox as a

binary semaphore

Module 5: Message Queue Management: (8 Hours)

Creating and deleting a Message Queue- waiting for a Message Queue- sending a message to a queue

FIFO, LIFO- getting a Message without waiting- flushing a Queue- obtaining status of Queue- using a

Message Queue when reading analogue inputs and counting semaphores.

Module 6: Memory Management (6 Hours)

Memory control blocks- creating a partition, obtaining a memory block, returning a memory block-

obtaining status of a memory partition- using memory partitions- waiting for memory blocks from a

partition-porting μCOS

18EI3021 REAL TIME OPERATING SYSTEM L T P C

3 0 0 3


Reference Books:

1. Jean J. Labrosse, MicroC/OS-II: The Real Time Kernel, Taylor & Francis, 05-Feb-2002

2. K.C. Wang Embedded and Real-Time Operating Systems, Springer 2017

3. Qing Li, Caroline Yao , Real-Time Concepts for Embedded Systems, CMP books, 2003

Course Objectives

1. To expose the students to the fundamentals of wireless embedded networking

2. To study on design of automation in instrumentation

3. To introduce design of Programmable measurement & control of electrical Devices & grid


1. Understand the fundamentals of wired embedded networking techniques

2. Understand the concept of embedded networking

3. Summarize the concept of sensor network implementation

4. Develop system automation with user interface programming

5. Apply the concept of embedded system in electrical apparatus

6. Analyze input-output configurations of computational processors with improved

communication strategies

Module 1: Embedded process communication with instrument bus (6 Hours) Embedded

Networking: Introduction – Cluster of Instruments in System: introduction to bus protocols,

connectors, Bus Architecture & Interfacing of external instruments to – RS 232C,RS – 422, RS 485

and USB standards – embedded Ethernet – MOD bus and CAN bus.

Module 2: Wireless Embedded networking (8 Hours) Wireless sensor networks – Introduction – Sensor node architecture – Commercially available sensor

nodes -Network Topology –Localization –Time Synchronization - Energy efficient MAC protocols –

SMAC –Energy efficient and robust routing – Data Centric routing Applications of sensor networks;

Applications - Home Control - Building Automation - Industrial Automation

Module 3: Sensor network implementation (8 Hours)

Sensor Programming- Introduction to TinyOS Programming and fundamentals of Programming

sensors using nesC- Algorithms for WSN – Techniques for Protocol Programming.

Module 4: Building system automation (8 Hours) Concept of microcontroller Based & PC based data acquisition – Concept of Virtual Instrumentation

Programming Environment to build a Virtual Instrumentation, Building system automation with

graphical user interface programming-Programmable Logic Controllers-introduction-Ladder&

Functional Block programming-Case study on Temperature control, Valve sequencing control.

Module 5: Measurement and embedded control of electrical apparatus (8 Hours) Sensor Types & Characteristics: Sensing Voltage, Current, flux, Torque, Position, Proximity, Force,

Data acquisition & Display system- Signal conditioning circuit design- computers/ embedded

processor interfacing circuit -design automation and protection of electrical appliances –processor

based digital controllers for switching Actuators: Servo motors, Stepper motors, Relays

Module 6: Communication for large electrical system automation (7 Hours)

Data Acquisition, Monitoring, Communication, Event Processing, and Polling Principles, SCADA

system principles – outage management– Decision support application for substation automation,

extended control feeder automation, Performance measure and response time, SCADA Data Models-

need- sources- interface.

Reference Books:

1. Control and automation of electrical power distribution systems, James Northcote-Green,

Robert Wilson, CRC, Taylor and Francis, 2006

2. Krzysztof Iniewski,”Smart Grid, Infrastructure & Networking”, TMcGH, 2012

3. Robert Faludi, Building Wireless Sensor Networks, O’Reilly, 2011

4. W. Bolton, Programmable Logic Controllers, 5th Ed, Elsevier, 2010.

5. Shih-Lin Wu, Yu-Chee Tseng,{“Wireless Ad Hoc Networking, PAN, LAN, SAN, Aurebach

Pub,2012

Course Objectives

1. To Study about Internet of Things technologies and its role in real time applications

18EI3022 EMBEDDED NETWORKING AND AUTOMATION OF

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

L T P C

3 0 0 3

18EI3023 INTERNET OF THINGS AND PROTOCOLS L T P C

3 0 0 3


2. To familiarize the accessories and communication techniques for IOT

3. To familiarize the different platforms and Attributes for IOT OUTCOMES

Course Outcomes:

1. Outline the basic concepts of IOT and its present developments.

2. Analyze the architectural overview of IOT

3. Summarize various protocols in data link and network layer

4. Summarize various protocols in transport, session and service layer

5. Analyse data analytics for IOT

6. Create an application using IOT

Module 1: Introduction to internet of things (7 Hours) IoT-An Architectural Overview– Building an architecture, Main design principles and needed

capabilities, An IoT architecture outline, standards considerations. M2M and IoT Technology

Fundamentals- Devices and gateways, Local and wide area networking, Data management, Business

processes in IoT, Everything as a Service (XaaS), M2M and IoT Analytics, Knowledge Management

Module 2:IOT Architecture: (8 Hours)

Node Structure - Sensing, Processing, Communication, Powering, Networking - Topologies,

Layer/Stack architecture, IoT standards, Cloud computing for IoT, Bluetooth, Bluetooth Low Energy,

beacons.

Module 3:IOT Data link layer & Network layer protocols(8 Hours) PHY/MAC Layer(3GPP

MTC, IEEE 802.11, IEEE 802.15), Wireless HART,Z-Wave, Bluetooth Low Energy, Zigbee Smart

Energy, DASH7 - Network Layer-IPv4, IPv6, 6LoWPAN, 6TiSCH,ND, DHCP, ICMP, RPL,

CORPL, CARP

Module 4:Transport, Session and Service layer protocols (8 Hours) Transport Layer (TCP, MPTCP, UDP, DCCP, SCTP)-(TLS, DTLS) – Session Layer-HTTP, CoAP,

XMPP, AMQP, MQTT , Service Layer Protocols & Security : Service Layer -oneM2M, ETSI M2M,

OMA, BBF – Security in IoT Protocols – MAC 802.15.4 , 6LoWPAN, RPL, Application Layer

Module 5:Data Analystics for IOT (8 Hours) Services/Attributes: Big-Data Analytics and Visualization, Dependability, Security, Maintainability.

Data analytics for IoT: A framework for data-driven decision making , Descriptive, Predictive and

Prescriptive Analytics , Business Intelligence and Artificial Intelligence Importance of impact and

open innovation in data-driven decision making.

Module 6: Case Studies (6 Hours) Smart cities, Smart Grid, Electric vehicle charging, Environment, Agriculture, Productivity

Applications

Reference Books:

1. Arshdeep Bahga and Vijai Madisetti : A Hands-on Approach “Internet of Things”,

Universities Press 2015.

2. Oliver Hersent, David Boswarthick and Omar Elloumi “The Internet of Things”, Wiley,2016.

3. Samuel Greengard, “ The Internet of Things”, The MIT press, 2015

4. Adrian McEwen and Hakim Cassimally “Designing the Internet of Things “Wiley,2014.

5. Jean- Philippe Vasseur, Adam Dunkels, “Interconnecting Smart Objects with IP: The Next

Internet” Morgan Kuffmann Publishers, 2010.

6. Adrian McEwen and Hakim Cassimally, “Designing the Internet of Things”, John Wiley and

sons, 2014

7. Lingyang Song/Dusit Niyato/ Zhu Han/ Ekram Hossain,” Wireless Device-to-Device

Communications and Networks, CAMBRIDGE UNIVERSITY PRESS,2015

8. Jan Holler, VlasiosTsiatsis, Catherine Mulligan, Stefan Avesand, StamatisKarnouskos, David

Boyle, “From Machine-to-Machine to the Internet of Things: Introduction to a New Age of

Intelligence”, 1 st Edition, Academic Press, 2014

Course Objectives 1. To educate the fundamental concepts or robotics

2. To educate on the robot drives and power transmission systems

3. To educate vision system for robotics

Course Outcomes 1. Recall the concept of robotics

2. Summarize building blocks of automation

18EI3024 ROBOTICS AND FACTORY AUTOMATION L T P C

3 0 0 3


3. Describe different sensors for robotic applications.

4. Analyze vision system for robotics.

5. Identify any intelligent automation system

6. Design ladder diagram for automation system

Module 1: Fundamental concepts of robotics: (6 Hours)

History, Present status and future trends in Robotics and automation - Laws of Robotics - Robot

definitions - Robotics systems and robot anatomy - Specification of Robots - resolution, repeatability

and accuracy of a manipulator. Robotic applications.

Module 2: Robot drives and power transmission systems: (8 Hours)

Robot drive mechanisms, hydraulic – electric – servomotor stepper motor - pneumatic drives,

Mechanical transmission method - Gear transmission, Belt drives, cables, Roller chains, Link - Rod

systems - Rotary-to-Rotary motion conversion, Rotary-to-Linear motion conversion, Rack and Pinion

drives, Lead screws, Ball Bearing screws, End effectors – Types.

Module 3: Sensors: (8 Hours)

Principle of operation, types and selection of Position& velocity sensors, Potentiometers, Encoders,

Resolvers, LVDT, Tacho generators, Proximity sensors. Limit switches – Tactile sensors - Touch

sensors - Force and torque sensors.

Module 4: Vision systems for robotics: (8 Hours)

Robot vision systems, Illumination techniques, Image capture- solid state cameras – Image

representation - Gray scale and color images, image sampling and quantization - Image processing

and analysis –, Image data reduction – Segmentation - Feature extraction - Object Recognition- Image

capturing and communication - JPEG,

MPEGs and H.26x standards, packet video, error concealment- Image texture analysis.

Module 5: Transformations and kinematics: (8 Hours)

Matrix representation- Homogeneous transformation matrices - The forward and inverse kinematics

of robots - D-H representation of forward kinematic equations of robots.

Module 6: Factory automation: (7 Hours)

Flexible Manufacturing Systems concept - Automatic feeding lines, ASRS, transfer lines, automatic

inspection - Computer Integrated Manufacture - CNC, intelligent automation. Industrial networking,

bus standards, HMI Systems, DCS and SCADA, Wireless controls.

Reference Books 1. Richard D Klafter, Thomas A Chmielewski, Michael Negin, "Robotics Engineering – An

Integrated Approach", Eastern

2. Economy, Prentice Hall of India P Ltd., 2006.

3. Mikell P Groover et. al., "Industrial Robots - Technology, Programming and Applications",

McGraw Hill, New York, 2008.

4. Saeed B Niku ,”Introduction to Robotics Analysis, Systems, Applications ”’PHI Pvt Ltd, New

Delhi,2003.

Course Objectives

1. To develop an understanding on business promotion process.

2. To expose students on the skills required for success in business.

3. To impart embedded system technology based entrepreneurship.

Course Outcomes : After the completion of this course the student will be able to:

1. Recall the basics for entrepreneurship

2. Analyze the challenges in entrepreneurship

3. Examine the responsibilities for entrepreneurship

4. Understand the ethics in entrepreneurship

5. Analyze the scope of entrepreneurship in embedded field

6. Analyze the scope of entrepreneurship in embedded product development

Module 1: Basics for Entrepreneurship (7 Hours) The entrepreneurial culture and structure -theories of entrepreneurship -entrepreneurial traits - types -

behavioural patterns of entrepreneurs -entrepreneurial motivation -establishing entrepreneurial

systems -idea processing, personnel, financial information and intelligence, rewards and motivation

concept bank -Role of industrial Fairs.

18EI3025 ENTREPRENEURSHIP DEVELOPMENT FOR

EMBEDDED SYSTEM

L T P C

3 0 0 3


Module 2: Challenges for Entrepreneurship (8 Hours) Setting quality standards- recruitment strategies- time schedules- Financial analysis - credit facilities

Marketing channel – advertisement- institutions providing technical, financial and marketing

assistance-factory design -design requirements -applicability of the Factories Act.

Module 3: Responsibilities in Entrepreneurship (8 Hours) Steps for starting a small industry -selection of type of organization -Incentives and subsidies -

Central Govt. schemes and State Govt. Schemes -incentives to SSI -registration, Registration and

Licensing requirements for sales tax, CST, Excise Duty -Power -Exploring export possibilities-

incentives for exports -import of capital goods and raw materials- Entrepreneurship development

programmes in India- Role and Improvement in Indian Economy.

Module 4: Ethics in Entrepreneurship: (8 Hours)

Effective Costumer Care -Mechanism for Handling Complaints - Business Etiquettes and Body

Language - Ethics, Values and Morale at Workplace - Managing Ethical Behaviour at Workplace.

Module 5: Scope in Embedded system field (8 Hours) Entrepreneurship opportunities in Embedded system technologies - embedded systems design,

modeling, Feasibility study on embedded system products- Entrepreneurial skills for embedded

system hardware and software architecture, software and hardware co-design and challenges;

problems of entrepreneurship in Embedded system field.

Module 6: Scope through Embedded products (6 Hours) Embedded system Product development- feature driven development- release management-market

pull product search, Entrepreneurial case studies: Mobile phone development- automation

components-Washing machine- Food Processing system and devices- High Performance embedded

computers-Industrial Controllers.

Reference Books:

1. Kuratko, Enmterpreneurship : A Contemporary Approach, Thomson Learning, 2001.

2. Thomas Zimmerer et.al., Essentials of Entrepreneurship and small business Management 3rd

Ed. Pearson Education, 2002.

3. Greene, Entrepreneurship: Ideas in Action, Thomson Learning, Mumbai, 2000

4. Jeffry Timmons, New Ventrure creation, McGraw Hill, 1999.

5. Gupta and Smivasan, Entrepreneurial Development, New Delhi, Sultan Chand, 1992

6. LyLa B. Das "Embedded Systems: An Integrated Approach" Pearson, 2013

7. James K.peckol ,” Embedded Systems: A contemporary Design Tool”, Wiley,2014

Karuny

a Univ

ersity

2017 Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering

LIST OF COURSES

S.No Course Code Name of the Course

Credits

1. 16EI3001 Advanced Virtual Instrumentation 3:0:0

2. 17EI2001 Sensors and Transducers 3:0:0

3. 17EI2002 Sensors and Transducers Laboratory 0:0:2

4. 17EI2003 Virtual Instrumentation and Data Acquisition Laboratory 0:0:1

5. 17EI2004 Electrical and Electronic Measurements 3:0:0

6. 17EI2005 Electrical Measurements and Machines Laboratory 0:0:2

7. 17EI2006 Control System 3:1:0

8. 17EI2007 Control Systems Laboratory 0:0:1

9. 17EI2008 Industrial Instrumentation 3:0:0

10. 17EI2009 Process Dynamics and Control 3:0:0

11. 17EI2010 Industrial Instrumentation Laboratory 0:0:2

12. 17EI2011 Process Control Laboratory 0:0:2

13. 17EI2012 Industrial Data Communication Networks 3:0:0

14. 17EI2013 Digital Control Systems 3:0:0

15. 17EI2014 Logic and Distributed Control Systems 3:0:0

16. 17EI2015 Logic and Distributed Control Systems Laboratory 0:0:2

17. 17EI2016 Sensors and Data Acquisition 3:0:0

18. 17EI2017 Biomedical Instrumentation 3:0:0

19. 17EI2018 Automotive Instrumentation 3:0:0

20. 17EI2019 Analytical Instrumentation 3:0:0

21. 17EI2020 Instrumentation and Control in Petrochemical Industries 3:0:0

22. 17EI2021 Instrumentation and Control in Paper Industries 3:0:0

23. 17EI2022 Instrumentation and Control in Iron and Steel Industries 3:0:0

24. 17EI2023 Optoelectronics and Laser Based Instrumentation 3:0:0

25. 17EI2024 Power Plant Instrumentation 3:0:0

26. 17EI2025 Aircraft Instrumentation 3:0:0

27. 17EI2026 Telemetry and Remote Control 3:0:0

28. 17EI2027 Robotics and Automation 3:0:0

29. 17EI2028 SCADA Systems Design 3:0:0

30. 17EI2029 Power Electronics and Drives for Industrial Control 3:0:0

31. 17EI2030 Smart Sensor Technology 3:0:0

32. 17EI2031 Pervasive devices and technology 3:0:0

33. 17EI2032 Theory and Design of Neuro Fuzzy Controllers 3:0:0

34. 17EI2033 Microcontroller based system design 3:0:0

35. 17EI2034 Instrumentation and Control Systems 3:0:0

36. 17EI2035 Instrumentation for Agriculture 3:0:0

37. 17EI2036 Environmental Instrumentation 3:0:0

38. 17EI2037 Virtual Instrumentation 3:0:0

39. 17EI2038 Ultrasonic Instrumentation 3:0:0

40. 17EI2039 Fiber Optics and Laser Instrumentation 3:0:0

41. 17EI2040 Building Automation 3:0:0

42. 17EI2041 Measurement and Instrumentation 3:0:0

43. 17EI2042 Process Control Laboratory for Food Engineers 3:0:0

44. 17EI2043 Process Control for Food Engineers 3:0:0

45. 17EI2044 Nano Scale Sensors and Transducers 3:0:0

46. 17EI3001 Instrumentation 3:0:0

47. 17EI3002 Advanced Process Control 3:0:0

48. 17EI3003 Advanced Control Systems 3:0:0

49. 17EI3004 Discrete Control System 3:0:0

Karuny

a Univ

ersity


50. 17EI3005 Intelligent Controllers 3:0:0

51. 17EI3006 Optimal Control Theory 3:0:0

52. 17EI3007 Advanced Industrial Instrumentation 3:0:0

53. 17EI3008 System Identification and Adaptive Control 3:0:0

54. 17EI3009 Industrial Instrumentation and Process Control Laboratory 0:0:2

55. 17EI3010 Virtual Instrumentation Laboratory 0:0:2

56. 17EI3011 Embedded Control Systems Laboratory 0:0:2

57. 17EI3012 Real Time and Embedded Control Automation 3:0:0

58. 17EI3013 Industrial Automation Systems 3:0:0

59. 17EI3014 Control System Design 3:0:0

60. 17EI3015 SCADA systems and Applications 3:0:0

61. 17EI3016 Design of Linear Multivariable control systems 3:0:0

62. 17EI3017 Embedded Instrumentation 3:0:0

63. 17EI3018 Networks and protocols for instrumentation and control 3:0:0

64. 17EI3019 Multi Sensor Data Fusion 3:0:0

65. 17EI3020 Non Linear Control Systems 3:0:0

66. 17EI3021 Robust Control 3:0:0

67. 17EI3022 Process Modelling and Control 3:0:0

68. 17EI3023 Advanced processor for control and automation 3:0:0

69. 17EI3024 Advanced Embedded Signal Processing 3:0:0

70. 17EI3025 Programmable Devices for industrial automation 3:0:0

71. 17EI3026 FPGA control design laboratory 0:0:2

72. 17EI3027 Embedded Virtual Instrumentation Laboratory 0:0:2

73. 17EI3028 Embedded Automotive Systems 3:0:0

74. 17EI3029 Embedded based Biomedical sensors and signal conditioning 3:0:0

75. 17EI3030 MEMS Technology for Embedded design 3:0:0

76. 17EI3031 Embedded Product Development 3:0:0

77. 17EI3032 Robotics and Factory Automation 3:0:0

78. 17EI3033 Linear Systems 3:0:0

16EI3001 ADVANCED VIRTUAL INSTRUMENTATION

Credits: 3:0:0

Course Objectives:

Learn the basics concepts of graphical programming.

Acquire knowledge on Data Acquisition Systems and network interface concepts.

To enable design and programming of Virtual Instruments for real time applications

Course Outcomes:

At the end of the course, the student will be able to

Create a Virtual Instrument using graphical programming.

Develop systems for real-time signal acquisition and analysis.

Apply concepts of network interface for data communication.

Implement and design data acquisition systems for practical applications.

Suggest solutions for automation and control applications using virtual instrumentation.

Description:

Introduction – Virtual Instrumentation and its evolution, graphical programming, comparison with conventional

programming, Development of virtual instrument, programming techniques,Instrument drivers.Data acquisition:

Introduction to data acquisition on PC, Sampling fundamentals, Sensor and its characteristics, Signal Processing

and manipulation, Calibration, Resolution, Data Acquisition Interface Requirements,Interface standards and PC

buses, Advances in Sensing Technology, Applications: Instrument control, System Simulation, Development of data

acquisition and control system, Image Acquisition and processing, motion control, remote data management

Karuny

a Univ

ersity


References:

1. Gray Johnson, LabVIEW Graphical Programming, Second edition, McGraw Hill, Newyork, 1997

2. Jovitha Jerome, “Virtual Instrumentation using LabVIEW”, PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd, New Delhi, 2010.

3. Sanjay Gupta and Joseph John, “Virtual Instrumentation using LabVIEW”, Tata McGraw Hill Inc., 2005

4. Kevin James, PC Interfacing and Data Acquisition: Techniques for Measurement, Instrumentation and

Control, Newnes, 2000.

5. Steve Mackay, Edwin Wright, John Park, and Deon Reynders, “Industrial Data Networks”, Elsevier, 2004.

6. P.Surekha, S.Sumathi, “LabVIEW based Advance Instrumentation”, Springer, 2007.

7. D Patranabis, ‘Sensors and Transducers’, PHI 2nd Edition, 2003.

8. Lisa K Wells and Geffrey Travis, “LabVIEW for Everyone: Graphical Programming Even Made Easier”,

Prentice Hall Inc., 1996.

9. Clyde F Coombs, “Electronic Instruments Handbook”, McGraw Hill Inc., 1999.

17EI2001 SENSORS AND TRANSDUCERS

Credits: 3:0:0

Course Objectives:

To gain knowledge on methods of measurement, classification of transducers and measurement errors.

Understand static and dynamic characteristics of transducers

Get exposed to different types of resistive, inductive and capacitive transducers and their application.

Course Outcomes:

Describe the mathematics, science and engineering fundamentals involved in measurement applications.

Examine the measuring problems related to sensors and transducers

Select the suitable sensor/transducer for a given application.

Determine the static and dynamic characteristics of transducers

Formulate sensors using MEMS and Nano technology

Design magnetic sensor and digital sensor based measuring circuits

Unit I - Fundamental of Measurements and Classification of Transducers: Units and standards – generalized

instrumentation system-Calibration techniques – Static calibration – errors in instrumentation system: Limiting error

and probable error – Error analysis – Statistical methods – Odds and uncertainty – Classification of transducers –

Selection of transducers.

Unit II - Characteristics of Measuring Instruments: Static: Accuracy, precision, resolution, sensitivity, linearity,

span and range - Dynamic characteristics: Mathematical model of transducer – Zero, I and II order transducers -

Response to impulse, step, ramp and sinusoidal inputs

Unit III - Resistive Principle based Transducers: Principle of operation, construction details, characteristics and

applications of potentiometer, strain gauge, resistance thermometer, Thermistor, hot-wire anemometer,

piezoresistive sensor and humidity sensor.

Unit IV - Inductive and Capacitive Principle based Transducers: Induction potentiometer – Variable reluctance

transducers – EI pick up – Principle of operation, construction details, characteristics and applications of LVDT –

Capacitive transducer and types – Capacitor microphone – Frequency response.

Unit V - Other Sensors and Transducers: Force and torque transducers: proving ring-hydraulic and pneumatic

load cell-dynamometer and gyroscope -Piezoelectric transducer - Hall Effect transducer – Magneto elastic sensor-

Digital transducers – Smart sensors – proximity devices, biosensors, Film sensors, MEMS – Nano sensors.

Text Books

1. Doebelin E.O. and Manik D.N., “Measurement Systems”, 6 th Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill Education Pvt.

Ltd., 2011.

2. Renganathan, S.,” Transducer Engineering”, Allied Publishers, New Delhi, 2003.

Reference Books

1. Neubert, H.K.P., “Instrument Transducers – An Introduction to their Performance and Design”, Oxford

University Press, Cambridge, 2003.

2. Albert, D. Helfrick and Cooper, W. D., “Modern Electronic Instrumentation and

3. Measurement Techniques”, PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd., 2011.

Karuny

a Univ

ersity


4. Murthy, D.V.S., “Transducers and Instrumentation”, 2nd Edition, Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd., New

Delhi, 2010.

5. John P. Bentley, “Principles of Measurement Systems”, 4th Edition, Pearson Education, 2004. Patranabis,

D., “Sensors and Transducers”, 2 nd Edition, Prentice Hall of India, 2010

17EI2002 SENSORS AND TRANSDUCERS LABORATORY

Credits: 0:0:2

Course Objectives:

To gain knowledge on classification of transducers and measurement errors.

Understand static and dynamic characteristics of transducers

Get exposed to different types of resistive, inductive and capacitive transducers and their application.

Course Outcomes:

Demonstrate the performance characteristics of various transducers

Design a measurement system for an application

Acquire Knowledge on testing the instruments

Obtain idea about Calibration techniques

Understanding of loading effect

Trouble shooting of various sensors and transducers

Description:

This laboratory course enables the students to gain practical knowledge on sensors, their characteristics, design and

applications

The faculty conducting the laboratory will prepare a list of 12 experiments and get the approval of HOD/Director

and notify it at the beginning of each semester.

17EI2003 VIRTUAL INSTRUMENTATION AND DATA ACQUISITION LABORATORY

Credits: 0:0:1

Course Objective:

To introduce the basics concepts of Virtual Instrumentation.

To develop ability for programming in LabVIEW using structures, graphs and charts for system

monitoring, processing and controlling

To learn about the data acquisition and interfacing concepts using a state-of-the-art software platform such

as National Instrument's LabVIEW.

Course Outcomes:


Develop Virtual instrumentation systems for practical applications

Apply PC interfacing principles for data acquisition

Understand the usage of Instrument Driver for Computer measurement and control.

Formulate instrumentation and control applications using Lab VIEW

Appraise the usefulness of LabVIEW for real time data acquisition and analysis

Description:

This course enables the students to gain practical knowledge in programming techniques, data acquisition and

interfacing techniques of virtual instrumentation and apply it to real time environment.



17EI2004 ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONIC MEASUREMENTS

Credits: 3:0:0

Course Objectives:

To provide information on the basics of Electronic Measurements.

To include specialized information needed for Analog and Digital Instrumentation.

Karuny

a Univ

ersity


To exploit an instrument’s potential, to be aware of its limitations.

Course Outcomes:

Investigate the Electromechanical and Electronic Equipment.

Select the proper instrument for measurement.

Develop instruments to measure Resistance, Impedance, Voltage and Current.

Demonstrate different types of waveform generators and analyzers and their applications.

Examine on virtual instrumentation, its applications, programming and DAQ cards and modules.

Create measurement method for the real time application using VI.

Unit I - Measurement of Voltage and Current: Electrical Measurement: D’Arsonval galvanometer – Theory,

calibration, application – Principle, construction, operation and comparison of moving coil, moving iron meters,

Extension of range and calibration of voltmeter and ammeter – Errors and compensation. Electronic Voltmeter and

their advantages – Types, Differential amplifier, source follower.

Unit II - Measurement of Power, Energy, Resistance and Impedance: Electrodynamometer type wattmeter –

Theory & its operation– Induction type energy meter – Calibration of wattmeter and Energy meter, D.C Bridges

Wheatstone bridge– Kelvin double bridge A.C bridges – Measurement of inductance, capacitance – Q of coil –

Maxwell Bridge – Wein’s bridge – Schering bridge ––Hay’s bridge- Q meter, ohmmeter

Unit III - Signal Generator and Signal Analyzers: Wien Bridge, RC Phase Shift Oscillator, Pulse Generator &

Function Generator– Harmonic distortion analyzer – Spectrum analyzer

Unit IV - Digital Instrument and Displays: Electronic Counters, Digital Frequency Meter, Digital Voltmeter,

Digital Multi-meter, LED & LCD.

Unit V - CRO and Virtual Instrumentation: General purpose cathode ray oscilloscope – Dual trace, dual beam

and sampling oscilloscopes– Analog and digital storage oscilloscope, Virtual instrumentation (VI) – Definition,

flexibility – Block diagram and architecture of virtual instruments – Virtual instruments versus traditional

instruments – Software in virtual instrumentation

Text Books

1. David A Bell, “Electronic Instrumentation and Measurements”, Third Edition, Ox for University Press,

2013.

Reference Books

1. A.D. Helfrick and W.D. Cooper, Modern Electronic Instrumentation and Measurement Techniques,

Prentice Hall India Private Ltd., New Delhi, 2010.

2. H.S. Kalsi, Electronic Instrumentation, Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, 2010.

3. J.J. Carr, Elements of Electronic Instrumentation and Measurement, Pearson Education India, New Delhi,

2011.

4. M.M.S. Anand, Electronics Instruments and Instrumentation Technology, Prentice Hall India, New Delhi,

2009.

5. Sanjay Gupta, Virtual Instrumentation using Lab view, Tata McGraw-Hill Education, 2010.

6. Sumathi S and P. Surekha , “LabVIEW based Advanced Instrumentation Systems” Springer, 2007.

7. Bouwens A.J., Digital Instrumentation, McGraw Hill Ltd., USA, 2002.

17EI2005 ELECTRICAL MEASUREMENTS AND MACHINES LABORATORY

Credits: 0:0:2

Course Objectives:

Understand characteristics of D.C machines and transformer.

Apply the measurements techniques to bridge circuits.

Develop platform independent applications in instrumentation system.

Course Outcomes:

Infer the basic concepts to obtain the no load and load characteristics of D.C machines and transformer.

Show proficiency in testing and control.

Identifying the type of special machines used for that particular application.

Develop the measurement techniques for a given application while carrying out projects.

Design the experiments using calibration for a measurement system.

Create prototype for latest instrumentation for real time application.

Karuny

a Univ

ersity




17EI2006 CONTROL SYSTEM

Credits: 3:1:0

Course Objectives:

Understand about various representations of systems.

To develop linear models mainly state variable model and Transfer function model from Non Linear

systems.

To make the students apply linear systems in time domain and frequency domain.

Course Outcomes:

Develop mathematical model of physical systems

Analyze the various linear models in time domain and frequency domain.

Outline the basics of state space representation of systems

Examine the stability of systems

Design appropriate controller for the given specifications.

Acquire knowledge on compensator design.

Unit I - Modeling of Linear Time Invariant System: Control system: Open loop and Closed loop – Feedback

control system characteristics – First principle modelling: Mechanical, Electrical and Hydraulic systems – Transfer

function representations: Block diagram and Signal flow graph.

Unit II - State Space Model of LTI and LTV Systems: State variable formulation – Non uniqueness of state space

model – State transition matrix –Free and forced responses for Time Invariant and Time Varying Systems –

Controllability – Observability.

Unit III - Time Domain and Stability Analysis :Standard test inputs – Time responses – Time domain

specifications – Stability analysis: Concept of stability – Routh Hurwitz stability criterion – Root locus:

Construction and Interpretation.

Unit IV - Frequency Domain Analysis : Frequency response plots: Bode plot, Polar plot and Nyquist plot –

Frequency domain specifications: Resonance peak, Resonant frequency and Bandwidth – Stability Analysis: Gain

margin and Phase margin.

Unit V - Compensator Design: Design specifications – Lead, Lag and Lag-lead compensators using Root

locus and Bode plot techniques.

Text Books

1. Benjamin C. Kuo, “Automatic Control Systems”, 7th

Edition PHI Learning Private Ltd., 2010.

2. Nagarath, I.J. and Gopal, M., “Control Systems Engineering”, New Age International

Publishers, 2010.

Reference Books

1. Richard C.Dorf and Bishop, R.H., “Modern Control Systems”, Education Pearson, 3rd

Impression, 2009.

2. John J.D., Azzo Constantine, H. and Houpis Sttuart, N Sheldon, “Linear Control System Analysis

and Design with MATLAB”, CRC Taylor& Francis Reprint 2009.

3. Katsuhiko Ogata, “Modern Control Engineering”, PHI Learning Private Ltd, 5th

Edition, 2010.

17EI2007 CONTROL SYSTEMS LABORATORY

Credits: 0:0:1

Course Objectives:

To strengthen the knowledge of Feedback control

To inculcate the controller design concepts

To introduce the concept of Mathematical Modeling

Karuny

a Univ

ersity


Course Outcomes:

Determine the mathematical model of physical systems.

Design a suitable controller for a process.

Analyze the time domain and frequency domain characteristics of systems.

Apply the control system concepts to servomotor, synchro.

Design and appraise the use of compensators in a control loop

Evaluate the merits and demerits of feedback control systems.



17EI2008 INDUSTRIAL INSTRUMENTATION

Credit: 3: 0: 0

Course Objectives:

To learn the principle of Pressure, Temperature, flow, level, density and viscosity measurements.

To know about the selection, calibration and installation of different instruments

To explore the application of measuring instruments in various industries

Course Outcomes:

Apply the knowledge of various Measuring Instruments to design a simple Instrumentation system.

Calibrate the industrial instruments and use them in various fields.

Select suitable instrument for a given application

Analyzing the instrument in Industry

Perform Calibration of Instruments

Design Instrumentation Circuits for measurement systems.

Unit I - Level Measurement :Float operated devices - Displacer devices - Pressure gauge method - Diaphragm box-

Air purge system-Differential pressure method – Hydro-step for boiler drum level measurement - Electrical methods

- Conductive sensors - capacitive sensors -Ultrasonic method -Solid level measurement

Unit II - Flow Measurement: Positive displacement flowmeters - Inferential flowmeter-Turbine flowmeter-

Variable head flowmeters -Rotameter - Electromagnetic flowmeter - Ultrasonic flowmeter-Coriolis mass flowmeter-

Calibration of flowmeters application.

Unit III - Temperature Measurement: Temperature standards - fixed points -filled-system thermometers -

Bimetallic thermometer Thermocouple - Laws of thermocouple - Cold junction compensation- Measuring circuits -

Speed of response -linearization - Resistance thermometer- 3 lead and 4 lead connections - thermistors - IC

temperature sensors - Radiation pyrometer- Optical Pyrometer

Unit IV - Pressure Measurement: Pressure standards - Dead weight tester - Different types of manometers -

Elastic elements, Electrical methods using strain gauge-High pressure measurement-Vacuum gauges - Mcleod gauge

- Thermal conductivity gauges -Ionization gauge- Differential pressure transmitters

Unit V - Density, Viscosity and Composition: Measurement of density – U-type densitometer, Buoyancy meter

Measurement of composition – Viscosity measurement methods, Electrical conductivity cell, non-dispersive

photometers, pH meter, Zirconia oxygen analyzer, dumbbell O2 analyzer, Gas chromatograph, Mass spectrometer

Text Book

1. A.K. Sawhney, Puneet Sawhney , “A Course in Mechanical Measurements and Instrumentation &

Control” Dhanpat Rai & Co. (P) Limited, 2017.

Reference Books

1. Doebelin, E.O., “Measurement Systems Application and Design”, fourth edition McGraw Hill

International, 1978.

2. Noltingk, B.E., “Instrumentation Reference Book”, II edition Butterworth Heinemann, 1996.

3. Flow measurement, “Practical Guides for Measurement and Control”, ISA publication, 1991.

4. Anderew, W.G., “Applied Instrumentation in Process Industries” - a survey Vol-I Gulf Publishing

Company.

5. Liptak, B.G., “Process Measurement & Analysis”, IV Edition, Chilton Book Company 1995.

6. Considine, D.M., “Process Instruments and Control & Handbook", McGraw Hill 1985.

http://www.amazon.in/s/ref=dp_byline_sr_book_1?ie=UTF8&field-author=A.K.+Sawhney&search-alias=stripbooks

http://www.amazon.in/s/ref=dp_byline_sr_book_2?ie=UTF8&field-author=Puneet+Sawhney&search-alias=stripbooks

Karuny

a Univ

ersity


17EI2009 PROCESS DYNAMICS AND CONTROL

Credits: 3:0:0

Course Objectives:

To equip the students with the knowledge of modelling a physical process.

To understand the design of various control schemes.

To apply the control system in various processes.

Course Outcomes:

Identify the fundamentals of system identification by deriving the models of physical systems.

Describe the characteristics, selection and sizing of control valves.

Apply various tuning techniques to attain the optimum gain in the composite controllers.

Analyze and decide suitable control schemes for various industrial applications.

Design the conventional controllers for regulating different parameters like pressure, temperature, level

and flow in the process control industries.

Interpret various processes with their P&ID diagrams and understand nomenclature associated with

Process control domain.

Unit I - Process dynamics: Process Control System: Terms and objectives - piping and Instrumentation diagram -

instrument terms and symbols- Process characteristics: Process equation- degrees of freedom- modeling of simple

systems – thermal – gas – liquid systems- Self- regulating processes- interacting and non interacting processes

Unit II - Basic control actions: Controller modes: Basic control action- two position- multi position- floating

control modes Continuous controller modes: proportional, integral, derivative. PI – PD – PID – Integral wind-up and

prevention- Auto/Manual transfer- Response of controllers for different test inputs- Selection of control modes for

processes like level-pressure-temperature and flow

Unit III - Optimum controller settings: Controller tuning Methods: Evaluation criteria - IAE, ISE, ITAE. Process

reaction curve method,- Ziegler –Nichol’s tuning- damped oscillation method- Closed loop response of I & II order

systems with and without valve -measuring element dynamics

Unit IV - Final control elements: Pneumatic Actuators – Electric Actuators - Control valves- construction details-

types- plug characteristics- Valve sizing- Selection of control valves- Inherent and installed valve characteristics-

Cavitation and flashing in control valves- Valve actuators and positioners

Unit V - Advanced control system: Cascade control- ratio control- feed forward control- Split range and selective

control- Multivariable process control- interaction of control loops - Case Studies: Distillation column- boiler drum

level control- Heat Exchanger and chemical reactor control

Text Books

1. Stephanopoulos, “Chemical Process Control”, Prentice Hall, New Delhi, 2003.

2. Coughanowr D.R., “Process Systems Analysis and Control”, McGraw Hill, Singapore, 2008.

3. Curtis D .Johnson,”Process control instrumentation technology,” Prentice Hall , New Jersey 2006.

Reference Books

1. Smith C.L and Corripio. A..B, “Principles and Practice of Automatic Process Control”, John Wiley and

Sons, New York, 2006.

2. Dale E. Seborg, Thomas F. Edgar, Duncan A. Mellichamp, “Process Dynamics and Control,” John Willey

and Sons, Singapore, 2010.

3. B.Wayne Bequette, “Process control: modeling, design, and simulation” Prentice Hall, New Jersey-2003

4. Peter Harriott, “Process Control”, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2008.

17EI2010 INDUSTRIAL INSTRUMENTATION LABORATORY

Credits: 0:0:2

Course Objectives:

To gain the knowledge of the working of Industrial Instruments

To learn the methods of Calibration for Instruments.

To understand the operation of Instrumentation Circuits.

Course Outcomes:

Identify various process measurements using the appropriate instruments.

Karuny

a Univ

ersity


Design control algorithms for different control loops.

Apply ladder logic in Programmable Logic Controller for Control purpose

Select the type of transducer for the Industrial application.

Develop Instrumentation Circuits for measurement systems.

Suggest the instrument suitable for a specific application



17EI2011 PROCESS CONTROL LABORATORY

Credits: 0:0:2

Course Objectives:

To introduce the practical concepts of digital controllers.

To demonstrate Data Acquisition in VI

To provide knowledge about controller design, simulation and implementation using

Course Outcomes:

Recall the concepts of process dynamics and control.

Identify the fundamental methods to transmit the industrial parameters such as Pressure, Temperature,

Level and Flow to the computer.

Apply the control algorithms for the real time plants.

Analyze the characteristics of the Actuating signal.

Design conventional controllers to regulate the process stations present in the lab.

Select suitable controller to the appropriate process stations.



17EI2012 INDUSTRIAL DATA COMMUNICATION NETWORKS

Credits: 3:0:0

Course Objectives:

Understand the basics of networking

Comprehend the significance of different Industrial Interface Standards

Apply the appropriate interface for different applications

Course Outcomes:

Identify the conventional point to point and multipoint interface standards

Classify the different channel access methods

Choose the appropriate Industrial communication network

Explain the various Industrial Communication Standards

Justify the need of wireless network

Describe the advanced wireless communication standards

Unit I - Introduction And Basic Principles: Protocols – Physical standards – ISO/OSI reference –UART - Serial

data communications interface standards –RS232,422,,423,449,485 interface standard – The 4 to 20mA current

loop –Parallel Interface - IEEE 488 – USB.

Unit II - Modbus And HART: Modbus protocol structure, Function codes. Evolution of signal standard: HART

communication protocol – Communication modes – HART Networks – HART commands – HART applications –

Troubleshooting

Unit III - Profibus And Fieldbus: Fieldbus: Introduction – General Fieldbus architecture – Basic requirements of

Fieldbus standard – Fieldbus topology – Interoperability and Interchangeability. Profibus: Introduction – Profibus

protocol stack – Profibus communication model – Communication objects – Foundation field bus versus Profibus

Unit IV - Actuator Sensor Interface (As-I), Devicenet And Industrial Ethernet: AS-i: Introduction –

Physical layer – Data link layer – Operating characteristics. Device net: Introduction – Physical layer – Data link

layer and Application layer. Industrial Ethernet: Introduction – 10Mbps Ethernet – 100Mbps Ethernet.

Karuny

a Univ

ersity


Unit V - Wireless Communication: Wireless sensor networks: Architecture – Sensor network scenario. Wireless

HART – Existing Wireless Options: IEEE 802.15.4 - ISA 100 – Zigbee – Bluetooth – their relevance to industrial

applications

Text Books

1. Mackay, S., Wright,E., Reynders,D., and Park,J., “Practical Industrial Data Networks: Design, Installation

and Troubleshooting”, Newnes Publication, Elsevier, 2004.

2. Buchanan,W., “Computer Busses: Design and Application”, CRC Press, 2000.

Reference Books

1. Bowden,R., “HART Application Guide”, HART Communication Foundation, 1999.

2. Bela G.Liptak, “Instrument Engineers’ Handbook, Volume 3 : Process Software and Digital Networks”, 4th

Edition, CRC Press, 2011.

3. Berge,J., “Field Buses for Process Control: Engineering, Operation, and Maintenance”, ISA Press, 2004.

4. Lawrence (Larry) M. Thompson and Tim Shaw, “Industrial Data Communications”, 5th Edition, ISA

Press, 2015.

5. NPTEL Lecture notes on, ”Computer Networks” by Department of Electrical Engg., IIT

Kharagpur.

17EI2013 DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS

Credits: 3:0:0

Course Objectives:

To equip the students with the basic knowledge of A/D and D/A conversion.

To study the stability analysis of digital control system.

To equip the basic knowledge of digital process control design.

Course Outcomes:

Describe the operating principles of discrete-time systems and control capabilities.

Determine the stability of discrete-time control systems.

Estimate the steady state response of a discrete time system for any given input.

Appreciate the issues associated with the implementation of digital controllers.

Evaluate and solve system equations in state-variable form.

Compose the digital control algorithm for real time applications.

Unit I - Introduction to digital control: Need for digital control – Configuration of the basic digital control scheme

- Principles of signal conversion - Basic discrete time signals – Time domain models for discrete time systems - Z

transform - Transfer function models

Unit II - Analysis of digital control: Frequency Response - Stability on the z-Plane and the Jury stability criterion -

Sample and hold systems - Sampled spectra and aliasing - Reconstruction of analog signals - Practical aspects of the

choice of sampling rate - Principles of discretization

Unit III - Models of digital control devices and systems: Introduction - Z domain description of sampled

continuous time plants - Z domain description of systems with dead time - Implementation of digital controllers -

Tunable PID controllers - Digital temperature control systems - Digital position control system

Unit IV - Design of digital control algorithms: Introduction - Z plane specifications of control system design -

Digital compensator design using frequency response plots – Digital compensator design using root locus plots - Z

plane synthesis

Unit V - State variable analysis of digital control systems: Introduction – State descriptions of digital processor -

State description of sampled continuous time plants – State description of systems with dead time - Solution of state

difference equations – Controllability and observability - Multivariable systems

Text Books

1. Gopal M, “Digital Control and State variable Methods”, Tata McGrawHill, New Delhi,

2012.

2. Ogata, “Discrete Time Control Systems”, Prentice– hall Of India, New Delhi 2008.

Reference Books

1. Gene F. Franklin, J. David Powell, “Digital control of dynamic systems”, Pearson

Karuny

a Univ

ersity


Education Limited, New Delhi,2002.

2. Richard C. Dorf, Robert H. Bishop, “Modern control systems,” Pearson Educatio inc,

New Delhi, 2008.

17EI2014 LOGIC AND DISTRIBUTED CONTROL SYSTEMS

Credits: 3:0:0

Course Objectives:

To provide the fundamentals of Data Acquisition system.

To introduce the concept of PLC and its Programming using Ladder Diagram.

To cover the basics of Distributed Control Systems

Course Outcomes:

Identify and understand the real time inputs and outputs for the problem given.

Select the appropriate PLC for the given problem.

Develop real time application using PLC.

Design distributed applications using computer controls.

Create prototype for the real time application Using PLC,SCADA and DCS.

Discriminates between user interface for DCS applications

Unit I - Computer Controlled Systems: Data loggers – Data Acquisition Systems (DAS) – Direct Digital Control

(DDC) – Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition Systems (SCADA) – sampling considerations – Functional

block diagram of computer control systems

Unit II - Programmable Logic Controller(PLC) Basics: Definition – Overview of PLC systems - Input/output

modules - Power supplies and isolators - General PLC programming procedures - Programming on-off inputs/

outputs - Auxiliary commands and functions – PLC Basic Functions - Register basics - Timer functions - Counter

functions.

Unit III - PLC Intermediate Functions : PLC intermediate functions: Arithmetic functions, Comparison functions,

Skip and MCR functions, Data move systems - PLC Advanced intermediate functions: Utilizing digital bits,

Sequencer functions, Matrix functions – PLC Advanced functions: Alternate programming languages, Analog PLC

operation, Networking of PLC - PID functions - PLC installation - Troubleshooting and maintenance - Design of

interlocks and alarms using PLC.

Unit IV - Distributed Control Systems (DCS): Introduction : DCS Evolution, DCS Architecture, Comparison –

Local Control unit – Process Interfacing Issues – Redundancy concept - Communication facilities.

Unit V - Interfaces in DCS: Operator interfaces: low level, high level – Operator Displays – Engineering

Interfaces: Low level, high level – General purpose computers in DCS

Text Books

1. John.W. Webb, Ronald A Reis, “Programmable Logic Controllers - Principles and Applications”, Prentice

Hall Inc., New Jersey, 2015.

2. Michael P Lukas, “Distributed Control System”, Van Nostrand Reinhold Co., Canada, 1986.

Reference Books

1. B.G. Liptak, “Instrument Engineers Hand, Process control and Optimization”, CRC press- Radnor,

Pennsylvania, 2011.

2. M.Chidambaram, “Computer Control of Process,” Narosa Publishing, New Delhi, 2003

17EI2015 LOGIC AND DISTRIBUTED CONTROL SYSTEMS LABORATORY

Credits: 0:0:2

Course Objectives:

To introduce the practical concepts of Industrial Automation using PLC and DCS

To demonstrate Data Acquisition and control using PLC

To provide knowledge on distributed control system

Course Outcomes:

Recall the concepts of PLC and Distributed control systems

Karuny

a Univ

ersity


Identify the fundamental methods to transmit the industrial parameters such as Pressure, Temperature,

Level and Flow to the computer.

Apply the control algorithms for the real time plants.

Analyze the characteristics of the Actuating signal.

Design conventional controllers to regulate the process stations present in the lab.

Select suitable controller to the appropriate process stations.



17EI2016 SENSORS AND DATA ACQUISITION

Credits: 3:0:0

Course Objectives:

To deal with basics concepts for selection of sensors and the signal conditioning necessary to include these

in a data acquisition system.

To investigate the analogue to digital and digital to analogue conversion principles and their practical

applications for data acquisition and control.

To learn about the selection of output drivers and devices

Course Outcomes:

Understand the basics of measurement system and its characteristics

Represent the equivalent circuit of sensors and describe their significant properties

Choose the type of signal conditioning circuits to be used for a specific sensor

Discuss the data conversion circuits and the constraints involved in their design

Examine the requirements for interfacing circuit design

Develop simple working model of a complete data acquisition system

Unit I - Introduction: General Measurement System, Static and Dynamic characteristics of instruments –

qualitative study, Loading effects, Signals and noise in Measurement Systems, Reliability, Choice and economics of

Measurement systems.

Unit II - Sensing Elements: Equivalent circuit of Resistive, capacitive, inductive, electromagnetic, thermoelectric,

elastic, piezoelectric, piezoresistive, electrochemical sensing elements, Hall effect sensors, characteristics

Unit III - Signal conditioning: Amplification, Impedance Matching, Instrumentation Amplifiers, Charge

Amplifiers, Filtering, attenuation, Noise Reduction and Isolation – Grounding Conflict, Ground Loops, Cross Talk,

Shielded Wiring, Isolation, Linearization, Circuit protection.

Unit IV - Interfacing circuits: Digital I/O interfacing, Microprocessor interfacing, serial interfaces, multi-channel

ADCs, internal microcontroller ADCs, ADC specifications, resolution, accuracy, linearity, offset and quantization

errors, sample rate and aliasing, Codecs, line drivers and receivers, high power output drivers and devices,

Unit V - Data Acquisition Systems: Parameters of Data Acquisition Systems such as dynamic range, calibration,

bandwidth, processor throughput, time-based measurements and jitter-Transducer Electronic data sheet, Smart

Sensors, System Architecture, Case Studies

Text Book

1. Bentley, John P. Principles of Measurement Systems, 4:th edition, Pearson/Prentice Hall, 2005.

References

1. Jacob Fraden, Handbook of Modern Sensors – Physics, Design and Applications, Fourth Edition, Springer,

2010.

2. Data Acquistion Handbook, A Reference for DAQ and analog and digital signal conditioning, 3rd

Edition,

2012.

Karuny

a Univ

ersity


17EI2017 BIOMEDICAL INSTRUMENTATION

Credits: 3:0:0

Course Objectives:

To study the fundamentals of anatomy and human physiology system and its functions.

To study the fundamental concepts of physiological parameters measurement.

To study the concepts of various medical instruments for biomedical applications.

Course Outcomes:

Identify the need of understanding human anatomy and physiology system

Select the suitable acquisition method for analysing biomedical signal and vital parameters measurement.

Apply the knowledge of biomedical instruments to practical applications

Categorize the parameter monitoring techniques based on the application and relevance.

Design the various structure for patient safety

Develop systems for real time bio signal acquisition and processing.

Unit I - Anatomy and Physiology of Human Body - The cell and its electrical activity– Principle physiological

system: Cardiovascular System, Nervous system, Respiratory system, Muscular system – Origin of bioelectric signal

– Bioelectric signals: ECG, EMG, EEG, EOG and their characteristics

Unit II - Measurement of Physiological Parameters - Physiological transducers – Measurement of Blood

pressure – Blood flow – Cardiac output measurement – Heart rate – Respiration rate – Measurement of lung volume

– Oximeters – Audiometer

Unit III - Therapeutic Equipments and Patient Safety - Electro Surgical unit: Short wave and microwave

diathermy – Laser surgical unit – Defibrillators – Pacemaker – Heart Lung machine – Dialyser – Anesthesia

machine – Ventilators – Nerve stimulators – Total artificial heart (TAH) – Patient Safety: Electric Shock Hazards,

Leakage Current

Unit IV - Clinical Laboratory Instruments Clinical Flame photometer – Spectrophotometer – Colorimeter –

Chromatography–Blood Gas Analyzer – Blood pH Measurement– Measurement of Blood pCO2– Blood pO2

Measurement– Blood Cell Counters: Types and Methods of cell counting

Unit V - Imaging Technique and Telemetry X– ray – C.T. scan – MRI instrumentation – Ultrasound scanner –

Vector cardiograph – Echo cardiograph – Angiography – Telemetry: Wireless telemetry, Single channel and

multichannel telemetry system– Multi patient Telemetry – Implantable Telemetry systems

Text Books

1. Khandpur. R. S., “Handbook of Biomedical Instrumentation”, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 2003.

2. Cromwell, “Biomedical Instrumentation and Measurements”, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 2007.

17EI2018 AUTOMOTIVE INSTRUMENTATION

Credits: 3:0:0

Course Objectives:

To learn the fundamental principles of electronics and to introduce the application of electronics in the

modern automobile.

To develop ability to understand various latest Communication protocols used in automobile industries.

To provide a thorough understanding of automotive systems and various electronic accessories used in

automobile.

Course Outcomes:

Understand the basic electronics system of an automobile.

Indicate the function of each system in automobile

Analyze the characteristics of the sensors.

Select suitable transducer for a specific system.

Apply instrumentation techniques for security and safety of automobile.

Develop automation for automobiles.

Unit I - Fundamentals of Automotive Electronics: Open loop and closed loop systems components for electronic

engine management, vehicle motion control, Current trends in modern Automobiles

Karuny

a Univ

ersity


Unit II - Electronic Fuel Injection and Ignition systems: Introduction, Carburettor control system, throttle body

ignition and multi port or point fuel injection, Advantages of electronic ignition system, Types of solid state ignition

systems and their principle of operation, electronic spark timing control system.

Unit III - Engine Control System: Engine cranking and warm up control, Acceleration enrichment –

Deacceleration leaning and idle speed control, integrated engine control system, exhaust emission control system,

Engine performance testing.

Unit IV - Automobile Chassis Electronic Control System: Principle of electronic braking, automatic transmission

electronic control circuit, cruise control circuit, the electronic steering control theory, ABS, ASR, ESP, and other

electronic control method.

Unit V - Auto Body Electronic Control Technology: Automotive central locking and anti-theft system control

technology, electronically controlled windows and doors and airbag technology, principle of control circuit

components and characteristics.

Text Books 1. Robert Bosch Gmbh ,“BOSCH– Automotive Handbook”, 7thEdition,John Wiley & Sons, ISBN:

0470519363, 2008.

2. Denton.T, “Automobile Electrical and Electronic System”, Elsevier Butterworth–

HeinemannPublications,3rd Edition,2004.

Reference Books

1. Knowles.D, “Automotive Electronic and Computer control Ignition Systems”, Prentice Hall,1988.

2. William.T.M, “Automotive Electronic System”,Elsevier Science,6th Edition,2003.

3. Kiencke,, Nielsen, “Automotive Control Systems” 2nd Edition.2005.

17EI2019 ANALYTICAL INSTRUMENTATION

Credits: 3:0:0

Course Objectives:

To equip the students with an adequate knowledge of analytical tools which are useful for clinical

analysis, pharmaceutical laboratories, environmental pollution monitoring and control.

To provide various techniques and methods of analysis which occur in the various regions of the

spectrum.

To give unique methods of separation of closely similar materials, using gas chromatography

Course Outcomes:

Develop instruments for clinical analysis.

Apply the concepts of Analytical Instruments for Environmental Monitoring

Analysis of industrial gases.

Analyze and control pollution in the environment.

Apply the latest ideas on ion-selective electrodes as well as biosensors which have

potential applications in medical field, food and beverage industries.

Analysis the important electromagnetic resonance and microscopic methods.

Unit I - Colorimetry And Spectrophotometry: Special methods of analysis – Beer– Lambert law – Colorimeters –

UV– Vis spectrophotometers – Single and double beam instruments – Sources and detectors – IR

spectrophotometers – Types – Attenuated total reflectance flame photometers – Atomic absorption

spectrophotometers – Sources and detectors – FTIR spectrophotometers – Flame emission photometers

Unit II - Chromatography: Different techniques – Gas chromatography – Detectors – Liquid chromatographs –

Applications – High– pressure liquid chromatographs – Applications

Unit III - Industrial gas analyzers and pollution monitoring instruments: Types of gas analyzers: Oxygen, NO2

and H2S types, IR analyzers, Thermal conductivity analyzers, Analysis based on ionization of gases – Air pollution

due to carbon monoxide, hydrocarbons, nitrogen oxides, sulphur dioxide estimation – Dust and smoke

measurements

Unit IV - Ph Meters And Dissolved Component Analyzers: Principle of pH measurement – Glass electrodes –

Hydrogen electrodes – Reference electrodes – Selective ion electrodes – Ammonia electrodes – Biosensor –

Dissolved oxygen analyzer – Sodium analyzer – Silicon analyzer

Karuny

a Univ

ersity


Unit V - Radio Chemical And Magnetic Resonance Techniques: Nuclear radiations – Detectors – GM counter –

Proportional counter – Solid state detectors – Gamma cameras – X– ray spectroscopy – Detectors –

Diffractometers– Absorption meters – Detectors – NMR – Basic principles – NMR spectrometer – Applications –

Mass spectrometers – Different types – Applications

Text Books

1. Khandpur. R. S., ‘Handbook of Analytical Instruments’, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Co. Ltd., 2006.

2. Willard. H., Merritt, Dean. J. A., Settle. F. A., ‘Instrumental Methods of Analysis’, CBS publishing &

distribution, 1995.

Reference Books

1. Robert D. Braun, ‘Introduction to Instrumental Analysis’, McGraw Hill, Singapore, 1987.

2. Ewing. G. W., ‘Instrumental Methods of Chemical Analysis’, McGraw Hill, 1992.

3. Skoog. D. A. and West. D. M., ‘Principles of Instrumental Analysis’, Holt, Saunders Publishing, 1992.

17EI2020 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL IN PETROCHEMICAL

INDUSTRIES

Credits: 3:0:0

Course Objective:

To expose the students to the Instrumentation field and control applied in petrochemical

industries.

Course Outcomes:

Illustrate the controls applied in various elements of Petrochemical industry

Provide adequate knowledge about the measurement of various parameters in petrochemical industry.

Apply the concepts to design instrumentation systems for a petrochemical industry

Choose a suitable control schemes for a specific operation

Explain the various measurement techniques in petrochemical industries

Categorize the different types of evaporators and dryers involved in petrochemical industries.

Unit I - Instrumentation and control in distillation columns: Distillation equipment, variables and degrees of

freedom, measurement and control of column pressure, liquid distillate, vapour distillate and inserts, control of feed

in reboiler and reflux, cascade and feed forward controls.

Unit II - Instrumentation and control in chemical reactors & Dryers: Temperature and pressure control in batch

reactors-Batch dryers and continuous dryers.

Unit III - Instrumentation and control in heat exchangers: Variables and degrees of freedom, liquid to liquid

heat exchangers, steam heaters, condensers, reboilers and vaporisers, use of cascade and feed forward control

Unit IV - Instrumentation and control in evaporators: Types of evaporators, measurement and control of

absolute pressure, density,conductivity, differential pressure and flow.

Unit V - Instrumentation and control in effluent and water treatment: Chemical oxidation, chemical reduction,

neutralization, precipitation and biological control.

Text book

1. Liptak B. G, Process Control , Third edition , Chilton Book Company, Pennsylvania,1995.

Reference Books

1. Liptak B. G, Process Measurement and Analysis, Third edition, Chilton Book Company, Pennsylvania,

1995.

2. Considine D.M., ‘Process / Industrial Instruments and Control Handbook’, Fourth edition, McGraw Hill,

Singapore, 1993.

17EI2021 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL IN PAPER INDUSTRIES

Credits: 3:0:0

Course Objectives:

Know the raw materials and the process in paper making

Comprehend the significance of different sensors used in Paper Industries

Karuny

a Univ

ersity


Apply the appropriate computer interface for different applications

Course Outcomes:

Describe the basic processing in paper industry.

Discuss the measurement of various parameters in paper industry

Choose the appropriate sensor for different applications

Explain the various control loops in Paper Industry.

Analyze the computer applications in Paper Industry

Unit I - Process Description: Raw materials -pulping process – chemical recovery process – paper making

process –converting.

Unit II - Instrumentation: Measurements of basic weight – density – specific gravity – flow – level of liquids

and solids– pressure – temperature – consistency – moisture – pH – oxidation – reduction potential – graphic

displays and alarms

Unit III - Controls: Blow tank controls – digester liquor feedpump controls – brown stock wacher level control –

stock chest level control – basic weight control – dry temperature control

Unit IV - Dissolving tank density control – white liquor classifier density control – white liquor flow control –

condensate conductivity control

Unit V - Computer applications in pulping process control, liquid level control and input stock control

Text Book

1. B.G Liptak, ‘Instrumentation in Process Industries’, Chilton Book Company, 1994.

17EI2022 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL IN IRON AND STEEL INDUSTRIES

Credits: 3:0:0

Course Objective

To learn about the process of making steel from the raw materials.

To know the role of instrumentation in a steel industry

To deal with the control operations carries out at various stages

Course Outcomes:

Describe various process in Iron and Steel industry

Indicate the use of instruments in steel making

Suggest suitable sensor for a typical measurement

Develop control systems for the various operations in Steel Industries

Computers, Alarm and Graphical displays

Evaluate the usefulness of Instrumentation in monitoring and control in the Steel industry

Unit I - Introduction- Description of Process and Flow Diagram- Raw Material Preparation- Iron Making- Blast

Furnace- Stoves- Raw Steel making- Oxygen Furnace- Electric Furnace.

Unit II - Introduction to Steel Casting- Casting Process- Primary Rolling- Cold Rolling- Finishing- Molding

Process- Melting-Pouring- Heat Treating- Cast Steels Compared to Other Processes- Application of Steel Casting in

Industries.

Unit III - Measurement of Level- Sensor Selection- Calibration- Electrical Methods- Measurement of Pressure-

Electrical Methods- Dead Weight Tester- Measurement of Flow- Classification of Flow Meters- Flow Meter

Selection- Calibration- Measurement of Density- Graphic Display- Alarm.

Unit IV - Blast Furnace-Stove Combustion Control System- Gas and Water- Controls in BOF Furnace- Stand

Casting Mould Level Control- Waste Water Treatment- Conventional Waste Water Treatment Process.

Unit V - Model Calculation and Logging- Rolling Mill Control- Annealing Process Control- Center Utilities

Dispatch Computer.

Text Book

1. Bela G.Liptak. “Instrumentation in the Processing Industries: Brewing, Food, Fossile Power, Glass, Iron

and Steel, Mining and Minerals, Nuclear Power, Paper, Petrochemical, Pharmaceuticals” Chilton Book Co.,

Reprint 2003

Karuny

a Univ

ersity


Reference Books

1. Liptak B.G Instrument Engineers Handbook, Vol 2, Process Control, 1977

2. SK Singh, Industrial Instrumentation and Control, Tata McGraw Hill, 2003.

17EI2023 OPTOELECTRONICS AND LASER BASED INSTRUMENTATION

Credits: 3:0:0

Course Objectives:

Acquire Knowledge about the basic concepts of Optical Fibers and LASERS

Analyze the various applications of optical fibers in Industrial Measurements

Understand the various applications of LASER

Course Outcomes:

Describe the principle of fiber optic communication

Explain the various sources and detectors used for fiber optic communication

Apply the principle of fiber optics in sensing various industrial applications

Understand the principle of LASER

Categorize the types of LASERS

Describe the Medical application of LASER

Unit I - Introduction: Principles of light propagation through a fiber-Different types of fibers and their properties -

Transmission characteristics of optical fiber-absorption losses-Scattering losses-Dispersion - Optical sources -

Optical detectors - LED -LD - PIN and APD

Unit II - Optical Fibre Fundamentals: Modes– Types of Optical Fibres – Fibre coupling – Fibre optic sensors for

Temperature, Pressure, Flow and Level measurement

Unit III - Characteristics Of Lasers: Laser principle– Properties – Two, Three and Four level system – Resonator

configuration – Q switching and Mode locking – Cavity dumping – Types of Lasers

Unit IV - Industrial Applications Of Lasers: Lasers for measurement of distance and length, Velocity, Material

processing: Laser heating, Melting, Scribing, Splicing, Welding and trimming of materials, Removal and

Vapourization.

Unit V - Hologram And Medical Application: Holography – Basic principle – Methods– Holographic

Interferometry and applications – Holography for non – destructive testing – Medical applications of lasers :Laser

interaction with biomolecules – Photothermal applications – Photochemical applications – Endoscopes

Text Books

1. Arumugam.M. “Fiber Optics and Laser Instrumentation", Anuradha Agencies Publishers,

Kumbakonam, 2006.

2. Optical Fiber Communications: Principles And Practice, John M. Senior, Pearson

Education, 2006.

Reference Books

1. G. Keiser, ‘Optical Fibre Communication’, McGraw Hill, 1995.

2. Ghatak A.K. and Thiagarajan K, Optical Electronics Foundation book , TMH, Cambridge

University Press, 1989.

3. Wilson and Hawkes, “Opto Electronics –An Introduction”, 3rd Edition, Prentice Hall, New Delhi, 1998.

17EI2024 POWER PLANT INSTRUMENTATION

Credits: 3:0:0

Course Objectives:

To provide an overview of different methods of power generation with a particular

stress on thermal power generation.

To bring out the various measurements involved in power generation plants.

To familiarize the students with the methods of monitoring different parameters like

speed, vibration of turbines and their control.

Course Outcomes:

Identify the methods of power generation

Karuny

a Univ

ersity


Apply the concepts to design instrumentation systems for a power plant

Choose a suitable control schemes for a specific operation

Explain the various measurement techniques in power plant

Categorize the different types of analyzers for safety purpose

Illustrate the control of a variety of parameters in power plant

Unit I - Overview Of Power Generation : Brief survey of methods of power generation – Hydro, Thermal,

Nuclear, Solar and Wind power– Importance of instrumentation in power generation – Thermal power plants –

Building blocks – Details of boiler process – Piping and Instrumentation diagram of boiler – Cogeneration

Unit II - Measurements In Power Plants: Electrical measurements: Current, Voltage, Power, Frequency, Power

factor – Non– electrical parameters: Flow of feed water, Fuel, Air and steam with correction factor for temperature –

Steam pressure and Steam temperature – Drum level measurement – Radiation detector – Smoke density

measurement – Dust monitor

Unit III - Analyzers In Power Plants: Flue gas oxygen analyzer – Analysis of impurities in feed water and steam –

Dissolved oxygen analyzer – Chromatography – PH meter – Fuel analyzer – Pollution monitoring instruments

Unit IV - Control Loops In Boiler: Steam pressure control – Combustion control – Air/Fuel ratio control –

Furnace draft control – Drum level control – Main steam and reheat steam temperature control – Superheater control

– Attemperator –Deaerator control – Distributed control system in power plants – Interlocks in boiler operation

Unit V - Turbine Monitoring And Control: Speed, Vibration, Shell temperature monitoring and control –

Lubricant oil temperature control

Text Book

1. K. Krishnaswamy, M. Ponnibala, “Power Plant Instrumentation”, PHI Learning Pvt Ltd.,2013.

Reference Book

1. P.K Nag, “Power plant Engineering”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2002.

17EI2025 AIRCRAFT INSTRUMENTATION

Credits: 3:0:0

Course Objectives:

Understand the basics of Aircraft and the Instrumentation involved in Aircraft Systems.

To learn the Instrumentation involved in Aircraft Systems

Understand the performance of Aircraft and the Instrumentation

Course Outcomes:

Understand Aircraft and the Display Equipments.

Apply the sensors to be used in the Flight.

Analyze Power Plant Instruments.

Appreciate the need for measurement in aircraft

Design instrumentation systems for aircraft.

Analyze gyroscopic instruments for attitude measurement

Unit I - Introduction: Classification of Aircraft – Instrumentation – Instrument displays – Panels and Layouts

Unit II - Flight Instrumentation: Static and Pitot Pressure Source – Altimeter – Airspeed indicator – Machmeter –

Maximum Safespeed indicator – Accelerometer

Unit III - Gyroscopic Instruments: Gyroscopic theory – Directional gyro indicator artificial horizon – Turn and

slip indicator

Unit IV - Aircraft Computer Systems: Terrestrial magnetism, Aircraft magnetism, Direct reading magnetic

components – Compasses - gyro magnetic compass

Unit V - Power Plant Instruments: Fuel flow – Fuel quantity measurement, Exhaust gas Temperature

Measurement and Pressure Measurement

Text Books

1. Pallett, E.B.J ., : " Aircraft Instruments ", Pitman and sons, 2009.

Reference Books

1. Pallett, E.B.J,“ Aircraft Instrument Integrated Systems”, ISBN-10: 0582086272, Edition: 3rd

1992.

Karuny

a Univ

ersity


2. Nagabhushanam S. et.al, S. Nagabhushana, L. K. Sudha, “Aircraft Instrumentation and Systems”,

International Pvt Ltd,2010.

3. Federal Aviation Administration (FAA) “Instrument Flying Handbook”, 2013.

4. Doeblin.E.O, “Measurement Systems Application and Design”, McGraw-Hill, New York, 1999.

17EI2026 TELEMETRY AND REMOTE CONTROL

Credits : 3:0:0

Course Objectives:

To introduce the basics of telemetry and remote control

To learn the principles of devices used for remote monitoring and control

To explore the concepts of communication systems

Course Outcomes:

Understand the fundamentals of signal transmission

Classify the types of modulation techniques.

Analyze the errors in transmission

Apply the concepts of telemetry and remote control to real life applications

Illustrate the use of fiber optics for telemetry and control

Develop simple models of remote telemetering systems

Unit I - Introduction: Purpose of telemetry, basic scheme, voltage, current and frequency telemetry, line length

limitations Concepts of Information transfer, bits, symbols, codes -source, line, channel, BCD, ASCII, BAUDOT,

AMI, CMI, Manchester, HDBM, Block, Differential, Hamming, Conduction

Unit II - Modulation codes: PAM, PFM, PTM, PCM 2 Bit error rate, Inter symbol, noise, parity checking 3

Review of modulation and multiplexing: FM-AM, FM-FM, PAM-AM, PAM-FM, PCM-AM, etc. Quantization and

conversion methods, error in quantization, bandwidth consideration

Unit III - FDM systems: IRIG standards in FDM systems in FDM telemetry, SCO’s, Mux and Demux circuits,

Detectors and Demodulators, Pulse averaging, Quadrature FM and PLL, Mixers TDM systems (architecture)- TDM-

PAM, PAM- PM, TDM- PCM systems, synchronization, PCM generation, differential PCM, PCM reception and

detection

Unit IV - Modems: Digital modulation and Shift-keying, FSK, PSK, DPSK, QPSK, QAM, Modem Protocols

Satellite telemetry, TT and C services, subsystems, The earth station

Unit V - Fiber optic Telemetry: The Fibre as transmission medium, Interconnections, Repeaters, Sources,

Detectors, WDM Remote control: concept and example from a typical industrial siteration

Text Books:

1. D. Patranabis, Telemetry principles, TMH, 2007.

2. E. L. Gruenberg, Handbook of Telemetry and Remote control, Mc Graw Hill, 1967

Reference Book:

1. A.S. Tanenbaum, Computer Networks, Pearson, 2011.

17EI2027 ROBOTICS AND AUTOMATION

Credits: 3:0:0

Course Objectives:

To introduce the basics of robotics

To study the various kinematics and inverse kinematics of robots

To understand the principle of end effectors in robots applications.

Course Outcomes:

Explain the basic principle of working of a robot

Understand the kinematics and dynamics in a robot

Analyze the applications of sensors in robotics

Suggest the suitable hardware requirements for a robot

Develop a simple robot from basic understanding

Karuny

a Univ

ersity


Select the type of robot to be used for a specific application

Unit I - Introduction- Definition and origin of robotics – different types of robotics – various generations of robots

– degrees of freedom – Asimov’s laws of robotics.

Unit II - Power Sources And Sensors - Hydraulic, pneumatic and electric drives – determination of HP of motor

and gearing ratio – variable speed arrangements – path determination – micro machines in robotics – machine vision

– ranging – laser – acoustic – magnetic, fiber optic and tactile sensors.

Unit III - Manipulators, Actuators And Grippers - Construction of manipulators – manipulator dynamics and

force control – electronic and pneumatic manipulator control circuits – end effectors –various types of grippers –

design considerations.

Unit IV - Kinematics And Path Planning -Solution of inverse kinematics problem – multiple solution jacobian

work envelop – hill climbing techniques – robot programming languages

Unit V - Case Studies - Mutiple robots – machine interface – robots in manufacturing and non- manufacturing

applications – robot cell design – selection of robot.

Text Book 1. Industrial Robotics – SIE, Nicholas Odray, Mitchell Weiss, McGraw-Hill, 2012

Reference Books

1. Industrial Robotics: Technology and applications, Mikell P. Groover, Nicholas Odray, Mitchell Weiss,

Roger, 1987

2. Robotics for Engineers, Yoram Koren, Mc GrawHill, 2014

3. Robotics, Gonzalez, Fu, Lee, McGrawHill, 2008.

4. Issac Asimov I Robot, Ballantine Books, New York, 1986.

17EI2028 SCADA SYSTEMS DESIGN

Credits: 3:0:0

Course Objective:

To introduce the need for Data Acquisition.

To understand the concept of Supervisory Control.

To deal with the applications of SCADA Systems.

Course Outcomes

Appreciate the need of Data Acquisition.

Apply the concept of Supervisory Control

Perform simulation for various processes.

Describe the programming logic involved in automation

Analyze SCADA protocol for effective communication

Apply the concept of optical and wireless techniques

Unit I - Introduction to SCADA: Data acquisition systems, Evolution of SCADA, Communication technologies,

Monitoring and supervisory functions, SCADA applications in Utility Automation, Industries

Unit II - SCADA System Components: Schemes- Remote Terminal Unit (RTU), Intelligent Electronic Devices

(IED), Communication Network, SCADA Server, SCADA/HMI Systems

Unit III - SCADA Architecture: Various SCADA architectures, advantages and disadvantages of each system -

single unified standard architecture -IEC 61850

Unit IV - SCADA Communication: various industrial communication technologies -wired and wireless methods

and fiber optics.

Unit V - SCADA Applications: Utility applications- Transmission and Distribution sector -operations,

monitoring, analysis and improvement. Simulation Exercises

Text Book:

1. Stuart A. Boyer: SCADA- Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition, Instrument Society of America

Publications, USA, 1999

Karuny

a Univ

ersity


Reference Books:

1. Gordon Clarke, Deon Reynders: Practical Modern SCADA Protocols: DNP3, 60870.5 and Related

Systems, Newness Publications, Oxford, UK, 2004

17EI2029 POWER ELECTRONICS AND DRIVES FOR INDUSTRIAL CONTROL

Credits: 3:0:0

Course Objectives:

Understand the PWM converters and their analysis

Understand the modeling on dc motor, drives and control techniques

To educate on dynamic modeling of Induction motor drive

Course Outcomes:

Evaluate on the V/f and vector control of Induction motor

Analize on generation of firing pulses and control algorithms in embedded platforms

Identify the need and choice of various drives.

Acquire knowledge on different speed control methods in D.C and A.C motors using thyristor based control

schemes

Acquire knowledge on different types of drives and applications in various industries.

Analyze the characteristics of various motors and loads.

Unit I - Power Electronic Converters For Drives: Power electronic switches-state space representation of

switching converters-Fixed frequency PWM-variable frequency PWM- space vector PWM- Hysteresis

current control-dynamic analysis of switching converters-PWM modulator model

Unit II - Control of Dc Drives: Modelling of DC machines-block diagram/transfer function-phase control-

1phase/3phase converter fed DC drives- Chopper fed DC drives-four quadrant chopper circuit-closed

loop control-speed control-current control-cascade control –constant torque/power operation-comparison

of chopper/converter fed drives- techniques-merits/demits

Unit III - Analysis And Modelling Of Induction Motor Drive: Basics of induction motor drive-

classification – equivalent circuit- torque Vs slip characteristics-steady state performance- Dynamic

modeling of induction motor, Three phase to two phase transformation-stator, rotor, synchronously

rotating reference frame model

Unit IV - Control Of Induction Motor Drive: VSI fed induction motor drives- waveforms for 1-phase,

3-phase Non-PWM and PWM VSI fed induction motor drives -principles of V/F control- principle of

vector control-direct vector control- space vector modulation- indirect vector control .

Unit V - Embedded Control of Drives:Generation of firing pulses- generation of PWM pulses using

embedded processors-IC control of DC drives- fixed frequency/variable frequency/current control- V/F

control using PIC microcontroller- vector control using embedded processors.

Text Books 1. R.Krishnan, “Electric Motor Drives, Modeling, Analysis and Control” Prentice Hall of India,

2002.

2. Ion Boldea, S.A.Nasar “Electric Drives”, CRC Press, 2006

Reference Books 1. Simon Ang, Alejandro Oliva “Power Switching Converters”, CRC Press, 2005

2. Thyristor control of Electric drives, Vedam Subrahmanyam, Tata McGraw Hill, 1988

3. Buxbaum, A. Schierau, and K.Staughen, “A design of control systems for DC drives”,

Springer- Verlag, Berlin,1990.

17EI2030 SMART SENSOR TECHNOLOGY

Credits: 3:0:0

Course Objectives:

To teach basics of smart sensors and communication

To inculcate the usage of smart sensors in real time applications

Karuny

a Univ

ersity


Course Outcomes:

Acquire the knowledge & concepts of smart sensors.

Comprehend interfacing of sensor with processor .

Applies the concepts of sensor communication protocol for real time applications.

Analyze the importance of MEMs technology in smart sensor.

Compare various standards of smart sensor

Evaluate the implications of smart sensor in recent trends.

Unit I - Basics of smart sensors and micromachining: Introduction, Mechanical-Electronic transitions in sensing,

nature of sensors, overview of smart sensing and control systems, integration of micromachining

and microelectronics, introduction to micromachining, bulk micromachining, wafer bonding, surface

micromachining, other micromachining techniques.

Unit II - MCUs and DSPs for sensor: Introduction, MCU control, MCUs for sensor interface, DSP control,

Software, tools and support, sensor integration.

Unit III - Sensor Communication and MEMS: Wireless zone sensing, surface acoustical wave devices, intelligent

transportation system, RF-ID, Microoptics, microgrippers, microprobes, micromirrors, FEDs, communications for

smart sensors - sources and standards, automotive protocols, industrial networks, office and building automation,

home automation, protocols in silicon, other aspects of networkcommunications.

Unit IV - Packaging, Testing And Reliability of Smart Sensors: Introduction, Semiconductor packaging applied

to sensors, hybrid packaging, packaging for monolithic sensors, reliability implications, testing smart sensors. Unit

Standards for Smart Sensors: Introduction, setting the standards for smart sensors and systems, IEEE 1451.1, IEEE

1451.2, IEEE P1451.3, IEEE 1451.4, extending the systems to network.

Unit V - Implications of Smart Sensor Standards And Recent Trends: Introduction, sensor plug-and-play,

communicating sensor data via existing wiring, automated/remote sensing and web, process control over the

internet, alternative standards, HVAC sensor chip, MCU with integrated pressure sensors, alternative views of smart

sensing, smart loop.

Text Book 1. Understanding Smart Sensors- Randy Frank, 2nd Edition. Artech House Publications, 2013.

Reference Book 1. G. K. Ananthasuresh, K. J. Vinoy, S. Gopalakrishnan, K. N. Bhat, V. K. Aatre, Micro and Smart

Systems: Technology and Modeling Wiley, 2012

17EI2031 PERVASIVE DEVICES AND TECHNOLOGY

Credits: 3:0:0

Course Objectives:

To expose the students to the fundamentals of wireless sensor technology

To teach the infrastructure of WSN processor and its functions

To study on challenges in Network communication

Course Outcomes:

Acquire the knowledge and concepts of wireless sensor technology.

Comprehends the challenges in network communication.

Applies the concepts of wireless technology for real time applications.

Analyze the functions of WSN processor.

Compare classification of commercial family of wireless technology

Evaluate and discuss on interconnectivity of networks

Unit I - Overview Of Wireless Sensor Networks: Challenges for Wireless Sensor Networks- Characteristic

requirements for WSN - Challenges for WSNs – WSN vs Adhoc Networks - Sensor node architecture –

Commercially available sensor nodes –Imote, IRIS, Mica Mote, TelosB,-Physical layer and transceiver design

considerations in WSNs, introduction to fundamentals of MAC protocols - Low duty cycle protocols and wakeup

concepts - Contention-based protocols - Schedule-based protocols -the IEEE 802.15.4 MAC protocol- Energy usage

profile, Choice of modulation scheme, Dynamic modulation scaling, Antenna considerations-Applications of sensor

networks

https://www.google.co.in/search?tbo=p&tbm=bks&q=inauthor:%22G.+K.+Ananthasuresh%22

https://www.google.co.in/search?tbo=p&tbm=bks&q=inauthor:%22K.+J.+Vinoy%22

https://www.google.co.in/search?tbo=p&tbm=bks&q=inauthor:%22S.+Gopalakrishnan%22

https://www.google.co.in/search?tbo=p&tbm=bks&q=inauthor:%22K.+N.+Bhat%22

https://www.google.co.in/search?tbo=p&tbm=bks&q=inauthor:%22V.+K.+Aatre%22

Karuny

a Univ

ersity


Unit II - Issues In Pervasive Sensor Network: Single-Node Architecture - Hardware Components, constraints &

challenges in resourcesEnergy Consumption of Sensor Nodes, Operating Systems for Wireless Sensor Networks –

Introduction - Operating System Design Issues - Examples of Operating Systems – TinyOS, Network Architecture -

Sensor Network Scenarios, Optimization Goals and Figures of Merit, Gateway Concepts. Data Dissemination-

Flooding and Gossiping-Data gathering Sensor Network Scenarios –Optimization, Goals and Figures of Merit –

Design Principles for WSNs- Gateway Concepts – Need for gateway

Unit III - Pervasive Networking and Computing - Introduction, Networking Infrastructure and Architecture of

PERV NET, Mobility management, service discovery, disconnected operation, Dynamic configuration, auto

registration, content based routing, Backbone Technology: Electrical Backbone Networks – Optical Backbone

Networks – Wireless Backbone Networks – Wireless Access Technology - Pervasive Web Application architecture-

Access from PCs and PDAs - Access via WAP

Unit IV - Pervasive Devices: Introduction with Case study of - PDA - Mobile Phone: Elements – Mobile

Information Architecture - Mobile Phone Design - Android Overview – The Stack – Android User Interface –

Preferences, the File System, the Options Menu and Intents.

Unit V - Emerging Wireless Technologies: Evolution and Deployment of Cellular Telephone Systems – 1G, 2G,

2.5G, 3G, 4G. Introduction to wireless LAN, Wireless PAN, Wireless MAN, Broadband Satellite and Microware

Systems – Emerging Wireless Technologies – IEEE 802.20 Mobile Broadband Wireless Access

Text Book

1. Frank Adelstein, Sandeep K S Gupta, Golden G Richard III, Loren Schwiebert, “Fundamentals of mobile

and pervasive computing, TMH, 2007.

Reference Books

1. Debashis saha, Amitava mukherjee ,”Networking Infrastructure for Pervasive Computing, Springer

International edition, 2011

2. Mullet,”Introduction to wireless telecommunications systems and networks", cengage learning, 2010

3. Brian Fling,”Mobile Design & Development,O’Reilly,2011

4. Marko Gargenta,”Learning Android”, O’Reilly,2011

17EI2032 THEORY AND DESIGN OF NEURO FUZZY CONTROLLERS

Credits: 3:0:0

Course Objectives:

To expose the students to the concepts of biological and artificial neural networks

To teach the basics of fuzzy set theory and operations.

To provide adequate knowledge applications of neural networks, fuzzy logic and genetic algorithm.

Course Outcomes:

Describe the evolution of soft computing techniques.

Apply mathematical fundamentals to develop learning algorithms.

Analyze problems to formulate models and develop control schemes using soft

computing techniques for non-linear systems.

Apply engineering fundamentals to use hybrid schemes and optimization

Solve complex engineering problems using neurofuzzy controllers.

Use modern tool boxes to simulate case studies.

Unit I - Introduction – Biological neuron – Artificial neuron – Neuron modeling – Learning rules – Single layer –

Multi layer feed forward network – Back propagation – Learning factors.

Unit II - Neural Networks For Control - Feed back networks – Discrete time hop field networks – Transient

response of continuous time networks – Applications of artificial neural network - Process identification – Neuro

controller for inverted pendulum.

Unit III - Fuzzy Systems - Classical sets – Fuzzy sets – Fuzzy relations – Fuzzification – Defuzzification – Fuzzy

rules.

Unit IV - Fuzzy Logic Control - Membership function – Knowledge base – Decision-making logic – Optimisation

of membership function using neural networks – Adaptive fuzzy system – Introduction to genetic algorithm,

Inverted pendulum – Image processing – Home heating system – Blood pressure during anesthesia

Karuny

a Univ

ersity


Unit V - Hybrid Control Schemes -Need for Hybrid control – Neuro-Fuzzy Control scheme – ANFIS – Case study

– Familiarization with ANFIS toolbox – Introduction to Genetic Algorithm and Particle swarm optimization –

Optimization of membership function and rule base using Genetic Algorithm – Introduction to Support vector

machine.

Text Books

1. Jacek M. Zurada, ‘Introduction to Artificial Neural Systems’, Jaico Publishing home, 2002.

2. Timothy J. Ross, ‘Fuzzy Logic with Engineering Applications’, Tata McGraw Hill, 1997.

Reference Books

1. Laurene Fausett, Englewood cliffs, N.J., ‘Fundamentals of Neural Networks’, Pearson Education, 2008.

2. Simon Haykin, ‘Neural Networks’, Pearson Education, 2003.

17EI2033 MICRO CONTROLLER BASED SYSTEM DESIGN

Credits: 3:0:0

Course Objectives:

To impart knowledge on PIC microcontroller and ARM processor.

To introduce the architecture, instruction set and peripheral devices of PIC

To introduce the architecture and assembly language programming of ARM.

Course Outcomes:

Describe the architectural features of PIC and ARM processors

Choose the processor relevant to a particular application.

Apply the knowledge of PIC microcontroller and ARM processor to solve simple

operations.

Use the microcontroller programming skills to design and carry out projects

Identify and formulate engineering problems and use the microcontrollers appropriately.

Develop simple working models using the advanced processors.

Unit I - Introduction to PIC Microcontroller – PIC 16F87x Architecture –Instruction Set – Simple Operations.

Unit II - Ports, Counters, Timer, Ccp Module And Interrupts - PIC16F87I2C I/O Ports, Counters, Timers CCP

Modules –Interrupts.

Unit III - Peripherals And Interfacing

16F87xI2C Bus Peripherals Chip Access – Analog to Digital Converter – UART.

Unit IV - Arm LPC2148 Introduction -ARM LPC2148 Architecture – ARM LPC2148 Development tools – ARM

Assembly Languages Programming – Simple Examples.

Unit V - Arm LPC2148 Organization -3-Stage Pipeline ARM Organization – 5-Stage Pipeline ARM Organization

– ARM Implementation – ARM Instruction Set.

Text Books

1. Peatman, J.B., “Design with PIC Micro Controllers”, Pearson Education, 3rd Edition, 2004.

2. Furber, S., “ARM System on Chip Architecture”, Addison Wesley trade Computer Publication,2000.

Reference Books

1. Andrew N. Sloss, Dominic Symes and Chris Wright, “ARM System Developer’s Guide:

Designing and Optimizing System Software”, Elsevier Inc., 2013.

2. Trevor Martin, “The insider’s guide to the Philips ARM 7 – based Microcontrollers: An

Engineers Introduction to the LPC 2100 Series” Hitex (UK) Ltd., 2005.

3. Muhammed Ali Mazidi, RolinMckinlay and Danny Causey, “PIC Microcontroller and

Embedded Systems using Assembly and C for PIC18”, Prentice Hall Publications, 2007.

4. Martin Bates, “Interfacing PIC Microcontrollers-Embedded Design by interactive simulation”,Newnes

Publication, 2006.

5. Tim Wilmshurst, “Designing Embedded Systems with PIC Microcontrollers – Principles and

Applications”, Newnes Publication, 2007.

Karuny

a Univ

ersity


17EI2034 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL SYSTEMS

Credit 3:0:0

Course Objectives:

• Understand the fundamental concepts of Instrumentation System

• To understand the importance of Instrumentation

To provide sound knowledge in the basic concepts of control theory

Course Outcomes:

Select suitable transducer for a specific instrumentation system

Analyze the characteristics of transducers

Apply controller principles to typical applications.

Analyze the transient and frequency response of systems.

Test the stability of a given system.

Analyze instrumentation for real time applications

Unit I - Generalized Measurement System: General concepts of Mechanical Instrumentation generalized

measurement system - Classification of instruments as indicators, Recorders and integrators their working principles

- Precision and accuracy: Measurement error and calibration

Unit II - Pressure And Temperature Measurement: Pressure measurement: Gravitational, Bourdon, Elastic

transducers, Strain gauge, Pressure cells – Temperature measurement: Bimetallic, Resistance thermometer,

Thermocouples, Pyrometer.

Unit III - Strain And Flow Measurement: Strain gauges types, Gauge rosettes.Force measurement: Scales and

torque measurement: Mechanical torsion meter, Electrical torsion meter, Piezo Electric Transducer - Hot– Wire

anemometer - Magnetic flowmeter- Ultrasonic flow meter

Unit IV - Control Systems: Open and closed systems - Servo– mechanisms - Transfer functions, Signal flow

graphs - Block diagram algebra - hydraulic and pneumatic control systems - Two –way control - Proportional

control - Differential and Integral control

Unit V - Stability analysis: Time response of First Order and Second Order Systems, Concept of Stability,

Necessary condition for Stability, Routh stability criterion, Polar and Bode plots.

Text Books

1. Jain R.K., “Mechanical and Industrial Measurements” Khanna Publishers, 2002.

2. Nagrath. M. and Gopal.I.J.Control systems Engineering, Wiley eastern Ltd.,.2001.

Reference Books

1. Sawhny, A.K. “Electrical and Electronics Measurements & Instrumentation”,

DhanpatRai& Co., 2000.

2. Collet. C. V. and Hope. A.D. ‘Engineering Measurements’ 2nd Edition ELBS.

3. Baskar S,’Instrumentation control system measurements and controls ‘anuradha agencies publishers,2004.

17EI2035 INSTRUMENTATION FOR AGRICULTURE

Credits: 3:0:0

Course Objectives:

To introduce the applications of instrumentation in agriculture

To teach the principle of sensors used in agriculture, irrigation

To gain knowledge on the automation in agriculture related applications

Course Outcomes:

Describe the need for sensors used in agricultural applications

Select suitable sensors for various applications pertaining to agriculture

Apply the concepts of automation to packing and storage systems

Illustrate the application of sensors in metrological measurements

Develop simple automation systems for agriculture

Relate the sensor technology to real time applications in agriculture.

Karuny

a Univ

ersity


Unit I - Introduction: Engineering properties of soil, fundamental definitions and relationships, Need for

measurement of soil parameters, Introduction to Sonic Anemometers, Hygrometers, Fine wire thermocouples, Open

and Close Path Gas Analyzers, Brief introduction to various Bio-sensors, Soil moisture measurement methods:

Resistance based method, Voltage based method, Thermal based method, Time-domain reflectometry(TDR)

Unit II - Irrigation systems: Necessity for instrumentation, Irrigation methods: overhead, center pivot, lateral

move, micro irrigation systems, Irrigation control management up- stream and down - stream control systems.

Unit III - Green houses and instrumentation: ventilation, cooling and heating, wind speed, temperature and

humidity, rain gauge carbon dioxide enrichment measurement and control. Ground water occurrence, confined and

unconfined aquifers, Aquifer properties, Ground water recharge measurement.

Unit IV - Automation in earth moving equipment & farm equipment, application of SCADA & PLC in packing

industry and cold storage systems, implementation of hydraulic, pneumatic & electronics control circuits in

harvesters cotton pickers, tractor etc.

Unit V - Leaf area length evapotranspiration, temperature, wetness & respiration measurement & data logging,

electromagnetic radiations photosynthesis, agro metrological instrumentation weather stations, surface flux

measurement.

Text Book

1. Instrumentation handbook-process control, “B.G.Liptak”, Chilton 40 , 2013

Reference Books

1. Industrial instrumentation, “Patranabis”, Tata Mc GrawHill, 2010

2. Process control and instrumentation technology, “C.D. Johnson”, PHI, 2015

17EI2036 ENVIRONMENTAL INSTRUMENTATION

Credits: 3:0:0

Course Objectives:

Learn the terminology, nomenclature and classification systems used in environmental science

Understand the methods of acquiring, interpreting and analysing environmental science information with a

critical understanding of the appropriate contexts for their use

Appreciate the contribution of environmental science to the development of knowledge of the world we

live in

Course Outcomes:

Describe the methodology of measurement used for environment montoring

Apply the knowledge of instruments to measure water and air quality

Choose the type of measurement technique suitable for a particular application

Evaluate the impact of measurement on environmental parameter monitoring

Identify cases where monitoring is required and provide solutions

Summarize the significance of instrumentation for environmental quality measurement and control

Unit I - Instrumentation Methodologies -Influence of regulatory requirements on instrumentation design, In situ

Vs extractive measurement, Online analysis of environmental samples, Ultra violet analysis of water and waste

water

Unit II - Water Quality parameters - Thermal conductivity detectors, Temperature Monitors, Ph analyzers,

Turbidity monitoring, Watershed Scale, Water Quality Monitoring.

Unit III - Groundwater monitoring – Level Measurements in ground water monitoring wells, techniques of

ground water sampling, Soil permeability and dispersion analysis, instrumentation for assessment of soil and

groundwater pollution.

Unit IV - Waste water monitoring and air monitoring– Automatic waste water sampling systems, Waste water

level measurement techniques, data acquisition systems for ambient air monitoring, air pollution control systems,

measurement of ambient air quality.

Unit V - Flow monitoring – Air flow measurement, Gas flow measurement, Non-open channel flow measurement,

Open channel waste water flow measurement

Text Book

1. Environmental Instrumentation and Analysis Handbook, Randy D Down and Jay H Lehr, Wiley, 2004

Karuny

a Univ

ersity


Reference Books

1. Measuring the Natural Environment, Ian Strangeways, Cambridge Press, 2003

2. Food and agricultural waste water utilization and treatment, Sean X Liu, Blackwell Publishing, 2007

3. Environmental Instrumentation, Fritschen, Leo, Gay, Lloyd, Springer advanced text in life sciences,

1979.

17EI2037 VIRTUAL INSTRUMENTATION

Credits: 3:0:0

Course Objectives:

Study about the virtual instrumentation system and LabVIEW based Virtual Instrumentation.

Study about the hardware and software involved programming techniques in VI.

Study about the basic of Programming Techniques and its applications.

Course Outcomes:

Understand the architecture of Virtual Instrumentation.

Appreciate the advantages of Data flow programming

Apply basic programming techniques of Virtual Instrumentation.

Use Virtual Instrumentation for instrumentation and control

Design a LabVIEW based instrumentation system.

Identify a suitable interface for data acquisition

Unit I - Review Of Virtual Instrumentation: Historical perspective, advantages, Block diagram and Architecture

of a Virtual Instrument, Data Flow Techniques, Graphical programming in data flow, comparison with Conventional

programming.

Unit II - Introduction To LabVIEW: Advantages of LabVIEW Software Environment-Creating and Saving VI-

Controls and Indicators- Data types. Sub VI: Creating- Opening-Editing-Placing a Sub VI in a block- Creating a

Stand Alone Application

Unit III - Programming Techniques: Loops and charts, arrays, clusters and graphs, case and

sequence structures, formula nodes, local and global variables, string and file I/O

Unit IV - Data Acquisition Basics: Signals Handling and Classification – Signal Conditioning -

Analog Interfacing (I/O) - Counters & Timers – Digital (I/O) - DAQ Hardware – DAQ Software

Architecture - DAQ Assist

Unit V - Common Instrument Interfaces: GPIB-RS232-Handshaking- RS232/RS485 interfacing, VISA – IVI -

PCMCIA – SCXI – VXI - Networking basics for office & Industrial applications

Text Books 1. Jovitha Jerome, “Virtual Instrumentation Using LabVIEW” Prentice Hall India Learning Private Limited,

New Delhi, 2010.

2. JohnEssick, “Hands-On Introduction to LabVIEW for Scientists and Engineers”, Oxford University

Press,New York, 2nd Edition, 2010.

Reference Books

1. NesimiErtugrul, “LabVIEW for Electric Circuits, Machines, Drives, and Laboratories”, Pearson Education,

2nd Edition, 2002.

2. LabVIEW: Basics I & II Manual, National Instruments, 2005.

3. Sanjay Gupta and Joseph John, “ Virtual Instrumentation using LabVIEW”, Tata McGraw – Hill Education

India Private Limited, New Delhi, 2nd Edition, 2010.

4. Gary W. Johnson, Richard Jennings, “LabVIEW Graphical Programming”, McGraw-Hill Education, New

York, 3rd Edition, 2001.

17EI2038 ULTRASONIC INSTRUMENTATION

Credits: 3:0:0

Course Objectives:

To introduce the fundamentals of ultrasonics

To provide knowledge on the basics of Ultrasonic Instrumentation

Karuny

a Univ

ersity


To teach the applications of Ultrasonic Instruments

Course Outcomes:

Recall the principles of ultrasonic Instrumentation

Discuss the various methods for the generation of ultrasonic waves

Choose a suitable measurement technique for different parameters

Analyze the different ultrasonic test methods

Apply the concepts of ultrasonic instrumentation for practical applications

Illustrate the ultrasonic applications in the field of Medicine

Unit I - Ultrasonic Waves: Principles and propagation of various waves – characterization of ultrasonic

transmission, reflection and transmission coefficients – intensity and attenuation of sound beam. Power level –

medium parameters

Unit II - Generation/ Detection of Ultrasonic Waves: Magnetostrictive and piezoelectric effects – construction

and characteristics – Detection of Ultrasonic Waves: Mechanical method- Optical Method-Electrical Method-

Precise Measurement: Pulse-echo Overlap- Cross correlation-Computer Based Automated methods: Pulse-echo

Overlap- Cross correlation-search unit types

Unit III - Classification of Ultrasonic Test Methods: Pulse echo- transit time-resonance- direct contact and

immersion type and ultrasonic methods of flaw detection – Flow meters – Density measurement- Viscosity

measurement, Level measurement – Sensor for Temperature and Pressure measurements

Unit IV - Ultrasonic Application: Measuring thickness-depth-Rail Inspection using Ultrasonic- SONAR-

Inspection of Welds and defect detection in welds of anisotropic materials

Unit V - Ultrasonic Applications in Medical Field: Medical Imaging- diagnosis and therapy- acoustical

holography

Text Books

1. Baldev Raj, V.Rajendran, P.Palanichamy, “Science and Technology of Ultrasonics”, Alpha

Science International, UK, 2004.

2. J.David N.Cheeke,”Fundamentals and Applications of Ultrasonic Waves,” CRC Press,

Florida, 2012.

Reference Books

1. C.R. Hill,J.C. Bamber, G.R. ter Harr, “Physical Principles of Medical Ultrasonics,” John

Wiley & sons, England, 2004.

2. Dale Ensminger, Foster B.Stulen, ”Ultrasonics Data,Equations and Their Practical Uses,”

CRC Press, 2009.

3. Lawrence E.Kinsler, Austin R.Frey, Alan B.Coppens, James V. Sanders, “Fundamentals of Acoustics,”

John Wiley and Sons Inc,USA,2000.

4. L.A. Bulavin, YU.F.Zabashta, “Ultrasonic Diagnostics in Medicine,” VSP, Koninklijke

Brill,Boston, 2007.

17EI2039 FIBER OPTICS AND LASER INSTRUMENTATION

Credits: 3:0:0

Course Objectives:

Understand the basic concepts of Optical Fibers and Lasers and their applications in the field of

Instrumentation.

Understand the knowledge of Fiber optics and Laser Instrumentation and its Industrial Application.

To introduce the techniques used by Fiber optics and Laser in the field of Medical Application.

Course Outcomes:

Understand measurement techniques in Optical fibers

Apply LASER in Instrumentation and Biomedical applications.

Understand the basic concepts of optical fibers and their properties.

To provide adequate knowledge about the Industrial applications of optical fibers.

Ability to understand Laser fundamentals.

Aadequate knowledgpe about Industrial application of lasers.

Karuny

a Univ

ersity


Unit I - Optical Fibers And Their Properties: Principles of light propagation through a fiber – Different types of

fibers and their properties – Optical sources: LED, Laser Diode – Optical detectors :PiN photodiode and Avalanche

Photodetectors (APD)

Unit II - Industrial Application Of Optical Fibers: Fiber optic sensors – Fiber optic Instrumentation system –

Application in Instrumentation: Measurement of Pressure, Temperature, Liquid Level and strain.

Unit III - Laser Fundamentals: Fundamental characteristics of Lasers – Three level and four level lasers –

Properties of laser– Laser modes – Resonator configuration – Q switching and mode locking – Cavity dumping –

Types of lasers: Gas lasers, Solid lasers, Liquid lasers, Semi conductor lasers

Unit IV - Industrial Application Of Lasers: Laser for measurement of distance, Length, Velocity, Acceleration,

and atmospheric effect – Material processing: Laser heating, Welding, Melting and Trimming of materials –

Removal and vaporization

Unit V - Hologram And Medical Application: Holography – Basic principle – Methods– Holographic

Interferometry and applications – Holography for non– destructive testing –Medical applications of lasers :Laser

interaction with biomolecules – Photothermal applications – Photochemical applications – Endoscopes

Text Books

1. Arumugam.M. “Fiber Optics and Laser Instrumentation", Anuradha Agencies Publishers, Kumbakonam,

2006.

2. Optical Fiber Communications: Principles And Practice, John M. Senior, Pearson Education, 2006

Reference Books

1. G. Keiser, ‘Optical Fibre Communication’, McGraw Hill, 1995.



17EI2040 BUILDING AUTOMATION

Credits: 3:0:0

Course Objectives

To gain knowledge on methods of automation techniques in building

Understand Concept of CCTV

Get exposed to different types of fire alarm systems standard

Course Outcomes

Describe the mathematics, science and engineering fundamentals involved in automation applications.

Examine the measuring problems related building automation

Select the suitable sensor/transducer for fire alarm system

Determine the suitable networking and cable technology

Formulate automation for safety purpose

Design a CCTV based security system

Unit I - Introduction to intelligent buildings and Building automation systems: -Intelligent architecture and

structure-Facilities management vs. intelligent buildings- Lifecycle of building- Evolution of intelligent buildings-

Different systems in BAS which includes HVAC, security, fire, lighting systems. Importance of each system in

BAS- Process of BAS design, Role of different stakeholders (Architect, contractor, consultant, application

engineer and engineer) in BAS system design- Comfort parameters for human being -temperature, humidity,

flow, pressure, clean air, Co2%.

Unit II - Introduction to Fire Alarm System: Fire alarm System-The History, Need for Fire alarm System,

Basic Fire Alarm System, Classification of Fire Alarm System, Conventional Fire Alarm System, Addressable

Fire Alarm System, Principles of Operations, Panel Components, Its Applications, FAS architecture: Types of

Architecture and Examples

Unit III - Fire Alarm Detection System Requirement: Stages of Fire Alarm System, Component within Fire

Alarm System, Specific Function within Component -Within Fire alarm System, Important Codes NFPA72 IS

2189 BS 5839,Critical Parameters in Facility Environment, FAS Loops-Classification of Loops and Examples,

Power Supply requirement and its designing parameters, Battery Calculations and Its Requirement and design

Unit IV - Fire Alarm System Details Standards: Network terminology, Classification of Cables, Class of

Cables-Types and distance Supported - Fire terminology -Types of Relay and its Working principle -Working

Karuny

a Univ

ersity


Principles of Fire Alarm devices and its working -Application in building safety - Components of fire alarm

detection system - SLC wiring and its classification - Cause and effect Matrix-Fire alarm system - Concepts of

Water leak detection system - Concepts of VESDA (Very early smoke detection system)

Unit V - Introduction to CCTV, Intrusion and Guard Tour System: Basic of CCTV system, System

Architecture of CCTV System - Types of Camera –Fixed, PTZ, Analog, Digital - Terminology for Cameras CIF,

Mpeg, MP4, POE and Concepts- Camera Connectivity- Video Management System: DVR, DVM, NVR- Video

Analytics- Camera Calculations Parameters Resolution, Compression, Image Connectivity, Recording, Motion%,

FPS, Bandwidth-Concepts, Storage Tape, PPF (Pixel per foot), Levels of Resolutions, Distance and Width

Approximate Compression techniques-Intrusion and Guard Tour System- Basics and Technology used in the

Intrusion system.- Application of Intrusion System

Text Book

1. Roger W. Haines “ HVAC Systems Design Handbook”, Fifth Edition 2010.

2. Building Control Systems, Applications Guide (CIBSE Guide) by The CIBSE (2000).

Reference Books

1. Vlado Damjanovski, CCTV, Newnes, 1999.

2. Joel Konicek and Karen Little, “The Book on Electronic Access Control”, Newnes, 1997.

3. D. Helfrick and Cooper, W. D., “Modern Electronic Instrumentation and Measurement Techniques”, PHI

Learning Pvt. Ltd., 2011.

4. Kruegle, Herman, “CCTV Surveillance: Analog and Digital Video Practices and Technology”,

ButterworthHeinemann, 2006

14EI2041 MEASUREMENTS AND INSTRUMENTATION

Credits: 3:0:0

Course Objectives:

To introduce the fundamentals of measurement systems and errors.

To provide adequate knowledge on the measurement of electrical and non-electrical quantities.

To have an understanding of the concepts of signal generators, analyzers and recording instruments.

Course Outcomes:

Describe the principle of working of instruments and their characteristics

Analyze the instrument characteristics and the errors in measurement.

Choose the types of sensor to be used for a specific application.

Apply the concepts of data acquisition for real time data processing

Develop measurement systems for measuring electrical and non-electrical quantities.

Suggest the types of analyzers, display devices and recording instruments for a specific application.

Unit I - Measurement Standards: Measurements. Significance of measurements-methods of measurements –

Standards and their classification. calibration- functional elements of a measurement system - errors in

measurements and statistical analysis.

Unit II - Indicating Instruments: D’Arsonval Galvanometer- PMMC Mechanism- DC Ammeters and voltmeters-

AC current and voltage measurements-RLC measurements-using ac and dc bridges-measurement of incremental

inductance and low capacitances-AC voltmeters using rectifiers- digital voltmeters- Q meters-RF power and voltage

measurement-high frequency measurement of inductances and capacitances.

Unit III - Instruments For Signal Generation And Analysis: Introduction- Sine wave generator- frequency

synthesized signal generator-pulse and square wave generator-Wave analyzers-harmonic distortion analyzer-

spectrum analyzer- heterodyne wave analyzer-frequency counter and time interval measurement- Block diagram of

General Purpose Oscilloscope Measurement of voltage, current , phase and frequency using CRO.

Unit IV - Analog And Digital Data Acquisition Systems: Components of analog and digital data acquisition

systems Instrumentation Systems-Interfacing transducers to Electronic control and measuring instruments-

Multiplexing-Types of multiplexing systems-Uses of data acquisition systems-Use of recorders in digital systems-

Digital recording systems-Input conditioning systems-digital data acquisition systems digital display units-

segmental display-liquid crystal displays.

717

Karuny

a Univ

ersity


Unit V - Transducers: Classification of transducers-Selecting a transducer- strain gauges - Temperature

Transducers – Linear Variable Differential Transformer(LVDT), Advantages and Disadvantages –Capacitive

Transducers, – Piezo-electric Transducers and Optoelectronic Transducers.

Text books

1. Albert D Helfrich, Cooper. W.D.,” Electronic Instrumentation and Measurement Techniques” Prentice Hall

of India, New Delhi, 2009.

2. Sawhney A K,” A course in Electrical and Electronic Measurement and instrumentation”, Dhanpat Rai and

Sons, New Delhi, 2000

References

1. Joseph J Carr,” Elements of Electronic Instrumentation and Measurement, Pearson Eduation, New Delhi,

2008.

2. Nakra B C and Choudhury K.k.,” Instrumentation Measurement and Analysis”, Tata McGraw Hill, New

Delhi, 2004.

17EI2042 PROCESS CONTROL LABORATORY FOR FOOD ENGINEERS

Credits: 3:0:0

Course Objectives:

To introduce the basics of sensors and control

To teach the signal conditioning circuits for data acquisition and control

To study the characteristics of the control elements in a closed loop control loop.

Course Outcomes:

Analyze the characteristics of sensors and transducers.

Determine the characteristics of instruments.

Design controllers for a given system.

Perform stability analysis of a system

Understand the process system design

Analyze various control valve characteristics



17EI2043 PROCESS CONTROL FOR FOOD ENGINEERS

Credits: 3:0:0

Course Objectives:

To introduce the fundamentals of sensors and control concepts

To teach the concepts of system analysis and control

To gain knowledge about the working of various sensors

Course Outcomes:

• Represent the mathematical model of a system.

• Determine the response of different order systems for various test inputs.

• Analyze the stability of the system.


Derive the Mathematical Model of a physical system.

• Analyse and decide suitable control schemes for a particular system.

Unit I - Introduction to Process control: System – steady state design – process control – process control

block diagram –definition of a process, measurement, controller, and control element, loop – damped and cyclic

response- feedback control – transient responses – laplace transform – transforms of simple functions – step

function, exponential function, ramp function and sine function.

Unit II - Control systems: Open and closed loop systems, servomechanisms, hydraulic and pneumatic control

systems, two-way control, proportional control, differential control and integral control.

Control valve – Construction and working of pneumatically operated valve and spring – diaphragm

Karuny

a Univ

ersity


Actuator

Unit III - Stability Analysis: Signal flow graph – Mason’s Gain formula, Block diagram algebra. Stability –

concept of stability, definition of stability in a linear system, stability criterion, characteristic equation, Routh test for

stability

Unit IV - Pressure and Temperature sensors: Pressure measurement – Construction and working of capacitive

pressure sensor, Inductive pressure sensor, strain gauge, pressure sensor, diaphragm, bourdon tube, differential

pressure cell Temperature sensors –Construction and working of RTD, Thermistors, Thermocouples, bimetallic

strips

Unit V - Level sensor: Simple float systems, capacitive sensing element, radioactive methods (nucleonic level

sensing) – ultrasonic level sensor. Measurement of density – U-type densitometer, Buoyancy meter Measurement of

composition – Electrical conductivity cell, non-dispersive photometers,

pH meter, Gas chromatograph, Mass spectrometer.

Text Books

1. J.F Richardson A D.G.Peacock, Coulson & Richardson’s “Chemical Engineering”, Volume3, Butherworth

– Heinemann, an imprint of Elsevier, 2006.

Reference Books

1. Donald R. Coughanowr., “Process System analysis and control” Mc- Graw Hill International Edition ,

Second Edition,singapore, S2008.

2. Nagoorkani.A “Control Systems”, RBA publications, 2nd edition, ninteenth reprint 2012

3. S.Baskar,”Instrumentation control system measurements and controls”Anuradha Agencies Publishers,

2004.

4. Nagrath, M and Gopal, I.J, “Control Systems Engineering”, Wiley Eastern Limited, Third Edition Reprint

2003.

5. Renganathan, “Transducer engineering, Allied publishers, New Delhi,2003.

6. Patranabis, “Principles of industrial instrumentation”, Printice Hall India, 2004. Patranabis, D., Second

Edition Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Co. Ltd.. New Delhi. 1997, ISBN 0074623346.

7. Curtis D .Johnson, “Process Control Instrumentation Technology ”, Prentice Hall , New

Jersey2006.

17EI2044 NANO SCALE SENSORS AND TRANSDUCERS

Credits: 3:0:0

Course Objectives:

To introduce the basics of Nano technology

To teach the principles of nano sensors

To explore the applications of nanosensor and transducers

Course Outcomes:

Describe the basics of development of Nano devices

Indicate the use of nano technology in sensor development

Identify the sensors that can be developed using nanotechnology

Apply nano sensors to practical applications

Evaluate the performance of nano sensors compared with conventional sensors

Develop simple application models using nano sensors and transducers

Unit I - Quantum Devices: Quantum Electronic devices – Electrons in mesocopic structures – Short channel, MOS

Transistor – split Gate Transistor – Electron wave transistor – Electron spin transistor – Quantum Dot array –

Quantum computer- Bit and Qubit. Carbon Nanotube based logic gates, optical devices. . Connection with quantum

dots, quantum wires, and quantum wells

Unit II - Tunneling Devices: Tunnelling element – Tunnel Effect and Tunneling Elements-Tunnelling Diode –

Resonant Tunnelling Diode – Three -Terminal Resonate Tunnelling Devices-Technology of RTD-Digital circuits

design based on RTDs - Basics Logic Circuits – Single Electron Transistor(SET) – Principle – Coulomb Blockade

Performance – Technology- Circuit Design- Logic and Memory Circuits – SET adder as an Example of a

Distributed Circuit.

Karuny

a Univ

ersity


Unit III - Nanosensors : Micro and nano-sensors, Fundamentals of sensors, biosensor, micro fluids, Packaging and

characterization of sensors, Method of packaging at zero level, dye level and first level. Sensors for aerospace and

defense: Accelerometer, Pressure Sensor, Night Vision System, Nano tweezers, nano-cutting tools, Integration of

sensor with actuators and electronic circuitry,

Unit IV - Applications: Sensor for bio-medical applications: Cardiology, Neurology and as diagnostic tool, For

other civil applications: metrology, bridges etc. Biosensors. Clinical Diagnostics, generation of biosensors,

immobilization, characteristics, applications, conducting Polymer based sensor, DNA Biosensors, optical sensors.

Biochips. Metal Insulator Semiconductor devices, molecular electronics, information storage, molecular switching,

Schottky devices,

Unit V - NEMS: Inertial sensors – accelerometer – gyroscope - micromechanical pressure sensors – pizoresistive –

capacitive - microrobotics – micro channel heat sinks – optical MEMS – visual display – precision optical platform

– optical data switching – RF MEMS – MEMS variable capacitors – MEMS switches – Resonators.

Text Books 1. Sensors: Micro &Nanosensors, Sensor Market trends (Part 1&2) by H. Meixner., 2005

2. “Nanoelectronics and Nanosystems-From Transistors to Molecular Quantum Devices” , K. Goser, P.

Glosekotter and J. Dienstuhl, Springer, 2004.

3. HerveRigneault, Jean-Michel Lourtioz, Claude Delalande, Ariel Levenson,

“Nanophotonics”, ISTE.

Reference Books

1. Nanoscience& Technology: Novel structure and phenomena by Ping Sheng (Editor)

2. Nano Engineering in Science &Technology : An introduction to the world of nano design

3. by Michael Rieth.

4. Tai –Ran Hsu, “MEMS & Microsystems Design and Manufacture”, Tata McGraw-Hill publication, 2001.

5. Rai-Choudhury, “MEMS and MOEMS technology and applications”, PHI learning private Ltd, 2009.

6. Mohamed Gad-el-Hak, “The MEMS Handbook”, CRC Press, 2002.

17EI3001 INSTRUMENTATION

Credits: 3:0:0

Course Objective:

To introduce the fundamental concepts of Instrumentation System

To understand the importance of Instrumentation

To learn about computer based instrumentation

Course Outcomes:

Identify the system with respect to the given inputs.

Analyze the characteristics of transducers.

Select suitable transducer for a specific instrumentation system.

Develop digital measurement systems.

Understand the use of virtual instrumentation.

Apply computer based instrumentation for real time applications.

Unit I - Instrumentation System: Introduction – Philosophy of Measurement – The general

instrumentation system – Static and Dynamic Characteristics – The overall transfer function –

Dynamic response of the sensor – The measurement system as a series of networks

Unit II - Resistance and Inductance Transducer: Basic principle – Potentiometer –resistance strain gauge–

Measurement of torque– Stress measurement on rotating members –

Semi- conductor strain gauges – Contact pressure humidity measurement – Basic principle – Linear variable

differential transformer – LVDT equations – RVDT – application of LVDT –

LVDT pressure transducer – Synchros – Synchros as position transducer – Induction

potentiometer – Variable reluctance accelerometer – Microsyn

Unit III - Capacitance and Piezoelectric Transducers: Basic principle – Capacitance

displacement transducer – Differential pressure transducer feedback type capacitance proximity

pickup – Condenser microphone – Pulse width modulating circuit – Introduction – Material for

Karuny

a Univ

ersity


piezoelectric transducer – Equivalent circuit of a piezoelectric crystal – Piezoelectric coefficients – Mode of

deformation – General form of piezoelectric transducers – Environmental effects

Unit IV - Digital methods of Measurements: Digital voltmeters and multimeters – Digital

frequency, period and time measurements – Digital tachometers – Digital phase meters – Automation in digital

instruments – Digital data recording – Digital Transducers

Unit V - Computer based Instrumentation: Evolution of Virtual Instrumentation – Architecture of Virtual

Instrumentation – Virtual Instruments Versus Traditional Instruments – Advantages of VI – PC based Data

acquisition system – Interfacing techniques to the IBM PC –Plug– In data acquisition boards – Interface Buses: PCI,

PXI, VXI

Reference Books

1. Jackson R G, “Novel Sensors and Sensing”, Institute of Physics Publishing, Bristol and

Philadelphia, 2004.

2. Doeblin E.O, “Measurement Systems– Applications and Design”, McGraw Hill,New

York, 2008.

3. Kalsi H S, “Electronics Instrumentation, ”Second Edition, Tata McGrawhill, New Delhi, 2010

4. John Park ,Steve Mackay,” Practical Data Acquisition for Instrumentation and Control

Systems” Elsevier 2003.

5. Mathivanan “PC– based instrumentation: concepts and practice” PHI, 2009

6. Dr.S.Renganathan, “Transducer Engineering”, Allied publishers, New Delhi, 2003.

7. D.Patranabis, “Principles of Electronic Instrumentation,” PHI, 2008

8. S. Sumathi and P. Surekha , “LabVIEW based Advanced Instrumentation Systems”

Springer, 2007.

17EI3002 ADVANCED PROCESS CONTROL

Credits: 3:0:0

Course Objectives:

To equip the students with the basic knowledge of Process Modeling.

To introduce the concept of Multivariable systems and decoupling.

To analyze complex control schemes

Course Outcomes:

Develop mathematical model of a physical process.

Analyze the various modes of controllers

Categorize the different types of valves.

Understand the knowledge of MIMO process and decoupling.

Formulate the design of Model based and adaptive controllers

Demonstrate various control algorithms in the real time complex process.

Unit I - Process Control System: Terms and objectives, Piping and Instrumentation diagram, Instrument terms

and symbols – Regulator and servo control – Classification of variables – Process characteristics: Process equation,

Degrees of freedom, Modeling of simple systems – Thermal, Gas, Liquid systems, Process lag, Load disturbance

and their effect on processes – Self – Regulating processes – Interacting and non –Interacting processes

Unit II - Controller modes: Basic control action, Two position, Multi – Position, Floating control modes –

Continuous controller modes: Proportional, Integral, Derivative – Composite controller modes: PI, PD, PID,

Integral wind – Up and prevention. Auto/Manual transfer, Response of Controllers for different types of test inputs

– Selection of control mode for different process with control scheme – Control Valve sizing – Control valve types:

Linear, Equal percentage and quick opening valve

Unit III - Optimum controller settings – Tuning of controllers by process reaction curve method – Damped

oscillation method – Ziegler Nichol’s tuning – Pole placement method – Feed forward control –Ratio control –

Cascade control – Split range control – Averaging control – Inferential control

Unit IV - Introduction to multivariable system – Evolution of loop interaction – Evolution of relative gains –

Single loop and overall stability – Model equations for a binary distillation column – Transfer function matrix –

Method of inequalities – Decoupling control – Centralized controller

Karuny

a Univ

ersity


Unit V - Adaptive Controllers: Internal model control – Adaptive control – Model predictive control: dynamic

matrix control – model – Generalized predictive control

Reference Books

1. Stephanopoulos G., “Chemical Process Control, Prentice Hall, New Delhi, 2003.

2. Coughanowr D.R., “Process Systems Analysis and Control”, McGraw – Hill Higher

Education, Singapore,2008.

3. Wayne BequetteB,’ Process control: modeling, design, and simulation’ Prentice Hall ,

New Jersey – 2003.

4. Smith C.L and Corripio.A..B, “Principles and Practice of Automatic Process Control”,

John Wiley and Sons, New York, 2006.

5. Dale E. Seborg, Thomas F. Edgar, Duncan A. Mellichamp, “Process Dynamics and

Control” ,Willey India, 2006.

6. Marlin. T.E., Process Control, Second Edition McGraw Hill NewYork, 2000.

17EI3003 ADVANCED CONTROL SYSTEMS

Credits: 3:0:0

Course Objectives

To understand the basics of mathematical modeling.

To study the stability analysis of linear and non linear systems.

To learn the characteristics of non linear systems

Course Outcomes

Describe the concept of Non-linear control systems.

Identify the various techniques to design the controllers for the higher order systems

Apply suitable mathematical method to solve the difference equation.

Examine stability analysis of linear and non linear systems.

Design the State Space model of various dynamic systems

Interpret the concepts of subspace identification and design of advanced controllers for various real time

dynamic systems in a better way by referring the examples.

Unit I - Modeling of Dynamic Systems: Definition of System– Mathematical modeling – State space

representation of system – Centrifugal Governor – Ground vehicle – Permanent Magnet stepper motor – Inverted

Pendulum

Unit II - Analysis of Mathematical Models: State space method– Phase plane – Isoclines – Numerical methods –

Taylor Series – Euler’s method – Predictor Corrector method – RungeKutta method – Principle of Linearization of

Differential Equation

Unit III - State Space Analysis: Reachability and controllability – Observability and constructability –

Companion forms – Controller / Observer form – State feed – back control – State estimator – Full order and

reduced order Estimator – Combined controller estimator compensator

Unit IV - Nonlinear Systems: Introduction to Non linear systems- Saturation–Relay–Dead zone – Backlash non

linearities

Unit V - Stability of Nonlinear System: Stability of Nonlinear system – Lyapunov stability theorems – Lyapunov

function for nonlinear system – Krasovskii’s method – Variable gradient method – Phase plane analysis, Singular

points, Constructing phase portraits – Limit cycle – Describing function analysis.

Reference Books

1. Stanislaw Zak, ‘Systems and Control’, Oxford University Press, 2003.

2. Gopal M, Digital Control and State variable Methods, Tata McGrawHill, New Delhi, 2003.

3. Ogata K, “Modern Control Engineering”, Pearson Education, New Jersey 2009.

4. Vidyasagar .M, “Nonlinear system analysis”, Prentice Hall Inc., New Jersey 2002.

5. Singiresu S. Rao, “Applied Numerical Methods”, Prentice Hall, Upper Saddle River, New Jersey, 2001.

6. Jean – Jacques E. Slotine, Weiping Li, “Applied nonlinear control”, Prentice Hall Inc., New Jersey, 2004

Karuny

a Univ

ersity


17EI3004 DISCRETE CONTROL SYSTEM

Credits: 3:0:0

Course Objective

To learn the concepts of discrete time Control systems.

To introduce polynomial equations approach to control system design.

To deal with the different types of digital control algorithm.

Course Outcome

Recognize the need for discrete time control systems

Design control system using polynomial equations approach.

Demonstrate the concept of pole placement and state observer techniques.

Analyze the state space representation of discrete time system and infer whether all the variables are

measurable or controllable.

Identify different types of digital controllers for the real time systems.

Evaluate the stability analysis of the discrete time system.

Unit I - Introduction: Review of Z Transform – Impulse Sampling and data Hold – Reconstructing original signal

from sampled signal – Pulse Transfer function – Mapping between the S plane and Z plane – Stability Analysis in

Z domain – Transient and steady state response analysis – modified Z transform

Unit II - State Space Analysis: State Space representation of discrete time Signals – Solving discrete time State

Space Equations – Pulse Transfer Function Matrix – Discretization of continuous time State Space Equations

Unit III - Pole Placement and Observer Design: Controllability – Observability – Useful Transformations in

State Space Analysis and Design – Design Via Pole placement – State observer – Servo Systems

Unit IV - Polynomial Equations approach to Control System Design: Diophantine Equations – Polynomial

Equations Approach to Regulator system– Polynomial Equations Approach to Control system Design – Design of

Model Matching Control Systems

Unit V - Digital Control Algorithm: Implementation of different digital control algorithms: Digital PID,

Deadbeat, Dahlin, Smith predictor and Internal Model Control algorithm with examples

Reference Books:

1. Gopal M, “Digital Control and State variable Methods”, 4th

Edition, Tata McGrawHill, New Delhi, 2012.

2. Ogata, “Discrete- Time Control Systems”, Pearson Education, Singapore,2002

3. Pradeep B Deshpande, “Computer Process Control with Advanced Control Applications”, Instrument

Society of America,2000.

4. Gene F. Franklin,J. David Powell, “Digital control of dynamic systems”, Pearson Education Limited-2002.

17EI3005 INTELLIGENT CONTROLLERS

Credit: 3:0:0

Course Objectives:

To introduce the basic concepts of neural networks and its applications in Control.

To introduce fuzzy logic concept and its applications in Control.

To introduce genetic algorithm

Course Outcomes:

Identify and describe soft computing techniques

Select suitable optimization algorithm for Industrial applications

Apply Neural Network control techniques in real time systems

Analyze Fuzzy Logic reasoning to handle uncertainity and solve engineering problems

Develop soft computing algorithms to solve real world problems pertaining to control and embedded

applications

Predict the feasibility of applying a soft computing methodology for a particular problem

Unit I - Introduction to Neural Networks : Introduction - biological neurons and their artificial models - learning,

adaptation and neural network's learning rules - types of neural networks- single layer, multiple layer- feed forward,

feedback networks; back propagation - learning and training - Hopfield network.

Karuny

a Univ

ersity


Unit II - Neural Network for Control Applications: Neural network for non-linear systems –schemes of neuro

control- system identification forward model and inverse model- indirect learning neural network control

applications – case studies- Inverted pendulum, cerebellar Model Articulation Control.

Unit III - Introduction to Fuzzy Logic :Fuzzy sets- fuzzy operation -fuzzy arithmetic –fuzzy relations- fuzzy

relational equations -approximate reasoning -fuzzy propositions - fuzzy quantifiers - if-then rules fuzzy for process

automation- level, pressure, temperature process.

Unit IV - Fuzzy Logic Control : Structure of fuzzy logic controller - fuzzification models- data base - rule base -

inference engine defuzzification module - Non-linear fuzzy control - PID like FLC- sliding mode FLC - Sugeno

FLC - adaptive fuzzy control -fuzzy control applications- case studies.

Unit V - Genetic Algorithm and its Applications : Fundamentals of genetic algorithm: Evolutionary computation -

search space –encoding - reproduction-elements of genetic algorithm-genetic modeling-comparison of GA and

traditional search methods - Applications of Genetic based machine learning-Genetic Algorithm and parallel

processors - composite laminates - constraint optimization - multilevel optimization – case studies

Reference Books 1. Jacek M Zurada, ‘Introduction to Artificial Neural Systems’, Jaico Publishing House, 1999

2. Rajasekaran.S and G.A Vijayalakshmi Pai, ‘Neural Networks, Fuzzy logic and Genetic Algorithms,

Synthesis and Applications’, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi – 2003.

3. Klir G.J. &Folger T.A. ‘Fuzzy sets, uncertainty and Information’, Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd.,1993.

4. Zimmerman H.J. ‘Fuzzy set theory –and its Applications’ – Kluwer Academic Publishers,1994.

5. Melanie Mitchell, ‘An introduction to Genetic Algorithm’, Prentice – Hall of India, New Delhi, Edition:

2004.

6. Kosko, B. ‘Neural Networks and Fuzzy Systems’, Prentice – Hall of India Pvt. Ltd.,1994.

17EI3006 OPTIMAL CONTROL THEORY

Credits: 3:0:0

Course Objectives:

To provide an introductory account of the theory of optimal control and its applications

To give students background in dynamic optimization

To learn Calculus of Variations, Pontryagin's Minimum Principle, and Bellman's Dynamic Programming.

Course Outcomes:

Identify a linear or non -linear system

Evaluate the performance of a given system

Apply the concept of Dynamic Programming

Solve the optimization problems using Calculus of variations

Measure the performance of the system using Pontryagin’s Minimum Principle

Devise Iterative Numerical Techniques for finding optimal controls and trajectories

Unit I - Introduction: Problem formulation – Mathematical model – Physical constraints – Performance measure –

Optimal control problem – Form of optimal control – Performance measures for optimal control problem –

Selection of performance measure

Unit II - Dynamic Programming: Optimal control law – Principle of optimality – An optimal control system – A

recurrence relation of dynamic programming – Computational procedure –Characteristics of dynamic programming

solution – Hamilton – Jacobi – Bellman equation –Continuous linear regulator problems

Unit III - Calculus of Variations: Functions and Functional – Maxima and minima of function– Variation of

functional – Extremal of functional – Euler Lagrange equation

Unit IV - Variational Approach to Optimal Control Problems: Necessary conditions for optimal control –

Linear regulator problems – Linear tracking problems –Pontryagin’s minimum principle and state inequality

constraints

Unit V - Iterative Numerical Techniques: Minimum control effort problems – Singular intervals in optimal

control problems – Numerical determination of optimal trajectories – Two point boundary value problems –

Methods of steepest descent – Variation of extremals – Quasilinearization – Gradient projection algorithm

Karuny

a Univ

ersity


Reference Books

1. Donald E. Kirk, Optimal Control Theory: An Introduction, Prentice – Hall networks

series, New Jersey, 2004.

2. Singiresu S. Rao “Engineering Optimization: Theory and Practice” New Age

International (P) Ltd., Publishers New Delhi – 2004.

3. Gopal. M, “Digital Control and State Variable Methods”, Tata McGraw – Hill Companies New Delhi,

2009.

4. Dimitri P. Bertsekas.’Dynamic Programming and Optimal Control’ Vol –1 Athena

Scientific, Bell mount MA, 2000.

17EI3007 ADVANCED INDUSTRIAL INSTRUMENTATION

Credits: 3:0:0

Course Objectives:

To understand the basic concepts of various process measurement.

To provide sound knowledge about various techniques used for the measurement of industrial process

parameters.

To design measurement system for process variables.

Course Outcomes:

Recognize the Basic construction, principle and working of various type of transducers/sensor to measure

physical quantities like pressure, flow, level.

Analyze, formulate and select suitable sensor and how to calibrate also knows to apply for the given

applications.

Identify technical terms and nomenclature used in industrial measurement, industrial processes, process

measurement and industrial process control

Acquire knowledge of safety practices used in the measurement and control of industrial processes

Demonstrate skills in trouble shooting problems with the measurement and control of industrial processes.

Design an instrument for a specific application

Unit I - Pressure: Manometers – Different types – Mechanical pressure measurements – Bourdon tube, bellows

and Diaphragms – Electrical pressure elements – Piezo resistive sensor –Differential capacitance sensor- Resonator

sensor – Force balance transmitter - Differential pressure transmitter and its applications – other methods – Dead

weight tester. Design a pressure sensor to measure stream pressure measurement in a boiler.

Unit II - Level:Level gauges – float gauges – Hydrostatic pressure – displacement –Echo –Ultrasonic level, radar

level, laser, magnetostrictive level – Weight – Capacitive – Radiation – Measurement of level of solids – Other

methods. Develop a procedure to measure liquid level in a boiler drum level measurement.

Unit III - Flow: Pressure based flow meters – Venturi tubes and basic principles – Volumetric flow calculations –

Mass flow calculations – Orifice plates – Pitot tube – proper installation – laminar flow meter – Other methods.

Demonstrate the working of DPT for pressure based flow meters - Variable area flow meters – Rotameters, weirs

and flumes – Velocity based flow meters – Positive displacement flow meters – True mass flow meters – coriolis

mass flow meter-Principle and constructional details of electromagnetic flow meter – different types of excitation

schemes used – different types of ultrasonic flow meters – laser doppler anemometer – vortex shedding flow meter

– target flow meter

Unit IV - Temperature: Bimetallic temperature sensors – filled bulb temperature sensor—Thermistor and RTD –

Signal conditioning of industrial RTDs and their characteristics –Three lead and four lead RTD -Temperature sensor

accessories - Thermometer - calibration of thermometer and their compensation - Thermocouples - Thermocouple

types -Connections -Laws of thermocouple - Reference compensation - software compensation - Signal conditioning

of thermocouple – Non contact temperature sensors. Design a signal conditioning circuit for thermocouple output

range of 0v-10v.

Unit V - Humidity, density and Viscosity: Humidity measurements – Density measurements – Viscosity terms –

Definition of absolute and kinematic viscosity –continuous measurement of viscosity– Industrial viscosity meter.

Construct a Humidity sensor for agriculture applications.

Karuny

a Univ

ersity


Reference Books

1. Doebelin, E.O., “Measurement Systems Application and Design”, fourth edition McGraw Hill


2. Noltingk, B.E., “Instrumentation Reference Book”, II edition Butterworth Heinemann, 1996.

3. Flow measurement, “Practical Guides for Measurement and Control”, ISA publication, 1991.

4. Anderew, W.G., “Applied Instrumentation in Process Industries” - a survey Vol-I Gulf Publishing

Company.

5. Liptak, B.G., “Process Measurement & Analysis”, IV Edition, Chilton Book Company 1995.

6. Considine, D.M., “Process Instruments and Control & Handbook", McGraw Hill 1985.

17EI3008 SYSTEM IDENTIFICATION AND ADAPTIVE CONTROL

Credits: 3:0:0

Course Objectives:

• To impart the concepts of process modeling

• To recall the various system identification techniques

• Apply adaptive control schemes in various processes

Course Outcomes:

• Classify the various models for identification

• Identify the given process model

• Validate the given model

• Design adaptive control.

• Apply the design of adaptive controllers for various industrial and real life applications

Unit I - Models of LTI systems: Linear Models - State space Models - OE model - Model sets, Structures and

Identifiability - Models for Time - varying and Non - linear systems: Models with Nonlinearities – Nonlinear state -

Space models - Black box models - Fuzzy models

Unit II - Transient response and Correlation Analysis – Frequency response analysis – Spectral Analysis – Least

Square – Recursive Least Square –Forgetting factor - Maximum Likelihood – Instrumental Variable methods

Unit III - Open and closed loop identification: Approaches – Direct and indirect identification – Joint input-

output identification – Non - linear system identification – Wiener models – Power series expansions – State

estimation techniques – Non linear identification using Neural Network and Fuzzy Logic

Unit IV - Adaptive Control: Introduction – Uses – Auto tuning – Self Tuning Regulators (STR) – Model

Reference Adaptive Control (MRAC) – Types of STR and MRAC – Different approaches to self tuning regulators

– Stochastic Adaptive control – Gain Scheduling

Unit V - Case Studies: Inverted Pendulum - Robot arm - Process control application: heat exchanger, Distillation

column - Application to power system - Ship steering control

Reference Books

1. Lennart Ljung, “System Identification Theory for the User”, Prentice Hall, Inc., NJ, 1999.

2. Torsten Soderstrom, Petre Stoica, “System Identification”, prentice Hall ` International (UK) Ltd,2000.

3. Astrom and Wittenmark,” Adaptive Control Second Edition”, Addison - Wesley Publishing Company

2001.

4. William S. Levine, “ Control Hand Book” CRC Press, Jaico Publishing House, 2000

5. Narendra and Annasamy,” Stable Adaptive Control Systems, Prentice Hall, Inc., 2005

17EI3009 INDUSTRIAL INSTRUMENTATION AND PROCESS CONTROL

LABORATORY

Credits:0:0:2

Course Objectives:

To demonstrate the various process Measurements.

To inculcate the various controller design.

To give an exposure about Programmable Logic Controller.

Karuny

a Univ

ersity


Course Outcomes:

Measure various process measurements using the appropriate instruments.

Design control algorithms for different control loops.

Write ladder logic program in Programmable Logic Controller for Control purpose.

Perform simulation for complex control schemes

Calibrate the process instruments

Assess the performance of the system in real time applications



17EI3010 VIRTUAL INSTRUMENTATION LABORATORY

Credits:0:0 :2

Course Objectives:

To strengthen the knowledge of Virtual Instrumentation.

To understand the concept of signal processing using virtual instruments

To introduce the concept of Data Acquisition using virtual instrumentation

Course Outcomes:

Understand the programming methodology.

Will be able to use the appropriate function for the given problem.

Develop simulations for real time process.

Analyze real world signals.

Interface real process with a virtual instrument.

Perform signal processing operations using virtual instrumentation.



17EI3011 EMBEDDED CONTROL SYSTEM LABORATORY

Credits: 0:0:2

Course Objective:

To impart the basic knowledge about Embedded hardware and its functions.

To learn about the interfacing of embedded hardware with embedded software for Real World

applications.

To understand the concepts of embedded programming.

Course Outcomes:

List different software tools used for system design

Review the structure of embedded software and download it to the embedded hardware.

Demonstrate the necessary of embedded hardware and the interface issues related to it.

Summarize the programming issues related to instrumentation system

Identify the various procedures for designing real time control system

Design a real time system for control applications



17EI3012 REAL TIME AND EMBEDDED CONTROL AUTOMATION

Credits: 3:0:0

Course Objectives:

To study the fundamentals of embedded system and its architecture.

To study the fundamental concepts of how process are created and controlled with OS

To study the development activities of real time system for control and automation

Karuny

a Univ

ersity


Course outcomes:

Identify the basic need of embedded systems and their usage in Instrumentation systems

Set up an interfacing circuit for real time processing and control.

Select the suitable languages and techniques for embedded system application development

Construct the real time models for control applications

Schedule the structure of RTOS for multitasking execution for real time embedded applications

Design real time system for control and automation applications using embedded processor

Unit I - Instrumentation System Design: Definitions-Characteristics -Architecture of an embedded system-

Overview of micro-controllers and microprocessors- Classifications of an embedded system - Embedded processor

architectural definitions-Typical application scenario of embedded systems- Design Process.

Unit II - Methods for Interfacing and Control: Overview of analog and digital Interfacing- LED, Seven

Segment Display, Switch Interface, Keypad Interface, Analog to Digital and Digital to analog converters, Timer

operations. Pressure sensing, Temperature sensor interfacing and serial communications

Unit III - Techniques for Embedded Instrumentation System Design: State Machine and state Tables in

embedded design. High level language descriptions of S/W for embedded system, Getting embedded software into

a target system, Simulation and Emulation of an embedded system, Software development tools.

Unit IV - Real Time Models and Operating Systems: Real time languages , OS tasks, Task states, Real time

kernel, Preemptive Kernel, Non preemptive kernel, Priority Inversion Problem, Task scheduling, Round robin

scheduling, Cooperative scheduling, Preemptive Scheduling, Petrinet Model, Interrupt Service Routine in RTOS

environment, Study of Micro C/OS-II RTOS

Unit V - Control and Automation Applications: Fundamentals of real-time processing in automation and

control, Liquid level control, Stepper Motor Control, Modern speed control- Hardware and software approach for

PWM Signal Generation, Servo Motor Control, Square Wave generator, PID Controller, Control of Electro

Pneumatic Mechanism, Elevator Control, Water Tank Control system, Embedded Implementation of temperature

control system, Remote Control applications.

Reference Books

1. RajKamal, “Embedded Systems Architecture, Programming and Design”, Tata McGrawHill , Second

Edition, 2008

2. Tim Wilhurst, “An Introduction to the Design of Small Scale Embedded Systems, Palgrave, 2004.

3. Tammy Noergaard, “Embedded Systems Architecture”, Elsevier, 2005.

4. Frank Vahid, Tony Givargis, “Embedded Systems Design”, Wiley India, 2006

17EI3013 INDUSTRIAL AUTOMATION SYSTEMS

Credits: 3:0:0

Course Objectives:

To introduce the process control philosophies

To learn the Programmable Logic controller design

To deal with computers based systems for control applications

Course Outcomes:

Explain architecture of industrial automation system

Understand various automation components and systems

Measure industrial parameters like temperature, pressure, force, displacement, speed, flow, level,

humidity and pH.

Apply fundamentals of process control for automation.

Develop Programs using programmable logic controllers for industrial automation

Use computers for industrial automation.

Unit I - Introduction to Industrial Automation: Defining Industrial Automation, Objectives and Requirements,

Role of Automation in Industry, Types of Automation System, Architecture of Industrial Automation System

Nature of Industrial Process: continuous & discrete state, sequential process, process variables and their

classification.

Karuny

a Univ

ersity


Unit II - Process Control: Introduction to process control, Problems on Continuous, Discontinuous & Composite

Controller, PID Control Tuning, Implementation of PID Controller, Control Structures of Feed Forward Feed,

Backward & Inertial Controller, Process Variables & Classification

Unit III - Automation components: Sensors for temperature, pressure, force, displacement, speed, flow, level,

humidity and pH measurement. Actuators, process control valves, power electronics devices DIAC, TRIAC, power

MOSFET and IGBT. Introduction of DC and AC servo drives for motion control.

Unit IV - Programmable logic controllers: Programmable controllers, Programmable logic controllers, Analog

digital input and output modules, PLC programming, Ladder diagram, Sequential flow chart, PLC Communication

and networking, PLC selection, PLC Installation, Advantage of using PLC for Industrial automation, Application of

PLC to process control industries.

Unit V - Computer aided measurement and control systems: Role of computers in measurement and control,

Elements of computer aided measurement and control, man-machine interface, computer aided process control

hardware, process related interfaces, Communication and networking, Industrial communication systems, Data

transfer techniques, Computer aided process control software, Computer based data acquisition system, Internet of

things (IoT) for plant automation

Reference Books: 1. John webb, “Programmable logic controllers-Principles & applications”, Prentice Hall of India,2003.

2. C. D. Johnson, “Process control instrumentation Technology, 8th


3. S.K. Singh, “Industrial Instrumentation and Control” , 3rd

Edition,The McGraw Hill,2009.

5. Andrew Parr, “Industrial control handbook” , 3rd

Edition, Newnes,1998.

17EI3014 CONTROL SYSTEM DESIGN

Credits: 3:0:0

Course Objectives

Understand the performance specification, limitations and structure of controllers

Design of controllers using root-locus and frequency domain techniques

To introduce the techniques of extending the theory on continuous systems to discrete time systems

Course Outcomes

Ability to understand the specification, limitation and structure of controllers.

Design controllers for process applications

Design a controller using Root-locus and Frequency Domain technique.

Design discrete state space systems

Acquire knowledge on state space and ability to design a controller and observer.

Design LQR and LQG for a system.

Unit I - Basics And Root-Locus Design: Design specifications-sensitivity and stability- Limitations- Controller

structure- one and two degrees of freedom- PID controllers and Lag-lead compensators- Root locus design-

Design examples

Unit II - Frequency Response Based Design: PID controllers and Lag-lead compensators – Design using Bode

plots- use of Nyquist plots and Routh-Hurwitz Criterion-Design examples

Unit III - Design In Discrete Domain: Sample and Hold devices -Discretisation - Effect of sampling on

transfer function – Discrete root locus, Nyquist plots –Jury’s stability test- Direct discrete design -Design

examples

Unit IV - Discrete State Variable Design: Effect of sampling on Controlability, observability- state and output

feedback- observers - estimated state feedback –Design examples

Unit V - LQR and LQG Design: Formulation of LQR problem- Pontryagin’s minimum principle and

Hamiltonian solutions- Ricatti’s equation – Optimal estimation- Kalman filter –solution to continuous and

discrete systems - Design examples.

Reference Books

1. M. Gopal “Modern control system Theory” New Age International, 2005.

2. Arthur G. O. Mutambara, “Design and Analysis of Control Systems”, CRC Press,

3. Indian reprint 2009.

Karuny

a Univ

ersity


4. G. F. Franklin, J. D. Powell and A. E. Naeini “Feedback Control of Dynamic Systems”, PHI

(Pearson), 2002.

5. Graham C. Goodwin, Stefan F. Graebe and Mario E. Salgado “Control system Design”, PHI

(Pearson), 2003.

6. G. F. Franklin, J. D. Powell and M Workman, “Digital Control of Dynamic Systems”, PHI (Pearson),

2002.

7. Loan D. Landau, Gianluca Zito,” Digital Control Systems, Design, Identification and Implementation”,

Springer, 2006.

8. Benjamin C. Kuo “Digital control systems”, Oxford University Press, 2004.

17EI3015 SCADA SYSTEMS AND APPLICATIONS

Credits: 3:0:0

Course Objectives:

To introduce the need for Data Acquisition.

To understand the concept of Supervisory Control.

To deal with the applications of SCADA Systems.

Course Outcomes:

Appreciate the need of Data Acquisition.

Apply the concept of Supervisory Control

Perform simulation for various processes.

Describe the programming logic involved in automation

Analyze SCADA protocol for effective communication

Apply the concept of optical and wireless techniques

Unit I - Introduction to SCADA: Data acquisition systems, Evolution of SCADA, Communication technologies,

Monitoring and supervisory functions, SCADA applications in Utility Automation, Industries

Unit II - SCADA System Components: Schemes- Remote Terminal Unit (RTU),Intelligent Electronic Devices

(IED),Programmable Logic Controller (PLC), Communication Network, SCADA Server, SCADA/HMI Systems

Unit III - SCADA Architecture: Various SCADA architectures, advantages and disadvantages of each system -

single unified standard architecture -IEC 61850

Unit IV - SCADA Communication: various industrial communication technologies -wired and wireless methods

and fiber optics. Open standard communication protocols

Unit V - SCADA Applications: Utility applications- Transmission and Distribution sector -operations, monitoring,

analysis and improvement. Industries - oil, gas and water. Case studies, Implementation, Simulation Exercises

Reference Books:

1. Stuart A. Boyer: SCADA- Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition, Instrument Society of America

Publications, USA, 1999

2. Gordon Clarke, Deon Reynders: Practical Modern SCADA Protocols: DNP3, 60870.5 and Related

Systems, Newness Publications, Oxford, UK, 2004

17EI3016 DESIGN OF LINEAR MULTIVARIABLE CONTROL SYSTEMS

Credits: 3:0:0

Course Objectives:

To inculcate the knowledge of Multivariable control systems.

To design controller for multivariable control systems.

To apply the design for various applications.

Course Outcomes:

Apply the concept of Multivariable control systems.

Design controller for multivariable control systems.

Use the corresponding controller synthesis techniques.

To inculcate the knowledge of P&ID for multivariable processes.

Testing the stability of multivariable control system

Karuny

a Univ

ersity


Derive the mathematical model of a system

Unit I - Analysis: System representations, return difference matrix, stability theory, multivariable poles and

zeros.

Unit II - Design Methods: Design criteria, LQG design methods (including the optimal linear quadratic regulator

and the Kalman filter), norm based methods, robust stability and performance.

Unit III - Advanced Design Methods: H-infinity design techniques, including the generalized regulator

problem.

Unit IV - Reduction Techniques: Model reduction, including modal and balanced truncation.

Unit V - Design examples: Use of software for the design of controllers for industrial processes such as

distillation column, reactors.

Reference Books:


2. Gopal M, “Digital Control and State variable Methods”, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2003.

3. Charles R. Slivinsky, Donald G. Schultz, Lynn E. Weaver, “The design of linear multivariable control

systems using modern control theory”, 1969.

4. Ying-Jyi Paul Wei, “Frequency-domain approaches to linear multivariable control system designs, 1979.

5. Ogata K, “Modern Control Engineering”, Pearson Education, New Jersey, 2009.

17EI3017 EMBEDDED INSTRUMENTATION

Credits: 3:0:0

Course Objective:



To deal with the concepts of embedded instrumentation systems

Course Outcomes:

Infer the principle and characteristics of instrumentation system



Develop the Virtual Instrumentation in the Engineering Process

Design the computer based instrumentation for real time applications

Create a prototype using data acquisition board

Unit I – Instrumentation: Introduction - Functional elements of an Instrumentation system. Classification of an

instruments - Transducers- Static Characteristics - Dynamic Characteristics, Errors and error analysis

UnitI I - Sensors And Transducers: Introduction Displacement, position and proximity sensors - Potentiometer-

Capacitive element -Differential transformers - Eddy current proximity sensors - Inductive proximity switch -

Optical encoders - Hall effect sensors Velocity and motion - Pyro electric sensors - Liquid flow - Liquid level -

Floats - Differential pressure - Temperature - Bimetallic strips - Light sensors

Unit III - Virtual Instrumentation: Introduction - Evolution of Virtual Instrumentation - Architecture of Virtual

Instrumentation - Virtual Instruments Vs traditional Instruments Creating Virtual Instruments Using LabVIEW

Virtual Instrumentation in the Engineering Process

Unit IV - Programming Techniques: LabVIEW Environment- Dataflow Programming - Programming Concepts

of VI - Control Structures - Selection Structures – Arrays - Clusters - Inputs and Outputs

Unit V - PC based data acquisition system - Interfacing techniques to IBM PC plug – In data acquisition boards

Interface buses: PCI, PXI, VXI

Reference Books

1. Jackson R G, “Novel Sensors and Sensing”, Institute of Physics Publishing, Bristol and Philadelphia,

2004.

2. Doeblin E.O, “Measurement Systems– Applications and Design”, McGraw Hill,New York, 2011.

3. Kalsi H S, “Electronics Instrumentation”, Second Edition, Tata Mcgrawhill, New Delhi, 2010

Karuny

a Univ

ersity


4. John Park ,Steve Mackay,” Practical Data Acquisition for Instrumentation and Control Systems” Elsevier

2003.

5. Mathivanan “PC– based instrumentation: concepts and practice” PHI, 2008

6. Dr.S.Renganathan, “Transducer Engineering”, Allied publishers, New Delhi,2003.


8. S. Sumathi and P. Surekha , “LabVIEW based Advanced Instrumentation Systems” Springer, 2007.

9. H K P Neubert, “Instrument Transducers”, Oxford University Press, Cambridge,2000.

17EI3018 NETWORKS AND PROTOCOLS FOR INSTRUMENTATION

AND CONTROL

Credits: 3:0:0

Course Objectives:

Understand the basics of networking

Comprehend the significance of different Industrial Interface Standards

Apply the appropriate interface for different applications

Course Outcomes:

Identify the conventional point to point and multipoint interface standards

Classify the different channel access methods

Choose the appropriate Industrial communication network

Explain the concept of Distributed Control System

Justify the need of wireless network

Describe the advanced wireless communication standards

Unit I - Introduction and basic principles: Protocols – Physical standards – ISO/OSI reference –UART - Serial

data communications interface standards –RS232,422,,423,449,485 interface standard – The 4 to 20mA current loop

–Parallel Interface - IEEE 488 – USB.

Unit II - HART and Field Bus: Evolution of signal standards – HART communication protocol – Communication

modes – HART networks – Control system interface – HART and OSI model – Filed bus introduction – General

field bus architecture – Basic requirements of field bus standard – Field bus topology – Inter operability

Unit III - Distributed Control System: Evolution – Architectures – Comparison – Local control unit – Process

interfacing issues – Communication facilities.

Unit IV - Interfaces in DCS: Operator interfaces - Low level and high level operator interfaces – Operator

displays - Engineering interfaces – Low level and high level engineering interfaces – General purpose computers

in DCS.

Unit V - Wireless Communication: Wireless sensor networks: Architecture – Sensor network scenario. Wireless

HART – Existing Wireless Options: IEEE 802.15.4 - ISA 100 – Zigbee – Bluetooth – their relevance to industrial

applications

Reference Books:

1. Mackay, S., Wright,E., Reynders,D., and Park,J., “Practical Industrial Data Networks: Design, Installation

and Troubleshooting”, Newnes Publication, Elsevier, 2004.

2. Buchanan,W., “Computer Busses: Design and Application”, CRC Press, 2000.

3. Bowden,R., “HART Application Guide”, HART Communication Foundation, 1999.

4. Bela G.Liptak, “Instrument Engineers’ Handbook, Volume 3 : Process Software and Digital Networks”, 4th

Edition, CRC Press, 2011.

5. Berge, J., “Field Buses for Process Control: Engineering, Operation, and Maintenance”, ISA Press, 2004.

6. Lawrence (Larry) M. Thompson and Tim Shaw, “Industrial Data Communications”, 5th Edition, ISA

Press, 2015.

7. NPTEL Lecture notes on, ”Computer Networks” by Department of Electrical Engg., IIT Kharagpur.

Karuny

a Univ

ersity


17EI3019 MULTI SENSOR DATA FUSION

Credits: 3:0:0

Course Objectives:

To impart the concepts multi sensor data fusion technique.

To give an exposure about the data fusion algorithm

To introduce the concepts of filter design

Course Outcomes:

Understand the concept of Multi sensor data fusion

Develop algorithms for data fusion

Analyse the practical issues in estimation

Classify the different types of advanced filtering concepts

Use multi sensor data fusion technique for practical applications

Design a Kalman filter

Unit I - Sensors and sensor data - Use of multiple sensors - Fusion applications - The inference hierarchy -Output

data - Data fusion model - Architectural concepts and issues - Benefits of data fusion - Mathematical tools used –

Algorithms - Co-ordinate transformations - Rigid body motion – Dependability and Markov chains - Meta-

heuristics

Unit II - Taxonomy of algorithms for multisensor data fusion - Data association - Identity declaration

Unit III - Kalman filtering - Practical aspects of Kalman filtering - Extended Kalman filters - Decision level

identify fusion - Knowledge based approaches

Unit IV - Data information filter - Extended information filter - Decentralized and scalable decentralized

estimation - Sensor fusion and approximate agreement - Optimal sensor fusion using range trees recursively-

Distributed dynamic sensor fusion

Unit V - Tessellated – Trees - Graphs and function - Representing ranges and uncertainty in data structures -

Designing optimal sensor systems with in dependability bounds - Implementing data fusion system

Reference Books

1. David L. Hall and Sonya AH McMullen, Mathematical techniques in Multisensor data fusion 2nd

Edition,

Artech House, Inc., Norwood, MA, March,2004.

2. R.R. Brooks and S.S. Iyengar, Multisensor Fusion: Fundamentals and Applications with Software,

Prentice Hall Inc., New Jersey, 1998.

3. Arthur Gelb, Applied Optimal Estimation, The Analytic Sciences Corporation, M.I.T. Press, 2001.

4. James V. Candy, Signal Processing: The Model Based Approach, McGraw –Hill Book Company, 1987.

17EI3020 NON LINEAR CONTROL SYSTEMS

Credits: 3:0:0

Course Objectives:

To describe the non-linear systems theory and its components

To construct a general systems model using inputs, throughputs and a feedback loop

To understand the concept of stability of control system and methods of stability analysis

Course Outcomes:

Assess the advantages and disadvantages of the different nonlinear methods,

Choose methods for analysis and design of a dynamical system

Apply the methods for analysis and design of nonlinear control systems

Assess the advantages and limitations of the resulting nonlinear control system

Analyze the stability of non linear systems

Evaluate the importance of sliding mode control

Unit I - Introduction to Linearization Process: Behavior of non – Linear systems – Common non linearites in

control system –Investigation of non-linear systems- Common physical nonlinearities -Feed back linearization,

Fourier series method.

Unit II - Describing Function: Fundamentals -Describing function of dead zone non-Linearity saturation non-

Karuny

a Univ

ersity


linearity, relay with dead zone non-linearity, blacklash non-linearity - model reference adaptive control, stable and

unstable limit cycles

Unit III - Phase Plane Analysis: Concept of phase plane analysis, construction of phase portraits – Using analytical

method – Isoclines, Singular points – Stable, Unstable complex roots – Real roots – Limit cycles.

Unit IV - Stability analysis: Lyapunov stability definitions – lyapunov stability theorem – lyapunov function for

non linear system – krasovski method – variable gradient method- Lyapunov stability non-autonomous system.

Unit V - Sliding Mode Control: Variable structures systems – basic concepts – sliding mode control algorithm –

sliding mode controller for a two link robot – reinforcement learning control – Q-learning –neural Q learning –

temporal difference learning

Reference Books

1. M. Gopal, “Digital Control and State Variable Methods, Convention and Intelligent Control System”, Mc

Graw Hill Inc., New Delhi, Third Edition, 2009.

2. Katsuhiko Ogata, “Modern Control Engineering”, Prentice Hall Inc., 2001

3. John K Khali, ”Non Linear Automatic Control”, Mc Graw Hill Inc., 2001

17EI3021 ROBUST CONTROL

Credits: 3:0:0

Course Objectives

To introduce norms, random spaces and robustness measures

To understand H2 optimal control and estimation techniques

To introduce Hinfinity optimal control techniques

Course Outcomes

Understand the structured and unstructured uncertainty of robustness.

Design a H2 optimal controller and to implement kalman Bucy filter .

Design a H-Infinity optimal control using Riccati and LMI Approach.

Synthesis the Robust Controller and small gain theorem.

Implement a robust Controller for CSTR and Distillation Column.

Understand synthesis techniques for robust controllers and illustrate through case studies

Unit I - Introduction: Norms of vectors and Matrices – Norms of Systems – Calculation of operator

Norms – vector Random spaces- Specification for feedback systems – Co-prime factorization and Inner

functions –structured and unstructured uncertainty- robustness

Unit II - H2 Optimal Control: Linear Quadratic Controllers – Characterization of H2 optimal controllers

– H2 optimal estimation-Kalman Bucy Filter – LQG controller

Unit III - H-Infinity Optimal Control-Riccatti Approach: Formulation – Characterization of H-infinity sub-

optimal controllers by means of Riccati equations – H-infinity control with full information – Hinfinity estimation

Unit IV - H-Infinity Optimal Control -LMI Approach: Formulation – Characterization of H-infinity sub-

optimal controllers by means of LMI Approach – Properties of H-infinity sub-optimal controllers – H-infinity

synthesis with pole- placement constraints

Unit V - Synthesis of Robust Controllers & Case Studies: Synthesis of Robust Controllers – Small Gain

Theorem – D-K –iteration- Control of Inverted Pendulum- Control of CSTR – Control of Aircraft – Robust

Control of Second-order Plant- Robust Control of Distillation Column

Reference Books

1. U. Mackenroth “Robust Control Systems: Theory and Case Studies”, Springer International

Edition, 2010.

2. J. B. Burl, “ Linear optimal control H2 and H-infinity methods”, Addison W Wesley, 1998

3. D. Xue, Y.Q. Chen, D. P. Atherton, "Linear Feedback Control Analysis and Design

Karuny

a Univ

ersity


17EI3022 PROCESS MODELLING AND SIMULATION

Credits: 3: 0: 0

Course Objectives:

Understand the concepts of Process Modelling.

Analyze lumped and distributed parameter models

Introduce grey box models and Empirical models

Course Outcomes:

Understand the need for Process Modelling.

Classify the different types of Models

Describe lumped and distributed parameter models

Apply grey box models and Empirical Models

Examine the solutions for lumped parameter models

Comprehend finite element and finite volume methods

Unit I - Introduction to Modelling : a systematic approach to model building- classification of models -

Conservation principles- thermodynamic principles of process systems.

Unit II - Development of steady state models: lumped parameter systems- Dynamic models: lumped parameter

systems- distributed parameter systems

Unit III - Development of grey box models: Empirical model building- Statistical model calibration and

validation- Population balance models.

Unit IV - Solution strategies for lumped parameter models: Stiff differential equations- Solution methods for

initial value and boundary value problems- Euler’s method- R-K method- finite difference methods-Solving the

problems using MATLAB.

Unit V - Solution strategies for distributed parameter models: Solving parabolic, elliptic and hyperbolic-partial

differential equations-Finite element and finite volume methods.

Reference Books:

1. K. M. Hangos and I. T. Cameron, “Process Modelling and Model Analysis”, Academic

2. Press, 2001.

3. B. Wayne Bequette, “Process control: modeling, design, and simulation”, Pearson

4. Education Inc., 2003.

5. Singiresu S. Rao, “Applied Numerical Methods for Engineers and Scientists” Prentice Hall,

6. Upper Saddle River, NJ, 2001

17EI3023 ADVANCED PROCESSOR FOR CONTROL AND AUTOMATION

Credits : 3:0:0

Course Objectives:

To Learn Recent Trends in Advanced Microcontroller Applications.

To Learn Microcontroller Implementation for Control Applications

To Understand Programming with 8 and 32 bit Microcontrollers.

Course Outcomes:

Identification of various Processors and Understanding of their On Chip Peripherals

and Functions.

Knowledge on Predict the Suitable Processor for the Required Applications for Control

Automation.

Solving problems using instruction set of various processor

Design and Development of Interfacing Circuits for Microcontroller based Applications.

Recognize suitable processors/controllers for real time applications

Appraise the use of Advanced Processors by Interfacing Sensors and Actuators for real

Time Automation.

Karuny

a Univ

ersity


Unit I - 8051 Microcontroller: Overview of 8 bit Microcontroller – General Architecture, Selection, On Chip

resources, – Memory Organization–Addressing Modes – Instruction Set – I/O Ports-–Counters and Timers –

Interrupt – UART – Analog to Digital Converter – Relay Interfacing – Temperature Sensor Interfacing.

Unit II - AVR Microcontroller: Introduction - Architecture- Hardware Components- I/O Interfacing-Serial

Communication-Timer/Counter- Interrupt- Pulse Width Modulation-Drive speed control-Throttle Angle Control –

On Chip ADC-Air Flow Rate Sensor Interfacing

Unit III - Arm Processor: Arcon RISC Machine – Architectural Inheritance – Core & Architectures - ARM

Programmer’s Model – CPU Registers – Pipeline - Interrupts – Memory Organization - ARM processor family –

Coprocessors - Instruction set – Thumb instruction set – Instruction cycle timings-Case Study: Digital Cruise

Control

Unit IV - Raspberry Pi Module: Onboard Processor – Linux OS - Integrated Development Environment-

Programming with Raspbian- Interfacing: I/O Devices – I2C Device – Sensors – Serial Communication-Case

Study: Onboard Diagnostic System.

Unit V - Blackfin Processor: Core Architecture- Memory Structure – Memory Port Flash Control– Addressing

Unit – Sequencer - Event Handling- Data Files - Timer Operation - Interrupt Processing- Hardware Errors -

Exception Handling – JTAG Test and Emulation-Case Study: Onboard Diagnostic System.

Reference Books

1. Rajkamal, “Microcontroller Architecture, Programming, Interfacing and Systems Design”, Pearson

Education India, 2009.

2. Kenneth Ayala, “The 8051 Microcontroller – Architecture, Programming & Application”, 2nd

Edition,

Thomson Delmar Learning, 2004

3. Muhammad Ali Mazidi, “The 8051 Microcontroller and Embedded Systems using Assembly and C”,

Prentice Hall, 2000.

4. Muhammad Ali Mazidi, “The AVR Microcontroller and Embedded Systems using Assembly and C”,

Prentice Hall, 2011.

5. Steve Furber, “ARM System On-Chip Architecture”, 2nd

Edition, Pearson Education, 2009.

6. Eben Upton, “Raspberry Pi User Guide”, 3rd

Edition, Wiley, 2016

7. Woon Seng Gan, Sen M Kuo, “Embedded Signal Processing with Micro Signal Architecture” January

2007, Wiley-IEEE Press.

17EI3024 ADVANCED EMBEDDED SIGNAL PROCESSING

Credits: 3:0:0

Course Objective:

To develop skills for understanding the requirements of the Real Time Digital Signal Processing

Algorithms.

To develop skills to comprehend the Digital Signal Processor and FPGA Architectures.

To develop skills to implement the signal processing algorithms using the Digital Signal Processors and

FPGA.

Course Outcome:

Acquire the knowledge & concepts of basic digital signal processing techniques.

Comprehends the Architectural features of Digital Signal Processors and FPGA .

Applies the features of DSP and FPGA Program to achieve speed in Digital Signal Processing Algorithms.

Analyze the Data path Architectures of DSP and FPGA.

Design the program for Signal Processing Algorithms for both DSP and FPGA.

Contrast the difference between Signal Processing Algorithm implementation in DSP and FPGA.

Unit I - Overview Of Digital Signal Processing And Applications: Signals and their origin– Sampling theorem

and discrete time system – Convolution – DSP in the sample and transform domain– Fast Fourier Transform –

Digital Filters – Multi–rate Signal Processing

Unit II - Introduction To Programmable DSP: Multiplier and Multiplier Accumulator –

Modified Bus structures and Memory Access schemes in P – DSPs – Multiple Access Memory

– Multi – ported Memory – VLIW Architecture–Pipelining –Special Addressing Modes in P –

DSPs – On – Chip Peripherals

Karuny

a Univ

ersity


Unit III - Architecture Of TMS320C5x: Introduction – Bus Structure – Central Arithmetic

Logic Unit – Auxiliary Register ALU – Parallel Logic Unit – Program controller – On Chip Peripherals –

Assembly Language Syntax – Addressing Modes – Normal pipeline operation, Convolution using MAC, MACD

instructions – FIR filter implementation

Unit IV - Architecture of TMS320C54x And TMS320C6x: Architecture of TMS320C54X- Bus Structure – Data

Path - Normal Pipe line operation – FIR filter implementation – VLIW Architecture of TMS320C6X- Bus

Structure – Data path – Normal Pipe line operation – Serial/Partially Parallel/ Fully Parallel FIR filter

implementation.

Unit V - DSP With FPGA: FPGA Technology pros and cons behind FPGA and programmable signal processors,

FPGA structure, Implementation of basic MAC Unit, FIR filter, IIR filter in FPGA

Reference Books

1. Venkataramani B & M.Bhaskar, “Digital Signal Processor”, TMH, New Delhi, 2003.

2. Meyer U – Baese “Digital Signal Processing with Field Programmable GateArrays”, Spinger, New York,

2003.

3. Michael John Sabastian Smith, “ Application Specific Integrated Circuits”,Pearson Education,USA,2005.

4. Stephen Brown, ZvonkoVranesic, “Fundamentals of Digital Logic with VHDLDesign”, McGraw – Hill

Higher Education, New Delhi – 2005.

17EI3025 PROGRAMMABLE DEVICES FOR INDUSTRIAL AUTOMATION

Credits: 3:0:0

Course Objectives

To expose the students to the fundamentals of sequential system design, Asynchronous circuits,

To teach Programmable Device architecuture and programming

To introduce hardware descriptive lanugages for industrial automation

Course outcome:

Acquire the knowledge & concepts of basic Sequential circuit design.

Comprehends the Architectural features of PLDs and FPGA.

Applies the features of PLDs to design synchronous circuits.

Analyze the FPGA Architectures for process automation.

Develop program for real time applications using descriptive languages.

Choose FPGA architectures for industrial automation applications.

Unit I - Sequential Circuit Design: Analysis of Clocked Synchronous Sequential Networks (CSSN) Modelling of

CSSN – State Stable Assignment and Reduction – Design of CSSN – ASM Chart – ASM Realization. Analysis of

Asynchronous Sequential Circuit (ASC) – Flow Table Reduction – Races in ASC – State

Assignment Problem and the Transition Table – Design of ASC – Static and Dynamic Hazards –Essential Hazards

– Designing Vending Machine Controller.

Unit II - Synchronous Design Using Programmable Devices: Programming Techniques - Re-Programmable

Devices Architecture- Function blocks, I/O blocks, Interconnects, Realize combinational, Arithmetic, Sequential

Circuit with Programmable Logic Devices.

Unit III - Reconfigurable architecture and programming: PLDs – Xilinx FPGA – Xilinx 2000, Xilinx 3000,

Xilinx 4000- Altera Max – ACT-implementation of combinational and sequential circuits with FPGA and PLDs.

Process automation –flow, pressure and level control using FPGA

Unit IV - High level descriptive languages and programming- VHDL and VERILOG: Design flow process –

Software tools – Data objects – Data types – Data operators – Entities and Architectures – Component declaration

and instantiation. Concurrent signal assignment – conditional signal assignment – selected signal assignment –

concurrent and sequential statements – Data flow, Behavioral and Structural Modeling - Test bench –

Verilog: Design methodology – Modules – Ports – Basic concepts – Operators – Nos. specification – Data types –

Arrays – Parameters – Gate delays – Operator types – Conditional statements – Multiway branches - Loops -

Switch – Modeling elements.

Unit V - FPGA for industrial automation

Home automation-motor control- industrial networking with Xilinx devices- machine vision camera solutions-

Monitoring processes and equipment- Automated system shut-down - Detecting dangerous situations.

Karuny

a Univ

ersity


Reference Books:

1. Charles H. Roth Jr., “Digital Systems design using VHDL”, Cengage Learning, 2010.

2. Samir Palnitkar, “Verilog HDL”, Pearson Publication, II Edition. 2003.

3. Muhammed Abdelati, “Modern Automation Systems”, University Science Press, 2009

4. Stephen Brown and Zvonk Vranesic, “Fundamentals of Digital Logic with VHDL Deisgn”, Tata McGraw

Hill, 2002

5. Stephen Brown and Zvonk Vranesic, “Fundamentals of Digital Logic with verilog Deisgn”, Tata McGraw

Hill, 2007

6. Donald G. Givone, “Digital principles and Design”, Tata McGraw Hill 2002.

17EI3026 FPGA CONTROL DESIGN LABORATORY

Credits: 0:0:2

Course Objective:

To illustrate theoretical concepts and to give the students the opportunity to build and test the digital

systems.

To learn the use of the Xilinx ISE tool for designing and implementing digital systems on FGPA.

To implement circuits for control applications.

Course Outcome:

Compare different FPGA architectures.

Write hardware descriptive language program to digital circuits

Design combinational and sequential digital systems using FPGA

Analyze various control process and implement the same in FPGA

Identify tool for FPGA implementation

Implement and test control applications using FPGA



17EI3027 EMBEDDED VIRTUAL INSTRUMENTATION LABORATORY

Credits: 0:0:2

Course Objective:


To understand the concept of signal processing

To introduce the concept of Data Acquisition.

Course Outcomes:

Identify virtual instrumentation representation for simple circuits

Choose VI to develop real time applications

Apply block diagram concept for developing simple digital circuits

Design embedded applications using VI

Analyze various embedded algorithms and implement the same using VI

Specify and develop control system methods using VI



17EI3028 EMBEDDED AUTOMOTIVE SYSTEMS

Credits: 3:0:0

Course Objectives:

To Understand the Current Trends in Automobiles

To Understand basic Sensor Arrangements and its Types

To Understand the Embedded Processors

Karuny

a Univ

ersity


Course outcomes:

Summarize the Automobile systems and the Requirements of Electronic Sensors and Actuators.

Identification of Suitable Sensors and Design the Automotive Electronics for Real Time Applications.

Modeling of Automotive Systems and Diagnostic Tools to Test and Calibrate the System Parts.

Interpretation of Automobile Concepts and Practice the Control Systems for Real Time Automotive

Applications.

Predict the Advance Control Systems in order to improve the Engine Performance and Control.

Evaluation of Automotive Systems by Implementing Advanced Communication Systems like GLS,

GPSS, GMS

Unit I - Trends in Automobile – Electronic Engine Management systems: Sensors – ECU – Actuators –

Electronic Dashboard Instruments: Information gauges – Displays – Onboard Diagnostic Systems: Fault Code

Display – DFI Oxygen sensor Test – Switch Test Series – Engine Data Display.

Unit II - Security, Warning Systems – Vehicle Motion Control: Cruise Control – Antilock Breaking –

Electronic Suspension Control – Electronic Steering Control – Sensor, Actuators Interfacing: Airflow rate Sensor

– Crankshaft Angular position Sensor – Throttle Angle Sensor – Temperature Sensor – Exhaust Gas Recirculation

Actuator – Electronic Motors.

Unit III - Basic Sensor Arrangements – Sensor types – Electronic Ignition Systems: Constant Dwell – Constant

Energy – Hall Effect Pulse Generator – Dwell Angle Control – Closed Loop Dwell – Capacitor Discharge

Ignition.

Unit IV - Solid State Ignition System: Triggering – Switching Devices – Digital Engine Control System –

Distributor Less Ignition – Integrated Engine Control: Combined Ignition – Fuel management – Exhaust Emission

Control.

Unit V - Automotive Embedded Systems – PIC – Free Scale Microcontrollers – Recent Advance like GLS,

GPSS, GMS.

Reference Books

1. William B. Riddens, “Understanding Automotive Electronics” , 5th

Edition, Butterworth Hennimann

Woburn, 6th

Edition, 2003

2. Tom Denton, Automobile Electrical and Electronic Systems, Third Edition, Taylor & Francis, 2012

3. Jack Erjavec, “Automotive technology: System Approach, 5th

edition, Delmar Cengage Learning, 2009.

4. Tom Weather Jr. & Cland C. Ilunter, “Automotive Computers and Control System” Prentice Hall Inc.,

New Jersey., 2001

5. Robert Bosch, “Automotive Electrics and Automotive Electronics: Systems & Components Networking &

Hybrid Drive”, 5th

edition, Springer, 2007

17EI3029 EMBEDDED BASED BIOMEDICAL SENSORS AND SIGNAL CONDITIONING

Credits: 3:0:0

Course Objectives:

To understand bioelectric amplifiers

To discuss filter and circuits

To introduce application of signal conditioning in biomedical field

Course Outcomes:

Identify the method to apply various signal conditioning circuits

Set up an Interface circuit for bioelectric signals with embedded systems

Construct the application of signal condition circuits for biomedical field.

Design a biomedical real time system based on various sensor with embedded system

Select the suitable microcontroller for system development

Apply embedded concepts for biomedical applications

Unit I - Measurement system: Measurement systems – Significance of Measurements, Methods of

Measurements – Direct and Indirect Methods, Classification of Instruments –Deflection and Null Type,

Generalised Measurement System, Characteristics of Instruments – Static and Dynamic, Types of errors, Error

Karuny

a Univ

ersity


analysis, Units and Standards. Study of biological sensors in the human body and their basic mechanism of

action.

Unit II - BioElectric Amplifier: Bioelectric amplifiers- General-purpose linear and non-linear electronic circuits

typically found in industrial applications- Instrumentation amplifiers, Transducer bridge Amplifier.

Unit III - Analysis of filtering circuit: Frequency and time domain analysis of low pass, high pass, band pass,

and band stop filters. Filter class- Frequency discriminators, oscillators, multivibrators - Amplifier selection for a

variety of biomedical sensors, Wheatstone bridge design, Active filter design using standard approaches

Unit IV - Study of various transducer for biomedical applications: Transducers - Definition, Classification of

transducers, Characteristics of transducers, types of Transducers – Temperature transducers, Displacement

transducers, potentiometric, resistive strain gauges, inductive displacement, capacitive displacement transducer.

Pressure transducer, Blood pressure measurement, measurement of intracranial pressure, LVDT transducers,

capacitive and piezo-electric type. Biosensors,

Unit V - Microcontroller based biomedical system development: Front-end analogue circuit design for EMG,

ECG, EEG ,Front-end analogue circuit design for limb movement sensing, Power supply topologies for

biomedical instruments, Microcontroller based ECG-continuous monitoring systems for pulse rate, temperature,

B.P, Respiration.

Reference Books

1. R. B. Northrop, “Analysis and Application of Analog Electronic Circuits to Biomedical Instrumentation”,

2nd ed., CRC Press, 2012.

2. J. D. Bronzino, “Biomedical Engineering Handbook”, 3rd ed.,CRC Press & IEEE Press, 2006.

3. Ramón Pallás-Areny, John G. Webster,”Sensors and Signal Conditioning”, 2nd ed., Wiley publishers,

2000.

17EI3030 MEMS TECHNOLOGY FOR EMBEDDED DESIGN

Credits: 3:0:0

Course Objectives:

To teach the students properties of materials , microstructure and fabrication methods.

To teach the design and modeling of Electrostatic sensors and actuators.

To teach the characterizing thermal sensors and actuators through design and modeling

Course outcomes:

Familiar with micro fabrication and materials

Compare various sensors and actuators

Develop embedded application based on MEMS

Explain the features of NEMS device in real time applications

Describe various medical application based on MEMS

Distinguish various sensors and actuators depending on the application

Unit I - Micro-Fabrication, Materials And Electro-Mechanical Conepts : Overview of micro fabrication –

Silicon and other material based fabrication processes – Concepts: Conductivity of semiconductors-Crystal planes

and orientation-stress and strain-flexural beam bending analysis-torsional deflections-Intrinsic stress- resonant

frequency and quality factor.

Unit II - Electrostatic Sensors And Actuation : Principle, material, design and fabrication of parallel plate

capacitors as electrostatic sensors and

actuators-Applications

Unit III - Thermal Sensing And Actuation : Principle, material, design and fabrication of thermal couples,

thermal bimorph sensors, thermal

resistor sensors-Applications.

Unit IV - Piezoelectric Sensing And Actuation :Piezoelectric effect-cantilever piezo electric actuator model-

properties of piezoelectric materials-Applications. Piezoresistive sensors, Magnetic actuation

Unit V - Case Studies : Micro fluidics applications, Medical applications, Optical MEMS.-NEMS Devices-

multisensor module for embedded design with IOT- web based system

Karuny

a Univ

ersity


Reference Books

1. Chang Liu, “Foundations of MEMS”, Pearson International Edition, 2006.

2. Marc Madou , “Fundamentals of microfabrication”,CRC Press, 1997.

3. Boston , “Micromachined Transducers Sourcebook”,WCB McGraw Hill, 1998.

4. M.H.Bao “Micromechanical transducers :Pressure sensors, accelerometers and gyroscopes”, Elsevier,

Newyork, 2000.

17EI3031 EMBEDDED PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT

Credits: 3:0:0

Course Objectives:


To understand the concept of signal processing

To introduce the concept of Data Acquisition.

Course Outcomes:

Describe the recent trends in embedded systems design with understand the integration of customer

requirements in product design.

Identify structural approach to concept generation, creativity, selection and testing

Design of Consumer specific product, its Reverse Engineering manufacture , economic analysis and

product architecture.

Develop an improved Employability and entrepreneurship capacity due to knowledge up gradation on

recent trends in embedded systems design.

Analyze an embedded concept towards a product development

Develop an embedded based product for multi real time applications.

Unit I - Concepts Of Product Development: Need for Product Development- Generic product Development

Process Phases- Product Development Process Flows, Product Development organization structures-Strategic

importance of Product Planning process –Product Specifications-Target Specifications-Plan and establish product

specifications - integration of customer, designer, material supplier and process planner, Competitor and customer

-Understanding customer and behavior analysis. Concept Generation, Five Step Method-Basics of Concept

selection- Creative thinking –creativity and problem solving- creative thinking methods generating design

concepts-systematic methods for designing –functional decomposition – physical decomposition –Product

Architecture--changes - variety – component Standardization –example case study on Conceptual Design of

DeskJet Printer as a product.

Unit II - Introduction To Approaches In Product Development : Product development management -

establishing the architecture - creation - clustering –geometric layout development - Fundamental and incidental

interactions - related system level design issues - secondary systems -architecture of the chunks - creating detailed

interface specifications-Portfolio Architecture- competitive benchmarking- Approach – Support tools for the

benchmarking process, trend analysis- Setting product specifications- product performance analysis -Industrial

Design, Robust Design – Testing Methodologies.

Unit III - Industrial Design : Integrate process design - Managing costs - Robust design –need for Involving

CAE, CAD, CAM, IDE tools –Simulating product performance and manufacturing processes electronically –

Estimation of Manufacturing cost-reducing the component costs and assembly costs – Minimize system

complexity - Prototype basics - Principles of prototyping - Planning for prototypes- Economic & Cost Analysis -

Understanding and representing tasks-baseline project planning -accelerating the project, project execution.

Unit IV - Development Based On Reverse Engineering : Basics on Data reverse engineering – Three data

Reverse engineering strategies – Finding reusable software components – Recycling real-time embedded software

based approach and its logical basics-Cognitive approach to program understated – Integrating formal and

structured methods in reverse engineering – Incorporating reverse engineering for consumer product

development-ethical aspects in reverse engineering.

Unit V - Developing Embedded Product Design : Discussions on Creating Embedded System

Architecture(with at least one Case study example: Mobile Phone /Adaptive Cruise Controller/ Robonoid about )

-Architectural Structures- Criteria in selection of Hardware & Software Components, product design by

Performance Testing, Costing, Benchmarking ,Documentation

Karuny

a Univ

ersity


Reference Books

1. George E.Dieter, Linda C.Schmidt, “Engineering Design”, McGraw-Hill International Edition,4th

Edition,

2009, ISBN 978-007-127189-9

2. Karl T. Ulrich, Steven D Eppinger, "Effective Product Design and Development", Tata Mc Graw Hill,

New Delhi, 2003,

3. Kevin Otto, Kristin Wood, “Product Design”, Indian Reprint 2004, Pearson Education, ISBN

9788177588217

4. Yousef Haik, T. M. M. Shahin, “Engineering Design Process”, 2nd Edition Reprint, Cengage Learning,

2010, ISBN 0495668141

5. Clive L.Dym, Patrick Little, “Engineering Design: A Project-based Introduction”, 3rd Edition, John Wiley

& Sons, 2009.

17EI3032 ROBOTICS AND FACTORY AUTOMATION

Credits: 3:0:0

Course Objectives

To educate the fundamental concepts or robotics

To educate on the robot drives and power transmission systems

To educate vision system for robotics

Course Outcomes

Recall the concept of robotics

Summarize building blocks of automation

Describe different sensors for robotic applications.

Analyze vision system for robotics.

Identify any intelligent automation system

Design ladder diagram for automation system

Unit I - Fundamental concepts of robotics: History, Present status and future trends in Robotics and automation -

Laws of Robotics - Robot definitions - Robotics systems and robot anatomy - Specification of Robots - resolution,

repeatability and accuracy of a manipulator. Robotic applications.

Robot drives and power transmission systems: Robot drive mechanisms, hydraulic – electric – servomotor

stepper motor - pneumatic drives, Mechanical transmission method - Gear transmission, Belt drives, cables, Roller

chains, Link - Rod systems - Rotary-to-Rotary motion conversion, Rotary-to-Linear motion conversion, Rack and

Pinion drives, Lead screws, Ball Bearing screws, End effectors – Types.

Unit II - Sensors: Principle of operation, types and selection of Position& velocity sensors, Potentiometers,

Encoders, Resolvers, LVDT, Tacho generators, Proximity sensors. Limit switches – Tactile sensors - Touch

sensors - Force and torque sensors.

Unit III - Vision systems for robotics: Robot vision systems, Illumination techniques, Image capture- solid state

cameras – Image representation - Gray scale and color images, image sampling and quantization - Image

processing and analysis –, Image data reduction – Segmentation - Feature extraction - Object Recognition- Image

capturing and communication - JPEG, MPEGs and H.26x standards, packet video, error concealment- Image

texture analysis.

Unit IV - Transformations and kinematics: Matrix representation- Homogeneous transformation matrices - The

forward and inverse kinematics of robots - D-H representation of forward kinematic equations of robots.

Unit V - PLC: Building blocks of automation, Controllers – PLC- Role of PLC in Robotics& FA - Architecture of

PLC - Advantages - Types of PLC - Types of Programming - Simple process control programs using Relay Ladder

Logic and Boolean logic

methods - PLC arithmetic functions.

Factory automation: Flexible Manufacturing Systems concept - Automatic feeding lines, ASRS, transfer lines,

automatic inspection - Computer Integrated Manufacture - CNC, intelligent automation. Industrial networking, bus

standards, HMI Systems, DCS and SCADA, Wireless controls.

Reference Books

1. Richard D Klafter, Thomas A Chmielewski, Michael Negin, "Robotics Engineering – An Integrated

Approach", Eastern Economy, Prentice Hall of India P Ltd., 2006.

Karuny

a Univ

ersity


2. Mikell P Groover et. al., "Industrial Robots - Technology, Programming and Applications", McGraw Hill,

New York, 2008.

3. Saeed B Niku ,”Introduction to Robotics Analysis, Systems, Applications ”’PHI Pvt Ltd, New Delhi,2003.

17EI3033 LINEAR SYSTEMS

Credits: 3:0:0

Course Objectives:

To understand the state model of LTI (Linear time invariant) system.

To give basic knowledge in obtaining decomposition of transfer function from state model.

To understand the concepts of Controllability, Observability and Lyapunov stability analysis.

Course Outcomes:

Determine the state space representation of any system

Calculate the solution of state equation

Design estimators for prediction of data for control system design.

Analyse the system whether it is controllable and observable.

Perform stability analysis of the systems.

Summarise the concept of control theory for linear systems.

Unit I - State model for linear time invariant systems: State space representation using physical - Phase and

canonical variables – Diagonalization-Solution of state equation - State transition matrix

Unit II - Analysis of linear time invariant systems: Transfer function from state model - Transfer matrix -

Decomposition Methods – State space representation of linear time invariant discrete time systems

Unit III - Solution of discrete time state equation: Discretization of continuous time state equations - Eigen

Values and Eigen Vectors – diagonalization

Unit IV - State Variable Design: Concepts of Controllability and Observability – Pole Placement by State

Feedback- Observer Systems.

Unit V - Lyapunov’s Stability Analysis: Introduction-Lyapunov stability criterion-Direct Method- Methods of

constructing Lyapunov functions for Nonlinear Systems

Reference Books

1. Katsuhiko Ogata, “Modern Control Engineering”, Prentice Hall of India Private Limited, New Delhi, 4th

Edition, 2002.

2. Nagrath I.J, & Gopal M, “Control System Engineering”, New Age International Publishers Limited,

New Delhi, 5th

Edition, 2007.

3. Nise S. Norman, “Control Systems Engineering”, John Wiley & Sons Inc, New Delhi, 3rd Edition, 2000.

4. John J. D'Azzo, Constantine H. Houpis, “Linear Control System Analysis and Design”, CRC Press, USA

, 5 th

Edition, 2003.

5. Shankar P. Bhattacharyya, Aniruddha Datta, Lee H. Keel, “Linear Control Theory: Structure, Robustness

And Optimization” CRC Press, USA, 2009.

Karuny

a Univ

ersity

LIST OF COURSES

Course

Code Name of the Course Credits

16EI2001 Digital Control Systems 3:1:0

16EI2002 Sensors and Data Acquisition 3:0:0

16EI2003 Virtual Instrumentation and Data Acquisition Laboratory 0:0:1

16EI2004 Automotive Electronics 3:0:0

REVISED VERSION COURSES

Course

Code Version Name of the Course Credits

14EI2001 1.1 Sensors and Transducers

3:0:0

14EI2002 1.1 Sensors and Transducers Laboratory 0:0:2

14EI2003 1.1 Electrical Measurements 3:0:0

14EI2004 1.1 Simulation Laboratory 0:0:2

14EI2005 1.1 Control System 3:1:0

14EI2006 1.1 Electrical Measurements and Machines Laboratory 0:0:2

14EI2007 1.1 Control Systems Laboratory 0:0:2

14EI2008 1.1 Industrial Instrumentation 3:0:0

14EI2009 1.1 Process Dynamics and Control 3:0:0

14EI2010 1.1 Industrial Instrumentation Laboratory 0:0:2

14EI2011 1.1 Electronic Instrumentation 3:0:0

14EI2012 1.1 Logic and Distributed Control Systems 3:0:0

14EI2013 1.1 Industrial Data Communication and Networks 3:0:0

14EI2014 1.1 Process Control Laboratory 0:0:2

14EI2015 1.1 Logic and Distribution Control Systems Laboratory 0:0:2

14EI2017 1.1 Biomedical Instrumentation 3:0:0

14EI2018 1.1 Automotive Instrumentation 3:0:0

14EI2019 1.1 Analytical Instrumentation 3:0:0

14EI2020 1.1 Instrumentation and Control in Petrochemical Industries 3:0:0

14EI2021 1.1 Instrumentation and Control in Paper Industries 3:0:0

14EI2022 1.1 Instrumentation and Control in Iron and Steel Industries 3:0:0

14EI2023 1.1 Opto-Electronics and Laser Based Instrumentation 3:0:0

14EI2024 1.1 Power Plant Instrumentation 3:0:0

14EI2025 1.1 Modern Control Techniques 3:0:0

14EI2026 1.1 Strength of Machine Elements 3:0:0

14EI2032 1.1 Flexible Manufacturing Systems 3:0:0

14EI2033 1.1 Vibration Analysis 3:0:0

14EI2035 1.1 Human-Robot Systems and Interaction 3:0:0

14EI2036 1.1 Environmental Instrumentation 3:0:0

14EI2038 1.1 Instrumentation for Agriculture 3:0:0

14EI2039 1.1 Instrumentation and Control for Avionics 3:0:0

14EI2040 1.1 Ultrasonic Instrumentation 3:0:0

14EI2041 1.1 Measurements and Instrumentation 3:0:0

14EI2042 1.1 Advanced Control Theory 3:0:0

Karuny

a Univ

ersity


14EI2043 1.1 Virtual Instrumentation 3:0:0

14EI2044 1.1 PLC and Automation 3:0:0

14EI2045 1.1 Artificial organs and Rehabilitation Engineering 3:0:0

14EI2046 1.1 Process Control for Food Engineers 3:0:0

14EI2047 1.1 Process Control Laboratory for Food Engineers 0:0:2

14EI2048 1.1 Instrumentation and Control Systems 3:0:0

14EI3002 1.1 Instrumentation 3:0:0

14EI3003 1.1 Advanced Process Control 3:0:0

14EI3004 1.1 Industrial Instrumentation and Process Control Laboratory 0:0:2

14EI3005 1.1 Advanced Control Systems 3:0:0

14EI3006 1.1 Discrete Control System 3:0:0

14EI3007 1.1 Intelligent Controllers 3:0:0

14EI3008 1.1 Optimal Control Theory 3:0:0

14EI3009 1.1 Industrial Instrumentation 3:0:0

14EI3010 1.1 Control System Design 3:0:0

14EI3011 1.1 Virtual Instrumentation laboratory 0:0:2

14EI3012 1.1 Embedded Control Systems Laboratory 0:0:2

14EI3014 1.1 Industrial Automation 3:0:0

14EI3015 1.1 System Identification and Adaptive Control 3:0:0

14EI3016 1.1 SCADA systems and Applications 3:0:0

14EI3017 1.1 Design of Linear Multivariable Control Systems 3:0:0 14EI3018 1.1 Piping and Instrumentation 3:0:0

14EI3019 1.1 Embedded Instrumentation 3:0:0

14EI3020 1.1 Networks and Protocols for instrumentation and control 3:0:0

14EI3022 1.1 Design of Embedded Control System

14EI3025 DESIGN OF EMBEDDED CONTROL SYSTEM


3:0:0

14EI3023 1.1 Advanced Processors for control and automation 3:0:0

14EI3028 1.1 Embedded Virtual Instrumentation Laboratory 0:0:2

14EI3029 1.1 Embedded Automotive Systems 3:0:0

14EI3030 1.1 Automotive Sensors and Intelligent Systems

3:0:0

14EI3031 1.1 Automotive Protocols and Telematics 3:0:0

14EI3033 1.1 Biomedical sensors and signal conditioning 3:0:0

14EI3038 1.1 Physiological Control Systems 3:0:0

14EI3039 1.1 Medical Instrumentation 3:0:0

14EI3040 1.1 Bio Virtual instrumentation 3:0:0

14EI3041 1.1 Hospital Management System 3:0:0 14EI3042 1.1 Cognitive technology for biomedical engineers 3:0:0

14EI3044 1.1 Embedded Based Medical Instrumentation Laboratory 0:0:2

14EI3045 1.1 Diagnostics and therapeutic Equipments Laboratory 0:0:2

14EI3046 1.1 Medical Imaging Techniques 3:0:0

14EI3048 1.1 Clinical Instrumentation 3:0:0

14EI3049 1.1 Medical Devices And Safety

Safe

Safe Sasafety Saf

3:0:0

14EI3051 1.1 Medical Sensors and wearable devices 3:0:0

14EI3052 1.1 Rehabilitation Engineering 3:0:0

14EI3054 1.1 Biomechanics 3:0:0

Karuny

a Univ

ersity


14EI3055 1.1 Medical Diagnostics And Therapeutic Equipments 3:0:0

14EI3056 1.1 Limb prosthetics 3:0:0

14EI3057 1.1 Industrial electronics and instrumentation 3:0:0

14EI3058 1.1 Linear systems 3:0:0

14EI3059 1.1 Transducers and Actuators 3:0:0

14EI3060 1.1 Automated Test and Measurement 3:0:0

14EI3061 1.1 Remote Sensing and Control 3:0:0

14EI3063 1.1 Robot Programming 3:0:0

14EI3064 1.1 Kinematics and Dynamics of Robot 3:0:0

14EI3065 1.1 Advanced Instrumentation and Process Control for Food

Engineers 3:0:0

14EI3066 1.1 Sensors and Data Acquisition Lab 0:0:2

14EI3067 1.1 Transducer Engineering 3:0:0


Credits: 3:1:0

Pre Requisite: 14EI2005 Control System

Course Objective:

• To introduce the concepts of system analysis using Z transforms.

• To equip with the basic knowledge of digital process control design.

• To study the stability analysis of digital control system

Course Outcome:

• Use Z transforms to analyse Discrete Systems.

• Design controllers for a digital process.

• Test the Stability of Discrete Systems.

Need for digital control, Configuration of the basic digital control scheme, Principles of signal

conversion, Basic discrete time signal, Z transform, Modified Z transform, Stability Analysis - Analysis

Of Digital Control, Frequency Response, Stability on the z-Plane and the Jury stability criterion, Sample

and hold systems , Digital Controller - Z domain description of sampled continuous time plants, Z domain

description of systems with dead time, Implementation of digital controllers, Digital Algorithms - Design

of Digital Control Algorithms, Z plane specifications of control system design, Digital compensator

design using frequency response plots, State description of sampled continuous time plants, Structure

realization of systems, State transition matrix, Controllability and Observability, Solution of state

difference equations.

References

1. Gopal M, “Digital Control and State variable Methods”, Tata McGrawHill, New Delhi, 2003.


3. Gene F. Franklin, J. David Powell, “Digital control of dynamic systems”, Pearson Education

Limited, New Delhi,2002.

4. Richard C. Dorf, Robert H. Bishop, “Modern control systems,” Pearson Education inc, New

Delhi, 2008.

5. Isermann R ‘Digital Control Systems’, Vol. I & II, Narosa Publishing, 2014.

Karuny

a Univ

ersity


16EI2002 SENSORS AND DATA ACQUISITION

Credits: 3:0:0

Course Objective:

To deal with basics concepts for selection of sensors and the signal conditioning necessary to

include these in a data acquisition system.

To investigate the analogue to digital and digital to analogue conversion principles and their

practical applications for data acquisition and control.

To learn about the selection of output drivers and devices

Course Outcome:

Demonstrate a critical understanding of elements of signal conditioning necessary for different

types of sensors.

Describe and evaluate the operation of analogue to digital and digital to analogue converters.

Critically evaluate and select appropriate techniques and devices for realizing a data acquisition

system.

Sensors and transducers, signal conditioning circuits, Parameters of Data Acquisition Systems such as

dynamic range, calibration, bandwidth, processor throughput, sample rate and aliasing, types and

principles of Analogue to Digital Converters (ADC) and Digital to Analogue Converters (DAC), ADC

specifications, resolution, accuracy, linearity, offset and quantization errors, time-based measurements

and jitter, microprocessor interfacing, serial interfaces, multi-channel ADCs, internal microcontroller

ADCs, Codecs, line drivers and receivers, high power output drivers and devices.

References

1. Bentley, John P. Principles of Measurement Systems, 4:th edition, Pearson/Prentice Hall, 2005.

2. Jacob Fraden, Handbook of Modern Sensors – Physics , Design and Applications, Fourth Edition,

Springer, 2010.

3. Data Acquistion Handbook, A Reference for DAQ and analog and digital signal conditioning, 3rd

Edition, 2012.

16EI2003 VIRTUAL INSTRUMENTATION AND DATA ACQUISITION LABORATORY

Credit: 0:0:1

Course Objective:

To introduce the basics concepts of Virtual Instrumentation.

To develop ability for programming in LabVIEW using structures, graphs and charts for system

monitoring, processing and controlling

To learn about the data acquisition and interfacing concepts using a state-of-the-art software

platform such as National Instrument's LABVIEW.

Course Outcome:


Design a complete Data Acquisition System,

Accommodate PC interfacing principles and Instrument Driver for Computer measurement and

control.

Description:

This course enables the students to gain practical knowledge in programming techniques, data acquisition

and interfacing techniques of virtual instrumentation and apply it to real time environment.

Karuny

a Univ

ersity


16EI2004 AUTOMOTIVE ELECTRONICS

Credit: 3:0:0

Course Objectives:

To understand the various automotive sensors and actuators.

To understand engine cranking system and control.

To understand various driver assistance and safety systems.

Course Outcomes:

Select sensors and actuators for an automotive applications.

State various engine control techniques and its requirement.

Explain the procedure of integration of various components to create an automotive system.

Basic sensor arrangement- Various sensors in vehicle, Actuators for vehicle, Control modes, Engine

cranking system, Ignition system, Block diagram of starting system, Condition at starting, Construction

and working of starter motor, Advance driver navigation and information system, Collision avoidance

radar warning system, ABS, Electronic steering control and electronic suspension, Low tire pressure

warning system, Insulated and earth return systems, Head light and side light, Trafficator, Electric fuel

pump, Horn, Wiper system, Introduction to CAN, FLEXRAY, LIN, MOST protocols.

References:

1. William. B. Ribbens, “Understanding Automotive Electronics”, Butterworth Heinemann Woburn,

Newyork, 6th Edition, 2003.

2. James. D. Haldeman and Chase. D. Mitchell, “Diagnosis and troubleshooting of Automotive

electric, electronic and computer systems”, Prentice Hall, New Jersey, 4th Edition, 2006.

3. James. D. Haldeman and Chase. D. Mitchell, “Automotive Electricity and electronics”, Prentice

Hall of India, New Delhi, 2004.

4. P.L. Kohli, “Automotive Electrical Equipment”, Tata Mc Graw hill Education India Pvt. Ltd.,

New Delhi, 2008.

5. Joseph Heitner, “Automotive Mechanics”, Affiliated East-West Pvt. Ltd., 2nd

edition, 2012.


Credits: 3:0:0 (Version 1.1)

Course Objective:

To learn the characteristics of sensors

To provide knowledge on the principle and operation of different transducers.

To introduce the application of sensors and transducers in the measuring system.

Course Outcome:

Determine the characteristics of various sensors and analyze them

Use the principle of transducers to design measuring systems

Suggest suitable sensors for a particular application

Transducers - Definition, Classification of transducers, Characteristics of transducers, types of

Transducers – Resistive, Inductive, Capacitive, Piezoelectric, Magnetic transducers, principle of

operation, working, characteristics and applications, Miscellaneous sensors – Elastic, digital, chemical,

fiber optic, MEMS.

References

1. Doebelin. E.O., “Measurement Systems Application and Design”, McGraw Hill

Karuny

a Univ

ersity


International, New York, 2007.

2. Renganathan. S., “Transducer Engineering”, Allied publishers Limited, Chennai, 2003.

3. Cooper W.D., “Electronic Instrumentation and Measurement Techniques”, Prentice Hall of India,

New Delhi, 2003.

4. Sawhney A.K., “A Course in Electrical and Electronics Measurements and Instrumentation”,

Eighteenth Edition, Dhanpat Rai and Sons, New Delhi, 2007.

5. Ian R Sinclair, “Sensors and Transducers”, Third Edition, Newnes, New Delhi, 2011.



Co-Requisite: 14EI2001 Sensors and Transducers

Course Objective:

To introduce the practical aspects of transducers and their characteristics.

To impart knowledge in the signal conditioning circuitry for a transducer.

To improve the skills in designing a measurement system.

Course Outcome:

Analyze the performance characteristics of various transducers and infer the reasons for the

behavior.

Design the signal conditioning circuitry for a measurement system.

Critically analyze a measurement application and suggest suitable measurement methods.

Description:

This laboratory introduces the different transducers, their working and determination of their

characteristics.

List of experiments

The faculty conducting the laboratory will prepare a list of 12 experiments and get the approval of

HoD/Director and notify it at the beginning of each semester.

14EI2003 ELECTRICAL MEASUREMENTS


Pre Requisite: 14EE2001 Electric Circuits and Networks

Course Objective:

To introduce the fundamentals of electrical measurements.

To understand the principle of instruments used for measuring electrical quantities.

To learn the working of bridges and recording instruments.

Course Outcome:

Use the basics of electrical measurement to analyze the characteristics of instruments.

Apply the knowledge of electrical instruments to measure electrical quantities.

Select and design the bridge circuits for a specific application.

Fundamentals Of Electrical Measurements-Functional Elements of an Instrument, Input– Output

Configuration of Measurement Systems, Performance Characteristics of Instruments, Electromechanical

DC Instruments - Galvanometers, PMMC Instrument, DC Ammeter and Voltmeter, Calibration of DC

instruments, Electromechanical AC Instruments-Moving Iron Instrument, Thermoinstruments,

Electrodynamometers in Power Measurements, Watt– hour meter, Power– factor meters, Instrument

Karuny

a Univ

ersity


Transformers, A.C. and D.C. Bridge Circuits, Four probe method of measuring electrical properties,

Recording Instruments.

References

1. Cooper W.D., “Electronic Instrumentation and measurement techniques”, Prentice Hall of India,

New Delhi, 2004.

2. Tumanski. S., “Principles of Electrical Measurement”, Taylor and Francis Group, Ny, 2006.

3. Kalsi.H.S, “Electronics Instrumentation”, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2009.

4. Golding E.W. and Widdis F.E., “Electrical measurements and measuring instruments”, Sir Issac

Pitman and Sons Pvt., Ltd., 2001.

5. Laughton. M. A. and Warne. D. J., “Electrical Engineer's Reference Book” Sixteenth Edition,

Newnes, 2003.

6. Horst Czichos, Tetsuya Saito, Leslie E. Smith, “Springer Handbook of Materials Measurement

Methods”, Springer Science & Business Media, 2007.

14EI2004 SIMULATION LABORATORY


Co-Requisite: 14EE2001 Circuit Analysis and Networks,

14EC2002 Electronic circuits

Course Objective:

To familiarize simulation software to analyze electronic circuits.

To introduce simulation software to learn signal operations

To design virtual instruments to analyze real time signals.

Course Outcome:

Simulate simple electronic circuits using simulation software.

Simulate signals and analyze them using simulation software

Acquire real time signals and perform simple operations on them using simulation software.

Description:

This laboratory aims to introduce simulation software that enables the student to understand the

theoretical concepts by simulating them.

List of experiments





Pre Requisite: 14MA2003, 14MA2004

Course Objective:

• To introduce the fundamentals of mathematical representation of a system.

• To gain knowledge on the concepts of time response and frequency response.

• To understand the concepts of stability analysis.

Course Outcome:

• Obtain the transfer function of a system.


• Analyse the stability of the system.

https://www.google.co.in/search?tbo=p&tbm=bks&q=inauthor:%22Horst+Czichos%22&source=gbs_metadata_r&cad=9

https://www.google.co.in/search?tbo=p&tbm=bks&q=inauthor:%22Tetsuya+Saito%22&source=gbs_metadata_r&cad=9

https://www.google.co.in/search?tbo=p&tbm=bks&q=inauthor:%22Leslie+E.+Smith%22&source=gbs_metadata_r&cad=9

Karuny

a Univ

ersity


Introduction to Control Systems, Types, Effect of Feedback, Differential equation of Physical Systems,

Transfer functions, Block diagram algebra, Signal Flow graphs, Time Response of Feed Back Control

Systems, Step response of First and Second order systems , Time response specifications of Second order

Systems, Concepts of Stability, Routh stability criterion, Root Locus Techniques, stability analysis using

Bode Plots, Polar plots, Introduction to lead, lag and lead–lag compensating networks, Nyquist criterion,

Concepts of State, State variable and State models for electrical systems, Solution of State Equations, P,

PI, PID Controllers.

References

1. Nagarath .J and Gopal M., “Control Systems Engineering”, New Age International (P) Limited,

Publishers, Fourth edition – 2005

2. Ogata .K “Modern Control Engineering”, Pearson Education Asia/ PHI, 4th Edition, 2002.

3. Benjamin C. Kuo and Farid Golnaagi, Wiley “Automatic Control Systems”, 8th Edition, 2009.

4. Joseph J Distefano “Feedback and Control System”, III et al., Schaum’s Outlines, TMH, 2nd

Edition 2007.

5. Norman. S. Nise, “Control Systems Engineering”, Wiley, 6th Edition, 2011.



Co-Requisite: 14EI2003 Electrical Measurements

Course Objective:

To expose the students to the operation of DC and AC machines

To learn about calibration of electrical instruments and bridge circuits

To introduce the working of special electrical machines.

Course Outcome:

Analyze the characteristics of DC and AC Machines.

Calibrate electrical instruments and bridge circuits

Perform experiments on special electric machines.

Description:

This laboratory enables the student to understand the operation of electrical machines, bridges and the

methods of calibrating electric instruments

List of experiments





Co-Requisite: 14EI2005 Control System

Course Objective:

• To introduce the concept of Mathematical Modelling.

• To explore the methods of controller design.

• To understand the design of the compensating circuits.

Course Outcome:

• Derive the mathematical model of a system.

• Design a controller for a real time system.

Karuny

a Univ

ersity


• Design lead and lag compensating circuits.

Description:

This laboratory demonstrates the methods to derive the mathematical model of a system and design a

controller for a practical system.

List of experiments





Course Objective:

To learn the principle of measurement of various industrial parameters.



Course Outcome:

Apply the knowledge of Instruments to design a simple Instrumentation system.

Select suitable instrument for a given application.

Develop methods to perform measurement of physical parameters.

Pressure Measurement-Standards, Dynamic testing, High and Low pressure measurement, Flow

Measurement - Pitot static tube, Yaw tube, Pivoted vane, Anemometer, Obstruction meters, Rotameters,

Turbine meters, Positive Displacement meters, Electromagnetic flow meter, Drag force flow meter ,

Ultrasonic flow meters, Vortex, Shedding flow meters, Temperature Measurement-Thermal Expansion

Methods, Thermoelectric sensors, Electrical Resistance Sensors, Junction Semiconductor Sensors,

Radiation methods, Level Measurement, Density And Viscosity Measurement, Selection, Range,

Installation, Calibration and Protection of instruments, Industrial Safety Standards.

References 1. Doebelin E.O, “Measurement Systems: Application and Design”, McGraw Hill, New York, 2003.

2. Singh S K, “Industrial Instrumentation and Control”, Tata McGraw– Hill, New Delhi, 2004.

3. William C. Dunn, “Fundamentals of Industrial Instrumentation and Process Control”, McGraw–

Hill, New Delhi, 2005.

4. Liptak B.G, “Process Measurement and Analysis,” Chilton Book Company, Radnor,

Pennsylvania, 2003.

5. Walt Boyes, “Instrumentation Reference Book,” Butterworth Heinemann, United States,

2003.




Course Objective:

• To equip the students with the knowledge of modelling a physical process.

• To understand the design of various control schemes.

• To analyse the effect of controllers in a given process.

Course Outcome:

• Derive the Mathematical Model of a physical system.

Karuny

a Univ

ersity


• Tune controllers for Optimum gain using various techniques.

• Selection of suitable control schemes for a particular process.

Process Control System -Terms and objectives, Piping and Instrumentation diagram, Degrees of

freedom, Modelling of simple systems ,Basic Control Actions - Continuous Controller Modes, Response

of controllers for different test inputs, Selection of control modes, Controller Tuning - Optimum

controller settings, Controller tuning Methods, Final Control Elements – Characteristics, Selection of

control valves, Advanced Control Schemes - Multivariable process control, Interaction of control loops,

Case Studies: Distillation column, Boiler drum level control, Heat Exchanger and chemical reactor

control

References


2. Coughanowr D.R., “Process Systems Analysis and Control”, McGraw Hill, Singapore,2008.

3. Curtis D .Johnson, “Process Control Instrumentation Technology, ”Prentice Hall , New Jersey,

2006.

4. Dale E. Seborg, Thomas F. Edgar, Duncan A. Mellichamp, “Process Dynamics and Control,”

John Willey and Sons, Singapore, 2006.

5. Wayne Bequette B., “Process control: modeling, design, and simulation” Prentice Hall , New

Jersey– 2003




Co-Requisite: 14EI2008 Industrial Instrumentation

Course Objective:




Course Outcome:

Use simple Industrial Instruments to measure physical quantities.

Perform Calibration of Instruments.


Description:

This laboratory introduces the operation of industrial instruments, their calibration and design of

instrumentation circuits.

List of experiments



14EI2011 ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION


Pre Requisite: 14EC2008 Linear Integrated Circuits

Course Objective:

• To introduce the principle of analog electronic measuring instruments.

Karuny

a Univ

ersity


• To deal with the basic principle of digital instrumentation.

• To gain knowledge on the concept of virtual instruments.

Course Outcome:

• Apply the knowledge of electronic instruments to measure analog quantities.

• Implement digital instrumentation techniques for measurement.

• Develop virtual instruments using simulation software.

Electronic Analog Instruments – Introduction, Amplified DC meter, AC voltmeters using rectifiers, True

RMS voltmeter, Q meter, Vector impedance meter. Oscilloscope, display devices and recorders, Signal

generators and analyzers, Digital Instruments-Digital Voltmeters and Multimeters, Simple frequency

counter, time interval, Digital Displacement transducer, Virtual Instrumentation – Evolution,

Architecture, Presentation and Control, Functional Integration, Programming Requirements,

Conventional and Distributed Virtual Instrumentation, Virtual Instruments and Traditional Instruments,

Advantages, Study of evolution and procedures in simulation softwares.

References

1. Cooper W.D., “Electronic Instrumentation and measurement techniques”, Prentice Hall

of India, New Delhi, 2009.

2. Kalsi.H.S, “Electronics Instrumentation”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2010.


4. Sumathi S and P. Surekha , “LabVIEW based Advanced Instrumentation Systems”

Springer, 2007.

5. Oliver B.H., and Cage J.M., “Electronics Measurements and Instrumentation”, McGraw

Hill, 2009.

6. David A Bell, “Electronic Instrumentation and measurements”, Prentice Hall of India,

New Delhi, 2006.



Pre Requisite: 14EI2009 Process Dynamics and Control

Course Objective:

• To provide the fundamentals of Data Acquisition system.

• To introduce the concept of PLC and its Programming using Ladder Diagram.

• To cover the basics of Distributed Control Systems

Course Outcome:

• Appreciate the significance of SCADA and DCS.

• Develop ladder logic programs for real time applications.

• Apply the knowledge of DCS and communication standards.

Review of Computers In Process Control - Data loggers, Data Acquisition Systems (DAS), Direct Digital

Control (DDC), Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition Systems (SCADA), Overview of PLC

systems, PLC programming procedures, PLC Basic Functions, PLC Intermediate Functions Sequencer

functions, Matrix functions, Alternate programming languages, Analog PLC operation, Design of

interlocks and alarms, Distributed Control Systems (DCS)-Evolution, Architecture, Comparison, Local

Control unit, Process Interfacing Issues, Redundancy concept, Communication facilities, Interfaces In

DCS, General purpose computers in DCS

Karuny

a Univ

ersity


References

1. John.W. Webb, Ronald A Reis, “Programmable Logic Controllers - Principles and Applications”,

Prentice Hall Inc., New Jersey, 2003.


3. B.G. Liptak, “Instrument Engineers Handbook, Process control and Optimization”, CRC press-

Radnor, Pennsylvania, 2006.

4. B.G. Liptak, “Process software and digital networks,” CRC press,Florida-2003.

5. Curtis D. “Johnson Process control instrumentation technology,” Prentice Hall , New Jersey

2006.

6. Krishna Kant, “Computer-Based Industrial Control,“ PHI, New Delhi, 2004

7. Frank D. Petruzella, “Programmable Logic Controllers”, McGraw Hill, New York, 2004.

14EI2013 INDUSTRIAL DATA COMMUNICATION AND NETWORKS


Pre Requisite: 14EC2080 Communication Engineering

Course Objective:

To introduce the basic principles of networking

To learn the serial communication standards

To equip the students with relevant knowledge about network protocols

Course Outcome:

Appreciate the need for network protocols during data transmission and reception.

Analyze the methods of communication

Compare the different protocols used as Universal standards.

Introduction and Basic Principles – Protocols, Physical standards, Modern instrumentation, Bits, Bytes

and characters, Communication principles, Communication modes, Synchronous and Asynchronous

systems, Transmission Characteristics, Data Coding, UART, Serial data communications interface

standards, Balanced and unbalanced transmission lines, RS232,422,,423,449,485 interface standard,

Introduction To Protocols - Flow control Protocols, BSC Protocols, HDLC, SDLC, Data communication

for Instrumentation and Control, Industrial protocols, Local Area Networks, Wireless Instrumentation.

References

1. John Park, Steve Mackay, Edwin Wright, “Practical Data Communications for Instrumentation

and Control”, Elsevier Publications, 2003.

2. Stallings W. “High speed Networks TCP/IP and ATM Design Principles “ PHI ,2002.

3. Behrouz A. Forouzan“ Data Communication and Networking” , TMH, 2006.

4. Lawrence. M. Thompson , “Industrial Data Communications”, 4th Edition , ISA- 2007.

5. Edwin Wright “Practical Industrial Data Networks: Design, Installation and Troubleshooting”,

Newnes-2004.

6. Tony.R. Kuphaldt, “Lessons in Industrial Instrumentation”, Creative Commons Attribution, 2015.

Karuny

a Univ

ersity





Course Objective:



To provide knowledge about controller design, simulation and implementation

Course Outcome:

Design and compare Digital Control Algorithms.

Analyze the performance of a Process

Demonstrate Data Acquisition in VI

Description:

This laboratory introduces the design procedure for digital controllers and their implementation of real

time process.

List of experiments





Co-Requisite: 14EI2012 Logic and Distributed Control Systems

Course Objective:

• To strengthen the knowledge of Programmable Logic Controllers

• To introduce the concepts of SCADA

• To gain hands on experience on Distributed Control Systems

Course Outcome:

• Write simple programs in Programmable Logic Controllers

• Design control system using Programmable Logic Controllers

• Use SCADA for real time applications

Description:

This laboratory introduces the basic concepts of PLC programming and Distributed Control systems using

simulation software.

List of experiments





Course Objective:

• To introduce the human anatomy and physiology and the physiological parameters.

• To learn about the generation of physiological signals and their measurement.

• To understand the fundamentals of biomedical instruments used for diagnosis and therapy.

Course Outcome:

• Appreciate the need for measuring physiological parameters in the human body.

• Develop measuring systems to measure the physiological parameters.

Karuny

a Univ

ersity


• Use the diagnostic and therapeutic instruments for specific application.

Cell and its Electrical activity, Physiological systems viz., cardiovascular system, Nervous system,

Respiratory system, Visual system, Muscular system, Electrodes and bioelectric signals: Bio electrodes,

ECG, EMG, EEG and EOG, Measurement of physiological parameters: Blood flow, Blood pressure,

Cardiac output, and Bio-chemical measurement: Blood pH, Blood pO2, Blood pCO2, Photometers.

Therapeutic equipments and imaging techniques.

References


New Delhi, 2003.

2. Cromwell, “Biomedical Instrumentation and Measurements”, Prentice Hall of India, New

Delhi, 2007.

3. Arumugam.M. “Biomedical Instrumentation", Anuradha Agencies Publishers, Kumbakonam,

2006.

4. Joseph J. Carr and John M. Brown, “Introduction to Biomedical Equipment Technology”,

Pearson Education India, Delhi, 2004.

5. Webster, “Medical Instrumentation – Application & Design,” John Wiley and sons Inc,

Netherlands, 2009.



Course Objective:

• To introduce the application of electronics in the modern automobile.

• To understand the latest communication protocols used in automobile industries.

• To provide information about the automotive systems and the electronic accessories used in

automobile.

Course Outcome:

• Analyze the use of instruments in automotive industry

• Design instruments for automotive applications.

• Use Communication protocols to perform advanced monitoring and control.

Automotive Electrical And Electronics - Basic Electronics components and their operation in an

automobile, Starting Systems, Charging Systems, Ignition Systems, Electronic Fuel Control, Advanced

vehicle control systems, Embedded System Communication Protocols - Vehicle Communication

Protocols, Introduction to CAN, LIN, FLEXRAY, MOST, KWP2000, Details of CAN, Embedded

System In Control Of Automotive Systems - Engine management systems, Vehicle Safety System,

Electronic Control of braking and traction, Electronic transmission control, Environmental tests for

electronic control units.

References

1. RobertBoschGmbh ,“BOSCH– Automotive Handbook”, 7thEdition,John Wiley & Sons,

ISBN: 0470519363, 2008.



3. Knowles.D, “Automotive Electronic and Computer control Ignition Systems”, Prentice

Hall,1988.


5. Kiencke,, Nielsen, “Automotive Control Systems” 2nd Edition.2005

Karuny

a Univ

ersity




Course Objective:

• To introduce the principle of analytic instruments

• To learn the concept of chromatography

• To know the applications of environment monitoring instruments

Course Outcome:

• Analyze the different types of analytic instruments

• Develop instruments for clinical analysis.

• Apply the concepts of Analytical Instruments for Environmental Monitoring

Colorimetry And Spectrophotometry-Special methods of analysis, Beer–Lambert law, Colorimeters, UV,

Vis spectrophotometers, Single and double beam instruments, Sources and detectors, IR

spectrophotometers, Types,Attenuated total reflectance flame photometers, Atomic absorption

spectrophotometers, Sources and detectors, FTIR spectrophotometers, Flame emission photometers,

Chromatography - Different techniques, Gas chromatography, Detectors, Liquid chromatographs,

Applications, High– pressure liquid chromatographs, Applications, Industrial gas analyzers and pollution

monitoring instruments, Ph meters and dissolved component analyzers, Radio chemical and magnetic

resonance techniques

References

1. Khandpur. R. S., ‘Handbook of Analytical Instruments’, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing

Co. Ltd., 2006.

2. Willard. H., Merritt, Dean. J. A., Settle. F. A., ‘Instrumental Methods of Analysis’, CBS

publishing & distribution, 1995.



5. Skoog. D. A. and West. D. M., ‘Principles of Instrumental Analysis’, Holt, Saunders

Publishing, 1998.


INDUSTRIES


Course Objective:

• To introduce the basic concepts of piping and instrumentation diagrams.

• To gain knowledge on the Instruments involved petrochemical industries.

• To learn about the control system in the subsystems of a petrochemical plant.

Course Outcome:

• Develop and interpret the piping and instrumentation diagrams of a system.

• Appreciate the significance of Measurement in Petrochemical Industry.

• Use the knowledge of control system design to control the subsystems.

Piping and Instrumentation diagrams, Instrumentation and control in distillation columns, chemical

reactors- Temperature and pressure control in batch reactors – Instrumentation and control in dryers:

Batch dryers and Continuous dryers, heat exchangers -, evaporators - Types of evaporators, Measurement

and control of absolute pressure, Density, Conductivity, Differential pressure and Flow, Effluent and

Water Treatment

Karuny

a Univ

ersity


References

1. Béla G. Lipták. ‘Instrumentation in the Processing Industries: Brewing, Food, Fossil

Power, Glass, Iron and Steel, Mining and Minerals, Nuclear Power, Paper, Petrochemical,

Pharmaceutical’, Chilton Book Co., Reprint 2003

2. Considine D.M., ‘Process / Industrial Instruments and Control Handbook’, Fourthedition,

McGraw Hill, Singapore, 1999.

3. Curtis D .Johnson,”Process control instrumentation technology,”Prentice Hall , New

Jersey, 2006.






Course Objective:

• To describe the paper making process and the need for measurement at various stages.

• To gain knowledge about the Instruments used in paper industries.

• To learn about the control operations in paper industries.

Course Outcome:

• Appreciate the need of instrumentation and control in paper making.

• Select suitable sensors for a given process

• Develop a control system for the various operations in the paper industry.

Description Of The Process -Raw materials, Pulping process, Chemical Recovery Process, Paper making

process, Converting, Instrumentation - Measurements of Basis Weight, Density, Specific gravity, Flow,

Level of liquids and solids, Pressure, Temperature, Consistency, Moisture, PH, Oxidation-Reduction

potential, Graphic displays and alarms, Control Operations - Blow tank controls, Digester liquor feed

pump controls, Brown stock water level control, Stock chest level control, Basis weight control, Dry

temperature control, density and flow control, computer applications.

References

1. B.G Liptak, ‘Instrumentation in Process Industries’, Chilton Book Company, 2003


3. Cooper W.D., “Electronic Instrumentation and Measurement Techniques”, Prentice Hall of India,

New Delhi, 2003.




14EI2022 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL IN IRON AND

STEEL INDUSTRIES


Course Objective:

• To learn about the process of making steel from the raw materials.

• To know the role of instrumentation in a steel industry

• To deal with the control operations carries out at various stages

Course Outcome:

• Appreciate the use of instruments in steel making.

• Suggest suitable sensor for a typical measurement.

Karuny

a Univ

ersity


• Develop control systems for the various operations.

Description of Process -Flow diagram and description of the processes, Raw materials preparation, Iron

making, Blast furnaces, Stoves, Raw steel making, Basic Oxygen Furnace, Electric Furnace, Casting of

steel: Primary rolling, Cold rolling and Finishing, Measurement of level, Pressure, Density, Temperature,

Flow, Weight, Thickness and shape, Graphic displays and alarms, Control Systems - Blast furnace, Stove

combustion control system, Gas and water controls in BOF furnace, Strand Casting mould Level control,

Mould Level sensors, Ingot weight measuring system, Waste water treatment, computer applications:

Model calculation and logging, Rolling Mill Control, Annealing Process Control, Center Utilities

Dispatch Computer.

References


Power, Glass, Iron and Steel, Mining and Minerals, Nuclear Power, Paper, Petrochemical,

Pharmaceutical’, Chilton Book Co., Reprint 2003 Original from the University of California.

2. Liptak B. G, Instrument Engineers Handbook, volume 2, Process Control,Third edition, CRC

press, London, 1995.

3. Considine D.M, Process / Industrial Instruments and Control Handbook, Fourth edition,


4. Steel Designers Handbook 1)Branko 2)Ron Tinyou 3) ArunSyamGorenc Seventh

Edition First Indian Reprint 2006.

5. Singh S K, “Industrial Instrumentation and Control”, Tata McGraw– Hill, 2004.

14EI2023 OPTO-ELECTRONICS AND LASER BASED INSTRUMENTATION


Course Objective:

To introduce the basic concepts of opto-electronics and optical fibers.

To learn about the principle of fiber optic sensors.

To deal with the fundamentals of lasers and its application for measurement.

Course Outcome:

Apply the knowledge of optical fibers for measurement.

Suggest the methods to use a fiber optic sensor for measurement.

Use lasers for industrial measurement and biomedical applications.

Basics of Opto-electronics - Characteristics of optical radiation, Optical Sources and Detectors, Charge

Coupled devices, Opto –couplers and their applications, Optical Fibre - Principle, Types, Fibre coupling,

Fibre optic sensors , Lasers and Applications - Principle, Laser Rate Equation, Properties, Two, Three

and Four level system, Resonator configuration, Q switching and Mode locking, Cavity dumping, Types

of Lasers, Industrial applications, Holography, Medical applications

References

1. Arumugam. M. “Fiber Optics and Laser Instrumentation", Anuradha Agencies Publishers,

Kumbakonam, 2006.

2. Optical Fiber Communications: Principles And Practice, John M. Senior, Pearson Education,

2006.

3. G. Keiser, ‘Optical Fibre Communication’, McGraw Hill, .



Karuny

a Univ

ersity


5. Wilson and Hawkes, “Opto Electronics – An Introduction”, 3rd Edition, Prentice Hall, New

Delhi, 1998.



Course Objective:

• To provide an overview of different methods of power generation with an emphasis on thermal

power generation.

• To bring out the various measurements involved in power generation plants.

• To familiarize the students with the methods of monitoring different parameters in a power plant.

Course Outcome:

• Compare the different methods of power generation.

• Apply the concepts to design instrumentation systems for a power plant.

• Develop control algorithms for a particular operation in a power plant.

Brief survey of methods of power generation, Hydro, Thermal, Nuclear, Solar and Wind power, Electrical

measurements, Non– electrical parameters Measurements, Analytical instruments in Thermal power

plants -Flue gas oxygen analyzer, Analysis of impurities in feed water and steam, Dissolved oxygen

analyzer, Chromatography , PH meter , Fuel analyzer, Pollution monitoring instruments, Boiler control

system in thermal power plant, Turbine Monitoring and Control

References

1. K. Krishnaswamy, M. Ponnibala, “Power Plant Instrumentation”, PHI Learning Pvt

Ltd.,2011.

2. P.K Nag, Power plant Engineering, Tata McGraw Hill, 2001.

3. Sam G Dukelow, The Control of Boilers, 2nd Edition, ISA Press, New York, 1991

4. Gill A B, Power Plant Performance, Butterworth, London, 1984.

5. P C Martin and I W Hannah, Modern Power Station Practice, British Electricity International,

Vols. 1 & VI, Pergamon Press, London, 1992.

14EI2025 MODERN CONTROL TECHNIQUES



Course Objective:

To enable the students to understand the advanced control systems like optimal control, Robust

control, Adaptive control fuzzy and Neural control.

To learn the methods to overcome the difficulties in implementing conventional control through

advanced control.

To analyze the modern control concepts

Course Outcome:

Design of conventional PID controller

Perform stability analysis and optimal control

Adaptive control and its implementation

Modifications of PID control schemes, Two degrees of freedom control, Optimal Control – Formulation,

Necessary conditions of optimality, state regulator problem, Output regulator tracking problems,

Karuny

a Univ

ersity


Pontryagin's minimum principle, infinite time optimal control , Problem, Advanced Control techniques -

Lyapunov Stability Analysis And Quadratic Optimal Control, Adaptive Control, Robust control

References

1. Katsuhiko Ogata, Morden Control Engineering,Third Edition, - Prentice Hall , India 2009.

2. Nagarath, I.J. and Gopal.M. Control Systems Engineering, Wiley & sons, 2008.

3. Astrom K.J. and Wittenmark.B, Adaptive Control, Addison Wesley Publishing, 1985.

4. Bernard friedlanced - Advanced Control System Design- Prentice Hall of India Pvt Ltd., New

Delhi,1996.

5. Richard.C. Dorf and Robert.H.Bisho, Modern Control System, Addison Wesley & sons, 2008

14EI2026 STRENGTH OF MACHINE ELEMENTS


Course Objective:

To introduce the basics of stress and strain on elements.

To discuss the theory of failure in machines.

To learn the concept of torsion on elements.

Course Outcome:

Appreciate the need for stress and strain analysis on elements.

Determine the shear force and bending moment of elements.

Analyze the effect of torsion on elements.

Stress at a point, stress and strains in bars subjected to axial loading, Various strengths of material,

Temperature stresses in simple & composite members. Strain energy due to axial load. Compound stress

and strains, Mohr’s circle of stress; ellipse of stress and their applications, stresses in machine elements,

Shear force and Bending moment – Definitions, Diagrams for cantilevers, simply supported beams with

or without overhangs Uniform distributed load, Combination of Concentrated load & UDL, Uniformity

varying load, Torsion equation, Applications to hollow and solid circular shafts, torsional rigidity,

combined torsion and bending of circular shafts, analysis of close-coiled-helical springs, theories of

failure, Buckling of columns.

References

1. R. S. Khurmi, Strength of Materials, S. Chand, 2008

2. S. S. Ratan, Strength of Materials, Tata McGrawhill, 2011

3. Gere and Temoshenko, “Mechanics of Material”, CBS Publishers

4. S. Ramamrutham “Strength of Materials”, , Dhanpat Rai Publishing Company

5. Singer and Pytel “Strength of Materials”, , Harper and Row Publications

14EI2032 FLEXIBLE MANUFACTURING SYSTEMS Credits: 3:0:0 (Version 1.1)

Course Objective:

To deal with automation strategies used in assembly systems.

To understand the concept of group technology.

To learn the significance of Flexible Manufacturing systems.

Course Outcome: Classify the automation strategies used in industries.

Select the group technology to be adopted for specific applications.

Appreciate the importance of Flexible manufacturing systems

Karuny

a Univ

ersity


Automation and Automated Assembly systems-Types, automation strategies, Detroit-type automation:

Automated flow lines, methods of work part transport, Transfer mechanisms, design of automated

assembly systems, Group Technology-Part families, parts classification and coding, Machine cell design,

Flexible Manufacturing Systems - Components of an FMS, types of systems, FMS work stations,

Material handling and storage system, Planning the FMS, analysis methods for FMS, applications and

benefits.

References

1. Automation, Production Systems and Computer Integrated Manufacturing- Groover M.P,

Prentice Hall of India, 2002

2. CAD/CAM – Groover M.P, Zimmers E.W, Prentice Hall of India, 2005

3. Approach to Computer Integrated Design and Manufacturing: Nanua Singh, John Wiley and

Sons, 1998.

4. Production Management Systems: A CIM Perspective- Browne J, Harhen J, Shivnan J, Addison

Wesley, 2nd Ed. 1996.

14EI2033 VIBRATION ANALYSIS


Course Objective:

To learn about the causes and effects of vibration and their characteristics.

To understand the principle of vibration transducers.

To learn the modern methods of vibration analysis.

Course Outcome: Characterize the vibration and perform cause-effect analysis.

Develop measurement systems to measure vibration.

Apply the knowledge of vibration analysis to suggest solutions to overcome the effect fo

vibration.

Causes and effects of vibration- Vibrations of Single Degree, Two Degree and Multi Degree of freedom

systems., Steady state and transient characteristics of vibration, Vibration measuring instruments-

Vibration transducers, signal conditioning elements. Display-and recording elements. Vibration meters

and analyzers, Special vibration measuring techniques - Change in sound method, Ultrasonic

measurement method, Shock pulse measurement, Kurtosis, Acoustic emission monitoring, Cepstrum

analysis, Modal analysis, critical speed analysis, Shaft –orbit & position analysis.

References

1. Collacott, R.A., Mechanical Fault Diagnosis and Condition Monitoring, Chapman & Hall, London, 1982.

2. John S. Mitchell, Introduction to Machinery Analysis and Monitoring, Penn Well Books, Penn

Well Publishing Company, Tulsa, Oklahoma, 1993.

3. Nakra, B.C. Yadava, G.S. and Thuested, L., Vibration Measurement and Analysis, National

Productivity Council, New Delhi, 1989. 4. Pox and Jenkins, “Time Series Analysis: Forecasting and Control”, ISBN 978-0-470-27284-8,

2008.

Karuny

a Univ

ersity


14EI2035 HUMAN - ROBOT SYSTEMS AND INTERACTION


Course Objective:

To study multimodal interactions between a human and a robot

To gain knowledge on surgical robotics.

To deal with rehabilitation and assistive robotics.

Course Outcome:

Perform motion analysis of human robots

Develop robot supported surgical assistive devices.

Design robots for rehabilitation.

Definition of human-robot interaction problem, human factors: perception, motor skills, social aspect of

interaction, safety, Haptic robots: kinematics, dynamics, collision detection, control,

Teleoperation systems: architectures, control, virtual fixtures, micro/nano manipulation; Soft robots based

on variable impedance actuators, Medical robotics: surgical robotics, robot-supported diagnostics, micro-

robots in the human body, nanorobots at the cell level, Rehabilitation and assistive robotics: motor

rehabilitation, exoskeletons, robotic prosthetics

References

1. M. Mihelj, J. Podobnik, Haptics for Virtual Reality and Teleoperation, Springer 2012.

2. J. Rosen, B. Hannaford, R.M. Satava, SurgicalRobotics: Systems Applications and Visions,

Springer, 2011

3. M. Tavakoli, R.V. Patel, M. Moallem, A. Aziminejad, Haptics for Teleoperated Surgical

Robotic Systems, World Scientific, 2008

4. Jose L. Pons, Wearable Robots:Biomechatronic Exoskeletons, John Wiley& Sons, 2008.

5. V. Dietz, T. Nef, W.Z. Rymer,Neurorehabilitation Technology, Springer, 2012

6. E. Burdet, D.W. Franklin, T.E. Milner, Human Robotics: Neuromechanics and Motor

Control, The MIT Press, 2013

7. L. Sciavico, B. Siciliano: Modeling and Control of Robot Manipulators, The McGraw –

Hill Companies, Inc., New York, 2000.



Course Objective:

To introduce the instrumentation methodologies for environment monitoring.

To deal with water quality monitoring and waste water treatment

To discuss the instrumentation required for air pollution monitoring.

Course Outcome:

Design instrumentation systems for environment monitoring.

Develop algorithms for waste water treatment

Develop instruments to measure and analyze air quality

Necessity of instrumentation & control for environment, Instrumentation methodologies, Quality of

water: Standards, effects, Water quality parameters: Thermal conductivity, detectors, Opacity monitors,

pH analyzers & their application, conductivity analyzers & their application, Water treatment:

Requirement of water treatment facilities, process design, Sedimentation & flotation: sludge, storage &

removal, design criteria of settling tank, effect of temperature on coagulation, Ground water monitoring:

Level measurement in ground water monitoring wells, instrumentation in ground water monitoring,

Karuny

a Univ

ersity


assessment of soil & ground water pollution, Waste water monitoring: Waste water measurement

techniques. Instrumentation set up for waste water treatment plant. Air pollution: Air monitoring,

measurement of ambient air quality, Air flow measurement, Rain water harvesting: necessity, methods,

rate of NGOs municipal corporation, Govt., limitations. Quality assurance of storage water.

References 1. Walter J. Weber, “Physiochemical processes for water quality control”.

2. David Hendricks, “Fundamentals of Water Treatment Unit Processes”, CRC press, 2011.

3. M. N. Rao & H. V. N. Rao, Air pollution engineering, Mcgrawhill education, 2004.

4. Kenneth Wark, Cecil Warner, “Air pollution control technology”, IEP series in Mechanical

Engineering, 2000.

5. Randy D. Down, Jey.H. Lehr, “Environmental Instrumentation & Analysis Handbook” Wiley




Course Objective:

To introduce the fundamental principles of soil measurement systems.

To deal with green house instrumentation.

To discuss the working of automation equipment in agriculture

Course Outcome:

Design sensors for soil moisture measurement

Develop green house instrumentation systems

Apply the knowledge of instruments for automation in agriculture.

Necessity of instrumentation & control for agriculture, engineering properties of soil: Sensors:

introduction to sonic anemometers, hygrometers, fine wire thermocouples, open & close path gas

analysers, brief introduction to various bio-sensors, soil moisture measurement methods: resistance based

method, voltage based method, thermal based method, details of gypsum block soil moisture sensor,

green houses & instrumentation: ventilation, cooling & heating, wind speed, temperature & humidity, rain

gauge, carbon dioxide enrichment measurement & control. Automation in earth moving equipments &

farm equipments, implementation of hydraulic, pneumatic & electronics control circuits in harvesters

cotton pickers, tractor etc. Leaf area length evaportranspiration, temperature, wetness & respiration

measurement , electromagnetic radiations photosynthesis, infrared & UV bio sensor methods in

agriculture, agrometrological instrumentation weather stations, surface flux measurement, soil water

content measurement using time-domain reflectometery(TDR)

References

1. Industrial instrumentation, “Patranabis”, TMH, 2012.

2. Instrumentation handbook-process control, “B.G.Liptak”, Chilton 40

3. Process control and instrumentation technology, “C.D. Johnson”, PHI, 2005

4. Wills B.A., “ Mineral Processing Technology”, 4thEd.,Pergamon Press, 2000.

Karuny

a Univ

ersity


14EI2039 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR AVIONICS


Course Objective:

• To introduce the fundamentals of Aircraft systems.

• To learn about the instrumentation involved in Aircrafts.

• To provide knowledge on the working of aircraft instruments.

Course Outcome:

• Appreciate the need for measurement in aircraft

• Design instrumentation systems for aircraft.

• Select suitable sensors to monitor the parameters in an aircraft.

Flight Instrumentation – Pitot, Static Instruments and Systems, Altimeter, Airspeed indicator,

Machmeter, Maximum Safe Speed indicator, Accelerometer, Gyroscope, Gyroscopic theory, Directional

gyro indicator, Artificial horizon, Turn and slip indicator, Measurements in Aircraft - Measurement of

Engine Speed, Measurement of Temperature, Pressure, Fuel Quantity and Fuel Flow, Engine Power And

Control Instruments, Power Indicators, Pressure Indicators, Turbine Temperature Control, Engine

Vibration Monitoring and Indicating Instruments.

References

1. Pallett, E.B.J,“ Aircraft Instruments – Principles and applications", Pitman and sons,

1981.


1992.

3. Nagabhushana S. Et.Al, S. Nagabhushana, L. K. Sudha, “ Aircraft Instrumentation and

Systems”, International Pvt Ltd,2010.





Course Objective:

• To know about the generation and detection of ultrasonic waves

• To provide knowledge on the concepts of Ultrasonic Instrumentation

• To understand the applications of ultrasonic instruments

Course Outcome:

• Analyze the Characteristics of ultrasonic waves.

• Develop sensors to measure physical quantities using ultrasonic methods.

• Apply the concepts of ultrasonic instruments to make simple applications.

Ultrasonic Waves -Principles and propagation of various waves, Characterization of ultrasonic

transmission, Reflection and Transmission coefficients, Intensity and attenuation of sound beam.

Generation/Detection Of Ultrasonic Waves - Magnetostrictive and piezoelectric effects, Detection of

Ultrasonic Waves: Mechanical ,Optical and Electrical Method, Precise Measurement: Pulse– echo

Overlap, Cross correlation, Ultrasonic Applications - Ultrasonic methods of flaw detection, Flow meters,

Density measurement, Viscosity measurement, Level measurement, Sensor for Temperature and Pressure

measurements, Measuring thickness, Depth, Rail Inspection, SONAR, Inspection of Welds and defect

detection in welds of anisotropic materials, ultrasonic applications in medical field.

Karuny

a Univ

ersity


References

1. Baldev Raj, V.Rajendran, P.Palanichamy, “Science and Technology of Ultrasonics”,Alpha

Science International, UK, 2004.

2. J.David N.Cheeke,”Fundamentals and Applications of Ultrasonic Waves,” CRC Press, Florida,

2002.

3. LawrenceE.Kinsler, Austin R.Frey, Alan B.Coppens, James V. Sanders, “Fundamentals of

Acoustics,” John Wiley and Sons Inc,USA, 2000.

4. L.A. Bulavin, YU.F.Zabashta, “Ultrasonic Diagnostics in Medicine,” VSP, Koninklijke,

Brill,Boston, 2007.

5. Emmanuel P. Papadakis, “Ultrasonic Instruments and Devices”Academic Press,1999.



Course objective:

To introduce the fundamentals of measurement systems and errors.

To provide adequate knowledge on the measurement of electrical and non-electrical quantities.

To have an understanding of the concepts of signal generators, analyzers and recording

instruments.

Course outcome:

Analyze the instrument characteristics and the errors in measurement.

Develop measurement systems for measuring electrical and non-electrical quantities.

Suggest the types of analyzers, display devices and recording instruments for a specific

application.

Standards and Indicating Instruments-Errors in measurement- MC-MI-PMMC instruments-

Measurement of electrical quantities- R,L,C,power,energy- Transducers used for sensing the measuring

quantities - measurement of non-electrical quantities - temperature, pressure, speed - Signal Generators

and analysers such as oscillators, spectrum and network analysers – various types of display indicators

and different types of signal recorders as data acquisition systems

References

1. Sawhney.A.K., “A Course in Electrical & Electronic Measurement and Instrumentation”,

DhanpatRai& Company Private Limited, New Delhi, 18thEdition, 2007.

2. Helfrick A.D., “Modern Electronic Instrumentation & Measurements”, Prentice Hall India Private

Limited, New Delhi, 2007.

3. Doeblin,E.O., “Measurement Systems : Application and Design”, 5th Edition, Tata Mc-Graw Hill

Publishing Company Limited , New Delhi, 2004.

4. Golding,E.W., and Widdis,F.C., “Electrical Measurements and Measuring Instruments”, A H

Wheeler & Company, Calcutta, 5th Edition, 2003.

5. Rangan,C.S., Sharma, G.R., Mani, V.S., “Instrumentation Devices and Systems”, Tata McGraw


6. John P Bentley, “Principles of measurement systems”, Pearson Prentice Hall, 4/e, 2005.

7. Alan S. Morris, “Measurement and Instrumentation Principles”, Elsevier, 2001.

Karuny

a Univ

ersity


14EI2042 ADVANCED CONTROL THEORY



Course Objective:

• Provide adequate knowledge on the description and stability of non-linear system.

• Understand the analysis of digital control system using state-space formulation.

• Look at the formulation and analysis of multi input multi output (MIMO) system.

Course Outcome:

• Gain knowledge in analysis of non-linear system and digital control of linear system.

• Implement the concept of MIMO system.

• Find non-linear system stability using the trajectory methods.

State Space Analysis of Discrete Time Systems, Controllability, Observability, Pole placement design,

Design of State observer, Response of sampled data system to step and ramp Inputs – Stability studies –

Jury’s test and bilinear transformation, Types of nonlinearity, Construction of phase trajectories,

Describing function method, Lyapunov stability analysis, Introduction to multivariable Nyquist plot and

Singular values analysis, Advanced control techniques.

References

1. Nagrath I.J., Gopal M., ‘Control Systems Engineering’, New Age International Publishers, 5th

Edition, New Delhi 2003.

2. Raymond T. Stefani, Bahram Shahian, Clement J. Savant and Gene Hostetter , “Design of

feedback Control systems”, Oxford University Press, New York,4th Edition, 2002.

3. Katsuhiko Ogata, “Discrete-Time Control Systems”, New Age International, New Delhi, 4th

Edition, 2007.

4. Gopal M, “Digital Control and State Variable Methods”, Tata McGraw- Hill, New Delhi, 3rd

Edition. 2008.

5. Richard C. Dorf and Robert H. Bishop, “Modern Control Systems”, Pearson Education, New

Delhi, 8th Edition, 2004.



Course Objective:

• To introduce the fundamentals of virtual instrumentation.

• To provide knowledge about the programming techniques in virtual instrumentation.

• To learn about the structures and special features of LabVIEW .

Course Outcome:

• Appreciate the advantages of Data flow programming

• Use VI for instrumentation and control

• Design a LabVIEW based instrumentation system.

Historical perspective, advantages, Block diagram and Architecture of a Virtual Instrument, Data Flow

Techniques, Graphical programming in data flow, comparison with Conventional programming -

Introduction and Advantages of LabVIEW, Software Environment, Creating and Saving VI- Front Panel

Controls and Indicators – Block Diagram - Data types – Date flow program – LabVIEW documentation

resources – Keyboard shortcuts – Modular Programming in LabVIEW – Icon and Connector Pane -

SubVI: Creating- Opening-Editing-Placing an SubVI - Creating a Stand Alone Application - Loops and

charts, arrays, clusters and graphs, case and sequence structures, formula nodes, local and global

variables, string and file I/O.

Karuny

a Univ

ersity


References

1. Jovitha Jerome, “Virtual Instrumentation Using LabVIEW” Prentice Hall India Learning Private

Limited, New Delhi, 2010.

2. JohnEssick, “Hands-On Introduction to LabVIEW for Scientists and Engineers”, Oxford

University Press,New York, 2nd

Edition, 2010.

3. NesimiErtugrul, “LabVIEW for Electric Circuits, Machines, Drives, and Laboratories”, Pearson

Education, 2nd

Edition, 2002.


5. Sanjay Gupta and Joseph John, “ Virtual Instrumentation using LabVIEW”, Tata McGraw – Hill

Education India Private Limited, New Delhi, 2nd

Edition, 2010.

6. Gary W. Johnson, Richard Jennings, “LabVIEW Graphical Programming”, McGraw-Hill

Education, New York, 3rd Edition, 2001.

14EI2044 PLC AND AUTOMATION


Course Objectives:

• To learn the basics and programming of PLC.

• To examine the difference between SCADA and DCS.

• To understand the basic concepts of Intelligent Automation.

Course Outcome:

• Identify, formulate, and solve problems related to PLC.

• Design a system, component, or process to meet desired needs of the industrial requirement.

• Implement a complete SCADA application relating to an industrial process or operation

Description

Basics of PLC – Architecture of PLC – Advantages – Types of PLC – Introduction to PLC Networking –

Protocols – Field bus – Process bus and Ethernet. Types of Programming – Simple process control

programs using Relay Ladder Logic and Boolean logic methods – PLC arithmetic functions – Process

automation - Difference between SCADA system and DCS – Architecture – Local control Unit –

Programming language – Operator interface – Engineering interfaces. Introduction to SCADA –

Comparison between SCADA and DCS - Necessity and Role in Industrial Automation – Text display –

Operator panels & Touch panels - Factory Automation - Computer Integrated Manufacture – CNC –

Intelligent automation – Wireless controls.

References

1. Webb, John W.Reis, Ronald A., “Programmable Logic Controllers Principles and Application”,

PHI Learning, New Delhi, 5th Edition, 2002.

2. Dieter K. Hammer, Lonnie R. Welch, Dieter K. Hammer, “Engineering of Distributed Control

Systems”, Nova Science Publishers, USA, 2001.

3. Gary Dunning, “Introduction to Programmable Logic Controllers”, Thomson Business

Information, New Delhi, 2nd

Edition, 2009.

4. Bolton. W, “Programmable Logic Controllers”, Elsevier India Private Limited, 5th Edition, New

Delhi, 2010.

5. Mikell P. Groover, “Automation Produciton systems and Computer Integrated Manufacturing”,

PHI Learning Ltd., 3rd

Edition, New Delhi, 2009

Karuny

a Univ

ersity


14EI2045 ARTIFICIAL ORGANS AND REHABILITATION ENGINEERING


Course Objective

To know about various types of assist devices.

To give a basic idea of the artificial organs that can aid a human to live a normal life.

To provide the awareness on assistance that can be rendered to a differently abled person

Course Outcome

Design simple assist devices from basic principles.

Choose suitable type of assist device for various disorders and legal aspects related to

rehabilitation.

Develop new devices based on the basic knowledge gained in different assisting devices.

Description

Biomaterials used in artificial organs andprostheses, Outlook for Organ replacement – Design

considerations – Evaluation Process - Brief of kidney filtration, Haemodialysis: flat plate type, coil

typeand hollow fiber. Haemodialysis Machine, Portable kidney machine - Brief of lungs gaseous

exchange / transport,artificial heart-lung devices. Oxygenators: bubble, film oxygenators and membrane

oxygenators. Gas flow rate and area for membrane oxygenators - Anatomy & Physiology of EAR-air

conduction, bone conduction, masking, functional diagram of an audiometer. Hearing aids: different

types, receiver amplifiers - Ultra sonic and laser canes, Intra ocular lens, Braille Reader, Tactile devices

for visually challenged, Text voice converter.

Reference Books

1. Joseph D. Bronzing, “The Biomedical Engineering Handbook”, CRC Press, Connecticut, 2nd

Edition, 2000.

2. Leslie Cromwell, “Biomedical Instrumentation and measurement”, Prentice hall of India, New

Delhi, 2007

3. Khandpur R.S, “Handbook of Biomedical Instrumentation”, Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi,

2007.

4. Laurence J. Street, “Introduction to Biomedical Engineering Technology”, CRC Press 2007.

5. Myer Kutz, “Standard Handbook of Biomedical Engineering & Design”, McGraw-Hill

Professional. 1st Edition, 2002

6. D. Jennings, A. Flint, B.C.H. firton and L.D.M. Nokes, “Introduction to Medical Electronics

Applications” Butterworth-Heinemann; 1995.



Course Objective:

To provide sound knowledge in the basic concepts of process control.

To deal with the concepts of stability analysis of a system.

To learn about the fundamentals of instruments used to measure physical parameters.

Course Outcome:

Derive the mathematical model of a system and analyze its characteristics.

Determine the stability of a given system

Apply the knowledge of industrial instruments to suggest sensors for a particular application.

Karuny

a Univ

ersity


Introduction to process control: Importance of Process control systems, steady state design, process

control block diagram, types of responses, transforms of functions, Control systems, Open and closed

loop systems, hydraulic and pneumatic systems, Control valves, Stability analysis, Stability criterion,

Characteristic equation, Routh test for stability, signal flow graph, Masons’s Gain formula, block

diagram, Industrial instrumentation, Measurement methods for sensing the pressure, temperature, level,

density, composition.

References

1. J.F Richardson A D. G. Peacock, Coulson & Richardson’s “Chemical Engineering” Volume3,

(Chemical and Biochemical reactors and process control) Butherworth – Heinemann, an imprint

of Elsevier, 2006.

2. Donald R. Coughanowr., “Process System analysis and control” McGraw Hill

International Edition , Second Edition, Singapore, 2008

3. Nagoorkani. A “Control Systems”, RBA publications, 2nd edition, Nineteenth reprint 2012

4. S. Baskar, “Instrumentation control system measurements and controls”, Anuradha Agencies

Publishers, 2004.

5. Nagrath. M and Gopal. I.J, “Control Systems Engineering”, Wiley Eastern Limited, Third Edition

Reprint 2003.



Co-Requisite: 14EI2046 Process Control for Food Engineers

Course Objective:

To provide adequate knowledge about the principle and characteristics of instruments.

To learn about open loop and closed loop systems.

To gain knowledge on stability analysis of a system

Course Outcome:

Determine the characteristics of instruments and analyze their performance.

Analyze the performance of open loop and closed loop systems.

Perform stability analysis of a given system.

Description:

This laboratory enables the student to analyze the performance of various measuring instruments and use

them to control a system.

List of experiments





Course Objective:

• To provide adequate knowledge in the fundamental concepts of mechanical instrumentation

• To introduce the basics of mathematical modelling and controller design.

• To discuss about stability analysis of systems.

Course Outcome:

• Apply the knowledge of mechanical instruments to select suitable sensors for a particular

application.

Karuny

a Univ

ersity


• Derive the mathematical model of a given system and develop control algorithms to improve its

performance.

• Determine the stability of a given system.

General concepts of Mechanical Instrumentation, generalized measurement system - Classification of

instruments as indicators, Recorders and integrators Measurement error and calibration, Pressure And

Temperature Measurement, Strain And Flow Measurement, Control Systems: Open and closed systems,

Servo– mechanisms, Transfer functions,Signal flow graphs, Block diagram algebra, hydraulic and

pneumatic control systems, Two way control , Proportional control - Differential and Integral control,

Stability analysis, Concept of Stability, Necessary condition for Stability, Routh stability criterion, Polar

and Bode plots, Nyquist plots

References

1. Jain R.K., “Mechanical and Industrial Measurements” Khanna Publishers, 2002.

2. Nagoorkani.A “Control Systems”, RBA publications, first edition ninth reprint 2002.

3. Sawhny, A.K. “Electrical and Electronics Measurements & Instrumentation”,

DhanpatRai& Co., 2000.

4. Collet. C. V. and Hope. A.D. ‘Engineering Measurements’ 2nd Edition ELBS.


6. Baskar S,’Instrumentation control system measurements and controls ‘anuradha agencies

publishers,2004.



Course Objective:



To learn about computer based instrumentation

Course Outcome:



Apply computer based instrumentation for real time applications

Instrumentation system – The general instrumentation system, Static and Dynamic Characteristics,

Resistance and Inductance transducers, Capacitance and Piezoelectric transducers, Digital methods of

measurements – Digital voltmeters and multimeters , Digital frequency, period and time measurements,

Digital tachometers, Digital phase meters, Digital data recording, Digital Transducers, Computer based

instrumentation – Evolution of Virtual Instrumentation, Architecture of Virtual Instrumentation, Virtual

Instruments Versus Traditional Instruments, Advantages of VI, Interface Buses: PCI, PXI, and VXI.

References

1. Jackson R G, “Novel Sensors and Sensing”, Institute of Physics Publishing, Bristol and

Philadelphia, 2004.

2. Doeblin E.O, “Measurement Systems– Applications and Design”, McGraw Hill, New

York, 2003.

3. Kalsi H S, “Electronic Instrumentation”, Second Edition, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi,

2009

4. John Park ,Steve Mackay,” Practical Data Acquisition for Instrumentation and Control

Systems” Elsevier, 2003.

Karuny

a Univ

ersity


5. Mathivanan “PC based instrumentation: concepts and practice” PHI, 2008



8. S. Sumathi and P. Surekha , “LabVIEW based Advanced Instrumentation Systems”

Springer, 2007.




Course Objective:

• To equip the students with the basic knowledge of Process Modelling.

• To understand various conventional and adaptive controllers.

• To introduce the concept of Multivariable systems and decoupling.

Course Outcome:

• Develop mathematical model of a physical process.

• Design various conventional and adaptive controllers.

• Understand the knowledge of MIMO process and decoupling.

Process control system – Terms and objectives, Piping and Instrumentation diagram, Instrument terms

and symbols, Classification of variables, Modelling of simple systems

Basic control action – Continuous controller modes- Selection of control mode for different process with

control scheme, Control valve types and characteristics, Controller tuning – Optimum controller settings,

Tuning of controllers, Advanced Control schemes, MIMO systems–Introduction, loop interaction ,

relative gains., Advanced control strategies – Internal model control, Adaptive control, Dynamic matrix

control, Generalized predictive control

References


2. Coughanowr D.R., “Process Systems Analysis and Control”, McGraw – Hill Higher Education,

Singapore, 2008.

3. Wayne BequetteB,’ Process control: modeling, design, and simulation’ Prentice Hall , New

Jersey – 2003.

4. Smith C.L and Corripio.A..B, “Principles and Practice of Automatic Process Control”, John

Wiley and Sons, New York, 2006.

5. Dale E. Seborg, Thomas F. Edgar, Duncan A. Mellichamp, “Process Dynamics and Control”

,Willey India, 2006.

6. Marlin. T.E., Process Control, Second Edition McGraw Hill NewYork, 2000


LABORATORY


Co-Requisite: 14EI3003 – Advanced Process Control

Course Objective:

• To demonstrate the various process Measurements.

• To inculcate the various controller design.

• To implement Programmable Logic Control for real time applications.

Karuny

a Univ

ersity


Course Outcome:

• Measure various process measurements using the appropriate instruments.

• Design control algorithms for different control loops.

• Implement Programmable Logic Control for real time applications.

List of experiments





Course Objective:

• To understand the basics of state space representation.

• To study the controllers and the stability analysis of linear and non-linear systems.

• To study the concepts of robustness

Course Outcome:

• Obtain the state space representation of a system.

• Design controllers and analyse stability of a system

• Design robust control systems

Modelling of dynamic systems-Definition, Mathematical modelling, State space representation,

Centrifugal Governor, Ground vehicle, Permanent Magnet stepper motor, Inverted Pendulum, Analysis of

mathematical models – State space method, Phase plane, Isoclines, Numerical methods, State space

analysis – Reachability and controllability , Observability and constructability, Companion forms,

Controller / Observer form, State feedback control, State estimators, Stability of nonlinear system –

Lyapunov stability theorems, Krasovskii’s method, Variable gradient method, Phase plane analysis,

Singular points, Limit cycle, Describing function analysis.

Robust PID control – Introduction to robust control- PID Tuning– Modifications of PID control scheme –

Two Degrees of Freedom Control – Design consideration of Robust Control

References





5. Singaresu S. Rao, “Applied Numerical Methods” Prentice Hall, Upper Saddle River, New Jersey,

2001.

6. Jean – Jacques E. Slotine, Weiping Li, “Applied nonlinear control”, Prentice Hall Inc., New

Jersey, 2004.



Course Objective:

• To learn the concepts of discrete time Control systems.

• To introduce polynomial equations approach to control system design.

• To deal with the different types of digital control algorithm.

Course Outcome:

• Appreciate the need for discrete time control systems

Karuny

a Univ

ersity


• Design control system using polynomial equations approach.

• Develop different types of digital control algorithm for a system.

Z transform – Review of Z Transform –Stability Analysis in Z domain

State space analysis – State Space representation of discrete time Signals – Solving discrete time State

Space Equations

Pole placement and observer design – Controllability – Observability –Design via Pole Placement – State

Observer

Polynomial approach – Polynomial Equations Approach to Control System Design

Digital algorithms – Implementation of different digital control algorithms

References

1. Ogata, “Discrete – Time Control Systems”, Pearson Education, Sigapore,2002.

2. Ky M. Vu, Optimal Discrete Control Theory The Rational Function Structure Model, Library and

archives Canada cataloguing in publication, Canada,2007.

3. Gene F. Franklin,J. David Powell, “Digital control of dynamic systems”, Pearson Education

Limited – 2002.

4. Gopal M, Digital Control and State variable Methods, Second Edition, Tata McGrawHill, New

Delhi, 2003.



Course Objective:


To introduce fuzzy logic concepts and its applications in Control.

To introduce the fundamental concepts of genetic algorithm.

Course Outcome:

Develop and train a neural network.

Develop a fuzzy system for a given application

Use the neural network and fuzzy logic techniques to control a system.

Neural Networks: Introduction – Biological Neurons and their artificial Models, Learning Rules, Types

Of Neural Networks , Schemes Of Neuro Control, System Identification , Case studies, Fuzzy Logic:

Fuzzy Sets, Fuzzy Operation, Fuzzy Arithmetic, Fuzzy Relations, Fuzzy Relational Equations,

Approximate Reasoning, Fuzzy Propositions, Fuzzy Quantifiers

Structure of Fuzzy Logic Controller, Fuzzy Control Applications

Genetic Algorithm and its applications: Fundamentals, Comparison Of GA And Traditional Search

Methods, Genetic Algorithm In Scientific Models And Theoretical Foundations, Case Studies

References

1. Jacek M Zurada, ‘Introduction to Artificial Neural Systems’, Jaico Publishing House,

1999.

2. Rajasekaran.S and G.A Vijayalakshmi Pai, ‘Neural Networks, Fuzzy logic and Genetic

Algorithms, Synthesis and Applications’, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi – 2003.

3. Klir G.J. &Folger T.A. ‘Fuzzy sets, uncertainty and Information’, Prentice Hall of India Pvt.

Ltd.,1993.

4. Zimmerman H.J. ‘Fuzzy set theory –and its Applications’ – Kluwer Academic

Publishers,1994.

Karuny

a Univ

ersity


5. Melanie Mitchell, ‘An introduction to Genetic Algorithm’, Prentice – Hall of India, New Delhi,

Edition: 2004.




Course Objective:

• To introduce the theory of optimal control and its applications.

• To provide knowledge of dynamic optimization

• To deal with design of optimal control system

Course Outcome:

• Apply optimal control concepts to systems.

• Use dynamic optimization techniques to controllers.

• Design optimal control algorithms for real time systems.

Introduction , Problem formulation , Optimal control problem, Performance measures for optimal control

problem, Selection, Dynamic programming – Optimal control law, Principle of optimality, A recurrence

relation of dynamic programming, Hamilton – Jacobi – Bellman equation, Calculus of variations –

Functions and Functional , Maxima and minima of function, Variation of functional , Extremal of

functional, Euler Lagrange equation

Variational approach to optimal control problems, Necessary conditions for optimal control, Linear

regulator problems, Linear tracking problems, Pontryagin’s minimum principle and state inequality

constraints, Minimum time problems – Singular intervals in optimal control problems, Various

optimization algorithms

References

1. Donald E. Kirk, Optimal Control Theory: An Introduction, Prentice – Hall networks series, New

Jersey, 2004.

2. Singiresu S. Rao “Engineering Optimization: Theory and Practice” New Age International (P)

Ltd., Publishers New Delhi – 2004.

3. Gopal M, “Digital Control and State Variable Methods”, Tata McGraw – Hill Companies New

Delhi, 2009.

4. Dimitri P. Bertsekas.’Dynamic Programming and Optimal Control’ Vol –1 Athena Scientific,

Bell mount MA, 2000.



Course Objective:

To provide the basic concepts of various industrial process measurements

To give an exposure to smart instruments.

To deal with the design and calibration of measuring Instruments

Course Outcome:

Design and calibrate the measuring instruments

Analyze the characteristics of instruments

Suggest suitable instruments for a particular application

Design and Calibration of various types of measuring instruments for Pressure Measurement, Flow

Measurement, Temperature Measurement and Level Measurement.

Karuny

a Univ

ersity


References

1. Doeblin E.O.I, Measurement Systems: Application and Design, Fifth Edition, McGraw –

Hill Publishing Co. 5th edition, 2003.

2. Liptak B. ‘Process Measurement and Analysis’, 4th Edition,ISA, CRC Press, 2003.

3. Tatamangalam R., ‘Industrial Instrumentation Principles and Design’, Springer Verlag,

2000.

4. Singh. S.K, ‘Industrial Instrumentation and Control’, Tata McGraw Hill, Reprint 2004.



Course Objective:

To impart the knowledge of compensators.

To study the basic concepts of discrete domain representation of the system.

To provide knowledge on the concepts of state estimation

Course Outcome:

Design compensators for process applications

Represent systems in discrete domain

Design state estimators.

Conventional Design Methods: Design specifications, PID controllers and compensators, Root locus

based design, Bode based design, Design examples, Design In Discrete Domain: Sample and Hold,

Digital equivalents, Impulse and step invariant transformations , Methods of discretisation, Effect of

sampling, Direct discrete design, Discrete root locus, Design examples, Optimal Control :Formation of

optimal control problems, Calculus of variations, Hamiltonian formulation, Discrete State Variable

Design: Discrete pole placement, State and output feedback, Estimated state feedback, Discrete optimal

control , Dynamic programming - Design examples, State Estimation :State Estimation Problem,

Luenberger’s observer - Noise characteristics, Kalman - Bucy filter, Separation Theorem, Controller

Design, Wiener filter, Design examples.

References



3. G. F. Franklin, J. D. Powell and A. E. Naeini “Feedback Control of Dynamic Systems”, PHI

(Pearson), 2002.

4. Graham C. Goodwin, Stefan F. Graebe and Mario E. Salgado “Control system Design”, PHI

(Pearson), 2003.

5. G. F. Franklin, J. D. Powell and M Workman, “Digital Control of Dynamic Systems”, PHI

(Pearson), 2002.

6. B.D.O. Anderson and J.B. Moore., ‘Optimal Filtering’, Prentice hall Inc., N.J., Second version

published in 2005.

7. Loan D. Landau, Gianluca Zito,” Digital Control Systems, Design, Identification and

Implementation”, Springer, 2006.

Karuny

a Univ

ersity




Course Objective:

• To strengthen the knowledge of Virtual Instrumentation.

• To understand the concept of signal processing using virtual instruments

• To introduce the concept of Data Acquisition using virtual instrumentation

Course Outcome:

• Analyze real world signals

• Interface real process with a virtual instrument.

• Perform signal processing operations using virtual instrumentation.

List of experiments



14EI3012 EMBEDDED CONTROL SYSTEMS LABORATORY


Course Objective:

To learn about the Embedded Processors with Real World applications.

To introduce the concept of control applications in embedded systems.

To enhance the knowledge in interfacing processes with embedded controllers.

Course Outcome:

Write programs in an IDE and download it to the Processor.

Design and program Embedded circuits.

Design control algorithms in an embedded processor.

List of experiments



14EI3014 INDUSTRIAL AUTOMATION


Course Objective:



To deal with PLC for control applications

Course Outcome:

Apply PLC programming for control purpose

Apply ladder logic methodology in automation field

Apply PLC in real time continuous process

Nature of Industrial Process: continuous & discrete state , sequential process, process variables and their

classification. Introduction to Process Control Philosophies: type of relays, ladder logic methodology,

Introduction to Programmable Logic Controllers: PLC programming methodologies: ladder diagram,

Karuny

a Univ

ersity


STL, functional block diagram, creating ladder diagram from process control descriptions, introduction to

IEC61131 international standard for PLC.

PLC functions- PLC Timer & Counter functions - on-delay timer, off-delay, Timers- PLC Data

Handling: - PLC arithmetic and logical functions- Analog value processing: types of analog modules,

analog input and output examples, PID control of continuous process.

References

1. John webb, “Programmable logic controllers-Principles & applications”, Prentice Hall of

India,2003.

2. T. A. Hughes, ”Programmable controllers, ISA, 2005.

3. 1.C. D. Johnson, “Process control instrumentation Technology, 3rd

Edition, John Wiley & Sons,

1988.



Course Objective:

• To understand the concept of signal modelling

• To impart the concepts of system identification

• To introduce the concept of adaptive control

Course Outcome:

• Select a suitable model for a given system.

• Perform system identification of a given process using different methods.

• Design adaptive control strategies for real time applications.

Signal modelling – Models of LTI systems- - Models for Time - varying and Non - linear systems,

Models with Nonlinearities, Nonlinear state - space models, Black box models, Fuzzy models,

Identification – Non - Parametric and Parametric identification, Transient response and Correlation

Analysis, Frequency response analysis, Spectral Analysis, Least Square, Recursive Least Square,

Validation – Non - Linear Identification and Model Validation, State estimation techniques, Non linear

identification using Neural Network and Fuzzy Logic, Adaptive control – Self Tuning Regulators (STR),

Model Reference Adaptive Control (MRAC) , Gain Scheduling, Applications – Inverted Pendulum,

Robot arm, Process control application: heat exchanger, Distillation column - Application to power

system, Ship steering control.

References

1. Narendra and Annasamy,” Stable Adaptive Control Systems, Prentice Hall, Inc., 2005.

2. Astrom and Wittenmark,” Adaptive Control Second Edition”, Addison - Wesley Publishing

Company 1995.

3. Monson H.Hayes,’ Statistical Digital Signal Processing and Modelling”, John Wiley and

Sons,2002


5. Torsten Soderstrom, Petre Stoica, “System Identification”, prentice Hall ` International (UK)

Ltd,1994.

6. William S. Levine, “ Control Hand Book” CRC Press, Jaico Publishing House, 1999.


Karuny

a Univ

ersity




Course Objective:

• To introduce the need for Data Acquisition.

• To understand the concept of Supervisory Control.

• To deal with the applications of SCADA Systems.

Course Outcome:

• Appreciate the need of Data Acquisition.

• Apply the concept of Supervisory Control

• Perform simulation for various process.

Introduction to SCADA and PLC:SCADA: Data acquisition system, PLC: Block diagram, programming

languages, SCADA system components: Schemes, Remote Terminal Unit, Intelligent Electronic

Devices, Communication Network, SCADA server, SCADA Architecture: Various SCADA

Architectures, advantages and disadvantages, SCADA Communication and Operation and control of

interconnected power system:SCADA applications

References

1. Stuart A Boyer, “SCADA supervisory control and data acquisition”,ISA- The Instrumentation,

Systems and Automation Society,2010.

2. Gordan Clark, Deem Reynders, “Practical Modem SCADA Protocols”, Elsevier

Publications,2004.

3. Sunil S. Rao, “Switchgear and Protections”, Khanna Publication,1992.

4. John Park, Steve Mackay, “Practical Data Acquisition for Instrumentation and Control

Systems”,.Elsevier Publications,2003.



Course Objective:

• To inculcate the knowledge of Multivariable control systems.

• To design controller for multivariable control systems.

• To apply the design for various applications.

Course Outcome:

• Apply the concept of Multivariable control systems.

• Design controller for multivariable control systems.

• Use the corresponding controller synthesis techniques.

Analysis: system representations, return difference matrix, stability theory, multivariable poles and

zeros. Design: design criteria, LQG design methods (including the optimal linear quadratic regulator and

the Kalman filter), norm-based methods, robust stability and performance. H-infinity design techniques,

including the generalised regulator problem. Model reduction, including modal and balanced truncation.

Design examples: use of software for the design of controllers for industrial processes.

References 1. Stanislaw Zak, ‘Systems and Control’, Oxford University Press, 2003.


3. Charles R. Slivinsky, Donald G. Schultz, Lynn E. Weaver, “The design of linear multivariable

control systems using modern control theory”, 1969.

http://www.google.co.in/search?tbo=p&tbm=bks&q=inauthor:%22Charles+R.+Slivinsky%22

http://www.google.co.in/search?tbo=p&tbm=bks&q=inauthor:%22Donald+G.+Schultz%22

http://www.google.co.in/search?tbo=p&tbm=bks&q=inauthor:%22Lynn+E.+Weaver%22

Karuny

a Univ

ersity


4. Ying-Jyi Paul Wei, “Frequency-domain approaches to linear multivariable control system

designs, 1979.


14EI3018 PIPING AND INSTRUMENTATION


Course Objective:

• To provide knowledge on the symbols of Piping and Instrumentation diagram.

• To deal with P&I flow diagram.

• To learn the applications of Piping and Instrumentation diagrams in process plants.

Course Outcome:

• Identify the symbols used in Piping and Instrumentation diagrams.

• Interpret the Piping and Instrumentation diagram of a process.

• Analyze the condition of a process from the Piping and Instrumentation representation.

Types of flow sheets, Flow sheet Presentation, Flow Sheet Symbols, Process flow diagram- Synthesis of

steady state flow sheet - Flow sheeting software.

P & I D objectives, guide rules, Symbols, Line numbering, Line schedule, P & I D development, typical

stages of P & I D.

P & I D for rotating equipment and static pressure vessels, Process vessels, absorber, Control System for

Heater, Heat exchangers, reactors, dryers, Distillation column,

Applications of P & I D in design stage - Construction stage - Commissioning stage - Operating stage -

Revamping stage - Applications of P & I D in Risk

References

1. Ernest E. Ludwig, “Applied Process Design for Chemical and Petrochemical Plants”, Vol.-I Gulf

Publishing Company, Houston, 1989.

2. Max. S. Peters and K.D.Timmerhaus, “Plant Design and Economics for Chemical Engineers”,

McGraw Hill, Inc., New York, 1991.

3. 3.Bela G. Liptak, “ Process Measurement and Analysis”, ISA, CRC press,2003.

4. Anil Kumar,”Chemical Process Synthesis and Engineering Design”, Tata McGraw Hill

publishing Company Limited, New Delhi - 1981.

5. A.N. Westerberg, et al., “Process Flowsheeting”, Cambridge University Press, 1979.



Course Objective:



To deal with the concepts of embedded instrumentation systems

Course Outcome:



Develop computer based instrumentation for real time applications

http://www.google.co.in/search?tbo=p&tbm=bks&q=inauthor:%22Ying-Jyi+Paul+Wei%22

Karuny

a Univ

ersity


Instrumentation system - resistance and inductance transducer-capacitance and piezoelectric transducers,

digital methods of measurements: computer based instrumentation, evolution of virtual instrumentation,

architecture of embedded virtual instrumentation, embedded virtual instruments versus traditional

instruments , advantages of vi – pc based data acquisition system, interfacing techniques to the IBM PC –

plug– in data acquisition boards – interface buses: PCI, PXI, VXI

References 1. S. Sumathi, P.Surekha, “LabVIEW based Advanced Instrumentation Systems “ springer 2007

2. N.Mathivanan, “ PC_Based Instrumentation- Concepts and Practice, PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd, 2007

3. Walt Boyes, “ Instrumentation Reference Books”, Third Edition, Butterworth Heinemann, 2003.

14EI3020 NETWORKS AND PROTOCOLS FOR INSTRUMENTATION AND

CONTROL


Course Objective:

To introduce the concept of communication protocols and give an overview of Data

Communication Standards.

To discuss the types of cables used for transmission.

To discuss the operation and applications of the Protocols used in Industries .

Course Outcome:

At the end of the course, Students will be able to

Identify the protocol.

Choose the requires protocol and the communication modes for the given system.

Select a suitable cable for the transmission .

Open systems interconnection ( OSI ) model – protocols – physical standard – smart instrumentation

systems – bits, bytes and characters – communication principles – communication modes –

asynchronous systems – synchronous systems -data communication standards: standards organizations –

serial data communications interface standards – balanced and unbalanced transmission lines – RS232

interface standard – troubleshooting serial data communication circuits – test equipment – ethernet –

ethernet protocol operation – ethernet hardware requirements -cabling, electrical noise and error

detection- modem and multiplexer- industrial protocol: profibus

References 1. Steve Mackay, John Park and Edwin Wright, “Practical Data Communication for Instrumentation

and Control”, Newnes Elsevier, USA, 2002.

2. TanenbaumA.S, “Computer Networks”, Fourth Edition, Prentice – Hall of India, Hyderabad,

2002.

3. William A Shay, “Understanding Data Communications and networks”, Pacific Grove, USA,

2003.



Course Objective:

To strengthen the knowledge of embedded design challenges

To understand the concept of controller using embedded

To deal with the concept of robot system

Karuny

a Univ

ersity


Course Outcome:

Design control application using embedded system

To analyse the process using system identification technique

Design control algorithms for robust control

Characteristics of embedded computing applications – Designing an Adaptive Cruise Control System,

Embedded systems , basic concept, Introduction to embedded control system design, System

identification and model-order reduction, Classical controller design, Classical controller design,

Fundamentals of robust control, Robust controller design, Embedded safety loop development

References

1. Forrai, Alexandru Embedded Control System Design- “A Model Based Approach”, Springer

publication, 2013.

2. Adamski, Marian Andrzej, Karatkevich, Andrei, Wegrzyn, Marek (Eds.), “Design of Embedded

Control Systems”, Springer Publication, 2005.

14EI3023 ADVANCED PROCESSORS FOR CONTROL AND AUTOMATION


Course Objective:

To learn recent trends in advanced microcontroller applications.

To learn microcontroller implementation for control applications

To understand programming with 8 and 32 bit microcontrollers.

Course Outcome:

Program microcontrollers for embedded applications.

Illustrate architecture differences and to show common characteristics.

Design the microcontroller for real time projects.

8 bit processor: 8051 architecture, Programming examples with stepper motor, dc motor, interfacing

timer with control applications, CPU Architecture of PIC microcontroller –temperature, flow process

interfacing , A/D converter, UART , 16 bit processor/32 bit processor: Introduction to 16/32 bit processor,

ARM architecture, The ARM instruction set, The thumb instruction set , programming examples with

control applications

References

1. Raj Kamal – “Microcontrollers – Architecture, Programming, Interfacing and System Design”,

Pearson Education, USA, 2005.

2. SteaveFurber,” ARM system–on–chip architecture” Addison Wesley, New Delhi, 2000.

3. John.B.Peatman, “Design with PIC Micro Controller”, Pearson Education, USA, 2003.

4. Mohammad Ali Mazide, Janice GillispicMazidi, RolinD.Mckinlay, “ The 8051 micro controller

and embedded systems using assembly and C”, prentice Hall of India, Hyderabad, 2006.

5. Kenneth Ayala ,”The 8051 Microcontroller”, Thomson Delmar Learning , New Jersey, 2004.

Karuny

a Univ

ersity




Course Objective:

• To strengthen the knowledge of Virtual Instrumentation..

• To understand the concept of signal processing

• To introduce the concept of Data Acquisition.

Course Outcome:

• Build simple virtual instruments

• Interface the embedded systems to real time signals

• Design embedded applications.

List of experiments





Course Objective:

To understand the current trends in automobiles

To understand basic sensor arrangement and its types

To understand the embedded processor

Course Outcome:

Implement automotive embedded systems in real time applications

Implement controllers design using recent advances like GLS, GPSS, GMS

Design various sensors for real time applications.

Current trends in Automobiles- components for electronic engine management system. Electronic

dashboard instruments, onboard diagnostic system , security and warming system- Vehicle motio control.

Sensors and actuators, and their interfacing. Basic sensor arrangement, types of sensors- Electronic

ignition systems. Types of solid state ignition systems and their principleof operation. Digital engine

control system.

Distributor less ignition – Integrated engine control system, Exhaust emission control engineering.

Automotive Embedded systems. PIC, Freescale microcontroller based system. Recent advances like GLS,

GPSS, GMS

References

1. William B. Riddens, “Understanding Automotive Electronics”, 5th Edition, Butterworth

Hennimann Woburn, Sixth Edition, 2003

2. Tom Weather Jr. & Cland c. Ilunter, “ Automotive computers and control system” Prentice Hall

Inc., New Jersey.,2001

3. Robert Bosch,” Automotive Hand Book”, SAE , (5th

Edition),2000

Karuny

a Univ

ersity


14EI3030 AUTOMOTIVE SENSORS AND INTELLIGENT SYSTEMS


Course Objective:

To introduce sensors in modern electronic system

To introduce the concept of intelligent transport systems

To discuss various sensors and interfacing concept

Course Outcome:

To select sensor for automobile industry

To gain in depth knowledge on the importance of various sensors in automative system

Interface various sensors in automotive electronic systems

Introduction to automotive sensors and instrumentation – sensor product selection guide- sensors and

interfacing – principles of actuation and control- sensors and interfacing techniques for Engine control,

adaptive cruise control, braking control, traction control, steering, stability, sensors for intelligent

transport systems, sensors for occupant safety.

References

1. Ronald K. Jurgeaon, “ Automotive ElectronicsHandbook, 2nd

Edition, Mc Graw-Hill,2007

2. William B. Ribbens, “Understanding Automotive Electronics”, 5th Edition, Newnes, 2006

3. E.Q.Doeblin, “Measurement Systems, Application and Design”, 4th Edition, McGraw-Hill, 2002.

14EI3031 AUTOMOTIVE PROTOCOLS AND TELEMATICS


Course Objective:

To prepare the students to analyse, simulate automotive communication protocols

To introduce theoretical concepts of telematics technologies relevant to automotive applications

To introduce automotive communication protocols and diagnostics protocols.

Course Outcome:

Gain in depth knowledge on data communication and networking and applied in real time

applications.

Implement automotive communication protocols and telematics technologies.

Simulate and implement telematics in wireless technologies.

Basics of Data Communication Networks and Automotive Communication Protocols - Controller Area

Network (CAN) Protocol-CAN Higher Layer Protocols-Local Interconnect Network (LIN) Protocol-

FlexRay Protocol-Media Oriented System Transport (MOST) Protocol - In Vehicle Network Diagnostics-

Telematics basics, applications and technologies- Global Positioning Systems (GPS), Inertial

Navigation Systems (INS), Vehicle Location and Navigation, Bluetooth, UWB, RFID, Satellite

Radio(XM-Radio and SIRIUS), Fleet Management and Case Study

References

1. Aswin Goel, “Fleet Management- Real-time management and planning of commercial vehicle

operations Series”, Springer., 2008

2. Gilbert Held. “Inter- and Intra-Vehicle Communications”, CRC Press, 2007

3. Behrouz Forouzan., “Data Communications and Networking”, McGraw-Hill. 2003

4. Dennis Foy. Automotive Telematics, Red Hat., 2002

Karuny

a Univ

ersity


14EI3033 BIOMEDICAL SENSORS AND SIGNAL CONDITIONING


Course Objective:




Course Outcome:


Interface bioelectric signals with embedded systems

Identify the application of signal condition circuits for biomedical field.

Bioelectric amplifiers- General-purpose linear and non-linear electronic circuits typically found in

industrial applications- Instrumentation amplifiers, Transducer bridge Amplifier. Frequency and time

domain analysis of low pass, high pass, band pass, and band stop filters. Filter class- Frequency

discriminators, oscillators, multivibrators - Amplifier selection for a variety of biomedical sensors,

Wheatstone bridge design, Active filter design using standard approaches, Front-end analogue circuit

design for EMG, ECG, EEG ,Front-end analogue circuit design for limb movement sensing, Power

supply topologies for biomedical instruments

References

1. R. B. Northrop, “Analysis and Application of Analog Electronic Circuits to Biomedical

Instrumentation”, 2nd ed., CRC Press, 2012.


3. Ramón Pallás-Areny, John G. Webster,”Sensors and Signal Conditioning”, 2nd ed., Wiley

publishers, 2000.

14EI3038 PHYSIOLOGICAL CONTROL SYSTEMS


Prerequisite: 14BT3026 Human Anatomy and physiology

Course Objective:

To understand the basic ideas related to modeling of physiological systems

To understand system identification techniques

To analyse physiological system in time and frequency domain

Course Outcome:

Develop mathematical model of any physiological system.

Apply system identification and optimization concepts in modeling.

Simulate the physiological system and analyse in time and frequency domain.

.

Introduction to Physiological control systems, Illustration, modeling Elements, linear models, Distributed

parameters versus lumped parameter models, principle of superposition, BioFeedback, Time and

frequency domain analysis, stability analysis of linear system, model identification of physiological

system, optimization technique, Simulation of biological systems, case studies.

References

1. Katz, A.M. “Physiology of the Heart”, Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, USA, 2006.

Karuny

a Univ

ersity


Ewart Carson, Claudio Cobelli, : “Introduction of Modeling in Physiology and

Medicine”,Academic Press, Netherland, 2008.

2. Vasilis.Z.Mararelis, “ Nonlinear Dynamic Modeling of Physiological System”,

John Wiley & Sons, New Jersey, 2004.

3. Daniel Weiner, Johan Gabrielsson, “Pharmacokinetic and Pharmacodynamic Data

Analysis: Concepts and Applications, Sweden, 2000.

4. Milsum J H, “Biological control system analysis”, Mc GrawHill, Newyark, 1966.

5. Michael.C.K.Khoo, “Physiological control systems: Analysis, Simulation and Estimation”, IEEE

Press, Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd. New Delhi. 2001.

14EI3039 MEDICAL INSTRUMENTATION


Course Objective:

To introduce the basic principle of human physiological systems.

To understand the measurement of various physiological parameters.

To understand the design principle biomedical instruments.

Course Outcome:

Suggest suitable medical instrumentation for physiological measurements.

Design instrumentation circuits for measuring new physiological parameters.

Use the knowledge of biomedical instruments to solve clinical problems.

Physiological measurements: Cell and its Electrical activity, Principle of Physiological systems:

Cardiovascular, Nervous system, Respiratory system, Vision, Muscular system-Electrodes and bioelectric

signals: Bio electrodes, ECG, EMG, EEG and EOG, Measurement of physiological parameters: Blood

flow, Blood pressure, Cardiac output, Bio–chemical measurement, Photometer.

References

1. Khandpur. R. S, “Handbook of Biomedical Instrumentation”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2/e, New Delhi,

2003.

2. Leslie Cromwell, Fred J Weibell, Erich A Pfeiffer, “Biomedical Instrumentation and

Measurements”, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 2007.

3. Joseph J. Carr and John M. Brown, “Introduction to Biomedical Equipment Technology”,Pearson

Education India, Delhi, 2004.

4. Myer Kutz, “Standard Handbook of Biomedical Engineering & Design,” McGraw– Hill

Publisher, New York, 2003.

5. Webster, “Medical Instrumentation – Application & Design,” John Wiley and sons Inc,

Netherlands, 2004.

6. Arumugam, “Biomedical Instrumentation”, Anuradha Publisher, Chennai.2013.

14EI3040 BIO VIRTUAL INSTRUMENTATION


Course Objectives:

To understand the salient features of virtual instruments.

To know about how to acquire a data and control an external measuring device by

interfacing to a computer.

To become competent in bio-signal acquisition and medical image acquisition and processing.

Karuny

a Univ

ersity


Course Outcome:

Identify salient traits of a virtual instrument and incorporate these traits in projects.

Experiment, analyze and document in the laboratory prototype measurement systems using a

computer, plug-in DAQ interfaces and bench level instruments.

Effectively use the virtual instrumentation in bio-signal processing and image processing.

Historical perspective, advantages, Architecture o f a Virtual Instrument-Graphical programming -

Development of Virtual Instrument-Software and hardware installation- Common Instrument Interfaces-

Current loop, interface buses- networking basics- Image and signal Acquisition and Processing- Motion

control-Applications of virtual instruments in Biomedical engineering.

References

1. Jerome, Jovitha, “Virtual Instrumentation and LABVIEW”, PHI Learning, New Delhi, First

Edition, 2010.

2. Sanjay Gupta and Joseph John, “ Virtual Instrumentation using LabVIEW”, Tata Mc

Graw – Hill Publishing Company Limited, New Delhi, 1st Edition, 2005.

3. Ronald W. Larsen, “LabVIEW for Engineers”, Prentice Hall Ltd, USA Jan 2010.


5. Gupta, “Virtual Instrumentation Using Lab View”, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi,1st

Edition, 2008.

14EI3041 HOSPITAL MANAGEMENT SYSTEM


Course Objective:

To understand the need and significance of Clinical Engineering and Health Policies.

To familiarize the training strategies, quality management policies and

information technology used in health care.

To know the needs of managerial training to hospital staffs

Course Outcome:

Appreciate the need for standard health policies and quality management in hospitals.

Apply the knowledge of computer and information technology in health care.

Relate the training needs at various level of organization

Need and scopes of clinical engineering, Educational responsibilities-Design and layout of hospital-

National health policies, Health organization in state- Health education-Health insurance, Health

legislation-Training -Employee appraisal method-Standards, codes and quality management in health

care-regulation for mobile ICU-Maintenance of equipments-work planning-Medical records and

information management-information technology in medicine and healthcare-operations research in

hazard management.

References

1. Webster J.C. and Albert M.Cook, “Clinical Engineering Principle and Practice”, Prentice Hall

Inc., Englewood Cliffs, New Jersey, 1979.

2. Goyal R.C., “Handbook of hospital personal management”, Prentice Hall of India, 1996.

3. R. Panneerselvam, “Operations research”, PHI learning pvt. Ltd., Newdelhi.2006.

http://www.google.co.in/search?tbo=p&tbm=bks&q=inauthor:%22R.+PANNEERSELVAM%22

Karuny

a Univ

ersity


4. A.K.Malhotra,“Hospital management: An Evaluation”, Global India Publications,2009.

5. James R. Langabeer, “Health Care Operations Management: A Quantitative Approach to

Business and logistics”, Jones & Bartlett Learning, UK.2008.

14EI3042 COGNITIVE TECHNOLOGY FOR BIOMEDICAL ENGINEERS


Course Objective:

To introduce the basic concepts of neural networks and its applications in biomedical field.

To introduce fuzzy logic concept and its applications in medical diagnosis.

To introduce the concepts of genetic algorithm and its application in biomedical field.

Course Outcome:

• Develop algorithms for medical applications using neural network.

• Design suitable fuzzy logic controllers for various medical instrumentation.

• Develop algorithms using genetic algorithm to solve real world problems pertaining to

biomedical applications.

Introduction to neural networks: Introduction – Biological neurons and their artificial models, Learning,

Adaptation and neural network's learning rules, Types of neural networks, Special networks and

applications: Associative memory, BAM, Hopfield network, ART Network, SOM, Case studies,

Introduction to fuzzy logic: Fuzzy sets, Fuzzy logic control: Structure of fuzzy logic controller, Case

studies, Genetic algorithm and its applications: Fundamentals of genetic algorithm, Case studies,

Optimization techniques for medical applications, Artificial intelligence, software tools.

References

1. Jacek M Zurada, ‘Introduction to Artificial Neural Systems’, Jaico Publishing House,1999.

2. Rajasekaran S. and G.A VijayalakshmiPai, ‘Neural Networks, Fuzzy logic and Genetic

Algorithms, Synthesis and Applications’, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi – 2003.

3. Klir G.J. &Folger T.A. ‘Fuzzy sets, uncertainty and Information’, Prentice –Hall

of India Pvt. Ltd.,1993.

4. Zimmerman H.J. ‘Fuzzy set theory – and its Applications’ – Kluwer Academic

Publishers,1994.


14E3044 EMBEDDED BASED MEDICAL INSTRUMENTATION

LABORATORY


Pre Requisite: 14EC3076 Embedded Systems for Biomedical Instrumentation

Course Objective:

To introduce the basic concepts of embedded systems and applications to biomedical instrument

design

To introduce various software tools for embedded Systems with real time examples.

To deal with the concepts of interfacing issues with real time signals.

Course Outcome:

Design and Analyze the systems for disease diagnosis and treatment methods

Apply real time models and languages in medical image processing applications

Analyze interface issues related to embedded systems.

http://www.jblearning.com/catalog/9780763750510/

Karuny

a Univ

ersity


List of experiments



14EI3045 DIAGNOSTIC AND THERAPEUTIC EQUIPMENTS LABORATORY


Co-Requisite: 14BT3026 Human Anatomy and Physiology

Course objectives:

To know the various methods involved in biosignal recordings and operation of patient

monitoring equipments.

To understand the working of medical therapeutic equipments.

To understand equipment used for rehabilitation.

Course outcome:

Develop measurement systems for biosignals and its signal conditioning circuits

Devise monitoring instruments and brain-computer interfacing techniques

Design and analyse assist devices for old age and gait analysis.

List of experiments



14EI3046 MEDICAL IMAGING TECHNIQUES


Course Objective:

• To provide knowledge of the principle of operation of radiological equipment.

• To know the working principles of radio diagnostic devices.

• To know about the hazards and safety of radiation usage in hospitals

Course Outcome:

Analyse the working principle of various imaging techniques

Compare the older technologies with newly developed techniques

Be aware of standards and safe limits of radiation exposure and control of radiation.

Generation of x – rays: principles and production of soft and hard x rays-radio diagnosis: radiography,

angiography, fluoroscopy, special radiological equipments-application of radioisotopes: alpha, beta and

gamma emission, principle of radiation detectors, nuclear angiogram- principles of radiation therapy-

Radiation safety: hazardous effect of radiation, radiation protection techniques-Safety limits, radiation

monitoring-CT-MRI.

References

1. Isaac Bankman, I. N. Bankman , Handbook of Medical Imaging: Processing and

Analysis(Biomedical Engineering), Academic Press, 2000.

2. Jacob Beutel (Editor), M. Sonka (Editor), Handbook of Medical Imaging, Volume 2.

Medical Image Processing and Analysis , SPIE Press 2000.

3. Khandpur R.S, “Handbook of Biomedical Instrumentation”, Tata McGraw Hill, New

Delhi,2003.

Karuny

a Univ

ersity


14EI3048 CLINICAL INSTRUMENTATION


Course Objective:

To introduce various analytical instruments and methods of spectral analysis used in clinical

laboratory.

To understand the unique methods of separation of closely similar materials with

chromatography.

To introduce the important radio chemical methods of analysis and techniques in clinical

laboratory

Course Outcome:

Analyze the techniques used for characterization of materials, devices and biological molecules.

Analyze the various methods used for separation of closely similar materials using

chromatography.

Compare the important radio chemical methods of analysis.

Introduction to analytical instruments and Spectrophotometers, NMR and mass spectrometer, radiation

techniques, Automated chemical analysis system, pH meters and Chromatography, Clinical

instrumentation techniques, Electrophoresis and microscopy.

References

1. Khandpur R.S,”Handbook of Analytical Instruments”, Tata McGraw – Hill Publishing company

limited, 2006.

2. Mousumi Debnath, “Tools and techniques of Biotechnology”, Pointer publications, 2005.

3. John G Webster, “Medical instrumentation application and design”, John wiley & Sons (Asia)

Pvt Ltd, 3rd edition, 2004

4. Willard, H.H., Merrit L.L., Dean J.A Seattle F.L., ‘Instrumental Methods of Analysis’,CBS

Publishing and Distribution, 1995.

5. Robert D.Braun, Introduction to Instrumental Analysis, McGraw–Hill, Singapore, 1987.

14EI3049 MEDICAL DEVICES AND SAFETY


Course Objective:

To provide in-depth knowledge in safety testing to reduce unacceptable errors in medical device

performance.

To understand the safe handling and operation of medical devices to avoid patient injury.

To provide adequate information on medical device standards and various regulations.

Course Outcome:

Appreciate the need for prevention of medical errors.

Analyze various case studies related to unsafe handling of medical devices which led to patient

injury.

Explore for reasonable, acceptable, and more effective remedies.

Reliability, safety testing, Failure assessment, Safety and risk management, Tools for risk estimation,

Safe medical devices, Handling and operation, Usability, Environmental safety , Interference with the

environment, ecological safety, Mechanical safety, Electrical Safety,

Biological aspect, Limitation-Protection, Leakage currents, Safety classe, Medical

Karuny

a Univ

ersity


Standards and Regulation, six sigma standard for medical device design.

References

1. Bertil Jacobson and alan Murray, “Medical Devices Use and Safety”, Elsvier Limited,

2007.

2. Richard Fries,“Reliable Design of Medical Devices – Second Edition”, CRC Press,

Taylor & Francis Group, 2006.

3. Norbert Leitgeb “SafetyofElectromedicalDevicesLaw – Risks – Opportunities”,

Springer Verlog/Wein, 2010.

4. Gordon R Higson, “Medical Device Safety- The regulation of Medical Devices for

Public Health and Safety”, IOP Publishing Limited, Bristol and Philadelphia, 2002.

5. Shayne Cox Gad, “Safety Evaluation of Medical Devices” Second Edition, Marcel

Dekker Inc., 2002.

6. Basem El-Haik, ‎Khalid S. Mekki, “Medical Device Design for Six Sigma: A Road Map

for Safety and effectiveness” John Wiley & Sons, 2011.

14EI3051 MEDICAL SENSORS AND WEARABLE DEVICES


Course Objective:

To provide introduction to the field of medical sensors and an indepth and quantitative view of

device design and performance analysis.

To gain overview of the current state of the art to enable continuation into advanced biosensor

work and design.

To study about the wearable sensors and smart sensors

Course Outcome:

Evaluate a sensor based on standard performance criteria and appropriateness for an

application.

Identify the key design criteria and suggest an appropriate wearable sensor approach which is

most likely to meet a specific biosensor application

Analyse the most relevant challenges facing the smart sensor research field and for a particular

challenge suggest a reasonable approach to find a solution.

Physiological Measurements: Sensors for Pressure Measurement- Sensors for Motion and Force

Measurement- Sensors for Flow Measurement -Temperature Measurement- Sensors for speed, torque,

vibration- Wearable Sensors-smart sensors.

References

1. Tatsuo Togawa, Toshiyo Tamura, P. Ake Oberg, “Bio-Medical Transducers and

Instruments”, CRC Press, USA, 2010.

2. Subhas Chandra Mukhopadhyay, Aime Lay Ekuakille, “Advances in biomedical sensing and

measurements”, Lecture notes in electrical engineering, Springer Verlag, Berlin, Gábor Harsányi,

“Sensors in biomedical applications: fundamentals, technology &

applications”, CRC Press, USA, 2000.

3. Joseph D. Bronzino, “The biomedical engineering handbook”, Volume 2, CRC Press,

USA, 2000.

https://www.google.co.in/search?hl=en&biw=1280&bih=583&tbm=bks&tbm=bks&q=inauthor:%22Basem+El-Haik%22&sa=X&ei=zrUkU9j-NqeViAfdhYCYDQ&ved=0CFIQ9AgwAw

https://www.google.co.in/search?hl=en&biw=1280&bih=583&tbm=bks&tbm=bks&q=inauthor:%22Khalid+S.+Mekki%22&sa=X&ei=zrUkU9j-NqeViAfdhYCYDQ&ved=0CFMQ9AgwAw

http://books.google.co.in/books?id=-I5wLPPdSu8C&printsec=frontcover&dq=medical+devices+safety&hl=en&sa=X&ei=zrUkU9j-NqeViAfdhYCYDQ&ved=0CFAQ6AEwAw


Karuny

a Univ

ersity


14EI3052 REHABILITATION ENGINEERING


Course Objective:

To provide knowledge about various types of assist devices and its applications.

To provide indepth understanding of the functions of assist devices

To develop new devices for rehabilitation

Course Outcome:

Appreciate and analyse the working of different assist devices.

Choose the assist device suitable for specific disorder.

Design and develop new products for rehabilitation

Rehabilitation -Prosthetic And Orthotic Devices, Types, models- Feedback in orthotic system- Material -

Auditory and speech assist devices -visual aids-Tactile devices - Muscle and nerve stimulator-Robot as

assist devices-Psychological aspects of Rehabilitation therapy- Legal aspect-case studies.

References

1. Albert M.Cook and Webster J.G, “Therapeutic Medical devices”, Prentice Hall Inc.,

NewJersy, 1982.

2. Levine.S.N.Editor, Advances in Bio Medical Engineering and Medical Physics, Inter

University Publication, New York 1968.

3. Kolff W.J., Artificial Organs, John Wiley and Sons, New York,1979.

4. Andreas.F.Von racum, Hand book of bio material evalution, Mc-Millan publishers, 1980.

5. Albert M.Cook and Webster J.G., “Therapeutic Medical Devices, Prentice Hall Inc.,

New Jersey, 1982

14EI3054 BIOMECHANICS


Course Objective:

To introduce the fundamental terms and concepts of human system modelling.

To understand the anthropometric, biomechanical and physiological principles and their use in

human well-being and overall performance.

To acquire knowledge in evaluation of physiological factors and fitness factors for vehicle

drivers.

Course Outcomes:

Analyse the concepts of human system modelling.

Analyse the biomechanical and physiological principles used in optimizing human well-being

and overall performance.

To Identify, analyze and implement solutions to a human factors problem.

Human system modeling - human control of systems, biomechanics-stress and fatigue measurements of

bones, muscles-cognitive stress-stress modeling- signal acquisition and processing-brain and computer

interface-Effects of environmental conditions –heat, stress-Human Factors Applications in medical and

industrial field-Human error- accidents analysis- human factors –case study on evaluation of the

physiological factors and fitness factors for defence vehicle driver –safety Standards.

References

1. Subrata Pal,“Text book of Biomechanics”, Viva education Private limited,NewDelhi. 2009.

Karuny

a Univ

ersity


2. Karl Kroemer, Henrike Kroemer, Katrin Kroemer-Elbert, “Ergonomics” How to Design for Ease

& Efficiency, Prentice Hall International Editions, 2001.

3. Mark S Sanders, “Human Factors in Engineering and Design”, McGraw Hill, New York, 1993.

4. Bridger R S, “Introduction to Ergonomics”, Taylor and Francis, London, 2003.

5. Martin Helander, “A Guide to Ergonomics of Manufacturing”, Tata Mc GrawHill, 1996.

6. Mccormic,E.J. and Sanders.M.S “Human factors in Engineering and Design”,

McGraw Hill, 1992.

7. Susan J.Hall,“Basics Bio Mechanics” 5th Edition, McGraw-Hill Publishing Co,Newyork, 2007.

14EI3055 MEDICAL DIAGNOSTICS AND THERAPEUTIC EQUIPMENTS


Course objectives:

To know the various biopotential recordings and operating procedure of ICCU equipments.

To develop an understanding of the medical therapeutic equipment.

To learn the safety standards of the diagnostics and therapeutic equipment.

Course outcome:


Know the safe operating procedure of Cardiac care monitoring instruments.

Get clear domain knowledge about various types of wearable and implantable devices.

Pace makers - patient monitoring system-diathermy-heart lung machine-pumps-Principle of

Hemodialysis-Wearable Artificial Kidney, Implanting Type- Respiratory aids-Breathing Apparatus

Operating Sequence-thermography- Fiber optics -Endoscopy, Laparoscopy, principles of Lithotripsy-

communication standards-wireless telemetry.

References

1. Albert M Cook and Webster J G, “Therapeutic medical devices”, Prentice Hall NewYork , 1982.

2. Heinz Kresse, “ Handbook of Electro medicine”, John Wiely & Sons, Chrchester.1985

3. Webster J.G, “Medical Instrumentation application and design”, John Wiley and sons New York

3rd

edition 1999

4. Jacobson B and Webster J G Medical and Clinical Engineering – Prentice Hall of India New

Delhi 1999

5. Leslie Cromwell , Fred J.Weibell and Erich A.Pfeiffer, “Biomedical Instrumentation”,

Prentice Hall New Delhi 2000

6. Joseph J Carr and John M Brown,“Introduction to Biomedical equipment Technology”,

7. Pearson Education 4th edition, New Delhi 2001.

8. Khandpur R.S “Hand Book of Biomedical Instrumentation”, Tata McGraw Hill publication ,

New Delhi 2nd edition 2003

9. John Denis Enderle, Joseph D. Bronzino, Susan M. Blanchard, “Introduction to Biomedical

Engineering”, Academic Press, 2005

14EI3056 LIMB PROSTHETICS


Course Objective:

To introduce the Basic concepts of robots and its applications to artificial limbs

To know the instrumentation involved in Robot Dynamics and Kinematics

Karuny

a Univ

ersity


To learn the applications of Robot controls

Course Outcome:

Design Robot Control System for positioning and movement

Learn the basic sensor and actuators and applications of robots.

Develop Robotic applications as assist devices for limbs.

Definition - Classification - History - Robots components - Degrees of freedom - Robot joints

coordinates - Reference frames - Workspace - Robot languages - Actuators - Sensors - Sensor

characteristics - and electric actuators - Trajectory planning- motion control - Non-linear control-Image

Processing And Vision Systems- PROSTHESIS, Introduction to Prosthesis, -Gait Analysis in Transtibial

Amputees, Prosthesis in Knee Disarticulation- Gait Analysis in Transfemoral Amputees, -Prosthesis for

Hand Amputation and Wrist Disarticulation-Recent Advances in Prosthesis -Ambulatory Aids.

References

1. Saeed B. Niku , ''Introduction to Robotics'', Pearson Education, 2002

2. K.S.Fu, Ralph Gonzalez and C.S.G.Lee, ''Robotics", TATA McGraw Hill, Aug., 2008.

3. R.D. Klafter, TA Chmielewski and Michael Negin, "Robotic Engineering, An Integrated

approach", Prentice Hall of India, 2003.

4. Millee Jorge, “Orthotics and Prosthetics in Rehabilitation”, third edition, Saunders Elsevier

publishing, , Missouri, 2013

5. Chinnathurai R, Sekar P, Kumar M Ramaa, Manoj K Nithya, Kumar C Senthil, “Short Textbook

of Prosthetics and Orthotics”, Jaypee Digital publishing, 2010.

6. Michelle Lusardi, Millee Jorge, Caroline Nielsen, “Orthotics and Prosthetics in Rehabilitation”,

Third edition, Elsevier, Saunders publishing,2012.

14E3057 INDUSTRIAL ELECTRONICS AND INSTRUMENTATION


Course Objective

• To understand the concepts of Conventional and Digital Transducers

• To study the concepts of Industrial heating, Photoelectric devices and Smart Transducers

• To study the Microprocessor based instrumentation

Course Outcome

• Select the type of transducer for the Industrial application.

• Apply in case studies and mini projects in industries.

• Design the Microprocessor based Controllers.

Review of variable resistance, inductance capacitanceand piezoelectric transducers - Direct digital

transducers, Absolute and incremental displacement transducers, Moiré Fringe transducers, Force and

Pressure measurement, IC sensors - Dielectric heating, Photoelectric devices and PLC - Detection of zero

crossing of an alternating waveform, Microprocessor based: triggering of a Thyristor, Voltmeter and

Ammeter, Speed monitoring Unit, phase difference and power factor monitoring Unit, over and under

voltage protection and over current protection - Smart transducer, Measurement of flow, pH with smart

transducers.

References

1. Biswas S.N, “Industrial Electronics”, Dhanpat Rai & Company Private Ltd., New Delhi, 2nd

Edition, 2008.

2. Murty.D.V.S., “Transducers and Instrumentation”, PHI Learning, New Delhi, 2nd

Edition, 2009.

Karuny

a Univ

ersity


3. Paul Biswanath., “Industrial Electronics & Control: Including Programmable Logic Controller”,

PHI Learning, New Delhi, 2nd

Edition, 2009.

4. Doebelin E.O, “Measurement Systems, Application and Design”, Mc-Graw Hill Publishing

Company Ltd., New Delhi, 5th Edition, 2002.

5. Webb, John W.Reis, Ronald A., “Programmable Logic Controllers Principles and Application”,

PHI Learning, 5th Edition, 2009.

6. Ram. B., “Fundamentals of Microprocessors & Microcontrollers”, Dhanpat Rai (P) Ltd., New

Delhi 2008.



Course Objective:


To understand the concepts of Controllability and Observability

To provide adequate knowledge in the Lyapunov stability analysis.

Course Outcome:

Represent the given system in state space.

Design a state estimator.

Analyze the stability of a system.

State model for linear time invariant systems: State space representation using physical - Phase and

canonical variables - Solution of state equation - State transition matrix - Transfer function from state

model - Transfer matrix - Decomposition Methods – State space representation of linear time invariant

discrete time systems - Solution of discrete time state equation. - Discretization of continuous time state

equations - Eigen Values and Eigen Vectors – diagonalization - Concepts of Controllability and

Observability - State Estimators - Lyapunov Stability Analysis of linear time invariant system.

References

1. Katsuhiko Ogata, “Modern Control Engineering”, Prentice Hall of India Private Limited, New

Delhi, 4th Edition, 2002.

2. Nagrath I.J, & Gopal M, “Control System Engineering”, New Age International Publishers

Limited, New Delhi, 5th Edition, 2007

3. Nise S. Norman, “Control Systems Engineering”, John Wiley & Sons Inc, New Delhi, 3rd

Edition, 2000.

4. John J. D'Azzo, Constantine H. Houpis, “Linear Control System Analysis and Design”, CRC

Press, USA , 5th Edition,2003

5. Shankar P. Bhattacharyya, Aniruddha Datta, Lee H. Keel, “Linear Control Theory: Structure,

Robustness And Optimization” CRC Press, USA , 2009

14EI3059 TRANSDUCERS AND ACTUATORS


Course Objective

• To understand different sensor systems used for process parameters.

• To understand signal conversion and conditioning.

• To understand sensor signal transmission.

Course Outcome

• Selection of sensor based on process parameter and application.

• Interconnection of sensors with Controller.

Karuny

a Univ

ersity


• Prevent data loss or noise during sensor signal transmission.

Electrical Transducers: Variable resistance type – Potentiometers, strain gauges, RTD, thermistors-

Variable inductance type – self and mutual inductance, pulse transducer-Variable capacitance

transducers-Special Transducers: Semiconductor temperature sensors, thermo-electric sensors,

piezoelectric sensors, smart sensors-Electromechanical Transducers: Electrodynamic, eddy current, force

balance transducers. Basics of MEMS devices-Other Transducers: Limit Switches, Proximity Switches,

Pressure, Temperature, Level, Flow, Speed-Power System Transducers: Analogue and digital transducers

for measurement of voltage, current, power factor, frequency, power – active and reactive. RTU for tariff

calculation-Analogue Signal Conditioning techniques: Bridge amplifier, carrier amplifiers, charge

amplifiers and impedance converters, modulation - demodulation, dynamic compensation, linearization,

multiplexing and demultiplexing-Signal Transmission: Transmitters, V-I, I-V and V-f converters. Single

transmission. Cable transmission of analog and digital signal, fiber optic signal transmission, radio,

telemetry, pneumatic transmission-Actuators: Solenoid Valves, Pneumatic Control Valves, Piston-

Cylinder, Motors, Contactors.

Reference Books

1. Doeblin, E.O. – Measurement Systems: Application and Design, Mc Graw Hill International,

2002

2. Patranabis, D – Sensors and Transducers, Wheeler Pub., New Delhi, 2003.

3. Murthy, D.V.S., Transducers and Instrumentation, PHI, New Delhi, 2008.

4. Newbert, H. K. – Instrument Transducers, Oxford University Press, 1999.

14EI3060 AUTOMATED TEST AND MEASUREMENT


Course Objective

• To understand the difference between classical measurement and microprocessor based

measurement.

• To understand Real Time signals.

• To understand standard IEEE buses used for smart measurement.

Course Outcome

• Differentiate industrial instrumentation buses.

• Sensors and transducers with smart data transfer.

• Process, analyze and log the sensor values

Measurement automation, Comparison with classical measurement and microprocessor based

measurement, Measured data base and data base management, Real time signals, Calculated signals-

Digital signal processing, Processed signals, Data flow and graphical programming techniques, Virtual

instrumentation (VI), Advantages, VIs and Sub Vis-Data acquisition methods, DAQ hardware,

Instrumentation buses, IEEE 488.1 and IEEE 488.2, Serial interfacing-RS 232C, RS 422, RS 423, RS

485, CAMAC, VXI, SCXI, PXI -Industrial drives and interface, Sensors and transducers, Interfacing

signal conditioning, Signal-analysis techniques, Networking methods and their applications in

instrumentation.

References

1. N. Mathivanan, PC-based Instrumentation-Concepts and Practice, Prentice-Hall, 2007.

2. M, Chidambaram, Computer Control of Processes, CRC Press, 2002

Karuny

a Univ

ersity


3. B. G. Liptak, Instrumentation Engineers Handbook, Philadelphia: Chilton Book Company, 4th

Edition, 2003.

14EI3061 REMOTE SENSING AND CONTROL


Course Objective

• To understand methods for remote sensing.

• To understand remote control techniques and its application in Industry

Course Outcome

• Classify characteristics of objects.

• Ground data acquisition.

• Importance of remote control in Industry.

Electromagnetic radiation: Classification and nature, spectral, spatial and temporal characteristics of

objects-Atmospheric interaction sensors: Photographic, thermal, multi-spectral, passive microwave and

active microwave sensors- Ground data acquisition: Photo-interpretation, image processing techniques,

remote sensing applications-Techniques of remote control: Remote control in industry including oil

pipelines, rocket motion and satellite movements.

References

1. Gupta - Remote Sensing Ecology, 2nd edition, Springer, 2005

2. Jensen - Remote Sensing of the Environment, Pearson, 2003

3. Barett, E.C. and Curtis, L.F. Introduction To Environmental Remote Sensing, 3/e, Chapman Hall,

New York 1992.

4. Lo, C.P. Applied Remote Sensing, Wiley, New York 1986.

14EI3063 ROBOT PROGRAMMING


Course Objective

• To understand the basics of Robot programming

• To understand the VAL language applications

• To understand the RAPID language applications

• To understand the Practical study of virtual robot software

• To understand the VAL-II and AML language

Course Outcome

Select proper safety interlock needed for robot action

Program the robot for various application specific movements

Developing robot programs in different software packages / languages

Robot programming-Introduction-Types- Flex Pendant- Lead through programming, Coordinate systems

of Robot, Robot controller- major components, functions-Wrist Mechanism-Interpolation-Interlock

commands-Operating mode of robot, Jogging-Types, Robot specifications- Motion commands, end

effectors and sensors commands-Robot Languages-Classifications, Structures- VAL language commands

motion control, hand control, program control, pick and place applications, palletizing applications using

VAL, Robot welding application using VAL program-WAIT, SIGNAL and DELAY command for

communications using simple applications-RAPID language basic commands- Motion Instructions-Pick

and place

Karuny

a Univ

ersity


operation using Industrial robot- manual mode, automatic mode, subroutine command based

programming. Movemaster command language- Introduction, syntax, simple problems-Robot cycle time

analysis-Multiple robot and machine Interference-Process chart-Simple problems-Virtual robotics, Robot

studio online software-Introduction, Jogging, components, work planning, program modules, input 13

RB-2013 SRM and output signals-Singularities-Collision detection-Repeatability measurement of robot-

Robot economics-VAL-II programming-basic commands, applications- Simple problem using conditional

statements-Simple pick and place applications-Production rate calculations using robot. AML Language-

General description, elements and functions, Statements, constants and variables-Program control

statements-Operating systems, Motion, Sensor commands-Data processing.

References

1. Deb. S. R. “Robotics technology and flexible automation”, Tata McGraw Hill publishing

company limited, 1994

2. Mikell. P. Groover, “Industrial Robotics Technology”, Programming and Applications, McGraw

Hill Co, 1995.

3. Klafter. R.D, Chmielewski.T.A. and Noggin’s., “Robot Engineering : An Integrated Approach”,

Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd.,1994.

4. Fu. K. S., Gonzalez. R. C. & Lee C.S.G., “Robotics control, sensing, vision and intelligence”,

McGraw Hill Book co, 1987

5. Craig. J. J. “Introduction to Robotics mechanics and control”, Addison-Wesley, 1999.

6. Robotcs Lab manual, 2007.

7. www.wpi.edu

14EI3064 KINEMATICS AND DYNAMICS OF ROBOT


Course Objective

• To control both the position and orientation of the tool in the three dimensional space.

• The relationship between the joint variables and the position and the orientation of the tool.

• Planning trajectories for the tool to follow on order to perform meaningful tasks.

• To precisely control the high speed motion of the system

Course Outcome





Introduction, position and orientation of objects, objects coordinate frame Rotation matrix, Euler angles

Roll, pitch and yaw angles coordinate Transformations, Joint variables and position of end effector, Dot

and cross products, coordinate frames, Rotations, Homogeneous coordinates.

Direct Kinematics-Link coordinates D-H Representation, The ARM equation. Direct kinematic analysis

for Four axis, SCARA Robot and three, five and six axis Articulated Robots- The inverse kinematics

problem, General properties of solutions. Tool configuration, Inverse kinematics of four axis SCARA

robot and three and five axis, Articulated robot-Workspace Analysis, work envelope of a Four axis

SCARA robot and five axis articulated robot workspace fixtures, the pick and place operations, Joint 11

RB-2013 SRM space technique - continuous path motion, Interpolated motion, straight line motion and

Cartesian space technique in trajectory planning-Manipulator Dynamics-Lagrange's equation kinetic and

potential energy-Link inertia Tensor, link Jacobian Manipulator inertia tensor. Gravity, Generalized

forces, Lagrange-Euler Dynamic model, Dynamic model of a Two-axis planar robot, Newton Euler

formulation, Lagrange - Euler formulation, problems.

http://www.wpi.edu/

Karuny

a Univ

ersity


References

1. Robert J. Schilling, Fundamentals of Robotics Analysis and Control, PHI Learning., 2009.

2. Richard D. Klafter, Thomas .A, Chri Elewski, Michael Negin, Robotics Engineering an

Integrated Approach, Phi Learning., 2009.

3. P.A. Janaki Raman, Robotics and Image Processing An Introduction, Tata Mc Graw Hill

Publishing company Ltd., 1995.

4. Francis N-Nagy Andras Siegler, Engineering foundation of Robotics, Prentice Hall Inc., 1987.

5. Bernard Hodges, Industrial Robotics, Second Edition, Jaico Publishing house, 1993.

6. Tsuneo Yohikwa, Foundations of Robotics Analysis and Control, MIT Press., 2003.

7. John J. Craig, Introduction to Robotics Mechanics and Control, Third Edition, Pearson, 2008.

8. Bijay K. Ghosh, Ning Xi, T.J. Tarn, Control in Robtics and Automation Sensor – Based

integration, Academic Press, 1999.

14EI3065 ADVANCED INSTRUMENTATION AND PROCESS CONTROL

FOR FOOD ENGINEERS


Course Objective:

To introduce the concept of process instruments for various physical variables, system,

automation.

To gain knowledge of the different controllers

To learn the complex control techniques used in process industries

Course Outcome:

Apply the knowledge of Measurement to various applications.

Analyze the characteristics of Instrumentation systems.

Design controllers for a typical application

Functional Elements of an Instrument, Performance Characteristics, Static and Dynamics Characteristics,

Open loop and closed loop systems, Response of First Order and Second order system for Unit Step input,

Response of Second Order system for Unit Step Input.

Pressure measurement: Manometers, Elastic elements, McLeod gauge, Ionization gauge, Thermal

Conductivity Gauge:Pirani Gauge, Thermocouple Gauge, Temperature Measurement: Expansion

Thermometer, Filled System Thermometer, Pyrometers,Thermocouple, RTD, Thermistor, Level

Measurement: Direct methods, Radiation Level Detector, Ultrasonic Level Detector, Flow Measurement:

Turbine flowmeter, Rotameter, Electromagnetic flowmeter, Ultrasonic flowmeter, Measurement of pH ,

Viscosity, Process Automation: Process Variables– Degrees of Freedom, Control Modes: P– PI–PID –

Final Control element, Actuators, Control Valve characteristics, Control Valve types, Complex Control

Techniques: Cascade control, Ratio control, Feed forward control, Split Range Control, Inferential

Control, Case studies: Distillation column, Chemical reactor, Heat exchanger, Condenser, Evaporator

References

1. Singh. S. K., “Industrial Instrumentation and Control”,2nd Edition, Tata McGraw– Hill,New

Delhi, 2004.

2. Curtis Johnson, D., “Process Control Instrumentation Technology”, Prentice Hall of

India,2006.

3. Coughanowr, and Koppel,“ Process systems analysis and control” , Tata McGraw– Hill,New

Delhi,2004.

4. Seborg. D. E., Edger. T. F, and Millichamp. D. A, “Process Dynamics and Control”,JohnWiley

and Sons, Newyork,2004.

Karuny

a Univ

ersity


5. Roffle. B., Betlem. B. H. L., “Advanced Practical Control”, Springer, Newyork,2004.

6. Stephanopoulos, “Chemical Process Control”, 2nd Edition, Prentice Hall, NewDelhi,

14EI3066 SENSORS AND DATA ACQUISITION LAB


Course Objective:

To learn the characteristics of sensors.

To introduce the concept of data acquisition.

To deal with experiments in data acquisition and analysis

Course Outcome:

Determine the characteristics of sensors.

Acquire real time data for analysis

Analyze acquired signals.

List of experiments



14EI3067 TRANSDUCER ENGINEERING


Objective:

To elaborate on basic and advanced concepts of nanosensors and transducers for nanotechnology

applications.

To teach various transducers effects for the best understanding of various nanotransducers.

To elaborate on the various types of nanosensors and actuators.

Outcome:

The students should be able to understand basic and advanced concepts of nanoelectronic devices

The students should be able to understand basic and advanced concepts of sensors

The students should be able to understand basic and advanced concepts of actuators

Course Description: Transducers - capacitive transducers -Acoustic wave transducers -MOS capacitor based transducers –

FET based transducers – Cantilever based transducers - Sensor Characteristics and Physical effects -

Static characteristics - Dynamic characteristic - Photoelectric effect – photodielectric effect –

Photoluminescence effect – electroluminescence effect – chemiluminescence effect –Doppler effect –

Barkhausen effect – Hal effect –Nano based Inorganic sensors - Organic /Biosensors - Signal

conditioning and data acquisition - Phase locked loop.

References 1. Nanoelectronics and Nanosystems: From transistors to Molecular and Quantum Devices by K.

Goser (Edition, 2004), Springer. London.

2. Nanotechnology enabled sensors by Kouroush Kalantar – Zadeh, Benjamin Fry, Springer Verlag

New York, (2007).

3. Sensors and signal conditioning, Ramon Pallas-Areny, John G. Webster John,2nd edition, Wiley

& Sons (2001).

4. S.Renganathan “Transducer Engineering” – Allied publishers Limited, 1999.

Karuny

a Univ

ersity


5. Ernest O. Doeblin “Measurement Systems – Application & Design” McGraw – Hill Publishing

company, 1990.

6. Biosensing: International Research and Development, Jerome Schultz, Milar Mrksich, Sangeeta

N. Bhatia, David J. Brady, Antionio J. Ricco, David R. Walt, Charles L. Wilkins, Springer 2006

7. H.Rosemary Taylor, Chapman and Hal, “Data acquisition for sensor systems”, London, 2007

2015 Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering

LIST OF SUBJECTS

S.No. Sub. Code Name of the Subject Credits

1 15EI2001 Health and Hospital Management 3:0:0

2 15EI2002 Medical Electronics 3:0:0

3 15EI2003 Biomedical Sensors and Transducers 3:0:0

4 15EI2004 Biomedical Sensors and Transducers Laboratory 0:0:2

5 15EI2005 Biosignal Conditioning Circuits 3:0:0

6 15EI2006 Biocontrol systems 3:1:0

7 15EI2007 Medical Diagnostic Equipment 3:0:0

8 15EI2008 Biosignal Processing Laboratory 0:0:2

9 15EI2009 Intelligent Instrumentation Systems Laboratory 0:0:2

10 15EI2010 Fundamentals of Biomechanics 3:0:0

11 15EI2011 Telemedicine 3:0:0

12 15EI2012 Radiological Imaging Techniques 3:0:0

13 15EI2013 Medical Image Computing 3:0:0

14 15EI2014 Biosignal conditioning circuits Laboratory 0:0:2

15 15EI2015 Biomedical Instrumentation Laboratory 0:0:2

16 15EI2016 Medical Therapeutic Equipment 3:0:0

17 15EI2017 Modelling of Physiological systems 3:0:0

18 15EI2018 BioVirtual Instrumentation Laboratory 0:0:2

19 15EI2019 Finite Element Modelling in Biomedical Engineering 3:0:0

20 15EI2020 Ambulatory Services 3:0:0

21 15EI2021 Ergonomics in Hospitals 3:0:0

22 15EI2022 Surgical Assist Systems 3:0:0

23 15EI2023 Sensory and Motor Rehabilitation 3:0:0

24 15EI2024 Hospital Automation 3:0:0

25 15EI2025 Medical Equipment Troubleshooting and Maintenance 3:0:0

26 15EI2026 Bio Fluid and Solid Mechanics 3:0:0

27 15EI2027 Computer Application in Modelling of Physiological Systems 3:0:0

28 15EI2028 Biomedical Optics 3:0:0

29 15EI2029 Patient and Device Safety 3:0:0

30 15EI2030 ICU and Operation Theatre Equipment 3:0:0

31 15EI2031 Medical Ethics 3:0:0

32 15EI2032 Bioelectric Phenomena 3:0:0

33 15EI2033 MEMS Sensor Technology 3:0:0

34 15EI2034 Biometric systems 3:0:0

35 15EI2035 Ionizing and Non-Ionizing Radiation 3:0:0

36 15EI2036 Radiation and Nuclear Medicine 3:0:0

37 15EI2037 Intelligent Instrumentation Systems 3:0:0

38 15EI2038 Modern Automotive and Intelligent Systems 3:0:0

39 15EI2039 Automotive Control and HIL Simulation 3:0:0

40 15EI2040 Automobile Electric and Electronics Systems 3:0:0

41 15EI2041 Automotive In-Vehicle Communication System 3:0:0

42 15EI2042 Automotive Telematics and Infotainment 3:0:0

43 15EI2043 Automotive Fault Diagnostics 3:0:0


15EI2001 HEALTH AND HOSPITAL MANAGEMENT

Credits: 3:0:0

Course Objective:

To understand the need and significance of clinical engineering and health policies.

To familiarize the training strategies, quality management policies and information

technology used in health care.

To know the needs of managerial training to hospital staffs.

Course Outcome:



Relate the training needs at various level of organization.

Health Organization of the country, National Health Policies, Health Financing System,

Organization of Technical Section. Management of Hospital Organization, Nursing section

Medical Sector, Central Services, Technical Department, Definition and Practice of Management

by Objective, Transactional Analysis Human relation in Hospital, Importance to Team Work,

Legal aspect in Hospital Management. FDA Regulation, Joint Commission Of Accreditation for

Hospitals, National Fire Protection Association, Standard, IRPC. Organizing Maintenance

Operations, Paper Work Control, Maintenance Job, Planning Maintenance Work. Measurement

and Standards, Preventive Maintenance, Maintenance Budgeting and Forecasting, Maintenance,

Training, Contract Mainframe, Function of Clinical Engineer, Role to be performed in Hospital,

Man power Market, Professional Registration, Structure in hospital.

References:

1. R.C. Goyal, “Handbook of Hospital Personal Management”, Prentice Hall of India, 2008.

2. Joseph. F. Dyro, “ Clinical Engineering Management”, Academic Press Series in

Biomedical Engineering, 2004

3. Antony Kelly, “Strategic Maintenance planning”, Butterworths London, 2006.

4. Cesar A. Caceres and Albert Zara, “The Practice of Clinical Engineering”, Academic

Press, 1977.

5. Webster, J.G. and Albert M. Cook, “Clinical Engineering Principles and Practices”,

Prentice HallInc.Englewood Cliffs, 1979.


15EI2002 MEDICAL ELECTRONICS

Credits: 3:0:0

Course Objective:

To furnish information on the mechanisms of current flow in semi-conductors.

To yield understanding about the basic operations of diode, transistor and their medical

applications.

To provide knowledge about advanced semiconductor devices and their significant

practical applications in medical field.

Course Outcome:

Apply the concepts of electronic circuits to biomedical applications.

Design practical circuits for acquisition and analysis of biomedical signals.

Build simple circuits for biomedical signal and analysis.

Overview of medical electronic equipments, transduction of bioelectric potentials, concepts of

bio-impedence. PN junction diodes-VI characteristics, rectifiers, Zener diodes, Regulators, LED,

LCD, Laser diodes, Special purpose diodes and their medical applications

BJT and its medical applications: Construction, Characteristics, Hybrid model. Transistor as

amplifier, Transistor as a switch, Opto-coupler & its medical application.

Junction field effect transistor and its medical applications: JFET, MOSFET and its

classification, Power MOSFET, MOS as a charge transferring Device – CCD, Uni-junction

transistor. Medical application of MOSFET.

Differential amplifiers: CM and DM, feedback amplifiers, Oscillators – LC, RC, crystal and their

medical application, Pulse circuits for medical devices.

References:

1. Khandpur. R. S.,“Handbook of Biomedical Instrumentation”, Tata McGraw-Hill, Second

edition, 2003.

2. Robert L. Boylestad, Louis Nashelsky, “Electronic Devices and Circuit Theory”, Prentice

Hall, Sixth edition, 2009.

3. David A Bell, “Electron Devices and Circuits”, Prentice Hall Of India, Fifth edition,

2007.

4. Millman and Halkias, “Electronic devices and Circuits”, Tata McGraw Hill, First edition,

1994.

5. Thomas L. Floyd, “Electron Devices״, Charles & Messil Publications, Tenth edition

2009.


15EI2003 BIOMEDICAL SENSORS AND TRANSDUCERS

Credits: 3:0:0

Course Objective:

To provide introduction to the field of medical sensors and an in depth and quantitative

view of device design and performance analysis.

To provide knowledge on the principle and operation of different medical transducers.

To introduce the application of sensors and transducers in the physiological parameter

measuring system.

Course Outcome:

Identify the key design criteria and suggest an appropriate wearable sensor approach

which is most likely to meet a specific biosensor application.

Use the principle of transducers to design medical instrumentation systems.

Suggest suitable sensors for a particular application.

Study of biological sensors in the human body and their basic mechanism of action, Study of

various corpuscles like pacinian, functions and modeling, Chemoreceptor, hot and cold

receptors, baro-receptors, sensors for smell, sound, vision, osmolality and taste.

Temperature transducers, Displacement transducers, potentiometric, resistive strain gauges,

inductive displacement, capacitive displacement transducer. Pressure transducer, Blood

pressure measurement, measurement of intracranial pressure, LVDT transducers, capacitive

and piezo-electric type. Biosensors, Biocatalysts based biosensors, bio-affinity based biosensors

& microorganisms based biosensors, biologically active material and analyte. Types of

membranes used in biosensor constructions. Ion exchange membrane, electrodes, Electrolytic

sensors, optical sensor, fiber optic sensors. Biosensors in clinical chemistry, medicine and

healthcare, Commercial prospects for biomolecular computingsystems.

References:

1. Michael. R. Newman, David. G. Flemming“Physical Sensors for Biomedical

Applications”, CRC Press Inc., Florida. 2004.

2. Pearson, J.E. Gill, A., and Vadgama, P. “Analytical Aspects of Biosensors”. Ann Clin.

Biochem,2002.

3. R.S.C. Cobbold, “Transducers for Biomedical Instruments”, Prentice Hall. 2003.

4. Joseph. J. Carr, John Michael Brown, “Introduction to Biomedical Equipment

Technology”, Prentice Hall and Technology, 2008.

5. John. G. Webster. “Medical Instrumentation, Application and Design”.Fourth

Edition. Wiley &sons, Inc., New York. 2009.


15EI2004 BIOMEDICAL SENSORS AND TRANSDUCERS LABORATORY

Co-Requisite: 15EI2003 Biomedical Sensors and Transducers

Credits: 0:0:2

Course Objective:

To introduce the practical aspects of various medical transducers and their characteristics.

To impart knowledge in measurement of Resistance, Inductance and Capacitance using

bridges.

To improve the skills in calibrating analog meters.

Description:

This laboratory introduces the different biomedical transducers, their working and determination

of their characteristics.

Course Outcome:

Analyze the performance characteristics of various transducers and infer the reasons for

the behavior.

Critically analyze any measurement application and suggest suitable measurement

methods.

Calibrate basic instruments.

The faculty conducting the laboratory will prepare a list of 12 experiments and get the approval

of HOD/Director and notify it at the beginning of each semester.


15EI2005 BIOSIGNAL CONDITIONING CIRCUITS

Pre requisite: 15EI2002 Medical Electronics

Credits: 3:0:0

Course Objective:


To discuss filters and circuits


Course Outcome:


Interface bioelectric signals with embedded systems.


Nature of Bio Electricity: Bioelectric Currents, Nernst Potential, Diffusion Potential, Action

potential, Detection of Bio electric events, bio-electrode and electrode-skin interface.

Operational Amplifiers and Comparators. Instrumentation and Medical Isolation Amplifiers:

Instrumentation Amplifier, Medical Isolation amplifiers.

Digital Interfaces: Analog to Digital , Digital to Analog conversion, Special analog circuits and

systems used in biomedical Instrumentation, Phase Detectors-Analog and Digital, Voltage

Controlled Oscillators, Phase locked loops.Electrical Interface problems and Safety Standards in

Bio Potential Measurements.

References:

1. Robert B. Northrop, “ Analysis and Application of Analog Electronic Circuits to

Biomedical Instrumentation”, CRC Press, II Edition, New York,2004

2. Myer Kutz, “Biomedical Engineering and Design Handbook”, II Edition, Volume 1,

McGraw Hill Professional,2009

3. Robert F. Coughlin, Frederick F. Driscoll, “Operational Amplifiers & Linear Integrated

Circuits”, Prentice-Hall, 6th

Edition,2001.

4. Sergio Franco, “Design with Operational Amplifier and Analog Integrated Circuits”,

TMH, 3rd

Edition, 2002.

5. Milman & Hallkias, “Integrated Electronics-Analog and Digital Circuit”, McGraw Hill,

II Edition,2011.


15EI2006 BIOCONTROL SYSTEMS

Pre requisite: 14MA2003 Mathematical Transforms

Credits: 3:1:0

Course Objective:

To study various

Bio control systems modeling technique.

Time response analysis and frequency response analysis.

Analyze biological control systems.

Course Outcome:

Model any physiological systems.

Perform the analysis of given system in time domain and frequency domain.

Perform Stability analysis and to design any physiological control systems.

Basic structure of control system, Positive and Negative Feedback, transfer functions, modeling

of electrical systems, block diagram and signal flow graph representation of systems, difference

between engineering and physiological control systems, generalized system properties , models

with combination of system elements.Physiological system modeling, Linear model of

respiratory mechanics, model of chemical regulation of ventilation, linear model of muscle

mechanics, model of regulation of cardiac output, model of Neuromuscular reflex motion,

Introduction to simulation. Step response of first order and second order systems, determination

of time domain specifications of first and second order systems. Definition of steady state error

constants and its computation, definition of stability, Routh-Hurwitz criteria of stability,

construction of root locus. Frequency response, Nyquist stability criterion, Nyquist plot and

determination of closed loop stability, determination of gain margin and phase margin using

Bode plot, use of Nichol’s chart to compute resonant frequency and band width.

References:

1. Michael. C. K. Khoo, “Physiological control systems”, IEEE press, Prentice –Hall of

India, 2001.

2. M. Gopal “Control Systems Principles and design”, Tata McGraw Hill ,2002

3. Benjamin C. Kuo, ”Automatic control systems”, Prentice Hall of India,7th

edition, 1995

4. John Enderle, Susan Blanchard, Joseph Bronzino “Introduction to Biomedical

Engineering” second edition, Academic Press, 2005.

5. Richard C. Dorf, Robert H. Bishop,” Modern control systems”,Pearson, 2004


15EI2007 MEDICAL DIAGNOSTIC EQUIPMENT

Pre requisite: 15EI2003 Biomedical sensors and Transducers

Credits: 3:0:0

Course objective:

To know the various biopotential recordings and operating procedure of ICCU

equipment.

To develop an understanding of the physiotherapy and diathermy equipment.

To learn the safety standards of the diagnostic equipment.

Course outcome:




ECG-continuous monitoring systems for pulse rate, temperature, B.P, Respiration,

Arrhythmia monitor; B.P.monitor, Blood flow and cardiac output, Measurement,

Plethysmography, Oximetry, Treadmill (StressECG). EMG, EEG, EOG, ERG. Audiometer,

Different modes and assessments.

UV, Visible and IR Spectrophotometers, Flame Photometers, Electrolyte analysis using

sensitive electrodes, pHmeter, principle and applications. Densitometer and Electrophoresis

apparatus.

Principles and applications of oil, gas and liquid chromatographs, MassSpectrometry, Flow

Cytometry, Radioimmunoassay and ELISA techniques, Blood gas analyzers, Blood cell

counters. Various types of Endoscopes, Fiber optic, Fluid optic, Integral Camera Electron

Microscope, Transmission and Reflection.

References:

1. Khandpur. R.S. “Handbook of Biomedical Instrumentation”. Second Edition,

McGraw Hill 2003.

2. Geddas, L.A. & Baker, L.E. “Principles of Applied Biomedical Instrumentation”.

Third Edition. John Wiley & Sons. 2008.


Edition. Wiley &sons, Inc.,New York.2009.

4. Leslie Cromwell, Fred. J. Weibell & Erich. A. Pfeiffer. “Biomedical Instrumentation

and Measurements”. Second Edition. Prentice Hall Inc.2000.




15EI2008 BIOSIGNAL PROCESSING LABORATORY

Co-Requisite: 14EC2014 Digital Signal Processing

Credits: 0:0:2

Course Objective:

To record the biosignals and analyze it.

To study the different preamplifiers used for amplifying the biosignals.

To impart knowledge about the measurements and recordings of bioelectric and biochemical

signals.

Description:

This laboratory introduces the different signal processing techniques used for analysing and

recording biosignals.

Course Outcome:

Analyze the performance of various biomedical equipments and infer their safety aspects.


methods.

Calibrate medical instruments.



15EI2009 INTELLIGENT INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEMS LABORATORY

Credits: 0:0:2

Course Objective:

To impart knowledge on the integration of hardware circuits with software.

To introduce the concepts of programming in an IDE and download it into a processor.

To learn about the practical aspects of data acquisition and analysis.

Description:

This laboratory introduces the basics of sensor data acquisition and interfacing issues related to

it.

Course Outcome:

Design interfacing circuits to acquire real time data and process it using software.

Develop intelligent instrumentation systems for biomedical applications.

Use communication protocols for data transmission.


of HOD/Director and notify it at the beginning of each semester


15EI2010 FUNDAMENTALS OF BIOMECHANICS

Credits: 3:0:0

Course Objective:

To introduce the Fundamental terms and concepts of human factors.

To discuss anthropometric, biomechanical and physiological principles and how they

are used to optimize human well-being and overall performance.

To Identify, Analyze, Setup and implement solutions to a human factors problem.

Course Outcomes:

Acquire biosignals and perform the quantification.

Apply biomechanical and physiological principles to optimize human well-being and

overall performance.

Analyze and implement solutions to human factors problem.

Introduction: Newton’s laws, Stress, Strain, Non Viscous fluid, Newtonian Viscous fluid, Visco

elasticity, Blood Characteristics, Mechanical Interaction of Red blood cells with solid wall,

Thrombous formation and dissolution, Medical applications of blood rheology.

Bone & its properties. Bone structure and Composition, Blood Circulation in Bone, Viscoelastic

properties of Bone, Electrical Properties of Bone, Fracture Mechanism and Crack Propagation in

bones, Kinetics and Kinematics of Joints .Cardio vascular system, Mechanical properties of

blood vessels- Arteries, Arterioles, Capillaries, Veins, Blood flow- Laminar & turbulent ,

Prosthetic Heart Valves & replacement.

Biomechanics of Spine- Structure, Movements, Loads on Spine, Exo-skeletal system for

Paraplegics, Structure of Hip- Movements, Loads on Hip, Total Hip Prosthesis , Structure of

Knee- Movements , loads on knee, Knee prosthesis , Powered wheel chair, Crutches and canes.

Human Locomotion- Gait Analysis, Foot Pressure measurements- Pedo-barograph , Mechanics

of Foot-Arthritis, Biomechanical treatment.

References:

1. Özkaya, N., Nordin, M., Goldsheyder, D., Leger, D., “Fundamentals of Biomechanics’’,

Equilibrium, Motion, and Deformation 3rd ed., Springer Science plus Business Media,

2012.

2. Duane Knudson, “Fundamentals of Biomechanics”, Second Edition, Springer Science

plus Business Media, 2007.

3. Iwan W. Griffiths, Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, “Principles of Biomechanics &

Motion Analysis”, Medical publication, 2006.

4. Donald R. Peterson, Joseph D. Bronzino, “Biomechanics Principles and Applications”,

CRC Press, 2008.

5. Dhanjoo N.Ghista, “Applied Biomedical Engineering Mechanics”, CRC Press, 2008.

6. Lucas, Cooke, “A Primer of Biomechanics”, Springer –Verlag, 1999.


15EI2011 TELEMEDICINE

Credits: 3:0:0

Course Objective:

To introduce the key principles of telemedicine and health.

To understand telemedical technology.

To learn telemedical standards, mobile telemedicine and its application.

Course Outcomes:

Apply multimedia technologies in telemedicine.

Use protocols behind encryption techniques for secure transmission of data.

Apply telehealth in healthcare.

Telemedicine and Health: History and Evolution of telemedicine, Functional diagram of

telemedicine system, Ethical and legal aspects of Telemedicine – Telemedical technology:

Principles of Multimedia - PSTN, POTS, ANT, ISDN, Internet, Air/ wireless communications:

GSM satellite, and Micro wave, Modulation techniques, Types of Antenna, Satellite

communication, mobile communication. Internet technology and telemedicine using world wide

web (www). Video and audio conferencing. Clinical data – local and centralized. Telemedical

standards: Data Security and Standards: Encryption, Cryptography. Protocols: TCP/IP, ISO-OSI,

Standards to followed DICOM, HL7, H. 320 series (Video phone based ISBN) T. 120, H.324

(Video phone based PSTN), Video Conferencing, Real-time Telemedicine integrating doctors /

Hospitals, Cyber laws related to telemedicine. Mobile telemedicine and telemedical applications.

References:

1. Norris, A.C. “Essentials of Telemedicine and Telecare”, Wiley, 2002

2. Wootton, R., Craig, J., Patterson, V., “Introduction to Telemedicine. Royal Society of

Medicine” Press Ltd, Taylor & Francis 2006.

3. O'Carroll, P.W., Yasnoff, W.A., Ward, E., Ripp, L.H., Martin, E.L., “Public Health

Informatics and Information Systems”, Springer, 2003.

4. Ferrer-Roca, O., Sosa - Iudicissa, M. , Handbook of Telemedicine. IOS Press (Studies in

Health Technology and Informatics, Volume 54, 2002.

5. Simpson, W. Video over IP. A practical guide to technology and applications. Focal

Press Elsevier, 2006.


15EI2012 RADIOLOGICAL IMAGING TECHNIQUES

Credits: 3:0:0

Course Objective:

To provide knowledge of the principle of operation and design of radiological equipment.

To learn the preferred medical imaging methods for routine clinical applications.

To understand the engineering models used to describe and analyze medical image.

Course Outcomes:

Apply the tools for different problems in medical imaging.

Implement various techniques to analyze the medical images.

Suggest suitable imaging methodology for a specific ailment.

Ultrasonics- Principles of image formation, display, scanning modes, types of display. X-Ray-

principles and production of hard and soft x-rays, fluoroscopy-image intensifiers, Generations of

X-ray imaging. CT-evolution, image formation, mathematical details of algorithms used, types-

spiral, transverse. Angiography. MRI-image acquisition, density weighted images-T1 and T2,

spin-echo and spin relaxation techniques, types of pulse sequences for fast acquisition, NMR

spectroscopy. Other imaging techniques- PET,SPECT,DS Angiography, IR imaging,

Thermography-clinical application, LCD, thermography.

References:

1. John Ball and Tony Price. Chesney’s, “Radiographic Imaging”. Blackwell

Science Limited, U.K. 2006

2. Khandpur.R.S. “Handbook of Biomedical Instrumentation”. Second edition Tata

McGraw Hill Pub.Co.,Ltd. 2003.

3. Farr, “The Physics of Medical Imaging”.Adem Hilger, Bristol & Philadelphia, 2007.

4. Joseph Bronzino. “The Physics of Medical Imaging”.Secondedition.2005.


15EI2013 MEDICAL IMAGE COMPUTING

Credits: 3:0:0

Course Objective:

To understand digital image processing and reconstruction techniques.

To introduce the basic concepts and methodologies for processing the CT, MRI and

Ultrasound images.

To acquire knowledge in the basic geometric transforms used in digital image

processing.

Course Outcome:

Analyse the physiological events associated with the entire human system.

Extraction of features that helps in easy diagnosis of various arrhythmias.

Put forth new algorithms for processing the images for better results.

Elements of visual perception, Image sampling and quantization. Basic relationship between

pixels, basic geometric transformations, Introduction to Fourier Transform and DFT,

Properties of 2D Fourier Transform, FFT, Separable Image Transforms, Walsh, Hadamard,

Discrete Cosine Transform, Haar, Slant, Karhunen, Loevetransforms.

Spatial Domain methods: Basic grey level transformation, Histogram equalization, Image

subtraction, Image averaging, Spatial filtering: Smoothing, Sharpening filters, Laplacian

filters, Frequency domain filters: Smoothing, Sharpening filters, Homomorphic filtering.

Model of Image Degradation/restoration process, Noise models, Inverse filtering, Least mean

square filtering, Constrained least mean square filtering, Blind image restoration, Pseudo

inverse, Singular value decomposition. Lossless compression: Variable length coding, LZW

coding, Bit plane coding, predictive coding, DPCM. Lossy Compression: Transform coding,

Wavelet coding, Basics of Image compression standards: JPEG, MPEG, Basics of vector

quantization. Edge detection, Thresholding, Region based segmentation, Boundary

representation: chair codes, Polygonal approximation, Boundary segments, Boundary

descriptors: Simple descriptors, Fourier descriptors, Regional descriptors.

References:

1. Rafael C. Gonzalez, Richard E Woods, “Digital Image Processing”, Pearson Education

2010.

2. William. K. Pratt,“Digital Image Processing”,John Wiley, 2001.

3. Jayaraman S, Veerakumar .T, Esakkirajan. S, “Digital Image Processing,” TataMc

Graw Hill Pub.Co. Ltd.,2009

4. Najarain Splinter, “Biomedical Signal and Image Processing”, Taylor and Francis,

2012.

5. Chanda Dutta Magundar,“Digital Image Processing and Applications”, Prentice

Hall of India,


15EI2014 BIOSIGNAL CONDITIONING CIRCUITS LABORATORY

Co-Requisite: 15EI2005 Biosignal Conditioning Circuits.

Credits: 0:0:2

Course Objective:

To understand the design of filters and circuits for bioelectric amplifiers.

To impart knowledge of the different preamplifiers used for amplifying the biosignals.

To impart knowledge about the application of signal conditioning in biomedical field.

Description:

This laboratory introduces the filter design and circuit design for bioelectric amplifiers.

Course Outcome:

Apply and analyze the front end analogue circuit design for ECG, EMG, EEG, etc.

Identify the method to apply various signal conditioning circuits.

Identify the amplifiers for a variety of biomedical sensors.



15EI2015 BIOMEDICAL INSTRUMENTATION LABORATORY

Credits: 0:0:2

Course Objective:

To record the biosignals and analyze it.

To study the different preamplifiers used for amplifying the biosignals.

To impart knowledge about the measurements and recordings of bioelectric and biochemical

signals.

Description:

This laboratory introduces the different diagnostic and therapeutic equipment, their working and

the methodologies used for analysing and recording biosignals.

Course Outcome:

Analyze the performance of various biomedical equipment and infer their safety aspects.


methods.

Calibrate medical instruments.




15EI2016 MEDICAL THERAPEUTIC EQUIPMENT

Credit 3:0:0

Course Objective:

To learn the principles of cardiac assist devices.

To understand the need and use of extracorporeal devices, and the use of lasers in

medicine.

To enable the students to gain knowledge on the working of therapeutic clinical

equipment.

Course Outcomes:

Suggest suitable therapeutic devices for ailments related to cardiology, pulmonology,

neurology, etc.

Analyze the different types of therapies for suitable applications.

Appreciate the application of lasers in biomedical applications.

External and implantable pacemakers, Programmable pacemakers, Cardiac Defibrillators,

Energy requirements, Implantable Defibrillators, Defibrillator analyzers. Principles of constant

pressure and constant volume ventilators, Basic principles of electromechanical, Pneumatic and

electronic ventilators, Nebulizer, Ventilator testing.

Electro diagnosis, Electrotherapy, Electrodes, Stimulators for Nerve and Muscle, Functional

Electrical Stimulation. High frequency heat therapy, Principle, Shortwave diathermy,

Microwave diathermy, Ultrasonic therapy, Lithotripsy, Therapeutic radiation, Therapeutic

UV Lamps. Basic principles of Biomedical LASERS: Applications of lasers in medicine,CO2

laser, He-Ne laser, Nd-YAG and Ruby laser.

References:

1. Khandpur. R.S., “Handbook of Biomedical Instrumentation”. Second Edition.

TataMc Graw Hill Pub. Co.,Ltd. 2003.


Edition. Wiley &sons, Inc.,New York.2009.

3. Leslie Cromwell, Fred. J. Weibell & Erich. A. Pfeiffer. “Biomedical Instrumentation

and Measurements”. Second Edition. Prentice Hall Inc.2000.

4. JohnLow & AnnReed. “Electrotherapy Explained, Principles and Practice”. Second

Edition. Butterworth Heinemann Ltd. 2000.




15EI2017 MODELLING OF PHYSIOLOGICAL SYSTEMS

Prerequisite: 15EI2006 Biocontrol Systems

Credits: 3:0:0

Course Objective:

To understand the basic ideas related to modeling and different modeling techniques of

certain physiological systems.

To analyze physiological system in time and frequency domain.

To understand the physical and chemical properties of blood.

Course Outcomes:

Develop mathematical model of physiological system.

Simulate the physiological system and analyze in time and frequency domain.

Apply system identification and optimization concepts in modeling.

Systems, Analysis, examples of physiological control systems, differences between

engineering and physiological control systems. Generalized system properties, mathematical

approach, electrical analog, linear models, lung mechanics, muscle mechanics, distributed

parameter versus lumped parameter models, static analysis, regulation of cardiac output,

blood glucose regulation, chemical regulation of ventilation, electrical model of neural

control mechanism

Physical, chemical and rheological properties of blood, Dynamics of circulatory system.

Biochemistry of digestion, types of heat loss from body, models of heat transfer between

subsystem of human body like skin core, etc. and systems like within body, body environment,

Transport through cells and tubules, diffusion, facilitated diffusion and active transport, methods

of waste removal, counter current model of urine formation in nephron, Modeling

Henle’sloop. Modeling oxygen uptake by RBC and pulmonary capillaries, Mass balancing

by lungs, Gas transport mechanism of lungs, oxygen and carbondioxide transport in blood

and tissues.

References:

1. David.O.Cooney,“Biomedical Engineering Principles”.Marcel Decker Pub.Co.2000

2. Michael C.K.Khoo.”Physiological Control Systems”.Prentice Hall of India. 2000

3. John Enderly, Susan Blanchard, Joseph Bronzino.“Introduction to Biomedical

Engineering”, Second Edition, Academic Press Series in Biomedical E ngineering,

2005.


15EI2018 BIOVIRTUAL INSTRUMENTATION LABORATORY

Credit 0:0:2

Course Objective:

To provide knowledge about data acquisition and control an external measuring device

by interfacing to a computer.

To familiarize in signal conditioning and various processing tools.

To become competent in designing virtual instruments for various biomedical

measurements and applications.

Description:

This laboratory introduces the various applications of virtual instruments in biomedical

engineering.

Course Outcome:


Experiment, analyze and document in the laboratory prototype measurement systems

using a computer, plug-in DAQ interfaces and bench level instruments.

Recognize the application of Vis in medical instrumentation in developing medical

instruments.




15EI2019 FINITE ELEMENT MODELLING IN BIOMEDICAL ENGINEERING

Credit 3:0:0

Course Objectives:

To equip the students with the Finite Element Analysis fundamentals.

To enable the students to formulate the design problems into FEA.

To introduce basic aspects of finite element technology, including domain discretization,

polynomial interpolation, application of boundary conditions, assembly of global arrays,

and solution of the resulting algebraic systems.

Course Outcome:

Identify mathematical model for solution of biomedical engineering problems.

Formulate simple problems into finite elements and develop 3D models .

Use professional-level finite element software to solve problems in dynamics of blood

flow, cardiovascular system, etc.

Introduction: Basic concepts- Historical Background -finite element packages- Boundary

Value and Initial Value Problem-Weighted Residual Methods-General Procedure of FEA-

Element Types and its Characteristics-Concept of Element Assembly-Bandwidth and its effects-

Boundary conditions-Aspect Ratio- Pascal’s Triangle- Stiffness matrix -beam element-Shape

Function for Spar element, Beam element-Convergence and Continuous criteria- Structural

Problems: Equations of elasticity- plane elasticity problems - Bending of elastic plates .Heat

Transfer Problems. One Dimensional Basic equation of heat transfer derivation of finite element

equation- Fluid Mechanics Problems: incompressible fluid flow-Biomedical Applications: Case

studies: FE modeling of blood flow channel, lungs, cardiovascular system, analysis using

mechanical solver, electrical solver, electromechanical solver, Vibration analysis using software

tools.

References:

1. David.V.Hutton, “ Fundamentals of Finite Element Analysis”, Tata McGraw Hill,2003.

2. Tirupathi.R.Chandrupatla, Ashok.D.Belegundu. ‘Introduction to Finite Elements in

Engineering’, Prentice Hall of India, 2004.

3. Rao. S.S. “The Finite Element Method in Engineering”, Second Edition,

PergamonPress,Oxford, 2001.


15EI2020 AMBULATORY SERVICES

Pre requisite: 15EI2003 Biomedical Sensors and Transducers

Credits:3:0:0

Course objectives:

to understand the need for ambulance services

to learn the wireless measuring instruments for vital parameter monitoring

to understand computer based technology in ambulatory services

Course outcomes:

Appreciate the purpose of ambulatory services to save human life.

Apply software and hardware required to develop wireless monitoring system

Design the patient transport and networked services

Patient monitoring systems- artifacts- denoising techniques- Advancements in Wireless patient

monitoring-design of ambulance- ambulance train- disaster relief squad- regulation for patient

transportation-Lift mechanism- design of mobile services- diagnostic equipments with battery

backup-mobile X-ray unit-nursing-medical gas handling-regulations-GPS in ambulance-

networked services-accident care- automated alert system- smart systems-fire protection-

maintenance and regulation- Arreditation for ambulatory services- Telehealth technology.

References:

1. David Tse and PramodViswanath, “Fundamentals of Wireless Communication”,

Cambridge University Press, 2005.

2. Andreas F. Molisch, “Wireless Communications, 2nd Edition, John Wiley &sons,USA,

2010.

3. Jochen Schiller, “Mobile Communications”, Addison Wesley Publishers, 2000.

4. Yi-Bing Lin and ImrichChlamtac, “Wireless and Mobile Network Architecture”, John

Wiley and Sons, New Delhi, 2nd Edition, 2001.

5. Feher K., “Wireless Digital Communications”, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 1995.

http://www.eecs.berkeley.edu/~dtse/

http://www.ifp.uiuc.edu/~pramodv/

http://www.cambridge.org/uk/

http://as.wiley.com/WileyCDA/Section/id-302477.html?query=Andreas+F.+Molisch


15EI2021 ERGONOMICS IN HOSPITALS

Pre requisite: 15EI2003 Biomedical sensors and Transducers

Credit 3:0:0

Course Objective:

To introduce the Fundamental terms and concepts of human factors

To discuss anthropometric, biomechanical and physiological principles and how they are

used to optimize human well-being and overall performance.

To learn signal acquisition, recording and processing of the physiological signals related

to human stress problem

Course Outcomes:

Quantify the anthropometric, biomechanical and physiological principles.

Apply instrumentation techniques for the disability and

Apply signal processing techniques for analysis and find solutions.

Definition, human technological system, human–machine system, manual, mechanical,

automated system, human system reliability, human system modeling, Human Output And

Control, material handling, motor skill, human control of systems, controls and data entry

devices, hand tools and devices, Workplace Design: Applied anthropometry, workspace design

and seating, design of computer worktable, case studies. Environmental Conditions Illumination,

climate, noise, motion, sound, vibration. Musculoskeletal anatomy, Quantitative models,

Measurement of muscle stress, fatigue using EMG, EEG, Modeling of pain. Human body

kinematics and Instrumentation - Instrumentation for the Measurement human body kinematics.

Case studies: computer based evaluation of recovery process caused due to limb fractures,

cognitive stress to patients.

References:


2. Karl Kroemer, Henrike Kroemer, Katrin Kroemer-Elbert, “Ergonomics” How to Design

for Ease & Efficiency, Prentice Hall International Editions, 2001.

3. Mark S Sanders, “Human Factors in Engineering and Design”, McGraw Hill, NewYork,

1993.

4. Martin Helander, A Guide to Ergonomics of Manufacturing, Tata McGrawHill, 1996.

5. Mccormic.E.J., and Sanders.M.S, “Human factors in Engineering and Design”, McGraw

Hill, 1992.


15EI2022 SURGICAL ASSIST SYSTEMS

Credits: 3:0:0

Course objectives:

To understand the need for assistive devices

To understand robot kinematics

To understand embedded system applications in controlling robot motion

Course Outcomes:

Write robotic equations of motion

Design path planning algorithms

Develop assist devices for surgery

Introduction to Robotics, degree of freedom, path planning, Lagrange equation of motion,

kinetics, payload sensors, actuators, gripper- lift mechanism for surgery, special lighting

controls, ventillator, heart lung machine, proximity switches, controllers, artificial intelligence,

machine vision, design of controllers based on embedded system, human machine interface, case

studies.

References:

1. Jacob Rosen, Blake Hannaford, Richard.M.Satava, “Surgical Robotics”, Systems

Applications and Visions”, Springer, 2010.

2. Farid Gharagozloo, Farzad Najam,”Robotic surgery”, McGrawHill Publishers, US,

2009.First edition.

3. Bruno Siciliano and Lorenzo Sciavicco, “Robotics: Modelling, Planning and Control,

Springer, 2010.

4. Bruno Siciliano, Oussama Khatib, “Springer Handbook of Robotics”, Springer, 2008.

5. Sebastian Thrun, Wolfram Burgard,” Probabilistic Robotics” ,Intelligent Robotics and

Autonomous Agents series, 2005

http://www.amazon.com/s/ref=dp_byline_sr_book_1?ie=UTF8&field-author=Bruno+Siciliano&search-alias=books&text=Bruno+Siciliano&sort=relevancerank

http://www.amazon.com/s/ref=dp_byline_sr_book_2?ie=UTF8&field-author=Oussama+Khatib&search-alias=books&text=Oussama+Khatib&sort=relevancerank

http://www.amazon.com/Sebastian-Thrun/e/B001HCWM9W/ref=dp_byline_cont_book_1

http://www.amazon.com/Wolfram-Burgard/e/B00QMWHU0S/ref=dp_byline_cont_book_2


15EI2023 SENSORY AND MOTOR REHABILITATION

Credit: 3:0:0

Course Objective:

To familiarize with the technology currently used to improve the quality of life

of individuals with disabilities.

Know new rehabilitation concepts for future development and applications.

Understand orthopedic prosthetics and orthotics in rehabilitation.

Course Outcome:

Choose the appropriate assist device suitable for specific disorder.

Develop new assist devices for the needy.

Use limb and prosthetic devices.

Rehabilitation concepts, Engineering concepts in sensory rehabilitation, motor

rehabilitation, communication disorders. Wheeled mobility, Categories of wheel chairs,

wheel chair structure & component design, Ergonomics of wheel chair propulsion, Power

wheel chair electrical system, Personal transportation.

Sensory aids for the blind, Rehabilitation of auditory disorders, treatment of hearing

impairment, Hearing aids and other assistive devices. Language disorders associated with

Dementia, assessment and treatment of Apraxia and Dysarthia.

Orthopedic prosthetics and orthotics in Rehabilitation: Fundamentals. Applications:

Computer Aided Engineering in customized component design, intelligent prosthetic knee.

A hierarchically controlled prosthetic hand, A self, aligning orthotic knee joint. Externally

powered and controlled orthotics and prosthetics. Active Above Knee Prostheses, Myo-

electric hand and arm prostheses. The MARCUS Intelligent Hand Prostheses.

Reference books:

1. Bronzino J.D., “The Biomedical Engineering handbook”. Second Edition. Vol. II,

CRC press, Bocaraton, 2000

2. Cooper Douglas, A. Hobson.” An Introduction to Rehabilitation Engineering”, CRC

Press, 2007

3. Horia, Hicholi, Teodorescu L., Lakme C Jain.”Intelligent Systems and

4. Technologies in Rehabilitation Engineering”. First Edition. CRC Press. 2000


15EI2024 HOSPITAL AUTOMATION

Credits: 3:0:0

Course Objectives

To know the need for acquisition and processing of multiple data types

To learn about power generation, utility and protection system

To know about distributed and central monitoring functions

Course outcomes:

Apply the data processing techniques and digital storage and transmit data

Analyse the need of power generator, its maintenance and energy conservation, fire

protection in hospitals

Use digital computer for central monitoring of parameters

Medical data handling and automation-RFID in record retrival-surveillance system in hospital-

building automation-power generator, maintenance, battery-maintenance and troubleshooting,

energy conservation-Medical gas production and automation-boiler, blower, compressor, air

conditioning, lighting, heating systems, piping, leakage test- fire prevention and safety

automation-control room, limit switches, sensors, controllers, alarm system –regulation and

standards.

References:


New Delhi, 2003.

2. Joseph J. Carr and John M. Brown, “Introduction to Biomedical Equipment Technology”,

Pearson Education India, Delhi, 2008.


India,2006.

4. John V. Grimaldi and Rollin H. Simonds., Safety Management, All India Travelers Book

seller, New Delhi, 1989.

5. N.V. Krishnan, Safety in Industry, JaicoPublishery House, 1996.


15EI2025 MEDICAL EQUIPMENT TROUBLESHOOTING AND MAINTENANCE

Pre requisite: 15EI2002 Medical Electronics

Credits: 3:0:0

Course Objectives:

To know about power supply operation and troubleshooting

To design electrical equipments with safety standards

To know the principle of medical equipments.

Course Outcomes:

Identify the reasons for equipment failure.

Appreciate the need for grounding aspects , maintenance and troubleshooting.

Design advanced equipments to solve critical problems.

AC, DC power supply, Grounding, shielding, Guarding, insulation testing, insulation resistance

measurement, Testing of electronic components, Troubleshooting of PCB boards, Calibration of

analog and digital sensor probe, Display interface, Safe electrical practice, Cables and standard,

Fuse, Transformer testing, CT and PT, Panel wiring, Troubleshooting of X-ray machines,

Troubleshooting of ECG recorders, ultrasound machine, patient monitor, ventilator, dialyser,

heart lung machine, surgical lights, incubator, baby warmer, infusion pumps, annual

maintenance, contract requirements, vendor services, quality and safety standards.

References:

1. Medical Equipment Maintenance Manuel, Ministry of Health and Family Welfare, New

Delhi, 2010.

2. Shakti Chatterjee,Aubert Miller, “Biomedical Equipment Repair”, Cengage Learning

Technology & Engineering, 2010.

3. David Herres, “Troubleshooting and Repairing Commercial Electrical Equipment”,

McGrawHill, Professional edition, 2013.

4. L.Nokes.B.Turton, D.Jennings, T. Flint,”Introduction to Medical Electronics

Applications”, A Butterworth Heinemann Title. 1995

5. Joseph F. Dyro, “Clinical engineering handbook, Elsevier Academic Press, 2004.

http://www.google.co.in/search?tbo=p&tbm=bks&q=inauthor:%22Aubert+Miller%22

http://www.google.co.in/search?tbo=p&tbm=bks&q=subject:%22Technology+%26+Engineering%22&source=gbs_ge_summary_r&cad=0


15EI2026 BIOFLUID AND SOLID MECHANICS

Credits: 3:0:0

Course Objective:

To learn the laws governing the mechanics & materials used in medicine.

To introduce the mechanics involved in the blood flow to various vessels and valves.

To study the breathing mechanism, airway resistance and lung diseases.

Course Outcome:

Analyze the problems in physiological systems and relate to its characteristic

phenomenon

Apply the mechanical principles in acquiring data, transduction and useful

representation for clinical diagnosis.

Identify the mechanical properties of the human body

Mechanical Properties of Materials used in Medicine, Newton’s laws, stress, strain, elasticity,

viscoelasticity, Tissue Reactions and Blood Compatibility. Biofluid Mechanics:Hook’s law,

Newtonian Fluid, Non Newtonian fluid , Biomechanics of Degenerative Disorders, Hematology

& Blood Rheology, Relationship between diameter, Instrumentation for velocity & pressure of

blood flow, Cardiac And Respiratory Mechanics: Mechanical properties of blood vessels,

Instrumentation for respiratory mechanics. Soft Tissue Mechanics, Orthopedic mechanics,

Mechanical properties of cartilages, Mechanical properties of bone, Bio mechanics in

orthopedics: Prosthetic design, GAIT, goniometer, accelerometer, sensors and instrumentation

techniques for orthopedic mechanics, evaluation and design of manual activities in various

occupations.

References:

1. Fung .Y. C., “Biomechanics: Mechanical properties of living tissues”, Springer-Verlag,

2nd Edition,2004.

2. NihatOzkaya, Margareta Nordin, “Fundamentals of Biomechanics: Equilibrium, Motion,

and Deformation”, Springer, 3rd Edition, Verlag, 2012.

3. Duane Knudson, “Fundamentals of Biomechanics”, Springer, 2nd Edition, US, 2007.

4. Sahay and Saxena, “Biomechanics", Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 1998.

5. J.B.Park, “Bio-materials - Science and Engineering”, Plenum Press, New York, 1984.


15EI2027 COMPUTER APPLICATIONS IN MODELLING OF PHYSIOLOGICAL

SYSTEM

Pre requisite: 15EI2017 Modeling of physiological systems

Credits: 3:0:0

Course Objectives:

To understand the modeling of physiological system

To know the simulation tools and techniques

To use software tools for simulation and analysis

Course Outcomes:

To learn the modeling tools in softwares

To analyse the characteristics of physiological system

To develop graphic user interface which helps as a tool for diagnosis.

Modeling of physiological system, electrical equivalent network-simulation, modeling of fluid

flow characteristics of cardiovascular system – simulation, microsensor design and analysis,

modeling and simulation of cardiac system, glucose regulation system, modeling and simulation

of anesthesia, modeling of bones using finite element techniques and analysis.

References:

1. Myer Kutz, “Biomedical engineering and design Hand book”, CRC press, UK, 2004.

2. Sanjay Gupta, Joseph John, “Virtual Instrumentation using LabVIEW”, Tata McGraw

Hill publishing, New Delhi, 2005.

3. MiChael.C.Khoo, “Physiological control systems -Analysis, simulation and

estimation”,Prentice Hall of India Pvt Ltd, New Delhi, 2001.

4. Jovitha Jerome, “Virtual Instrumentation Using LabVIEW”, PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd.,

2010.


15EI2028 BIOMEDICAL OPTICS

Credit 3:0:0

Course Objective:

To offer clear understanding of tissue characteristics when it is exposed to optical energy.

To know about various optical sources and applications of lasers.

To learn about Holography and its medical applications.

Course Outcome:

Analyze the optical properties of tissues and light interactions with tissues.

Use optical sources for instrumentation and measurement.

Apply photo dynamic therapy and optical holography for biomedical applications.

Optical properties of the tissues: Refraction, Scattering, absorption, light transport inside the

tissue, tissue properties, Light interaction with tissues, optothermal interaction, fluorescence,

speckles.

Instrumentation for absorption, scattering and emission measurements, excitation light sources –

high pressure arc lamp, solid state LEDs, LASERs, optical filters, polarisers, solid state

detectors, time resolved and phase, resolved detectors, Laser in tissue welding, lasers in

dermatology, lasers in ophthalmology, otolaryngology, urology. Wave fronts, Interference

patterns, principle of hologram, optical hologram, applications, Near field imaging of biological

structures, in vitro clinical diagnostic, fluorescent spectroscopy, photo dynamic therapy.

References:

1. Tuan Vo Dirh, Biomedical photonics – Handbook , CRC Press, Bocaraton, 2003.

2. Leon Goldman, M.D., &R.James Rockwell, Jr., Lasers in Medicine , Gordon and

Breach, SciencePublishers Inc., New York, 1971.


15EI2029 PATIENT AND DEVICE SAFETY

Credits: 3:0:0

Course Objective:

To provide a source of useful ideas, concepts, and techniques that could be selectively

applied to reduce an intolerable rate of unacceptable errors, mistakes, goofs, or

shortcomings in expected Medical Device performance.

To avoid patient injury, achieving efficacious treatment, and controlling health care costs.

Medical error has proved to be a difficult and recalcitrant phenomenon.

Course Outcome:

Develop medical equipment that conforms to safety standards.

Suggest reasonable, acceptable, and more effective remedies and countermeasures in

medical device errors.

Apply appropriate safety regulations to medical devices.

Reliability, Types of reliability, The concept of failure, Causes of failure, Types of Failures in

Medical devices, Safety testing, Failure assessment and Documentation, Visual inspection:

External & Internal visual inspection. Measurement, Safety parameters, Safety and risk

management, Manufacturer’s and physician’s responsibilities. Safe medical devices, operation –

Medical Application safety. Environmental safety, Interference with the environment,

Ecological safety. Electrical Safety, Limitation of Voltages ,Macroshock and Microshock, Earth

and Protection, Leakage currents, Magnetic fields and compatibility.

Medical Standards and Regulations – Device classification – Registration and listing –

Declaration of conformance to a recognized standard – Investigational Device Exemptions

(IDEs) – Institutional Review Boards (IRBs) – IDE format – Good laboratory practices (GLPs) –

Good manufacturing practices (GMPs) – Human factors – Design control – The Medical Devices

Directives (MDD) – Definition, Process and choosing the appropriate directive –

Active Implantable Medical Devices Directive (AIMDD) – In Vitro Diagnostic Medical Devices

Directive (IVDMDD).

References:

1. Bertil Jacobson and Alan Murray, “Medical Devices Use and Safety”, Elsvier

Limited,2007.

2. Richard Fries,“Reliable Design of Medical Devices – Second Edition”, CRC

Press,Taylor& Francis Group, 2006.

3. Norbert Leitgeb “SafetyofElectromedicalDevicesLaw – Risks –

Opportunities”,SpringerVerlog/Wein, 2010.

4. Gordon R Higson, “Medical Device Safety – The regulation of Medical Devices

forPublic Health and Safety”, IOP Publishing Limited, Bristol and Philadelphia, 2002.


15EI2030 ICU AND OPERATION THEATRE EQUIPMENT

Credit: 3:0:0

Course Objective:

To offer clear understanding of various intensive care equipment and their working.

To understand the necessity of different operation theatre equipment.

To know about different dialyzers and ventilators.

Course Outcome:

Apply the knowledge acquired, in designing new monitoring devices for ICU.

Suggest suitable surgical instruments and operational devices.

Assist the medical personnel’s during emergency situations in the ICU.

Suction apparatus,Different types;Sterilizers, Chemical, Radiation, Steam for small and larger

units. Automated drug delivery systems, Infusion pumps, closed loop control infusion system,

implantable infusion system. Hemodialysis Machine, Differen ttypesof Dialyzers,

Membranes, Machine controls and measurements. Heart Lung Machine, different types of

oxygenators, peristaltic pumps, Incubators.

OperationTheatreEquipment: Surgical diathermy, Instruments for operation. Anesthesia

Equipment, Humidification, Sterilization aspects, Boyles apparatus. Centralized Oxygen,

Nitrogen, Air supply & Suction. Centralized Air Conditioning, Operation Theatre table &

Lighting. Patient electrical safety, Types of hazards,Natural protective mechanisms against

electricity, Leakage current, Inspection of grounding and patient isolation, Hazards in

operation rooms, ICCU and IMCUs, Optocouplers and Pulse transformers.

References:

1. Khandpur,R.S,”Handbook of Biomedical Instrumentation ”,Second Edition. Tata Mc

Graw Hill Pub. Co., Ltd. 2003

2. John, G. Webster. Medical Instrumentation, Application and Design. Second Edition.

John Wiley & sons, Inc., NewYork. 2008.

3. Joseph Dubovy, Introduction to Biomedical.Mc Graw Hill Co.1978

4. Terry Bahil.A, Biomedical and Clinical Engineering. Prentice Hall Inc.1981


15EI2031 MEDICAL ETHICS

Credit: 3:0:0

Course Objective:

Achieve familiarity with some basic ethical framework & understand how these ethical

frame works can help us to think through contemporary questions in medical ethics.

To know about the legal and ethical principles and application of these in medical field.

Gain knowledge about the medical standards that to be followed in hospitals.

Course Outcome:

Apply the moral values and ethics in their work environment

Maintain the confidentiality issues in medical practice.

Suggest standards that are patient centered.

Introduction to medical ethics: Definition of Medical ethics, Scope of ethics in medicine,

American medical Association code of ethics, CMA code of ethics- Fundamental

Responsibilities, The Doctor and the Patient, The Doctor and the Profession, Professional

Independence, The Doctor and Society. Ethical theories & moral principles: Theories-

Deontology& Utilitarianism, Casuist theory, Virtue theory, The Right Theory. Principles - Non-

Maleficence, Beneficence, Autonomy, Veracity, Justice. Autonomy & Confidentiality issues in

medical practice, Ethical Issues in biomedical research, Bioethical issues in Human Genetics &

Reproductive Medicine. Hospital accreditation standards, Accrediation- JCI Accreditation & its

Policies. Patient centered standards, Healthcare Organization management standards. Hospital

safety standards: Life Safety Standards- Protecting Occupants, Protecting the Hospital From

Fire, Smoke, and Heat, Protecting Individuals From Fire and Smoke, Providing and Maintaining

Fire Alarm Systems, Systems for Extinguishing Fires Environment of Care Standards-

Minimizing EC Risks, Smoking Prohibitions, Managing Hazardous Material and Waste,

Maintaining Fire Safety Equipment, Features, Testing, Maintaining, and Inspecting Medical

Equipment.

References:

1. Domiel A Vallero “Biomedical Ethics for Engineers”, Elsevier Pub.1st edition, 2007

2. Biomedical Ethics: A Canadian Focus. Johnna Fisher (ed.), Oxford University Press

Canada, 2009

3. Robert M Veatch” Basics of Bio Ethics”, Second Edition. Prentice- Hall,Inc. 2003


15EI2032 BIOELECTRIC PHENOMENA

Credits: 3:0:0

Course Objective:

To offer clear understanding of ionic activity in cells and generation of action potential.

To know about generation and conduction of cardiac, nervous and muscular action

potentials.

To impart knowledge on the measurement and recording of the various biopotentials.

Course Outcome:

Analyze the ionic activity in cells and generation of action potential.

Interpret the cardiac, nervous and muscular action potentials for diagnostic purpose.

Measure and record the various bio potentials.

Cell membrane: Structure, Excitable cells, Nernst potential, Resting membrane potential,

Polarized state, Goldman Hodgkin Katz equation, Action potential , Propagation of nerve

impulses, Refractory period, Hodgkin Huxley model of squid gait axon membranes, Modes of

transport of substances across the cell membranes. Electrical activity of the heart: Cardiac

muscle, Action potentials in cardiac muscle, SA node, Origin and propagation of rhythmical

excitation & contraction, refractoriness, regular and ectopic pace makers, Electrocardiogram,

Arrhythmias, Electrical activity of brain – Sleep stages, Brain waves, waveforms &

measurements, 10-20 electrode system , Evoked potentials , Magneto encephalogram,

Electrogastrogram, Electroretinogram, Electroocculogram. Electrical activity of muscles –

neuromuscular junction, synaptic potentials, motor unit, motor unit action potentials,

Electromyogram ,Electrodes for measurement of biopotentials, electrode tissue interfaces ,

Polarizable and non polarizable electrodes , skin contact impedance. Electroneurogram – nerve

conduction studies.

References:

1. Arthur C. Guyton : Textbook of Medical Physiology, Prism Books (Pvt) Ltd & W.B.

Saunders Company, 12th

edition, 2012

2. D.J. Aidley: The Physiology of Excitable cells, 3rd Ed., Cambridge University Press, 4th

edition, 1998

3. John G. Webster: Medical Instrumentation - Application and Design; Houghton Mifflin

Co., Boston, 3rd

edition, 2009.

4. Richard Aston: Principles of Biomedical Instrumentation and Measurement, Merril

Publishing Co., Columbus, 1st edition, 1990.

5. Khandpur R S: Handbook of Medical Instrumentation, Tata McGraw Hill, New

Delhi.2004.


15EI2033 MEMS SENSOR TECHNOLOGY

Credits: 3:0:0

Course Objective:

To introduce the theories and concepts of microelectromechanical systems.

To know about the materials used and the manufacture of MEMS

To impart knowledge on the various types of Microsystems and their applications in

medical field.

Course Outcome:

Analyze the theories and concepts of micro electro mechanical systems.

Apply the fundamentals in the manufacture of MEMS

Analyze the various types of Microsystems and their applications in medical field.

Introduction to MEMS: Historical Background, Smart Materials and Structures. Microsystems

and their advantages. Materials used. Technology involved in MEMS. General applications in

Aerospace, automotive industry and health care. Market size and world scenario.

Micro machining technology: lithography, etching, ion implantation, wafer bonding,

integrated processing, bulk micromachining, surface micro, machining, coating technology

and CVD, LIGA process. Principles of Microsystems: general principles, micro sensors,

pressure sensors, actuators, electrostatic forces, piezo-electric crystals, intelligent materials

and structures. MEMS applications in medicine (BIOMEMS): special features/requirements

for medical application. Current scenario of MEMS for health care. Drug delivery system

and MEMS. Application models, blood pressure sensors, biochip, micro needles,

microelectrodes, neural prosthesis, and catheter end sensors.

Introduction to Nanotechnology: Nano materials, Nano materials fabrication by bottom, up and

Top down approaches, Classification of Nano devices based on the characteristics, Medical

use of Nano materials.

Reference books: 1. Sergey Edward Lysherski.Nano and Micro-electromechanical systems. Second

Edition. CRC Press. 2005

2. WanjunWang, StevenA. Soper, Bio MEMS Technologies and Applications. CRC

Press. 2006

3. N.P.Mahalik, Micro manufacturing & Nanotechnology. Springer. 2006


15EI2034 BIOMETRIC SYSTEMS

Credits: 3:0:0

Course Objective:

To introduce the basic concepts of fingerprint, iris, face and speech recognition.

To impart knowledge on the general principles of design of biometric systems and the

underlying trade-offs

To render knowledge on personal privacy and security implications of biometrics based

identification technology and the issues realized

Course Outcome:

Apply the technologies of fingerprint, iris, face and speech recognition.

Analyze the general principles of design of biometric systems and the underlying trade-

offs.

Inculcate knowledge on personal privacy and security implications of biometrics based

identification technology and the issues involved.

Introduction and back ground, Biometric technologies, Biometric systems, Enrollment,

templates, verification, Biometric applications, biometric characteristics, Authentication

technologies -Need , Protecting privacy and biometrics and policy.

Fingerprint pattern recognition, modeling of fingerprint images, fingerprint classification,

fingerprint matching. Introduction to face recognition, Neural networks for face recognition,

face recognition from correspondence maps, Hand geometry, scanning, Feature Extraction -

Adaptive Classifiers - Visual-Based Feature Extraction and Pattern Classification, Biometric

fusion. Voice Scan, physiological biometrics, Behavioral Biometrics, Introduction to multimodal

biometric system, Integration strategies, Architecture, level of fusion, combination strategy,

training and adaptability, examples of multimodal biometric systems, Performance evaluation-

Statistical Measures of Biometrics ,Memory requirement and allocation.

Introduction - Biometric Authentication Methods, Biometric Authentication Systems, Support

Vector Machines. Securing and trusting a biometric transaction, matching location, local host -

authentication server, match on card (MOC), Multi biometrics and Two-Factor Authentication.

References:

1. James Wayman, Anil Jain, DavideMaltoni, Dario Maio, “Biometric Systems, Technology

Design and Performance Evaluation”, Springer, 2005

2. S.Y. Kung, S.H. Lin, M.W.Mak, “Biometric Authentication: A Machine Learning

Approach” Prentice Hall, 2005

3. Paul Reid, “Biometrics for Network Security”, Pearson Education, 2004.

4. Nalini K Ratha, Ruud Bolle, “Automatic fingerprint Recognition System”, Springer,

2003

5. L C Jain, I Hayashi, S B Lee, U Halici, “Intelligent Biometric Techniques in Fingerprint

and Face Recognition” CRC Press, 1999.


15EI2035 IONIZING AND NON-IONIZING RADIATION

Credit 3:0:0

Course Objective:

To expose the student to the use of ionizing radition and its biological effects in the

medical field.

To know about the use of ionizing radiation in medical and industrial applications.

To understand the biological effects of low and high doses of ionizing radiation.

Course Outcome:

Analyze the effect of radiation at cellular level.

Analyze the effect of microwave on human organs and systems.

Suggest suitable diagnostic and therapeutic devices to prevent unnecessary effects due to

radiations.

Action of radiation in living cells: Various theories related to radiation at cellular level. Dna and

chromosomal damages. Somatic application of radiation. Radio sensitivity protocols of different

tissues of human. Ld50/30 effective radiation on skin, bone marrow, Eye, endocrine glands, and

basis of radio therapy. Genetic effects of radiation: Threshold and linear dose, gene control

hereditary diseases effect of dose. Effect of microwave: Effects on various human organs and

systems. Wavelength in tissue, non thermal interaction. Standards of Protection, national and

international standards and precautions. UV radiation, Classification of sources, measurement,

photo medicine, uv radiation safety visible and infrared radiation.

References:

1. Mary Alice S, Paula J Visconti, E Russell Ritenour, Kelli Haynes,” Radiation Protection

In medical Radiography,”Elsevier Health Sciences,2014

2. Glasser O.,”Medical Physics”, Volume I,II,III, The year book publishers inc, chicago

1980.

3. Moselly H., “Non ionizing radiation”, Adam-hilgar, Bristol 1988.


15EI2036 RADIATION AND NUCLEAR MEDICINE

Credits: 3:0:0

Course Objective:

To introduce the basic principles radiology, computer tomography and nuclear medicine.

To impart knowledge on radioactivity, radiation measurement techniques and detectors

To render knowledge on phototherapy, radioisotopes,application areas and hazards of

radiation

Course Outcome:

Analyze the basic principles radiology, computer tomography and nuclear medicine.

Apply the knowledge acquired on radioactivity, radiation measurement techniques and

detectors.

Inculcate knowledge on phototherapy, radioisotopes, application areas and hazards of

radiation.

X-Ray spectrum, Production of X-rays, Modern X-ray tubes, Quality of X-rays, Photographic

effects on X-ray films, Fluorescent and Intensifying screen, Scattered rays, Use of filters, HVL,

Collimators, Cones, Bucky Grids, Fluoroscopy, Image intensifier, Digital Radiography,

Computed Tomography(CT). Basic characteristics and units of radioactivity, Ionization

chamber, GM tubes, Gas filled detectors, scintillation detectors, semiconductor detectors,

Liquid scintillation counter, Statistical aspects of nuclear medicine.

Rectilinear scanners, Scintillation Camera, principle of operation, collimator, photo multiplier

tube, Pulse height Analyzer, computerized multi crystal Gamma camera, Principles of PET

and SPECT. Principles of Radiation Therapy, Radio therapy treatment planning Dose in

Radiotherapy, Mega voltage therapy, Intensity modulated Radiation therapy, Brachy-therapy,

Radiotherapy using radio isotopes. Radiation sensitivity of biological materials, Evidence on

radiobiological damage from cell survival curve, Radiation effects on humans, Maximum

permissible dose equivalent limits, Hazard from ingested radioactivity, substances, ICRP

regulations, Quality factor and sievert, Principles of radiological protection, personnel

dosimetry.

References:

1. Dendy,P.P & Heaton. B, Physics for Radiologists. Third Edition. Charles C.Thomas

Publisher S.A., 2000

2. .Khan,F.M, Physics for Radiation Therapy, Williams & Wilkins. 2009

3. Gopal B.Saha, Physics and Radiation biology of Nuclear Medicine. 2006

4. Penelope J. Allisy, Roberts Obefipsm. Farr’s Physics for Medical Imaging, Ferry

Williams.2007


15EI2037 INTELLIGENT INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEMS

Credits: 3:0:0

Course Objective:

To introduce the basic principles of embedded systems.

To impart knowledge on the design of embedded systems, memory requirements and

interfacing.

To render knowledge on real time operating systems and software development tools.

Course Outcome:

Design interfacing circuits to acquire real time data and process it using software.

Develop intelligent instrumentation systems for biomedical applications.

Use communication protocols for data transmission.

Concept of embedded systems design, Embedded microcontroller cores, embedded memories,

Examples of embedded system, Design challenges in embedded system Design.

Serial data communication, Microcomputer based control systems.

Issues in sensor interfacing, Interfacing Keyboard displays, signal conditioning, interfacing with

external systems, user interfacing, ADC, DAC, relay, optoisolator, LEDs. Process parameter

measurement system. (DAQ), Digital Weighing machine, Embedded Implementation of

temperature controller, Speed control of DC motor. Frequency counter. Stepper motor control.

Introduction to real time operating systems: Tasks and task states, tasks and data, semaphores

and shared data, message queues, mailboxes and pipes, timer functions, Events, memory

management, Interrupt routines in an RTOS environment. Emulator, Simulators, Host and

target machines, Linkers/locators for embedded software, getting embedded software into the

target system and testing on host machine.

References:

1. A.Rajkamal, “Embedded systems, Architecture, Programming and design”, Tata

McGraw Hill, New Delhi. 2008

2. David.E.Simon, An Embedded Software Primer. Addison Wesley, New Delhi. 2001

3. Micheal Predko, Myke Predko, PIC Microcontroller Pocket Reference. McGraw Hill,

NewDelhi. 2000

4. WayneWolf. Computers as Components: Principles of Embedded Computer System

Design. Morgan Kaufman. 2004

5. John.B. Peatman, Design with PIC Microcontrollers. Prentice Hall, NewDelhi.2006


15EI2038 MODERN AUTOMOTIVE AND INTELLIGENT SYSTEMS

Credits: 3:0:0

Course Objective:

To understand the basic knowledge about the Automotive Industry.

To understand the fundamentals of Modern automotive systems.

To understand the fundamentals of safety systems.

Course Outcome:

Identifying the challenges of electronics in modern automobile.

Gaining fundamental knowledge about the physical system.

Explore potential new functions and applications.

Description

Vehicle classifications, Modern automotive systems , need and application areas for electronics

in automobiles, Sensors and actuators, Possibilities and challenges in automotive industry,

Enabling technologies and industry trends-Ignition systems , Fuel delivery system and control,

Engine control functions, modes and diagnostics. Transmission fundamentals, Types,

Components, Electronic transmission control-Shift point control, Lockup control/torque

converter clutch, Engine torque control during shifting, Safety and diagnostic functions,

Improvement of shift quality Vehicle braking fundamentals and its dynamics during braking,

Brake system components, Antilock braking systems, Components and control logic, Electronic

stability, Steering system basics, Fundamentals of electronically controlled power steering: type,

Electronically controlled hydraulic system, Electric power steering Active Passive and

Functional Safety.

References:

1. William Ribbens, “Understanding Automotive Electronics: An Engineering erspective”,

Butterworth-Heinemann, Elsevier Incorporation, Massachusetts, 7th Edition, 2012.

2. Tom Denton “Automotive Electrical and Electronic Systems”, Butterworth-Heinemann,

Elsevier Incorporation,2009.

3. Jack Erjavec, “Automotive Technology- A System Approach”, Thomas Delmar

Learning, New York, 3rd Edition, 2004.

4. Ronald K. Jurgrn, “Automotive Electronics Handbook”, McGraw Hill Incorporation,

New York, 2nd Edition, 2007.

5. Robert Bosch, “Automotive Electrical and Electronics”, Robert Bosch, Germany, 3rd

Edition, 1999.


15EI2039 AUTOMOTIVE CONTROL AND HIL SIMULATION

Credits: 3:0:0

Course Objective:

To understand need for simulation and co-simulation

To understand the Real time prototyping

To understand the concept of SIL, MIL and HIL

Course Outcome:

Ability to work with integrated platforms

Ability to generate model based codes

Skills to develop and validate the controller

Description:

Model Based system design, HIL simulation, need Basics of continuous and discrete simulation,

modelling basics. Connection between Hardware and Simulation, Event Discrete simulation. xPc

target, Real Time Workshops, state flow and Real Time Embedded coder. Using Simulink: for

plant model, controller (PID) designs for an automotive application. Analog output, targeting a

processor for plant. System modelling and validation using test setup. Interfacing of software

models with hardware design. System programming and development of experimental setup for

hardware in loop simulation. HIL: Separate and In the loop testing of plant and controller system

verification and Validation: Comparing the HIL test results with real world result, Hardware in-

the-loop testing.

References:

1. Christain Kohler, “Enhancing Embedded systems Simulation: A Chip-Hardware-in-the-

Loop Simulation Framework”, Viewe+Teubner Verlag/Springer, Germany, 1st edition,

2011.

2. Gaberial Nicolescu, Pieter J. Mosterman, “Model-Based Design For Embedded

Systems”, CRC Press, Boca Raton,2010

3. Fabio Patern, “Model -based Design and Evaluation of Interaction Applications”,

Springer-Verlag, Germany, 2000.

4. Mathworks Courseware, “InTroducing to Model-Based System Design”

5. Mathworks Courseware, “Advanced Model-Based System Design”


15EI2040 AUTOMOBILE ELECTRIC AND ELECTRONICS SYSTEMS

Credits: 3:0:0

Course Objective:

To understand the automotive electrical and electronics systems

To understand the design aspect with respect to EMI/EMC

To understand the safety constrains associated with electrical systems

Course Outcome:

Gain fundamental knowledge about the physical system

Ability to develop integrated control system

Explore potential new functions and applications

Description:

Electrical systems and circuits, EMI/EMC, Earthing , Positive and negative Relays, Charging

systems, Starting systems, Ignition systems, Electronic Ignition system, Electronic fuel control,

Interior and Exterior lighting Windscreen washers and wipers, Horns ,Chassis electrical systems

comfort and safety ,Seats ,mirrors and sun-roofs, Central locking and electric windows, Cruise

control, In-car multimedia, Security, Airbags and belt tensioners, Other safety and comfort

systems, Diagnosing comfort and safety system faults, Active Passive and Functional Safety,

Advanced comfort and safety systems technology, New developments in comfort and safety

systems

References:

1. James D. Haldermen, ”Automotive Electricity and Electronics”, Prentice Hall, New

Jersey,4th

Edition,2013

2. Tom Denton, ”Automobile Electrical and Electronic Systems”, Elsevier Butterworth-

Heinemann, Oxford, 3rd

Edition, 2004.

3. Robert Bosch GmBH , ”Bosch Automotive Hand Book”, Bentley publishers, 8th Edition,

Cambridge, 2011


15EI2041 AUTOMOTIVE IN-VEHICLE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM

Credits: 3:0:0

Course Objective:

To understand the need for in vehicle communication.

To analyze automotive communication protocols.

To understand the automotive standards for communication.

Course Outcome:

Depth knowledge on data communication and networking.

Ability to select the suitable protocol for an application.

Ability to integrate different communication platforms.

Needs and benefits of IVN, Classes of IVN Protocols, Multiplexed electrical systems, Vehicle

multiplexing, Bitwise contention, Network elasticity, Error processing and management.

Overview of the automotive communication protocols: TCP/IP, CAN, LIN, Flexray, MOST:

Features, Specifications, baud rate, timing, synchronizing, error detection and correction

mechanisms, frames, standards, advantages and limitation. Cross protocol compatibility, gateway

ECU, Comparison of different IVN protocols.

References:

1. Gilbert Held, “Inter and Intra Vehicle Communications”, Auerbach Publications,

CRC Press, Boca Raton, 2007.

2. Behrouz Forouzan, “Data Communications and Networking”, McGraw-Hill Limited,

NewYork, 4th

Edition, 2006

3. Ronald K. Jurgen, “Automotive Electronics Handbook”, McGraw-Hill Incorporation,

NewYork, 1999

4. Marc Emmelmman, Brend Bochow, Christopher Kellum, “Vehicular Networking :

Automotive Applications and Beyond”, John Wley & Sons, 2010

5. Robert Bosch, “Bosch Automotive Networking: Expert know-how on Automotive

Technology”, Bently Publishers, Cambridge, 2007


15EI2042 AUTOMOTIVE TELEMATICS AND INFOTAINMENT

Credits: 3:0:0

Course Objective:

• To understand the role of Telematics and Infotainment

• To understand the role of electronics in driver assistant system

• To understand the role of inter vehicle communication

Course Outcome:

• Depth knowledge about different assistive system

• Ability to explore new infotainment system

• Ability to develop fleet management system

Description:

Driver Assistance Systems: driver support systems, Vehicle support systems, Safety Systems:

Anti - spin regulation, traction control systems Security Systems: Anti-theft technologies, smart

card system, number plate coding. Comfort Systems Adaptive cruise control, adaptive noise

control, active roll control system, cylinder cut- off technology. Telematics basics, applications

and technologies: HUD, Global Positioning Systems (GPS), Inertial Navigation Systems (INS),

Vehicle Location and Navigation, Bluetooth, UWB, RFID, Intelligent Transportation Systems

(ITS) and Wireless Access in Vehicular Environments (WAVE), Communications, Air-interface,

Long and Medium range (CALM), Real-time management and planning of commercial vehicle

operation, Satellite Radio(XM-Radio and SIRIUS), Fleet Management

References:

1. William Ribbens, “Understanding Automotive Electronics: An Engineering Perspective”,

Butterworth-Heinemann, Elsevier Incorporation, Massachusetts, 7th Edition, 2012.

2. Dennis Foy, “Automotive Telematics: The One-stop Guide to In-vehicle Telematics and

Infotainment Technology and Applications, Red Hat Publishing Company Incorporation,

Maryland, 2002.

3. Ljubo Vlacic, Michel Parent, Fumio Harashima, “Intelligent Vehicle Technologies”,

Butterworth-Heinemann publications, Oxford, 2001.

4. Robert Bosch GmBH, “Bosch Automotive Hand Book”, Bentley Publishers, 8th Edition,

Cambridge, 2011.

5. Ronald K Jurgen, “Navigation and Intelligent Transportation Systems – Progress in

Technology”, Automotive Electronics Series, SAE, USA, 1998.


15EI2043 AUTOMOTIVE FAULT DIAGNOSTICS

Credits: 3:0:0

Course Objective:

To understand the importance about diagnostics

To understand the methods of diagnostics

To understand the tools available for fault diagnostics

Course Outcome:

Knowledge about different diagnostic tools

Depth knowledge about the diagnostic process

Ability to identify the faults on the vehicle

Description:

Need for diagnostics, Circuit testing, Vehicle specific details, The ’six-steps’ approach, Skills

required for effective diagnosis, An approach to fault finding, Tools and equipment,

Oscilloscope diagnostics, On-board diagnostics, Diagnostics of Engine system, chassis System,

Electrical and Transmission system.

References:

1. Allan W. M. Bonnick, “Automotive Computer Controlled Systems Diagnostic tools and

techniques”, Butterworth-Heinemann, Oxford, 1st Edition, 2001.

2. Tom Denton, “Advanced Automotive Fault Diagnosis”, Elsevier Butterworth-

Heinemann, Oxford, 2nd Edition, 2006.

3. Tracy Martin, “How to Diagnose and Repair Automotive Electrical Systems”, Motor

Books/MBl Publishing Company, London, 1st Edition, 2005.

4. James D. Halderman Jim Linder Automotive Fuel And Emissions Control Systems third

edition Pearson Education, 2012.

5. AlexanderA.Stotsky, “Automotive Engines Control, Estimation, Statistical

Detection”Springer-Verlog, Berlin Heidelberg 2009.


LIST OF SUBJECTS

Sub. Code Name of the Subject Credits

14EI2001 Sensors and Transducers 3:0:0

14EI2002 Sensors and Transducers Laboratory 0:0:2

14EI2003 Electrical Measurements 3:1:0

14EI2004 Simulation Laboratory 0:0:2

14EI2005 Control System 3:1:0

14EI2006 Electrical Measurements and Machines Laboratory 0:0:2

14EI2007 Control Systems Laboratory 0:0:2

14EI2008 Industrial Instrumentation 3:0:0

14EI2009 Process Dynamics and Control 3:0:0

14EI2010 Industrial Instrumentation Laboratory 0:0:2

14EI2011 Electronic Instrumentation 3:0:0

14EI2012 Logic and Distributed Control Systems 3:0:0

14EI2013 Industrial Data Communication and Networks 3:0:0

14EI2014 Process Control Laboratory 0:0:2

14EI2015 Logic and Distributed Control Systems Laboratory 0:0:2

14EI2016 Digital Control Systems 3:0:0

14EI2017 Biomedical Instrumentation 3:0:0

14EI2018 Automotive Instrumentation 3:0:0

14EI2019 Analytical Instrumentation 3:0:0

14EI2020 Instrumentation and Control in Petrochemical Industries 3:0:0

14EI2021 Instrumentation and Control in Paper Industries 3:0:0

14EI2022 Instrumentation and Control in Iron and Steel Industries 3:0:0

14EI2023 Opto-Electronics and Laser Based Instrumentation 3:0:0

14EI2024 Power Plant Instrumentation 3:0:0

14EI2025 Modern Control Techniques 3:0:0

14EI2026 Strength of Machine Elements 3:0:0

14EI2032 Flexible Manufacturing System 3:0:0

14EI2033 Vibration Analysis 3:0:0

14EI2035 Human- Robot Systems and Interaction 3:0:0

14EI2036 Environmental Instrumentation 3:0:0

14EI2038 Instrumentation for Agriculture 3:0:0

14EI2039 Instrumentation and Control for Avionics 3:0:0

14EI2040 Ultrasonic Instrumentation 3:0:0

14EI2041 Measurements and Instrumentation 3:0:0

14EI2042 Advanced Control Theory 3:0:0

14EI2043 Virtual Instrumentation 3:0:0

14EI2044 PLC and Automation 3:0:0

14EI2045 Artificial organs and Rehabilitation Engineering 3:0:0

14EI2046 Process Control for Food Engineers 3:0:0

14EI2047 Process Control Laboratory for Food Engineers 0:0:2

14EI2048 Instrumentation and Control Systems 3:0:0

14EI3002 Instrumentation 3:0:0


14EI3003 Advanced Process Control 3:0:0

14EI3004 Industrial Instrumentation and Process Control Laboratory 0:0:2

14EI3005 Advanced Control Systems 3:0:0

14EI3006 Discrete Control System 3:0:0

14EI3007 Intelligent Controllers 3:0:0

14EI3008 Optimal Control Theory 3:0:0

14EI3009 Industrial Instrumentation 3:0:0

14EI3010 Control System Design 3:0:0

14EI3011 Virtual Instrumentation Laboratory 0:0:2

14EI3012 Embedded Control Systems Laboratory 0:0:2

14EI3014 Industrial Automation 3:0:0

14EI3015 System Identification and Adaptive Control 3:0:0

14EI3016 SCADA systems and Applications 3:0:0

14EI3017 Design of Linear Multivariable control systems 3:0:0

14EI3018 Piping and Instrumentation 3:0:0

14EI3019 Embedded Instrumentation 3:0:0

14EI3020 Networks and Protocols for instrumentation and control 3:0:0

14EI3022 Design of Embedded Control System



3:0:0

14EI3023 Advanced Processors for control and automation 3:0:0

14EI3028 Embedded Virtual Instrumentation Laboratory 0:0:2

14EI3029 Embedded Automotive Systems 3:0:0

14EI3030 Automotive Sensors and Intelligent Systems

3:0:0

14EI3031 Automotive Protocols and Telematics 3:0:0

14EI3033 Biomedical sensors and signal conditioning 3:0:0

14EI3038 Physiological Control Systems 3:0:0

14EI3039 Medical Instrumentation 3:0:0

14EI3040 Bio Virtual instrumentation 3:0:0

14EI3041 Hospital Management System 3:0:0

14EI3042 Cognitive technology for biomedical engineers 3:0:0

14EI3044 Embedded Based Medical Instrumentation Laboratory 0:0:2

14EI3045 Diagnostics and therapeutic Equipments Laboratory 0:0:2

14EI3046 Medical Imaging Techniques 3:0:0

14EI3048 Clinical Instrumentation 3:0:0

14EI3049 Medical Devices And Safety

Safe

Safe

Sasafety Saf

3:0:0

14EI3051 Medical Sensors and wearable devices 3:0:0

14EI3052 Rehabilitation Engineering 3:0:0

14EI3054 Biomechanics 3:0:0

14EI3055 Medical Diagnostics And Therapeutic Equipments 3:0:0

14EI3056 Limb prosthetics 3:0:0

14EI3057 Industrial electronics and instrumentation 3:0:0

14EI3058 Linear systems 3:0:0

14EI3059 Transducers and Actuators 3:0:0

14EI3060 Automated Test and Measurement 3:0:0

14EI3061 Remote sensing and control 3:0:0


14EI3063 Robot Programming 3:0:0

14EI3064 Kinematics and Dynamics of Robot 3:0:0

14EI3065 Advanced Instrumentation and Process Control for Food Engineers 3:0:0

14EI3066 Sensors and Data Acquisition Lab 0:0:2

14EI3067 Transducer Engineering 3:0:0


Credits: 3:0:0

Course Objective:

To learn the characteristics of sensors

To provide knowledge on the principle and operation of different transducers.

To introduce the application of sensors and transducers in the measuring system.

Course Outcome:

Determine the characteristics of various sensors and analyze them

Use the principle of transducers to design measuring systems

Suggest suitable sensors for a particular application

Transducers - Definition, Classification of transducers, Characteristics of transducers, types of Transducers –

Resistive, Inductive, Capacitive, Piezoelectric, Magnetic transducers, principle of operation, working, characteristics

and applications, Miscellaneous sensors – Elastic, digital, chemical, fiber optic, MEMS.

References

1. Doebelin. E.O., “Measurement Systems Application and Design”, McGraw Hill

International, New York, 2007.


3. Cooper W.D., “Electronic Instrumentation and Measurement Techniques”, Prentice Hall of India, New

Delhi, 2003.

4. Sawhney A.K., “A Course in Electrical and Electronics Measurements and Instrumentation”, Eighteenth

Edition, Dhanpat Rai and Sons, New Delhi, 2007.

5. Ian R Sinclair, “Sensors and Transducers”, Third Edition, Newnes, New Delhi, 2011.


Co-Requisite: 14EI2001 Sensors and Transducers

Credits: 0:0:2

Course Objective:

To introduce the practical aspects of various transducers and their characteristics.

To impart knowledge in measurement of Resistance, Inductance and Capacitance using bridges.

To improve the skills in calibrating analog meters.

Course Outcome:

Analyze the performance characteristics of various transducers and infer the reasons for the behavior.

Critically analyze any measurement application and suggest suitable measurement methods.

Calibrate basic instruments.

Description:

This laboratory introduces the different transducers, their working and determination of their characteristics.


Experiments:



14EI2003 ELECTRICAL MEASUREMENTS

Pre Requisite: 14EE2001 Electric Circuits and Networks

Credits: 3:1:0

Course Objective:

To introduce the principle of measurement of D.C. and A.C. voltages.

To understand the use of instruments and techniques for practical measurements required in electrical

measurements.

To learn the working of D.C and A.C. Bridges

Course Outcome:

Apply the knowledge of electrical measurement techniques to design circuits.

Solve problems through instrument illustrations.

Use the concept of bridges in instrumentation application

Fundamentals Of Electrical Measurements-Functional Elements of an Instrument, Input– Output Configuration of

Measurement Systems, Performance Characteristics of Instruments, Electromechanical DC Instruments -

Galvanometers, PMMC Instrument, DC Ammeter and Voltmeter, Calibration of DC instruments, Electromechanical

AC Instruments-Moving Iron Instrument, Thermoinstruments, Electrodynamometers in Power Measurements,

Watt– hour meter, Power– factor meters, Instrument Transformers, A.C. and D.C. Bridge Circuits and Recording

Instruments.

References

1. Cooper W.D., “Electronic Instrumentation and measurement techniques”, Prentice Hall of India, New

Delhi, 2004.

2. Tumanski. S., “Principles of Electrical Measurement”, Taylor and Francis Group, Ny, 2006.

3. Kalsi.H.S, “Electronics Instrumentation”, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2009.

4. Golding E.W. and Widdis F.E., “Electrical measurements and measuring instruments”, Sir Issac Pitman

and Sons Pvt., Ltd., 2001.

5. Laughton. M. A. and Warne. D. J., “Electrical Engineer's Reference Book” Sixteenth Edition, Newnes,

2003.

14EI2004 SIMULATION LABORATORY

Co-Requisite: 14EE2001 Electric Circuits and Networks

14EC2002 Electronic circuits

Credits: 0:0:2

Course Objective:

To familiarize simulation software to analyze electronic circuits.

To introduce simulation software to learn signal operations

To design virtual instruments to analyze real time signals.

Course Outcome:

Simulate simple electronic circuits using simulation software.

Simulate signals and analyze them using simulation software


Acquire real time signals and perform simple operations on them using simulation software.

Description:

This laboratory aims to introduce simulation software that enables the student to understand the theoretical concepts

by simulating them.

Experiments:




Credits: 3:1:0

Course Objective:

• To introduce the fundamentals of Feedback Control systems and mathematical modeling of the system.

• To cover the concepts of time response and frequency response of the system.

• To understand the basics of stability analysis of the system.

Course Outcome:

• Represent the mathematical model of a system.


• Analyse the stability of the system.

Introduction to Control Systems, Types, Effect of Feedback, Differential equation of Physical Systems, Transfer

functions, Block diagram algebra, Signal Flow graphs, Time Response of Feed Back Control Systems, Step response

of First and Second order systems , Time response specifications of Second order Systems, Concepts of Stability,

Routh stability criterion, Root Locus Techniques, stability analysis using Bode Plots, Polar plots, Introduction to

lead, lag and lead–lag compensating networks, Nyquist criterion, Concepts of State, State variable and State models

for electrical systems, Solution of State Equations, P, PI, PID Controllers.

References

1. Nagarath .J and Gopal M., “Control Systems Engineering”, New Age International (P) Limited,

Publishers, Fourth edition – 2005

2. Ogata .K “Modern Control Engineering “, Pearson Education Asia/ PHI, 4th Edition, 2002.

3. Benjamin C. Kuo and Farid Golnaagi, Wiley “Automatic Control Systems”, 8th Edition, 2009.

4. Joseph J Distefano “Feedback and Control System”, III et al., Schaum’s Outlines, TMH, 2nd Edition

2007.

5. Norman. S. Nise, “Control Systems Engineering”, Wiley, 6th

Edition, 2011.


Co-Requisite: 14EI2003 Electrical Measurements

Credits: 0:0:2

Course Objective:

To expose the students to the operation of DC and AC machines

To learn about calibration of electrical instruments and bridge circuits

To introduce the working of special electrical machines.

Course Outcome:

Analyze the characteristics of DC and AC Machines.

Calibrate electrical instruments and bridge circuits


Perform experiments on special electric machines.

Description:

This laboratory enables the student to understand the operation of electrical machines, bridges and the methods of

calibrating electric instruments

Experiments:





Credits: 0:0:2

Course Objective:

• To explore the methods of controller design.

• To introduce the concept of Mathematical Modelling.

• To understand the design of the compensating circuits.

Course Outcome:

• Design a controller for a practical system.

• Derive the mathematical model of a system.

• Design lead and lag compensating circuits.

Description:

This laboratory demonstrates the methods to derive the mathematical model of a system and design a controller for a

practical system.

Experiments:




Credits: 3:0:0

Course Objective:

To learn the principle of Pressure, Temperature, flow, level, density and viscosity measurements.



Course Outcome:


Calibrate the various instruments and use them in various fields.

Select suitable instrument for a given application

Pressure Measurement-Standards, Dynamic testing, High and Low pressure measurement, Flow Measurement -

Pitot static tube, Yaw tube, Pivoted vane, Anemometer, Obstruction meters, Rotameters, Turbine meters, Positive

Displacement meters, Electromagnetic flow meter, Drag force flow meter , Ultrasonic flow meters, Vortex,

Shedding flow meters, Temperature Measurement-Thermal Expansion Methods, Thermoelectric sensors, Electrical

Resistance Sensors, Junction Semiconductor Sensors, Radiation methods, Level Measurement, Density And

Viscosity Measurement, Selection, Range, Installation, Calibration and Protection of instruments


References 1. Doebelin E.O, “Measurement Systems: Application and Design”, McGraw Hill, New York, 2003.


3. William C. Dunn, “Fundamentals of Industrial Instrumentation and Process Control”, McGraw– Hill, New

Delhi, 2005.

4. Liptak B.G, “Process Measurement and Analysis,” Chilton Book Company, Radnor, Pennsylvania, 2003.

5. Walt Boyes, “Instrumentation Reference Book,” Butterworth Heinemann, United States, 2003.



Credits: 3:0:0

Course Objective:

• To equip the students with the knowledge of modelling a physical process.

• To understand the design of various control schemes.

• To apply the control system in various processes.

Course Outcome:

• Derive the Mathematical Model of a physical system.

• Tune controllers for Optimum gain using various techniques.

• Analyse and decide suitable control schemes for a particular system.

Process Control System -Terms and objectives, Piping and Instrumentation diagram, Degrees of freedom,

Modelling of simple systems ,Basic Control Actions - Continuous Controller Modes, Response of controllers for

different test inputs, Selection of control modes, Controller Tuning - Optimum controller settings, Controller tuning

Methods, Final Control Elements – Characteristics, Selection of control valves, Advanced Control Schemes -

Multivariable process control, Interaction of control loops, Case Studies: Distillation column, Boiler drum level

control, Heat Exchanger and chemical reactor control

References


2. Coughanowr D.R., “Process Systems Analysis and Control”, McGraw Hill, Singapore,2008.

3. Curtis D .Johnson, “Process Control Instrumentation Technology, ”Prentice Hall , New Jersey, 2006.

4. Dale E. Seborg, Thomas F. Edgar, Duncan A. Mellichamp, “Process Dynamics and Control,” John Willey

and Sons, Singapore, 2006.

5. Wayne Bequette B., “Process control: modeling, design, and simulation” Prentice Hall , New Jersey– 2003



Co-Requisite: 14EI2008 Industrial Instrumentation

Credits: 0:0:2

Course Objective:




Course Outcome:

Handle simple Industrial Instruments.

Perform Calibration of Instruments.



Description:

This laboratory introduces the operation of industrial instruments, their calibration and design of instrumentation

circuits.

Experiments:



14EI2011 ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION

Pre Requisite: 14EC2008 Linear Integrated Circuits

Credits: 3:0:0

Course Objective:

• To provide information on the basics of Electronic Measurements.

• To include specialized information needed for Analog and Digital Instrumentation.

• To exploit an instrument’s potential, to be aware of its limitations.

Course Outcome:

• Correctly interpret the measurement results

• Suggest the instrument suitable for a specific application

• Discover applications and solve problems that arise in measurement applications

Electronic Analog Instruments – Introduction, Amplified DC meter, AC voltmeters using rectifiers, True RMS

voltmeter, Q meter, Vector impedance meter. Oscilloscope, display devices and recorders, Signal generators and

analyzers, Digital Instruments-Digital Voltmeters and Multimeters, Simple frequency counter, , time interval,

Digital Displacement transducer, Virtual Instrumentation – Evolution, Architecture, Presentation and Control,

Functional Integration, Programming Requirements, Conventional and Distributed Virtual Instrumentation, Virtual

Instruments and Traditional Instruments, Advantages, Study of evolution and procedures in simulation softwares.

References

1. Cooper W.D., “Electronic Instrumentation and measurement techniques”, Prentice Hall of India, New

Delhi, 2009.

2. Kalsi.H.S, “Electronics Instrumentation”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2010.


4. Sumathi S and P. Surekha , “LabVIEW based Advanced Instrumentation Systems” Springer, 2007.

5. Oliver B.H., and Cage J.M., “Electronics Measurements and Instrumentation”, McGraw Hill, 2009.

6. David A Bell, “Electronic Instrumentation and measurements”, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 2006.


Pre Requisite: 14EI2009 Process Dynamics and Control

Credit: 3:0:0

Course Objective:

• To provide the fundamentals of Data Acquisition system.

• To introduce the concept of PLC and its Programming using Ladder Diagram.

• To cover the basics of Distributed Control Systems

Course Outcome:

• Acquire knowledge of data acquisition System


• Write simple Programs using ladder diagrams

• Use the knowledge of DCS and communication standards in their Projects

Review of Computers In Process Control - Data loggers, Data Acquisition Systems (DAS), Direct Digital Control

(DDC), Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition Systems (SCADA), Overview of PLC systems, PLC

programming procedures, PLC Basic Functions, PLC Intermediate Functions Sequencer functions, Matrix functions,

Alternate programming languages, Analog PLC operation, Design of interlocks and alarms, Distributed Control

Systems (DCS)-Evolution, Architecture, Comparison, Local Control unit, Process Interfacing Issues, Redundancy

concept, Communication facilities, Interfaces In DCS, General purpose computers in DCS

References

1. John.W. Webb, Ronald A Reis, “Programmable Logic Controllers - Principles and Applications”, Prentice

Hall Inc., New Jersey, 2003.


3. B.G. Liptak, “Instrument Engineers Handbook, Process control and Optimization”, CRC press- Radnor,

Pennsylvania, 2006.

4. B.G. Liptak, “Process software and digital networks,” CRC press,Florida-2003.

5. Curtis D. “Johnson Process control instrumentation technology,” Prentice Hall , New Jersey 2006.

6. Krishna Kant, “Computer-Based Industrial Control,“ PHI, New Delhi, 2004

7. Frank D. Petruzella, “Programmable Logic Controllers”, McGraw Hill, New York, 2004.

.

14EI2013 INDUSTRIAL DATA COMMUNICATION AND NETWORKS

Pre Requisite: 14EC2080 Communication Engineering

Credits: 3:0:0

Course Objective:

To introduce the basic principles of networking

To learn the serial communication standards

To equip the students with relevant knowledge about network protocols

Course Outcome:

Appreciate the need for network protocols during data transmission and reception.

Analyze the methods of communication

Compare the different protocols used as Universal standards.

Introduction and Basic Principles – Protocols, Physical standards, Modern instrumentation, Bits, Bytes and

characters, Communication principles, Communication modes, Synchronous and Asynchronous systems,

Transmission Characteristics, Data Coding, UART, Serial data communications interface standards, Balanced and

unbalanced transmission lines, RS232,422,,423,449,485 interface standard, Introduction To Protocols - Flow

control Protocols, BSC Protocols, HDLC, SDLC, Data communication for Instrumentation and Control, Industrial

protocols, Local Area Networks

References

1. John Park, Steve Mackay, Edwin Wright, “Practical Data Communications for Instrumentation and

Control”, Elsevier Publications, 2003.

2. Stallings W. “High speed Networks TCP/IP and ATM Design Principles “ PHI ,2002.

3. Behrouz A. Forouzan“ Data Communication and Networking” , TMH, 2006.

4. Lawrence. M. Thompson , “Industrial Data Communications”, 4th Edition , ISA- 2007.

5. Edwin Wright “Practical Industrial Data Networks: Design, Installation and Troubleshooting”, Newnes-

2004.




Credits: 0:0:2

Course Objective:



To provide knowledge about controller design, simulation and implementation

Course Outcome:

Design and compare Digital Control Algorithms.

Analyze the performance of a Process

Demonstrate Data Acquisition in VI

Description:

This laboratory introduces the design procedure for digital controllers and their implementation of real time process.

Experiments:




Co-Requisite: 14EI2012 Logic and Distributed Control Systems

Credits: 0:0:2

Course Objective:

• To strengthen the knowledge of Programmable Logic Controllers

• To introduce the concepts of SCADA

• To gain hands on experience on Distributed Control Systems

Course Outcome:

• Write simple programs in Programmable Logic Controllers

• Design control system using Programmable Logic Controllers

• Use SCADA for real time applications

Description:

This laboratory introduces the basic concepts of PLC programming and Distributed Control systems using

simulation software.

Experiments:






Credits: 3:0:0

Course Objective:

• To introduce the concepts of system analysis using Z transforms.

• To equip with the basic knowledge of digital process control design.

• To study the stability analysis of digital control system

Course Outcome:

• Use Z transforms to analyse Discrete Systems.

• Design controllers for a digital process.

• Test the Stability of Discrete Systems.

Need for digital control, Configuration of the basic digital control scheme, Principles of signal conversion, Basic

discrete time signal, Z transform, Stability Analysis - Analysis Of Digital Control, Frequency Response, Stability

on the z-Plane and the Jury stability criterion, Sample and hold systems , Digital Controller - Z domain description

of sampled continuous time plants, Z domain description of systems with dead time, Implementation of digital

controllers, Digital Algorithms - Design of Digital Control Algorithms, Z plane specifications of control system

design, Digital compensator design using frequency response plots, State description of sampled continuous time

plants, Solution of state difference equations

References

1. Gopal M, “Digital Control and State variable Methods”, Tata McGrawHill, New Delhi, 2003.


3. Gene F. Franklin, J. David Powell, “Digital control of dynamic systems”, Pearson Education Limited,

New Delhi,2002.

4. Richard C. Dorf, Robert H. Bishop, “Modern control systems,” Pearson Education inc, New Delhi,

2008.

5. Isermann R ‘Digital Control Systems’, Vol. I & II, Narosa Publishing


Credits: 3: 0:0

Course Objective:

• To give knowledge of the principle of operation and design of Biomedical Instruments.

• To render a broad and modern account of biomedical instruments.

• To teach the application of biomedical instruments in real life applications

Course Outcome:

• Apply the concepts of Medical Instrumentation to physiological measurements

• Design Instrumentation circuits for Biomedical Applications.

• Use the knowledge of Biomedical Instruments to Practical Problems.

Cell and its Electrical activity, Physiological systems viz., cardiovascular system, Nervous system, Respiratory

system, Visual system, Muscular system, Electrodes and bioelectric signals: Bio electrodes, ECG, EMG, EEG and

EOG, Measurement of physiological parameters: Blood flow, Blood pressure, Cardiac output, and Bio-chemical

measurement: Blood pH, Blood pO2, Blood pCO2, Photometers. Therapeutic equipments and imaging techniques.

References

1. Khandpur. R. S., “Handbook of Biomedical Instrumentation”, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 2003.

2. Cromwell, “Biomedical Instrumentation and Measurements”, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 2007.

3. Arumugam.M. “Biomedical Instrumentation", Anuradha Agencies Publishers, Kumbakonam, 2006.


4. Joseph J. Carr and John M. Brown, “Introduction to Biomedical Equipment Technology”, Pearson


5. Webster, “Medical Instrumentation – Application & Design,” John Wiley and sons Inc, Netherlands, 2009.


Credits: 3:0:0

Course Objective:

• To learn the fundamental principles of electronics and to introduce the application of electronics in the

modern automobile.

• To develop ability to understand various latest Communication protocols used in automobile industries.

• To provide a thorough understanding of automotive systems and various electronic

accessories used in automobile.

Course Outcome:

• Analyze the use of instruments in automotive industry

• Design instruments for automotive applications.

• Use Communication protocols to perform advanced monitoring and control.

Automotive Electrical And Electronics - Basic Electronics components and their operation in an automobile,

Starting Systems, Charging Systems, Ignition Systems, Electronic Fuel Control, Advanced vehicle control systems,

Embedded System Communication Protocols - Vehicle Communication Protocols, Introduction to CAN, LIN,

FLEXRAY, MOST, KWP2000, Details of CAN, Embedded System In Control Of Automotive Systems - Engine

management systems, Vehicle Safety System, Electronic Control of braking and traction, Electronic transmission

control, Environmental tests for electronic control units.

References

1. RobertBoschGmbh ,“BOSCH– Automotive Handbook”, 7thEdition,John Wiley & Sons,

ISBN: 0470519363, 2008.



3. Knowles.D, “Automotive Electronic and Computer control Ignition Systems”, Prentice

Hall,1988.


5. Kiencke,, Nielsen, “Automotive Control Systems” 2nd Edition.2005


Credits: 3:0:0

Course Objective:

• To introduce the principle of analytic instruments

• To learn the concept of chromatography

• To know the applications of analytical instruments

Course Outcome:

• Analyze the different types of analytic instruments

• Develop instruments for clinical analysis.

• Apply the concepts of Analytical Instruments for Environmental Monitoring

Colorimetry And Spectrophotometry-Special methods of analysis, Beer–Lambert law, Colorimeters, UV, Vis

spectrophotometers, Single and double beam instruments, Sources and detectors, IR spectrophotometers,

Types,Attenuated total reflectance flame photometers, Atomic absorption spectrophotometers, Sources and

detectors, FTIR spectrophotometers, Flame emission photometers, Chromatography - Different techniques, Gas

chromatography, Detectors, Liquid chromatographs, Applications, High– pressure liquid chromatographs,


Applications, Industrial gas analyzers and pollution monitoring instruments, Ph meters and dissolved component

analyzers, Radio chemical and magnetic resonance techniques

References

1. Khandpur. R. S., ‘Handbook of Analytical Instruments’, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Co. Ltd., 2006.

2. Willard. H., Merritt, Dean. J. A., Settle. F. A., ‘Instrumental Methods of Analysis’, CBS publishing &

distribution, 1995.



5. Skoog. D. A. and West. D. M., ‘Principles of Instrumental Analysis’, Holt, Saunders Publishing, 1998.


INDUSTRIES

Credits: 3:0:0

Course Objective:

• To expose the students to the Instrumentation involved in petrochemical industries.

• To learn the control applied in the subsystems of a petrochemical plant.

• To introduce the instrumentation and control in Effluent And Water Treatment

Course Outcome:

• Appreciate the significance of Measurement in Petrochemical Industry.

• Use the Knowledge of Control to design new Control Algorithms.

• Design instruments and control algorithms for effluent and water treatment.

Piping and Instrumentation diagrams, Instrumentation and control in distillation columns, chemical reactors-

Temperature and pressure control in batch reactors – Instrumentation and control in dryers: Batch dryers and

Continuous dryers, heat exchangers -, evaporators - Types of evaporators, Measurement and control of absolute

pressure, Density, Conductivity, Differential pressure and Flow, Effluent and Water Treatment

References

1. Béla G. Lipták. ‘Instrumentation in the Processing Industries: Brewing, Food, Fossil Power, Glass, Iron and

Steel, Mining and Minerals, Nuclear Power, Paper, Petrochemical, Pharmaceutical’, Chilton Book Co.,

Reprint 2003

2. Considine D.M., ‘Process / Industrial Instruments and Control Handbook’, Fourthedition, McGraw Hill,

Singapore, 1999.

3. Curtis D .Johnson,”Process control instrumentation technology,”Prentice Hall , New Jersey, 2006.



Delhi, 2005.


Credits: 3:0:0

Course Objective:

• To describe the paper making process and need for measurement

• To expose the students to the Instrumentation applied in Paper industries.

• To learn the control operations in paper industries.

Course Outcome:

• Appreciate the need of instrumentation and control in Paper making.

• Select suitable sensors for a specific process

• Design a Controller for paper industries.


Description Of The Process -Raw materials, Pulping process, Chemical Recovery Process, Paper making process,

Converting, Instrumentation - Measurements of Basis Weight, Density, Specific gravity, Flow, Level of liquids and

solids, Pressure, Temperature, Consistency, Moisture, PH, Oxidation-Reduction potential, Graphic displays and

alarms, Control Operations - Blow tank controls, Digester liquor feed pump controls, Brown stock water level

control, Stock chest level control, Basis weight control, Dry temperature control, density and flow control, computer

applications.

References

1. B.G Liptak, ‘Instrumentation in Process Industries’, Chilton Book Company, 2003


3. Cooper W.D., “Electronic Instrumentation and Measurement Techniques”, Prentice Hall of India, New

Delhi, 2003.



Delhi, 2005.

14EI2022 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL IN IRON AND STEEL INDUSTRIES

Credits: 3:0:0

Course Objective:

• To learn the steel making process and the need for measurement.

• To know the role of instrumentation in a steel industry

• To teach the control operations carried out at various stages

Course Outcome:

• Analyze the use of sensors in steel making

• Suggest suitable sensor for a typical measurement

• Develop control algorithms for any control operation

Description of Process -Flow diagram and description of the processes, Raw materials preparation, Iron making,

Blast furnaces, Stoves, Raw steel making, Basic Oxygen Furnace, Electric Furnace, Casting of steel: Primary

rolling, Cold rolling and Finishing, Measurement of level, Pressure, Density, Temperature, Flow, Weight, Thickness

and shape, Graphic displays and alarms, Control Systems - Blast furnace, Stove combustion control system, Gas

and water controls in BOF furnace, Strand Casting mould Level control, Mould Level sensors, Ingot

weight measuring system, Waste water treatment, computer applications: Model calculation and logging, Rolling

Mill Control, Annealing Process Control, Center Utilities Dispatch Computer.

References


Power, Glass, Iron and Steel, Mining and Minerals, Nuclear Power, Paper, Petrochemical, Pharmaceutical’,

Chilton Book Co., Reprint 2003 Original from the University of California.

2. Liptak B. G, Instrument Engineers Handbook, volume 2, Process Control,Third edition, CRC press,

London, 1995.

3. Considine D.M, Process / Industrial Instruments and Control Handbook, Fourth edition,


4. Steel Designers Handbook 1)Branko 2)Ron Tinyou 3) ArunSyamGorenc Seventh

Edition First Indian Reprint 2006.

5. Singh S K, “Industrial Instrumentation and Control”, Tata McGraw– Hill, 2004.


14EI2023 OPTO-ELECTRONICS AND LASER BASED INSTRUMENTATION

Credits: 3:0:0

Course Objective:

To introduce the basic concepts of Optical Fibers and Lasers

To learn the measurements done using Optical fibers and Lasers

To know the use of lasers in biomedical applications

Course Outcome:

Analyze the use of optical fibers and lasers in instrumentation

Use Optical fibers for measurement

Apply LASER in Instrumentation and Biomedical applications.

Basics of Opto-electronics - Characteristics of optical radiation, Optical Sources and Detectors, Charge Coupled

devices, Opto –couplers and their applications, Optical Fibre - Principle, Types, Fibre coupling, Fibre optic sensors

, Lasers and Applications - Principle, Laser Rate Equation, Properties, Two, Three and Four level system,

Resonator configuration, Q switching and Mode locking, Cavity dumping, Types of Lasers, Industrial applications,

Holography, Medical applications

References

1. Arumugam. M. “Fiber Optics and Laser Instrumentation", Anuradha Agencies Publishers, Kumbakonam,

2006.

2. Optical Fiber Communications: Principles And Practice, John M. Senior, Pearson Education, 2006.

3. G. Keiser, ‘Optical Fibre Communication’, McGraw Hill, .

4. Ghatak A.K. and Thiagarajan K, Optical Electronics Foundation book , TMH, Cambridge University Press,

1989.

5. Wilson and Hawkes, “Opto Electronics – An Introduction”, 3rd Edition, Prentice Hall, New Delhi, 1998.


Credit 3:0:0

Course Objective:

• To provide an overview of different methods of power generation with a particular

stress on thermal power generation.

• To bring out the various measurements involved in power generation plants.

• To familiarize the students with the methods of monitoring different parameters like

speed, vibration of turbines and their control.

Course Outcome:

• Survey of methods of power generation

• Apply the concepts to design instrumentation systems for a power plant

• Develop control algorithms for a particular operation

Brief survey of methods of power generation, Hydro, Thermal, Nuclear, Solar and Wind power, Electrical

measurements, Non– electrical parameters Measurements, Analytical instruments in Thermal power plants -Flue gas

oxygen analyzer, Analysis of impurities in feed water and steam, Dissolved oxygen analyzer, Chromatography , PH

meter , Fuel analyzer, Pollution monitoring instruments, Boiler control system in thermal power plant, Turbine

Monitoring and Control

References

1. K. Krishnaswamy, M. Ponnibala, “Power Plant Instrumentation”, PHI Learning Pvt Ltd.,2011.

2. P.K Nag, Power plant Engineering, Tata McGraw Hill, 2001.

3. Sam G Dukelow, The Control of Boilers, 2nd Edition, ISA Press, New York, 1991


4. Gill A B, Power Plant Performance, Butterworth, London, 1984.

5. P C Martin and I W Hannah, Modern Power Station Practice, British Electricity International, Vols.I & VI,

Pergamon Press, London, 1992.

14EI2025 MODERN CONTROL TECHNIQUES


Credits: 3:0:0

Course Objective:

To enable the students to understand the advanced control systems like optimal control, Robust control,

Adaptive control fuzzy and Neural control.

To learn the methods to overcome the difficulties in implementing conventional control through advanced

control.

To analyze the modern control concepts

Course Outcome:

Design of conventional PID controller

Perform stability analysis and optimal control

Adaptive control and its implementation

Modifications of PID control schemes, Two degrees of freedom control, Optimal Control – Formulation, Necessary

conditions of optimality, state regulator problem, Output regulator tracking problems, Pontryagin's minimum

principle, infinite time optimal control , Problem, Advanced Control techniques - Lyapunov Stability Analysis And

Quadratic Optimal Control, Adaptive Control, Robust control

References

1. Katsuhiko Ogata, Morden Control Engineering,Third Edition, - Prentice Hall , India 2009.

2. Nagarath, I.J. and Gopal.M. Control Systems Engineering, Wiley & sons, 2008.

3. Astrom K.J. and Wittenmark.B, Adaptive Control, Addison Wesley Publishing, 1985.

4. Bernard friedlanced - Advanced Control System Design- Prentice Hall of India Pvt Ltd., New Delhi,1996.

5. Richard.C. Dorf and Robert.H.Bisho, Modern Control System, Addison Wesley & sons, 2008

14EI2026 STRENGTH OF MACHINE ELEMENTS

Credits: 3:0:0

Course Objective:

To introduce the basics of stress and strain on elements

To discuss the theory of failure

To learn the concept of torsion

Course Outcome:

Appreciate the need for stress and strain analysis

Determine the shear force and bending moment

Analyze the effect of torsion on elements

Stress at a point, stress and strains in bars subjected to axial loading, Various strengths of material, Temperature

stresses in simple & composite members. Strain energy due to axial load. Compound stress and strains, Mohr’s

circle of stress; ellipse of stress and their applications, stresses in machine elements, Shear force and Bending

moment – Definitions, Diagrams for cantilevers, simply supported beams with or without overhangs Uniform

distributed load, Combination of Concentrated load & UDL, Uniformity varying load, Torsion equation,


Applications to hollow and solid circular shafts, torsional rigidity, combined torsion and bending of circular shafts,

analysis of close-coiled-helical springs, theories of failure, Buckling of coloumns

References

1. R. S. Khurmi, Strength of Materials, S. Chand, 2008

2. S. S. Ratan, Strength of Materials, Tata McGrawhill, 2011

3. Gere and Temoshenko, “Mechanics of Material”, CBS Publishers

4. S. Ramamrutham “Strength of Materials”, Dhanpat Rai Publishing Company

5. Singer and Pytel “Strength of Materials”, Harper and Row Publications

14EI2032 FLEXIBLE MANUFACTURING SYSTEMS

Credits: 3:0:0

Course Objective:

To deal with Automation and Automated Assembly systems

To understand the concept of Group Technology

To learn the significance of Flexible Manufacturing systems

Course Outcome:

Classify the automation strategies being followed

Decide the automation


Automation and Automated Assembly systems-Types, automation strategies, Detroit-type automation: Automated

flow lines, methods of work part transport, Transfer mechanisms, design of automated assembly systems, Group

Technology-Part families, parts classification and coding, Machine cell design, Flexible Manufacturing Systems -

Components of an FMS, types of systems, FMS work stations, Material handling and storage system, Planning the

FMS, analysis methods for FMS, applications and benefits.

References

1. Automation, Production Systems and Computer Integrated Manufacturing- Groover M.P, Prentice Hall of

India, 2002

2. CAD/CAM – Groover M.P, Zimmers E.W, Prentice Hall of India, 2005

3. Approach to Computer Integrated Design and Manufacturing: Nanua Singh, John Wiley and Sons, 1998.

4. Production Management Systems: A CIM Perspective- Browne J, Harhen J, Shivnan J, Addison Wesley,

2nd Ed. 1996.

14EI2033 VIBRATION ANALYSIS

Credits: 3:0:0

Course Objective:

To deal with Automation and Automated Assembly systems

To understand the concept of Group Technology

To learn the significance of Flexible Manufacturing systems

Course Outcome:

Classify the automation strategies being followed

Decide the automation and group technology


Causes and effects of vibration- Vibrations of Single Degree, Two Degree and Multi Degree of freedom systems.,

Steady state and transient characteristics of vibration, Vibration measuring instruments-Vibration transducers, signal


conditioning elements. Display-and recording elements. Vibration meters and analyzers, Special vibration

measuring techniques - Change in sound method, Ultrasonic measurement method, Shock pulse measurement,

Kurtosis, Acoustic emission monitoring, Cepstrum analysis, Modal analysis, critical speed analysis, Shaft –orbit &

position analysis.

References

1. Collacott, R.A., Mechanical Fault Diagnosis and Condition Monitoring, Chapman

& Hall, London, 1982.

2. John S. Mitchell, Introduction to Machinery Analysis and Monitoring, Penn Well Books, Penn Well

Publishing Company, Tulsa, Oklahoma, 1993.

3. Nakra, B.C. Yadava, G.S. and Thuested, L., Vibration Measurement and Analysis, National Productivity

Council, New Delhi, 1989.

4. Pox and Jenkins, “Time Series Analysis: Forecasting and Control”, ISBN 978-0-470-27284-8, 2008.

14EI2035 HUMAN - ROBOT SYSTEMS AND INTERACTION

Credits: 3:0:0

Course Objective:

To study multimodal interactions between a human and a robot

To introduce the concepts of neurorehabilitation

To deal with surgical robotics

Course Outcome:

Model human robots for real applications

Perform motion analysis of human robots

Analyze the sensory feedback and use it to control robot movements

Course Content

Definition of human-robot interaction problem, human factors: perception, motor skills, social aspect of interaction,

safety, Haptic robots: kinematics, dynamics, collision detection, control.

Teleoperation systems: architectures, control, virtual fixtures, micro/nano manipulation; Soft robots based on

variable impedance actuators, Medical robotics: surgical robotics, robot-supported diagnostics, micro-robots in the

human body, nanorobots at the cell level, Rehabilitation and assistive robotics: motor rehabilitation, exoskeletons,

robotic prosthetics

References

1. M. Mihelj, J. Podobnik, Haptics for Virtual Reality and Teleoperation, Springer 2012.

2. J. Rosen, B. Hannaford, R.M. Satava, SurgicalRobotics: Systems Applications and Visions, Springer, 2011

3. M. Tavakoli, R.V. Patel, M. Moallem, A. Aziminejad, Haptics for Teleoperated Surgical Robotic Systems,

World Scientific, 2008

4. Jose L. Pons, Wearable Robots:Biomechatronic Exoskeletons, John Wiley& Sons, 2008.

5. V. Dietz, T. Nef, W.Z. Rymer,Neurorehabilitation Technology, Springer, 2012

6. E. Burdet, D.W. Franklin, T.E. Milner, Human Robotics: Neuromechanics and Motor Control, The MIT

Press, 2013

7. L. Sciavico, B. Siciliano: Modeling and Control of Robot Manipulators, The McGraw –Hill Companies,

Inc., New York, 2000.


Credits: 3:0:0

Course Objective:

To introduce the instrumentation methodologies for environment monitoring.

To deal with water quality monitoring and waste water treatment


To discuss the instrumentation required for air pollution monitoring.

Course Outcome:

Design instrumentation systems for environment monitoring.

Develop algorithms for waste water treatment

Measure and analyze air quality

Necessity of instrumentation & control for environment, Instrumentation methodologies, Quality of water:

Standards, effects, Water quality parameters: Thermal conductivity, detectors, Opacity monitors, pH analyzers &

their application, conductivity analyzers & their application, Water treatment: Requirement of water treatment

facilities, process design, Sedimentation & flotation: sludge, storage & removal, design criteria of settling tank,

effect of temperature on coagulation, Ground water monitoring: Level measurement in ground water monitoring

wells, instrumentation in ground water monitoring, assessment of soil & ground water pollution, Waste water

monitoring: Waste water measurement techniques. Instrumentation set up for waste water treatment plant. Air

pollution: Air monitoring, measurement of ambient air quality, Air flow measurement, Rain water harvesting:

necessity, methods, rate of NGOs municipal corporation, Govt., limitations. Quality assurance of storage water.

References 1. Water treatment technology - Walter J. Weber

2. Air pollution engineering – M. N. Rao & H. V. N. Rao

3. Air pollution control technology – Wark & Warner

4. Environmental Instrumentation & Analysis Handbook- Randy D. Down.


Credits: 3:0:0

Course Objective:

To introduce the soil measurement systems.

To deal with green house instrumentation

To discuss the working of automation equipments in agriculture

Course Outcome:

Design sensors for soil moisture measurement

Automate agricultural applications

Measure characteristics of leaves

Necessity of instrumentation & control for agriculture, engineering properties of soil: Sensors: introduction to sonic

anemometers, hygrometers, fine wire thermocouples, open & close path gas analysers, brief introduction to various

bio-sensors, soil moisture measurement methods: resistance based method, voltage based method, thermal based

method, details of gypsum block soil moisture sensor, green houses & instrumentation: ventilation, cooling &

heating, wind speed, temperature & humidity, rain gauge, carbon dioxide enrichment measurement & control.

Automation in earth moving equipments & farm equipments, implementation of hydraulic, pneumatic & electronics

control circuits in harvesters cotton pickers, tractor etc. Leaf area length evaportranspiration, temperature, wetness &

respiration measurement , electromagnetic radiations photosynthesis, infrared & UV bio sensor methods in

agriculture, agrometrological instrumentation weather stations, surface flux measurement, soil water content

measurement using time-domain reflectometery(TDR)

References

1. Industrial instrumentation, “Patranabis”, TMH.

2. Instrumentation handbook-process control, “B.G.Liptak”, Chilton 40

3. Process control and instrumentation technology, “C.D. Johnson”, PHI

4. Wills B.A., “ Mineral Processing Technology”, 4thEd.,Pergamon Press


14EI2039 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR AVIONICS

Credits: 3:0:0

Course Objective:

• To introduce the basics of Aircraft

• To learn the Instrumentation involved in Aircraft Systems

• To deal with gyroscopic instruments

Course Outcome:

• Appreciate the need for measurement in aircraft

• Design instrumentation systems for aircraft.

• Use gyroscopic instruments for attitude measurement

Flight Instrumentation – Pitot, Static Instruments and Systems, Altimeter, Airspeed indicator, Machmeter,

Maximum Safe Speed indicator, Accelerometer, Gyroscope, Gyroscopic theory, Directional gyro indicator,

Artificial horizon, Turn and slip indicator, Measurements in Aircraft - Measurement of Engine Speed, Measurement

of Temperature, Pressure, Fuel Quantity and Fuel Flow, Engine Power And Control Instruments, Power Indicators,

Pressure Indicators, Turbine Temperature Control, Engine Vibration Monitoring and Indicating Instruments.

References

1. Pallett, E.B.J,“ Aircraft Instruments – Principles and applications", Pitman and sons,

1981.


1992.

3. Nagabhushana S. Et.Al, S. Nagabhushana, L. K. Sudha, “ Aircraft Instrumentation and Systems”,

International Pvt Ltd,2010.




Credits: 3:0:0

Course Objective:

• To know the generation and detection of ultrasonic waves

• To provide knowledge on the concepts of Ultrasonic Instrumentation

• To understand the applications of ultrasonic instrumentation

Course Outcome:

• Characterize the ultrasonic waves

• Analyze the sensors used in ultrasonic application

• Apply the concepts to make simple applications

Ultrasonic Waves -Principles and propagation of various waves, Characterization of ultrasonic transmission,

Reflection and Transmission coefficients, Intensity and attenuation of sound beam.

Generation/Detection Of Ultrasonic Waves - Magnetostrictive and piezoelectric effects, Detection of Ultrasonic

Waves: Mechanical ,Optical and Electrical Method, Precise Measurement: Pulse– echo Overlap, Cross correlation,

Ultrasonic Applications - Ultrasonic methods of flaw detection, Flow meters, Density measurement, Viscosity

measurement, Level measurement, Sensor for Temperature and Pressure measurements, Measuring thickness,

Depth, Rail Inspection, SONAR, Inspection of Welds and defect detection in welds of anisotropic materials,

ultrasonic applications in medical field.

References

1. Baldev Raj, V.Rajendran, P.Palanichamy, “Science and Technology of Ultrasonics”,Alpha Science

International, UK, 2004.

2. J.David N.Cheeke,”Fundamentals and Applications of Ultrasonic Waves,” CRC Press, Florida, 2002.


3. LawrenceE.Kinsler, Austin R.Frey, Alan B.Coppens, James V. Sanders, “Fundamentals of Acoustics,”

John Wiley and Sons Inc,USA, 2000.

4. L.A. Bulavin, YU.F.Zabashta, “Ultrasonic Diagnostics in Medicine,” VSP, Koninklijke, Brill,Boston,

2007.

5. Emmanuel P. Papadakis, “Ultrasonic Instruments and Devices”Academic Press,1999.


Credits: 3:0:0

Course objective:

To make student have a clear knowledge of the instruments, relevant circuits and their working

To provide adequate knowledge in electrical instruments and measurements techniques.

Emphasis is laid on analog and digital techniques used to measure voltage, current, power etc

Course outcome:

Good understanding of comparison methods of measurements.

Exposure to various transducers, Signal Analyser and display devices.

Standards and Indicating Instruments-Errors in measurement- MC-MI-PMMC instruments-Measurement of

electrical quantities- R,L,C,power,energy- Transducers used for sensing the measuring quantities - measurement of

non-electrical quantities - temperature, pressure, speed - Signal Generators and analysers such as oscillators,

spectrum and network analysers – various types of display indicators and different types of signal recorders as data

acquisition systems

References

1. Sawhney.A.K., “A Course in Electrical & Electronic Measurement and Instrumentation”, DhanpatRai&

Company Private Limited, New Delhi, 18thEdition, 2007.

2. Helfrick A.D., “Modern Electronic Instrumentation & Measurements”, Prentice Hall India Private Limited,

New Delhi, 2007.

3. Doeblin,E.O., “Measurement Systems : Application and Design”, 5th Edition, Tata Mc-Graw Hill

Publishing Company Limited , New Delhi, 2004.

4. Golding,E.W., and Widdis,F.C., “Electrical Measurements and Measuring Instruments”, A H Wheeler &

Company, Calcutta, 5th Edition, 2003.

5. Rangan,C.S., Sharma, G.R., Mani, V.S., “Instrumentation Devices and Systems”, Tata McGraw Hill, New

Delhi, 1998.

6. John P Bentley, “Principles of measurement systems”, , Pearson Prentice Hall, 4/e, 2005.

7. Alan S. Morris, “Measurement and Instrumentation Principles”, Elsevier, 2001.

14EI2042 ADVANCED CONTROL THEORY


Credits: 3:0:0

Course Objective:

• Insight a wide knowledge on the description and stability of non-linear system.

• Understand the analysis of digital control system using state-space formulation.

• Look at the formulation and analysis of multi input multi output (MIMO) system.

Course Outcome:

• Gain knowledge in analysis of non-linear system and digital control of linear system.

• Implement the concept of MIMO system.

• Find non-linear system stability using the trajectory methods.


Pole placement design – Design of State observer - Response of sampled data system to step and ramp Inputs –

Stability studies – Jury’s test and bilinear transformation - State Space Analysis of Discrete Time Systems - Types

of nonlinearity Construction of phase trajectories, Describing function method, Lyapunov stability analysis - Models

of MIMO system, Introduction to multivariable Nyquist plot and Singular values analysis, Advanced control

techniques

References

1. Nagrath I.J., Gopal M., ‘Control Systems Engineering’, New Age International Publishers, 5th

Edition, New

Delhi 2003.

2. Raymond T. Stefani, Bahram Shahian, Clement J. Savant and Gene Hostetter , “Design of feedback

Control systems”, Oxford University Press, New York,4th

Edition, 2002.

3. Katsuhiko Ogata, “Discrete-Time Control Systems”, New Age International, New Delhi, 4th

Edition, 2007.

4. Gopal M, “Digital Control and State Variable Methods”, Tata McGraw- Hill, New Delhi, 3rd

Edition. 2008.

5. Richard C. Dorf and Robert H. Bishop, “Modern Control Systems”, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 8th

Edition, 2004.


Credits 3:0:0

Course Objective:

• Study about the Virtual instrumentation system and LabVIEW based Virtual Instrumentation.

• Study about the hardware and software involved programming techniques in VI.

• Study about the basic of Programming Techniques and its applications.

Course Outcome:

• Appreciate the advantages of Data flow programming

• Use VI for instrumentation and control

• Design a LabVIEW based instrumentation system.

Historical perspective, advantages, Block diagram and Architecture of a Virtual Instrument, Data Flow Techniques,

Graphical programming in data flow, comparison with Conventional programming - Introduction and Advantages of

LabVIEW, Software Environment, Creating and Saving VI- Front Panel Controls and Indicators – Block Diagram -

Data types – Date flow program – LabVIEW documentation resources – Keyboard shortcuts – Modular

Programming in LabVIEW – Icon and Connector Pane -SubVI: Creating- Opening-Editing-Placing an SubVI -

Creating a Stand Alone Application - Loops and charts, arrays, clusters and graphs, case and sequence structures,

formula nodes, local and global variables, string and file I/O.

References

1. Jovitha Jerome, “Virtual Instrumentation Using LabVIEW” Prentice Hall India Learning Private Limited,

New Delhi, 2010.

2. JohnEssick, “Hands-On Introduction to LabVIEW for Scientists and Engineers”, Oxford University

Press,New York, 2nd

Edition, 2010.

3. NesimiErtugrul, “LabVIEW for Electric Circuits, Machines, Drives, and Laboratories”, Pearson Education,

2nd

Edition, 2002.


5. Sanjay Gupta and Joseph John, “ Virtual Instrumentation using LabVIEW”, Tata McGraw – Hill Education

India Private Limited, New Delhi, 2nd

Edition, 2010.

6. Gary W. Johnson, Richard Jennings, “LabVIEW Graphical Programming”, McGraw-Hill Education, New

York, 3rd Edition, 2001.

14EI2044 PLC AND AUTOMATION

Credits: 3:0:0

Course Objectives:

• To learn the basics and programming of PLC.

• To examine the difference between SCADA and DCS.


• To understand the basic concepts of Intelligent Automation.

Course Outcome:

• Identify, formulate, and solve problems related to PLC.

• Design a system, component, or process to meet desired needs of the industrial requirement.

• Implement a complete SCADA project relating to an industrial process or operation

Description

Basics of PLC – Architecture of PLC – Advantages – Types of PLC – Introduction to PLC Networking – Protocols

– Field bus – Process bus and Ethernet. Types of Programming – Simple process control programs using Relay

Ladder Logic and Boolean logic methods – PLC arithmetic functions – Process automation - Difference between

SCADA system and DCS – Architecture – Local control Unit – Programming language – Operator interface –

Engineering interfaces. Introduction to SCADA – Comparison between SCADA and DCS - Necessity and Role in

Industrial Automation – Text display – Operator panels & Touch panels - Factory Automation - Computer

Integrated Manufacture – CNC – Intelligent automation – Wireless controls.

References

1. Webb, John W.Reis, Ronald A., “Programmable Logic Controllers Principles and Application”, PHI

Learning, New Delhi, 5th

Edition, 2002.

2. Dieter K. Hammer, Lonnie R. Welch, Dieter K. Hammer, “Engineering of Distributed Control Systems”,

Nova Science Publishers, USA, 2001.

3. Gary Dunning, “Introduction to Programmable Logic Controllers”, Thomson Business Information, New

Delhi, 2nd

Edition, 2009.

4. Bolton. W, “Programmable Logic Controllers”, Elsevier India Private Limited, 5th

Edition, New Delhi,

2010.

5. Mikell P. Groover, “Automation Produciton systems and Computer Integrated Manufacturing”, PHI

Learning Ltd., 3rd

Edition, New Delhi, 2009

14EI2045 ARTIFICIAL ORGANS AND REHABILITATION ENGINEERING

Credits: 3:0:0

Course Objective

• To know about various types of assist devices.

• To give a basic idea of the artificial organs that can aid a human to live a normal life.

• To provide the awareness of how a help can be rendered to a differently abled person

Course Outcome

• Have knowledge about various types of assist devices.

• Students will have the ability to choose which type of assist device is suitable for various disorders and

legal aspects related to rehabilitation.

• Students will have the urge to develop new devices based on the basic knowledge gained in different

assisting devices.

Description

Biomaterials used in artificial organs andprostheses, Outlook for Organ replacement – Design considerations –

Evaluation Process - Brief of kidney filtration, Haemodialysis: flat plate type, coil typeand hollow fiber.

Haemodialysis Machine, Portable kidney machine - Brief of lungs gaseous exchange / transport,artificial heart-lung

devices. Oxygenators: bubble, film oxygenators and membrane oxygenators. Gas flow rate and area for membrane

oxygenators - Anatomy & Physiology of EAR-air conduction, bone conduction, masking, functional diagram of an

audiometer. Hearing aids: different types, receiver amplifiers - Ultra sonic and laser canes, Intra ocular lens, Braille

Reader, Tactile devices for visually challenged, Text voice converter.

Reference Books

1. Joseph D. Bronzing, “The Biomedical Engineering Handbook”, CRC Press, Connecticut, 2nd

Edition, 2000.

2. Leslie Cromwell, “Biomedical Instrumentation and measurement”, Prentice hall of India, New Delhi, 2007

3. Khandpur R.S, “Handbook of Biomedical Instrumentation”, Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, 2007.

4. Laurence J. Street, “Introduction to Biomedical Engineering Technology”, CRC Press 2007.


5. Myer Kutz, “Standard Handbook of Biomedical Engineering & Design”, McGraw-Hill Professional. 1st

Edition, 2002

6. D. Jennings, A. Flint, B.C.H. firton and L.D.M. Nokes, “Introduction to Medical Electronics Applications”

Butterworth-Heinemann; 1995.


Credits: 3:0:0

Course Objective:

To provide sound knowledge in the basic concepts of control theory

To provide knowledge about the importance of control systems

To provide knowledge on the basic concepts of instrumentation

Course Outcome:

Analyze the transient and frequency response of systems

Test the stability of a given system

Apply controller principles to typical applications

Introduction to process control: Importance of Process control systems, steady state design, process control block

diagram, types of responses, transforms of functions, Control systems, Open and closed loop systems, hydraulic and

pneumatic systems, Control valves, Stability analysis, Stability criterion, Characteristic equation, Routh test for

stability, signal flow graph, Masons’s Gain formula, block diagram, Industrial instrumentation, Measurement

methods for sensing the pressure, temperature, level, density, composition.

References

1. J.F Richardson A D. G. Peacock, Coulson & Richardson’s “Chemical Engineering” Volume3, (Chemical

and Biochemical reactors and process control) Butherworth – Heinemann, an imprint of Elsevier, 2006.

2. Donald R. Coughanowr., “Process System analysis and control” McGraw Hill

International Edition , Second Edition, Singapore, 2008

3. Nagoorkani. A “Control Systems”, RBA publications, 2nd edition, Nineteenth reprint 2012

4. S. Baskar, “Instrumentation control system measurements and controls”, Anuradha Agencies Publishers,

2004.

5. Nagrath. M and Gopal. I.J, “Control Systems Engineering”, Wiley Eastern Limited, Third Edition Reprint

2003.


Co-Requisite: 14EI2046 Process Control for Food Engineers

Credits: 0:0:2

Course Objective:

To learn the characteristics of instruments.

To introduce the concepts of control systems.

To gain knowledge on stability analysis of a system

Course Outcome:

Determine the characteristics of instruments.

Design controllers for a given system.

Perform stability analysis of a system.


Description:

This laboratory enables the student to analyze the performance of various measuring instruments and use them to

control a system.

Experiments:




Credits: 3:0:0

Course Objective:

• To provide sound knowledge in the basic concepts of instrumentation

• To introduce the basics of control systems

• To discuss about stability analysis of systems

Course Outcome:

• Analyze the transient and frequency response of systems.

• Test the stability of a given system.

• Apply controller principles to typical applications.

General concepts of Mechanical Instrumentation, generalized measurement system - Classification of instruments as

indicators,Recorders and integrators Measurement error and calibration, Pressure And Temperature Measurement,

Strain And Flow Measurement, Control Systems: Open and closed systems, Servo– mechanisms, Transfer

functions,Signal flow graphs, Block diagram algebra, hydraulic and pneumatic control systems, Two way control ,

Proportional control - Differential and Integral control, Stability analysis, Concept of Stability, Necessary condition

for Stability, Routh stability criterion, Polar and Bode plots, Nyquist plots

References

1. Jain R.K., “Mechanical and Industrial Measurements” Khanna Publishers, 2002. 2. Nagoorkani.A “Control Systems”, RBA publications, first edition ninth reprint 2002. 3. Sawhny, A.K. “Electrical and Electronics Measurements & Instrumentation”, DhanpatRai& Co., 2000. 4. Collet. C. V. and Hope. A.D. ‘Engineering Measurements’ 2nd Edition ELBS.


6. Baskar S,’Instrumentation control system measurements and controls ‘anuradha agencies publishers,2004.


Credits: 3:0:0

Course Objective:

• To introduce the fundamental concepts of Instrumentation System


• To learn about computer based instrumentation

Course Outcome:

• Select suitable transducer for a specific instrumentation system

• Analyze the characteristics of transducers

• Apply computer based instrumentation for real time applications

Instrumentation system – The general instrumentation system, Static and Dynamic Characteristics, Resistance and

Inductance transducers, Capacitance and Piezoelectric transducers, Digital methods of measurements – Digital

voltmeters and multimeters , Digital

frequency, period and time measurements, Digital tachometers, Digital phase meters, Digital data recording, Digital

Transducers, Computer based instrumentation – Evolution of Virtual Instrumentation, Architecture of Virtual


Instrumentation, Virtual Instruments Versus Traditional Instruments, Advantages of VI, Interface Buses: PCI, PXI,

and VXI.

References

1. Jackson R G, “Novel Sensors and Sensing”, Institute of Physics Publishing, Bristol and Philadelphia, 2004.

2. Doeblin E.O, “Measurement Systems– Applications and Design”, McGraw Hill, New York, 2003.

3. Kalsi H S, “Electronic Instrumentation”, Second Edition, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2009

4. John Park ,Steve Mackay,” Practical Data Acquisition for Instrumentation and Control Systems” Elsevier,

2003.

5. Mathivanan “PC based instrumentation: concepts and practice” PHI, 2008



8. S. Sumathi and P. Surekha , “LabVIEW based Advanced Instrumentation Systems” Springer, 2007.



Credits: 3:0:0

Course Objective:

• To equip the students with the basic knowledge of Process Modelling.

• To understand various controllers and control algorithms.

• To introduce the concept of Multivariable systems and decoupling.

Course Outcome:

• Develop mathematical model of a physical process.

• Design various controllers.

• Understand the knowledge of MIMO process and decoupling.

Process control system – Terms and objectives, Piping and Instrumentation diagram, Instrument terms and symbols,

Classification of variables, Modelling of simple systems

Basic control action – Continuous controller modes- Selection of control mode for different process with control

scheme, Control valve types and characteristics, Controller tuning – Optimum controller settings, Tuning of

controllers, Advanced Control schemes, MIMO systems–Introduction, loop interaction , relative gains., Advanced

control strategies – Internal model control, Adaptive control, Dynamic matrix control, Generalized predictive

control

References


2. Coughanowr D.R., “Process Systems Analysis and Control”, McGraw – Hill Higher Education, Singapore,

2008.

3. Wayne BequetteB,’ Process control: modeling, design, and simulation’ Prentice Hall , New Jersey – 2003.

4. Smith C.L and Corripio.A..B, “Principles and Practice of Automatic Process Control”, John Wiley and

Sons, New York, 2006.

5. Dale E. Seborg, Thomas F. Edgar, Duncan A. Mellichamp, “Process Dynamics and Control” ,Willey India,

2006.

6. Marlin. T.E., Process Control, Second Edition McGraw Hill New York, 2000



LABORATORY

Co-Requisite: 14EI3003 – Advanced Process Control

Credits: 0:0:2

Course Objective:

• To demonstrate the various process Measurements.

• To inculcate the various controller design.

• To give an exposure about Programmable Logic Controller.

Course Outcome:

• Measure various process measurements using the appropriate instruments.

• Design control algorithms for different control loops.

• Write ladder logic in Programmable Logic Controller for Control purpose.

Experiments:




Credits: 3:0:0

Course Objective:

• To understand the basics of mathematical modeling.

• To study the stability analysis of linear and non linear systems.

• To study the concepts of robustness

Course Outcome:

• Apply the modelling concepts to systems

• Analyse stability of a system

• Perform robust control of systems

Modelling of dynamic systems-Definition, Mathematical modelling, State space representation, Centrifugal

Governor, Ground vehicle, Permanent Magnet stepper motor, Inverted Pendulum, Analysis of mathematical models

– State space method, Phase plane, Isoclines, Numerical methods, State space analysis – Reachability and

controllability , Observability and constructability, Companion forms, Controller / Observer form, State feedback

control, State estimators, Stability of nonlinear system – Lyapunov stability theorems, Krasovskii’s method,

Variable gradient method, Phase plane analysis, Singular points, Limit cycle, Describing function analysis.

Robust PID control – Introduction to robust control- PID Tuning– Modifications of PID control scheme – Two

Degrees of Freedom Control – Design consideration of Robust Control

References





5. Singaresu S. Rao, “Applied Numerical Methods” Prentice Hall, Upper Saddle River, New Jersey, 2001.

6. Jean – Jacques E. Slotine, Weiping Li, “Applied nonlinear control”, Prentice Hall Inc., New Jersey, 2004.



Credits: 3:0:0

Course Objective:

• To learn the concepts of discrete time Control systems.

• To introduce polynomial equations approach to control system design.

• To deal with the different types of digital control algorithm.

Course Outcome:

• Appreciate the need for discrete time control systems

• Design control system using polynomial equations approach.

• Develop different types of digital control algorithm for a system.

Z transform – Review of Z Transform –Stability Analysis in Z domain

State space analysis – State Space representation of discrete time Signals – Solving discrete time State Space

Equations

Pole placement and observer design – Controllability – Observability –Design via Pole Placement – State Observer

Polynomial approach – Polynomial Equations Approach to Control System Design

Digital algorithms – Implementation of different digital control algorithms

References

1. Ogata, “Discrete – Time Control Systems”, Pearson Education, Sigapore,2002.

2. Ky M. Vu, Optimal Discrete Control Theory The Rational Function Structure Model, Library and archives

Canada cataloguing in publication, Canada,2007.

3. Gene F. Franklin,J. David Powell, “Digital control of dynamic systems”, Pearson Education Limited –

2002.

4. Gopal M, Digital Control and State variable Methods, Second Edition, Tata McGrawHill, New Delhi,

2003.


Credits: 3:0:0

Course Objective:


To introduce fuzzy logic concept and its applications in Control.

To introduce genetic algorithm

Course Outcome:

Design Neural Network based application

Use Soft Computing to solve real world problems mainly pertaining to Control system applications.

Suggest an appropriate control approach for different applications.

Neural Networks: Introduction – Biological Neurons and their artificial Models, Learning Rules, Types Of Neural

Networks , Schemes Of Neuro Control, System Identification , Case studies, Fuzzy Logic: Fuzzy Sets, Fuzzy

Operation, Fuzzy Arithmetic, Fuzzy Relations, Fuzzy Relational Equations, Approximate Reasoning, Fuzzy

Propositions, Fuzzy Quantifiers

Structure of Fuzzy Logic Controller, Fuzzy Control Applications

Genetic Algorithm and its applications: Fundamentals, Comparison Of GA And Traditional Search Methods,

Genetic Algorithm In Scientific Models And Theoretical Foundations, Case Studies

References

1. Jacek M Zurada, ‘Introduction to Artificial Neural Systems’, Jaico Publishing House,

1999.


2. Rajasekaran.S and G.A Vijayalakshmi Pai, ‘Neural Networks, Fuzzy logic and Genetic Algorithms,


3. Klir G.J. &Folger T.A. ‘Fuzzy sets, uncertainty and Information’, Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd.,1993.

4. Zimmerman H.J. ‘Fuzzy set theory –and its Applications’ – Kluwer Academic

Publishers,1994.

5. Melanie Mitchell, ‘An introduction to Genetic Algorithm’, Prentice – Hall of India, New Delhi, Edition:

2004.



Credits: 3:0:0

Course Objective:

• To introduce the theory of optimal control and its applications.

• To provide knowledge of dynamic optimization

• To deal with design optimal control system

Course Outcome:

• Apply optimal control concepts to systems.

• Use dynamic optimization techniques to controllers.

• Design optimal control algorithms for real time systems.

Introduction , Problem formulation , Optimal control problem, Performance measures for optimal control problem,

Selection, Dynamic programming – Optimal control law, Principle of optimality, A recurrence relation of dynamic

programming, Hamilton – Jacobi – Bellman equation, Calculus of variations – Functions and Functional , Maxima

and minima of function, Variation of functional , Extremal of functional, Euler Lagrange equation

Variational approach to optimal control problems, Necessary conditions for optimal control, Linear regulator

problems, Linear tracking problems, Pontryagin’s minimum principle and state inequality constraints, Minimum

time problems – Singular intervals in optimal control problems, Various optimization algorithms

References

1. Donald E. Kirk, Optimal Control Theory: An Introduction, Prentice – Hall networks series, New Jersey,

2004.

2. Singiresu S. Rao “Engineering Optimization: Theory and Practice” New Age International (P) Ltd.,

Publishers New Delhi – 2004.

3. Gopal M, “Digital Control and State Variable Methods”, Tata McGraw – Hill Companies New Delhi, 2009.

4. Dimitri P. Bertsekas.’Dynamic Programming and Optimal Control’ Vol –1 Athena Scientific, Bell mount

MA, 2000.


Credits: 3:0: 0

Course Objective:

• To provide the basic concepts of various industrial process measurements

• To give an exposure about smart instruments.

• To design and calibrate measuring Instruments

Course Outcome:

• Design and calibrate the measuring instruments

• Analyze the characteristics of instruments

• Suggest suitable instruments for a particular application

Design and Calibration of various types of measuring instruments for Pressure Measurement, Flow Measurement,

Temperature Measurement and Level Measurement.


References

1. Doeblin E.O.I, Measurement Systems: Application and Design, Fifth Edition, McGraw –Hill Publishing

Co. 5th edition, 2003.

2. Liptak B. ‘Process Measurement and Analysis’, 4th

Edition,ISA, CRC Press, 2003.

3. Tatamangalam R., ‘Industrial Instrumentation Principles and Design’, Springer Verlag, 2000.

4. Singh. S.K, ‘Industrial Instrumentation and Control’, Tata McGraw Hill, Reprint 2004.


Credits: 3:0:0

Course Objective:

To impart the knowledge of controllers and compensators.

To make the students to study the basic concepts of discrete domain representation of the system.

To guide the students to design filters, optimal discrete controllers.

Course Outcome:

Design controllers for process applications

Represent systems in discrete domain

Design filters for real time applications

Conventional Design Methods: Design specifications, PID controllers and compensators, Root locus based design,

Bode based design, Design examples, Design In Discrete Domain: Sample and Hold, Digital equivalents, Impulse

and step invariant transformations , Methods of discretisation, Effect of sampling, Direct discrete design, Discrete

root locus, Design examples, Optimal Control :Formation of optimal control problems, Calculus of variations,

Hamiltonian formulation, Discrete State Variable Design: Discrete pole placement, State and output feedback,

Estimated state feedback, Discrete optimal control , Dynamic programming - Design examples, State Estimation

:State Estimation Problem, Luenberger’s observer - Noise characteristics, Kalman - Bucy filter, Separation

Theorem, Controller Design, Wiener filter, Design examples.

References



3. G. F. Franklin, J. D. Powell and A. E. Naeini “Feedback Control of Dynamic Systems”, PHI (Pearson),

2002.

4. Graham C. Goodwin, Stefan F. Graebe and Mario E. Salgado “Control system Design”, PHI (Pearson),

2003.

5. G. F. Franklin, J. D. Powell and M Workman, “Digital Control of Dynamic Systems”, PHI (Pearson), 2002.

6. B.D.O. Anderson and J.B. Moore., ‘Optimal Filtering’, Prentice hall Inc., N.J., Second version published in

2005.

7. Loan D. Landau, Gianluca Zito,” Digital Control Systems, Design, Identification and Implementation”,

Springer, 2006.


Credits: 0:0:2

Course Objective:

• To strengthen the knowledge of Virtual Instrumentation.

• To understand the concept of signal processing using virtual instruments

• To introduce the concept of Data Acquisition using virtual instrumentation

Course Outcome:

• Analyze real world signals

• Interface real process with a virtual instrument.

• Perform signal processing operations using virtual instrumentation.


Experiments:



14EI3012 EMBEDDED CONTROL SYSTEMS LABORATORY

Credits:0:0:2

Course Objective:

To learn about the Embedded Processors with Real World applications.

To introduce the concept of control applications in embedded systems.

To enhance the knowledge in interfacing processes with embedded controllers.

Course Outcome:

Write programs in an IDE and download it to the Processor.

Design and program Embedded circuits.

Design control algorithms in an embedded processor.

14EI3014 INDUSTRIAL AUTOMATION

Credits: 3:0:0

Course Objective:



To deal with PLC for control applications

Course Outcome:

Apply PLC programming for control purpose

Apply ladder logic methodology in automation field

Apply PLC in real time continuous process

Nature of Industrial Process: continuous & discrete state ,sequential process, process variables and their

classification. Introduction to Process Control Philosophies: type of relays, ladder logic methodology, Introduction

to Programmable Logic Controllers: PLC programming methodologies: ladder diagram, STL, functional block

diagram, creating ladder diagram from process control descriptions, introduction to IEC61131 international standard

for PLC.

PLC functions- PLC Timer & Counter functions - on-delay timer, off-delay

Timers- PLC Data Handling: - PLC arithmetic and logical functions- Analog value processing: types of analog

modules, analog input and output examples, PID control of continuous process.

References

1. John webb, “Programmable logic controllers-Principles & applications”, Prentice Hall of India,2003.

2. T. A. Hughes, ”Programmable controllers, ISA, 2005.

3. 1.C. D. Johnson, “Process control instrumentation Technology, 3rd



Credits: 3:0:0

Course Objective:

• To impart the concepts of system identification

• To introduce the concept of adaptive control


• To understand the concept of signal modelling

Course Outcome:

• Identify the given process

• Validate the identified model

• Design adaptive control for practical applications.

Signal modelling – Models of LTI systems- - Models for Time - varying and Non - linear systems, Models with

Nonlinearities, Nonlinear state - space models, Black box models, Fuzzy models, Identification – Non - Parametric

and Parametric identification, Transient response and Correlation Analysis, Frequency response analysis, Spectral

Analysis, Least Square, Recursive Least Square, Validation – Non - Linear Identification and Model Validation,

State estimation techniques, Non linear identification using Neural Network and Fuzzy Logic, Adaptive control –

Self Tuning Regulators (STR), Model Reference Adaptive Control (MRAC) , Gain Scheduling, Applications –

Inverted Pendulum, Robot arm, Process control application: heat exchanger, Distillation column - Application to

power system, Ship steering control.

References


2. Astrom and Wittenmark,” Adaptive Control Second Edition”, Addison - Wesley Publishing Company

1995.

3. Monson H.Hayes,’ Statistical Digital Signal Processing and Modelling”, John Wiley and Sons,2002


5. Torsten Soderstrom, Petre Stoica, “System Identification”, prentice Hall ` International (UK) Ltd,1994.

6. William S. Levine, “ Control Hand Book” CRC Press, Jaico Publishing House, 1999.



Credits: 3:0:0

Course Objective:

• To introduce the need for Data Acquisition.

• To understand the concept of Supervisory Control.

• To deal with the applications of SCADA Systems.

Course Outcome:

• Appreciate the need of Data Acquisition.

• Apply the concept of Supervisory Control

• Perform simulation for various process.

Introduction to SCADA and PLC:SCADA: Data acquisition system, PLC: Block diagram, programming languages,

SCADA system components: Schemes, Remote Terminal Unit, Intelligent Electronic Devices, Communication

Network, SCADA server, SCADA Architecture: Various SCADA Architectures, advantages and disadvantages,

SCADA Communication and Operation and control of interconnected power system:SCADA applications

References

1. Stuart A Boyer, “SCADA supervisory control and data acquisition”,ISA- The Instrumentation, Systems and

Automation Society,2010.

2. Gordan Clark, Deem Reynders, “Practical Modem SCADA Protocols”, Elsevier Publications,2004.

3. Sunil S. Rao, “Switchgear and Protections”, Khanna Publication,1992.

4. John Park, Steve Mackay, “Practical Data Acquisition for Instrumentation and Control Systems”,.Elsevier

Publications,2003.



Credits: 3:0:0

Course Objective:

• To inculcate the knowledge of Multivariable control systems.

• To design controller for multivariable control systems.


Course Outcome:

• Apply the concept of Multivariable control systems.



Analysis: system representations, return difference matrix, stability theory, multivariable poles and zeros. Design:

design criteria, LQG design methods (including the optimal linear quadratic regulator and the Kalman filter), norm-

based methods, robust stability and performance. H-infinity design techniques, including the generalised regulator

problem. Model reduction, including modal and balanced truncation.

Design examples: use of software for the design of controllers for industrial processes.

References 1. Stanislaw Zak, ‘Systems and Control’, Oxford University Press, 2003.


3. Charles R. Slivinsky, Donald G. Schultz, Lynn E. Weaver, “The design of linear multivariable control

systems using modern control theory”, 1969.

4. Ying-Jyi Paul Wei, “Frequency-domain approaches to linear multivariable control system designs, 1979.


14EI3018 PIPING AND INSTRUMENTATION

Credits: 3:0:0

Course Objective:

• To inculcate the knowledge of Piping and Instrumentation diagram.

• To learn the design of controller for multivariable control systems.


Course Outcome:

• Apply the concepts of Multivariable control systems to real applications



Types of flow sheets, Flow sheet Presentation, Flow Sheet Symbols, Process flow diagram- Synthesis of steady state

flow sheet - Flow sheeting software.

P & I D objectives, guide rules, Symbols, Line numbering, Line schedule, P & I D development, typical stages of P

& I D.

P & I D for rotating equipment and static pressure vessels, Process vessels, absorber, Control System for Heater,

Heat exchangers, reactors, dryers, Distillation column,

Applications of P & I D in design stage - Construction stage - Commissioning stage - Operating stage - Revamping

stage - Applications of P & I D in Risk

References

1. Ernest E. Ludwig, “Applied Process Design for Chemical and Petrochemical Plants”, Vol.-I Gulf

Publishing Company, Houston, 1989.

2. Max. S. Peters and K.D.Timmerhaus, “Plant Design and Economics for Chemical Engineers”, McGraw

Hill, Inc., New York, 1991.

http://www.google.co.in/search?tbo=p&tbm=bks&q=inauthor:%22Charles+R.+Slivinsky%22

http://www.google.co.in/search?tbo=p&tbm=bks&q=inauthor:%22Donald+G.+Schultz%22

http://www.google.co.in/search?tbo=p&tbm=bks&q=inauthor:%22Lynn+E.+Weaver%22

http://www.google.co.in/search?tbo=p&tbm=bks&q=inauthor:%22Ying-Jyi+Paul+Wei%22


3. 3.Bela G. Liptak, “ Process Measurement and Analysis”, ISA, CRC press,2003.

4. Anil Kumar,”Chemical Process Synthesis and Engineering Design”, Tata McGraw Hill publishing

Company Limited, New Delhi - 1981.

5. A.N. Westerberg, et al., “Process Flowsheeting”, Cambridge University Press, 1979.


Credits: 3:0:0

Course Objective:

• To introduce the fundamental concepts of Instrumentation System


• To deal with the concepts of embedded instrumentation systems

Course Outcome:

• Select suitable transducer for a specific instrumentation system

• Analyze the characteristics of transducers

• Computer based instrumentation for real time applications

Instrumentation system - resistance and inductance transducer-capacitance and piezoelectric transducers, digital

methods of measurements: computer based instrumentation, evolution of virtual instrumentation, architecture of

embedded virtual instrumentation, embedded virtual instruments versus traditional instruments , advantages of vi –

pc based data acquisition system, interfacing techniques to the IBM PC – plug– in data acquisition boards –

interface buses: PCI, PXI, VXI

References 1. S. Sumathi, P.Surekha, “LabVIEW based Advanced Instrumentation Systems “ springer 2007

2. N.Mathivanan, “ PC_Based Instrumentation- Concepts and Practice, PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd, 2007

3. Walt Boyes, “ Instrumentation Reference Books”, Third Edition, Butterworth Heinemann, 2003.

14EI3020 NETWORKS AND PROTOCOLS FOR INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL

Credits: 3:0:0

Course Objective:

To understand the System Interconnection and protocols.

To introduce the concept of communication protocols and give an overview of Data Communication

Standards.

To discuss the types of cables used for transmission.

To discuss the operation and applications of the Protocols used in Industries .

Course Outcome:

At the end of the course, Students will be able to

Identify the protocol.

Choose the require protocol and the communication modes for the given system.

Select a suitable cable for the transmission .

open systems interconnection ( osi ) model – protocols – physical standard – smart instrumentation systems –

bits, bytes and characters – communication principles – communication modes – asynchronous systems –

synchronous systems -data communication standards: standards organizations – serial data communications

interface standards – balanced and unbalanced transmission lines – RS232 interface standard – troubleshooting

serial data communication circuits – test equipment – ethernet – ethernet protocol operation – ethernet hardware

requirements -cabling, electrical noise and error detection- modem and multiplexer- industrial protocol: profibus


References 1. Steve Mackay, John Park and Edwin Wright, “Practical Data Communication for Instrumentation and

Control”, Newnes Elsevier, USA, 2002.

2. TanenbaumA.S, “Computer Networks”, Fourth Edition, Prentice – Hall of India, Hyderabad, 2002.

3. William A Shay, “Understanding Data Communications and networks”, Pacific Grove, USA, 2003.


Credits: 3:0:0

Course Objective:

To strengthen the knowledge of embedded design challenges

To understand the concept of controller using embedded

To deal with the concept of robot system

Course Outcome:

Design control application using embedded system

Meet the Demand for Embedded Controls Engineers

Design robust controllers

Characteristics of embedded computing applications – Designing an Adaptive Cruise Control System, Embedded

systems , basic concept, Introduction to embedded control system design, System identification and model-order

reduction, Classical controller design, Classical controller design, Fundamentals of robust control, Robust controller

design, Embedded safety loop development

References

1. Forrai, Alexandru Embedded Control System Design- “A Model Based Approach”, Springer publication,

2013.

2. Adamski, Marian Andrzej, Karatkevich, Andrei, Wegrzyn, Marek (Eds.), “Design of Embedded Control

Systems”, Springer Publication, 2005.

14EI3023 ADVANCED PROCESSORS FOR CONTROL AND AUTOMATION

Credit: 3:0:0

Course Objective:

To learn recent trends in advanced microcontroller applications.

To learn microcontroller implementation for control applications

To understand programming with 8 and 32 bit microcontrollers.

Course Outcome:

Program microcontrollers for embedded applications.

Illustrate architecture differences and to show common characteristics.

Design the microcontroller for real time projects.

8 bit processor: 8051 architecture, Programming examples with stepper motor, dc motor, interfacing timer with

control applications, CPU Architecture of PIC microcontroller –temperature, flow process interfacing , A/D

converter, UART , 16 bit processor/32 bit processor: Introduction to 16/32 bit processor, ARM architecture, The

ARM instruction set, The thumb instruction set , programming examples with control applications

References

1. Raj Kamal – “Microcontrollers – Architecture, Programming, Interfacing and System Design”, Pearson

Education, USA, 2005.

2. SteaveFurber,” ARM system–on–chip architecture” Addison Wesley, New Delhi, 2000.

3. John.B.Peatman, “Design with PIC Micro Controller”, Pearson Education, USA, 2003.


4. Mohammad Ali Mazide, Janice GillispicMazidi, RolinD.Mckinlay, “ The 8051 micro controller and

embedded systems using assembly and C”, prentice Hall of India, Hyderabad, 2006.

5. Kenneth Ayala ,”The 8051 Microcontroller”, Thomson Delmar Learning , New Jersey, 2004.


Credits: 0:0:2

Course Objective:

• To strengthen the knowledge of Virtual Instrumentation..

• To understand the concept of signal processing

• To introduce the concept of Data Acquisition.

Course Outcome:

• Build simple virtual instruments

• Interface the embedded systems to real time signals

• Design embedded applications.

Experiments:




Credits: 3:0:0

Course Objective:

To understand the current trends in automobiles

To understand basic sensor arrangement and its types

To understand the embedded processor

Course Outcome:

Implement automotive embedded systems in real time applications

Implement controllers design using recent advances like GLS, GPSS, GMS

Design various sensors for real time applications.

Current trends in Automobiles- components for electronic engine management system. Electronic dashboard

instruments, onboard diagnostic system , security and warming system- Vehicle motion control. Sensors and

actuators, and their interfacing. Basic sensor arrangement, types of sensors- Electronic ignition systems. Types of

solid state ignition systems and their principleof operation. Digital engine control system.

Distributor less ignition – Integrated engine control system, Exhaust emission control engineering. Automotive

Embedded systems. PIC, Freescale microcontroller based system. Recent advances like GLS, GPSS, GMS

References

1. William B. Riddens, “Understanding Automotive Electronics”, 5th

Edition, Butterworth Hennimann

Woburn, Sixth Edition, 2003

2. Tom Weather Jr. & Cland c. Ilunter, “ Automotive computers and control system” Prentice Hall Inc., New

Jersey.,2001

3. Robert Bosch,” Automotive Hand Book”, SAE , (5th

Edition),2000


14EI3030 AUTOMOTIVE SENSORS AND INTELLIGENT SYSTEMS

Credit: 3:0:0

Course Objective:

To introduce sensors in modern electronic system

To introduce the concept of intelligent transport systems

To discuss various sensors and interfacing concept

Course Outcome:

Interface various sensors in automotive electronic systems

Design, simulate and implement sensor interface

Select sensors of different characteristics.

Introduction to automotive sensors and instrumentation – sensor product selection guide- sensors and interfacing –

principles of actuation and control- sensors and interfacing techniques for Engine control, adaptive cruise control,

braking control, traction control, steering, stability, sensors for intelligent transport systems, sensors for occupant

safety.

References

1. Ronald K. Jurgeaon, “ Automotive ElectronicsHandbook, 2nd

Edition, Mc Graw-Hill,2007

2. William B. Ribbens, “Understanding Automotive Electronics”, 5th

Edition, Newnes, 2006

3. E.Q.Doeblin, “Measurement Systems, Application and Design”, 4th

Edition, McGraw-Hill, 2002.

14EI3031 AUTOMOTIVE PROTOCOLS AND TELEMATICS

Credit: 3:0:0

Course Objective:

To prepare the students to analyse, simulate automotive communication protocols

To introduce theoretical concepts of telematics technologies relevant to automotive applications

To introduce automotive communication protocols and diagnostics protocols.

Course Outcome:

Gain in depth knowledge on data communication and networking and applied in real time applications.

Implement automotive communication protocols and telematics technologies.

Simulate and implement telematics in wireless technologies.

Basics of Data Communication Networks and Automotive Communication Protocols - Controller Area Network

(CAN) Protocol-CAN Higher Layer Protocols-Local Interconnect Network (LIN) Protocol-

FlexRay Protocol-Media Oriented System Transport (MOST) Protocol - In Vehicle Network Diagnostics-

Telematics basics, applications and technologies- Global Positioning Systems (GPS), Inertial

Navigation Systems (INS), Vehicle Location and Navigation, Bluetooth, UWB, RFID, Satellite Radio(XM-Radio

and SIRIUS), Fleet Management and Case Study

References

1. Aswin Goel, “Fleet Management- Real-time management and planning of commercial vehicle operations

Series”, Springer., 2008

2. Gilbert Held. “Inter- and Intra-Vehicle Communications”, CRC Press, 2007

3. Behrouz Forouzan., “Data Communications and Networking”, McGraw-Hill. 2003

4. Dennis Foy. Automotive Telematics, Red Hat., 2002


14EI3033 BIOMEDICAL SENSORS AND SIGNAL CONDITIONING

Credits: 3:0:0

Course Objective:




Course Outcome:


Interface bioelectric signals with embedded systems


Bioelectric amplifiers- General-purpose linear and non-linear electronic circuits typically found in industrial

applications- Instrumentation amplifiers, Transducer bridge Amplifier. Frequency and time domain analysis of low

pass, high pass, band pass, and band stop filters. Filter class- Frequency discriminators, oscillators, multivibrators -

Amplifier selection for a variety of biomedical sensors, Wheatstone bridge design, Active filter design using

standard approaches, Front-end analogue circuit design for EMG, ECG, EEG ,Front-end analogue circuit design for

limb movement sensing, Power supply topologies for biomedical instruments

References

1. R. B. Northrop, “Analysis and Application of Analog Electronic Circuits to Biomedical Instrumentation”,

2nd ed., CRC Press, 2012.


3. Ramón Pallás-Areny, John G. Webster,”Sensors and Signal Conditioning”, 2nd ed., Wiley publishers,

2000.

14EI3038 PHYSIOLOGICAL CONTROL SYSTEMS

Prerequisite: 14BT3026 Human Anatomy and physiology

Credits: 3:0:0

Course Objective:

To understand basic ideas related to modeling and different modeling techniques of certain physiological

systems

To understand system identification techniques

To analyse physiological system in time and frequency domain

Course Outcome:

Develop mathematical model of physiological system.

Simulate the physiological system and analyse in time and frequency domain

Apply system identification and optimization concepts in modeling

.

Introduction to Physiological control systems, Illustration, modeling Elements, linear models, Distributed

parameters versus lumped parameter models, principle of superposition, BioFeedback, Time and frequency domain

analysis, stability analysis of linear system, model identification of physiological system, optimization technique,

Simulation of biological systems, case studies.

References

1. Katz, A.M. “Physiology of the Heart”, Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, USA, 2006.

Ewart Carson, Claudio Cobelli, : “Introduction of Modeling in Physiology and Medicine”,Academic Press,

Netherland, 2008.

2. Vasilis.Z.Mararelis, “ Nonlinear Dynamic Modeling of Physiological System”,

John Wiley & Sons, New Jersey, 2004.


3. Daniel Weiner, Johan Gabrielsson, “Pharmacokinetic and Pharmacodynamic Data

Analysis: Concepts and Applications, Sweden, 2000.

4. Milsum J H, “Biological control system analysis”, Mc GrawHill, Newyark, 1966.

5. Michael.C.K.Khoo, “Physiological control systems: Analysis, Simulation and Estimation”, IEEE Press,

Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd. New Delhi. 2001.

14EI3039 MEDICAL INSTRUMENTATION

Credits: 3:0:0

Course Objective:

To strengthen the knowledge of the principle of operation and design of biomedical instruments.

An attempt to render a broad and modern account of biomedical instruments.

The introductory idea about human physiology system which is very important

with respect to design consideration.

Course Outcome:

Apply the concepts of Medical Instrumentation to physiological measurements

Design Instrumentation circuits for Biomedical Applications.

Use the knowledge of Biomedical Instruments to solve Practical Problems.

Physiological measurements: Cell and its Electrical activity, Principle of Physiological systems: Cardiovascular,

Nervous system, Respiratory system, Vision, Muscular system-Electrodes and bioelectric signals: Bio electrodes,

ECG, EMG, EEG and EOG, Measurement of physiological parameters: Blood flow, Blood pressure, Cardiac output,

Bio–chemical measurement, Photometer.

References

1. Khandpur. R. S, “Handbook of Biomedical Instrumentation”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2/e, New Delhi, 2003.

2. Leslie Cromwell, Fred J Weibell, Erich A Pfeiffer, “Biomedical Instrumentation and

Measurements”, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 2007.

3. Joseph J. Carr and John M. Brown, “Introduction to Biomedical Equipment Technology”,Pearson


4. Myer Kutz, “Standard Handbook of Biomedical Engineering & Design,” McGraw– Hill Publisher, New

York, 2003.

5. Webster, “Medical Instrumentation – Application & Design,” John Wiley and sons Inc, Netherlands, 2004.

6. Arumugam, “Biomedical Instrumentation”, Anuradha Publisher, Chennai.2013.

14EI3040 BIO VIRTUAL INSTRUMENTATION

Credits: 3:0:0

Course Objectives:

To provide new concepts towards measurement and virtual instruments.

To know about how to acquire a data and control an external measuring device by interfacing to a

computer.

To become competent in signal and image acquisition and processing tools

Course Outcome:


Experiment, analyze and document in the laboratory prototype measurement systems using a computer,

plug-in DAQ interfaces and bench level instruments.

recognize the application of VIs in medical instrumentation in developing medical instruments

Historical perspective, advantages, Architecture o f a Virtual Instrument-Graphical programming -Development of

Virtual Instrument-Software and hardware installation- Common Instrument Interfaces-Current loop, interface


buses- networking basics- Image and signal Acquisition and Processing- Motion control-Applications of virtual

instruments in Biomedical engineering.

References

1. Jerome, Jovitha, “Virtual Instrumentation and LABVIEW”, PHI Learning, New Delhi, First Edition, 2010.

2. Sanjay Gupta and Joseph John, “ Virtual Instrumentation using LabVIEW”, Tata Mc

Graw – Hill Publishing Company Limited, New Delhi, 1st Edition, 2005.

3. Ronald W. Larsen, “LabVIEW for Engineers”, Prentice Hall Ltd, USA Jan 2010.


5. Gupta, “Virtual Instrumentation Using Lab View”, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi,1st

Edition, 2008.

14EI3041 HOSPITAL MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

Credits: 3:0:0

Course Objective:

To understand the need and significance of Clinical Engineering and Health Policies.

To familiarize the training strategies, quality management policies and

information technology used in health care.

To know the needs of managerial training to hospital staffs

Course Outcome:



Relate the training needs at various level of organization

Need and scopes of clinical engineering, Educational responsibilities-Design and layout of hospital-National health

policies, Health organization in state- Health education-Health insurance, Health legislation-Training -Employee

appraisal method-Standards, codes and quality management in health care-regulation for mobile ICU-Maintenance

of equipments-work planning-Medical records and information management-information technology in medicine

and healthcare-operations research in hazard management.

References

1. Webster J.C. and Albert M.Cook, “Clinical Engineering Principle and Practice”, Prentice Hall Inc.,

Englewood Cliffs, New Jersey, 1979.

2. Goyal R.C., “Handbook of hospital personal management”, Prentice Hall of India, 1996.

3. R. Panneerselvam, “Operations research”, PHI learning pvt. Ltd., Newdelhi.2006.

4. A.K.Malhotra,“Hospital management: An Evaluation”, Global India Publications,2009.

5. James R. Langabeer, “Health Care Operations Management: A Quantitative Approach to Business and

logistics”, Jones & Bartlett Learning, UK.2008.

14EI3042 COGNITIVE TECHNOLOGY FOR BIOMEDICAL ENGINEERS

Credits: 3:0:0

Course Objective:

To introduce the basic concepts of neural networks and its applications in biomedical applications.

To introduce fuzzy logic concept and its applications in medical diagnosis.

To introduce the concepts of genetic algorithm for artificial intelligence

Course Outcome:

• Apply the Basic Neural Network, Fuzzy Logic and Genetic algorithms in analysis.

• Develop algorithms for medical signal and image processing to solve real world

problems pertaining to Biomedical applications.

http://www.google.co.in/search?tbo=p&tbm=bks&q=inauthor:%22R.+PANNEERSELVAM%22

http://www.jblearning.com/catalog/9780763750510/


• Design develop intelligent methods based on human like thinking using computing techniques.

Introduction to neural networks: Introduction – Biological neurons and their artificial models, Learning, Adaptation

and neural network's learning rules, Types of neural networks, Special networks and applications: Associative

memory, BAM, Hopfield network, ART Network, SOM, Case studies, Introduction to fuzzy logic: Fuzzy sets,

Fuzzy logic control: Structure of fuzzy logic controller, Case studies, Genetic algorithm and its applications:

Fundamentals of genetic algorithm, Case studies, Optimization techniques for medical applications, Artificial

intelligence, software tools.

References

1. Jacek M Zurada, ‘Introduction to Artificial Neural Systems’, Jaico Publishing House,1999.

2. Rajasekaran S. and G.A VijayalakshmiPai, ‘Neural Networks, Fuzzy logic and Genetic Algorithms,


3. Klir G.J. &Folger T.A. ‘Fuzzy sets, uncertainty and Information’, Prentice –Hall

of India Pvt. Ltd.,1993.

4. Zimmerman H.J. ‘Fuzzy set theory – and its Applications’ – Kluwer Academic

Publishers,1994.


14EI3044 EMBEDDED BASED MEDICAL INSTRUMENTATION LABORATORY

Corequisite: 14EC3076 Embedded Systems for Biomedical Instrumentation

Credits: 0:0:2

Course Objective:

To introduce the basic concepts of embedded systems and applications to biomedical instrument design

To introduce various software tools for embedded Systems with real time examples.

To deal with the concepts of interfacing issues with real time signals.

Course Outcome:

Design and Analyze the systems for disease diagnosis and treatment methods

Apply real time models and languages in medical image processing applications

Analyze interface issues related to embedded systems.

Experiments:



14EI3045 DIAGNOSTIC AND THERAPEUTIC EQUIPMENTS LABORATORY

Co-Requisite: 14BT3026 Human Anatomy and Physiology

Credits: 0:0:2

Course objectives:

To know the various methods involved in biosignal recordings and operation of patient monitoring

equipments.


To provide understanding of equipments for rehabilitation.

Course outcome:



Devise monitoring instruments, brain computer interface techniques,

Design and analyse assist devices for old age and gait analysis.

Experiments:



14EI3046 MEDICAL IMAGING TECHNIQUES

Credits: 3:0:0

Course Objective: To provide knowledge of the principle of operation and design of Radiological equipments. To know the working principles of radio diagnostic devices To know about the hazards and safety of radiation usage in hospitals

Course Outcome: Apply Radiological equipments and its imaging techniques Analyse the present technogies and will develop new techniques Be aware of standards and safe limits of radiation exposure and control of radiation

Generation of x – rays: principles and production of soft and hard x rays-radio diagnosis: radiography, angiography,

fluoroscopy, special radiological equipments-application of radioisotopes: alpha, beta and gamma emission,

principle of radiation detectors, nuclear angiogram- principles of radiation therapy-Radiation safety: hazardous

effect of radiation, radiation protection techniques-Safety limits, radiation monitoring-CT-MRI.

References

1. Isaac Bankman, I. N. Bankman , Handbook of Medical Imaging: Processing and Analysis(Biomedical

Engineering), Academic Press, 2000.

2. Jacob Beutel (Editor), M. Sonka (Editor), Handbook of Medical Imaging, Volume 2.

Medical Image Processing and Analysis , SPIE Press 2000.

3. Khandpur R.S, “Handbook of Biomedical Instrumentation”, Tata McGraw Hill, New

Delhi,2003.

14EI3048 CLINICAL INSTRUMENTATION

Credits: 3:0:0

Course Objective:

To provide various techniques and methods of spectral analysis used in clinical laboratory.

To give unique methods of separation of closely similar materials with chromatography.

To provide the important radio chemical methods of analysis and techniques in clinical laboratory

Course Outcome:

Analyze the techniques used for characterization of materials, devices and Biological molecules

Compare the important radio chemical methods of analysis.

Apply clinical laboratory instrumentation for real time applications

Introduction to analytical instruments and Spectrophotometers, NMR and mass spectrometer, radiation techniques,

Automated chemical analysis system, pH meters and Chromatography, Clinical instrumentation techniques,

Electrophoresis and microscopy.

References

1. Khandpur R.S,”Handbook of Analytical Instruments”, Tata McGraw – Hill Publishing company limited,

2006.

2. Mousumi Debnath, “Tools and techniques of Biotechnology”, Pointer publications, 2005.


3. John G Webster, “Medical instrumentation application and design”, John wiley & Sons (Asia) Pvt Ltd, 3rd

edition, 2004

4. Willard, H.H., Merrit L.L., Dean J.A Seattle F.L., ‘Instrumental Methods of Analysis’,CBS Publishing and

Distribution, 1995.

5. Robert D.Braun, Introduction to Instrumental Analysis, McGraw–Hill, Singapore, 1987.

14EI3049 MEDICAL DEVICES AND SAFETY

Credits: 3:0:0

Course Objective:

To provide useful ideas, concepts, and techniques that could be applied to reduce

unacceptable errors in expected Medical Device performance.

To avoid patient injury, achieving efficacious treatment, and controlling health care

costs.

To understand Medical data error has to be a difficult and recalcitrant phenomenon.

Course Outcome:

Appreciate the need for prevention of medical errors

Explore for reasonable, acceptable, and more effective remedies

Will have better understanding, knowledge, and directed motivation, there should be rapid advancement in

the medical device management discipline.

Reliability, safety testing, Failure assessment, Safety and risk management, Tools for risk estimation, Safe medical

devices, Handling and operation, Usability, Environmental safety , Interference with the environment, ecological

safety, Mechanical safety, Electrical Safety, Biological aspect, Limitation-Protection, Leakage currents, Safety

classe, Medical Standards and Regulation, six sigma standard for medical device design.

References

1. Bertil Jacobson and alan Murray, “Medical Devices Use and Safety”, Elsvier Limited, 2007.

2. Richard Fries,“Reliable Design of Medical Devices – Second Edition”, CRC Press, Taylor & Francis

Group, 2006.

3. Norbert Leitgeb “SafetyofElectromedicalDevicesLaw – Risks – Opportunities”, Springer Verlog/Wein,

2010.

4. Gordon R Higson, “Medical Device Safety- The regulation of Medical Devices for Public Health and

Safety”, IOP Publishing Limited, Bristol and Philadelphia, 2002.

5. Shayne Cox Gad, “Safety Evaluation of Medical Devices” Second Edition, Marcel Dekker Inc., 2002.

6. Basem El-Haik Khalid S. Mekki, “Medical Device Design for Six Sigma: A Road Map for Safety and

effectiveness” John Wiley & Sons, 2011.

14EI3051 MEDICAL SENSORS AND WEARABLE DEVICES

Credits: 3:0:0

Course Objective: To provide introduction to the field of medical sensors and an indepth and quantitative view of device design and performance analysis. To gain overview of the current state of the art to enable continuation into advanced biosensor work and

design. To study about the wearable sensors and smart sensors

Course Outcome: Evaluate a sensor based on standard performance criteria and appropriateness for an

application.

https://www.google.co.in/search?hl=en&biw=1280&bih=583&tbm=bks&tbm=bks&q=inauthor:%22Basem+El-Haik%22&sa=X&ei=zrUkU9j-NqeViAfdhYCYDQ&ved=0CFIQ9AgwAw

https://www.google.co.in/search?hl=en&biw=1280&bih=583&tbm=bks&tbm=bks&q=inauthor:%22Khalid+S.+Mekki%22&sa=X&ei=zrUkU9j-NqeViAfdhYCYDQ&ved=0CFMQ9AgwAw




identify the key design criteria and suggest an appropriate wearable sensor approach which is most likely to

meet a specific biosensor application Analyse the most relevant challenges facing the smart sensor research field and for a particular challenge

suggest a reasonable approach to find a solution.

Physiological Measurements: Sensors for Pressure Measurement- Sensors for Motion and Force Measurement-

Sensors for Flow Measurement -Temperature Measurement- Sensors for speed, torque, vibration- Wearable

Sensors-smart sensors.

References

1. Tatsuo Togawa, Toshiyo Tamura, P. Ake Oberg, “Bio-Medical Transducers and Instruments”, CRC Press,

USA, 2010.

2. Subhas Chandra Mukhopadhyay, Aime Lay Ekuakille, “Advances in biomedical sensing and

measurements”, Lecture notes in electrical engineering, Springer Verlag, Berlin, Gábor Harsányi, “Sensors

in biomedical applications: fundamentals, technology & applications”, CRC Press, USA, 2000.

3. Joseph D. Bronzino, “The biomedical engineering handbook”, Volume 2, CRC Press, USA, 2000.

14EI3052 REHABILITATION ENGINEERING

Credits: 3:0:0

Course Objective:

To provide knowledge about various types of assist devices and its applications.

To provide indepth understanding of the functions of assist devices

To develop new devices for rehabilitation

Course Outcome:

Operate assist devices for real time applications

Choose the assist device suitable for specific disorder.

Design and develop new products for rehabilitation

Rehabilitation -Prosthetic And Orthotic Devices, Types, models- Feedback in orthotic system- Material -Auditory

and speech assist devices -visual aids-Tactile devices - Muscle and nerve stimulator-Robot as assist devices-

Psychological aspects of Rehabilitation therapy- Legal aspect-case studies.

References

1. Albert M.Cook and Webster J.G, “Therapeutic Medical devices”, Prentice Hall Inc., NewJersy, 1982.

2. Levine.S.N.Editor, Advances in Bio Medical Engineering and Medical Physics, Inter University

Publication, New York 1968.

3. Kolff W.J., Artificial Organs, John Wiley and Sons, New York,1979.

4. Andreas.F.Von racum, Hand book of bio material evalution, Mc-Millan publishers, 1980.

5. Albert M.Cook and Webster J.G., “Therapeutic Medical Devices, Prentice Hall Inc., New Jersey, 1982

14EI3054 BIOMECHANICS

Credit 3:0:0

Course Objective: To introduce the Fundamental terms and concepts of human factors To discuss anthropometric, biomechanical and physiological principles and how they are used to optimize

human well-being and overall performance. To Identify, Analyze, Setup and implement solutions to a human factors problem

Course Outcome:

Acquire biosignals and perform the quantification


Understand biomechanical and physiological principles and how they are used to optimize human well-

being and overall performance.

Apply, Analyze, Setup and implement solutions to a human factors problem

Human system modeling - human control of systems, biomechanics-stress and fatigue measurements of bones,

muscles-cognitive stress-stress modeling- signal acquisition and processing-brain and computer interface-Effects of

environmental conditions –heat, stress-Human Factors Applications in medical and industrial field-Human error-

accidents analysis- human factors –case study on evaluation of the physiological factors and fitness factors for

defence vehicle driver –safety Standards.

References

1. Subrata Pal,“Text book of Biomechanics”, Viva education Private limited,NewDelhi. 2009.

2. Karl Kroemer, Henrike Kroemer, Katrin Kroemer-Elbert, “Ergonomics” How to Design for Ease &

Efficiency, Prentice Hall International Editions, 2001.

3. Mark S Sanders, “Human Factors in Engineering and Design”, McGraw Hill, New York, 1993.


5. Martin Helander, “A Guide to Ergonomics of Manufacturing”, Tata Mc GrawHill, 1996.

6. Mccormic,E.J. and Sanders.M.S “Human factors in Engineering and Design”, McGraw Hill, 1992.

7. Susan J.Hall,“Basics Bio Mechanics” 5th

Edition, McGraw-Hill Publishing Co,Newyork, 2007.

14EI3055 MEDICAL DIAGNOSTICS AND THERAPEUTIC EQUIPMENTS

Credit 3:0:0

Course objectives:

To know the various biopotential recordings and operating procedure of ICCU equipments.


To learn the safety standards of the diagnostics and therapeutic equipments

Course outcome:




Pace makers - patient monitoring system-diathermy-heart lung machine-pumps-Principle of Hemodialysis-Wearable

Artificial Kidney, Implanting Type- Respiratory aids-Breathing Apparatus Operating Sequence-thermography- Fiber

optics -Endoscopy, Laparoscopy, principles of Lithotripsy-communication standards-wireless telemetry.

References

1. Albert M Cook and Webster J G, “Therapeutic medical devices”, Prentice Hall NewYork , 1982.

2. Heinz Kresse, “ Handbook of Electro medicine”, John Wiely & Sons, Chrchester.1985

3. Webster J.G, “Medical Instrumentation application and design”, John Wiley and sons New York 3rd

edition

1999

4. Jacobson B and Webster J G Medical and Clinical Engineering – Prentice Hall of India New Delhi 1999

5. Leslie Cromwell , Fred J.Weibell and Erich A.Pfeiffer, “Biomedical Instrumentation”,

Prentice Hall New Delhi 2000

6. Joseph J Carr and John M Brown,“Introduction to Biomedical equipment Technology”,

7. Pearson Education 4th edition, New Delhi 2001.

8. Khandpur R.S “Hand Book of Biomedical Instrumentation”, Tata McGraw Hill publication , New

Delhi 2nd edition 2003

9. John Denis Enderle, Joseph D. Bronzino, Susan M. Blanchard, “Introduction to Biomedical Engineering”,

Academic Press, 2005


14EI3056 LIMB PROSTHETICS

Credits: 3: 0: 0

Course Objective:

To introduce the Basic concepts of robots and its applications to artificial limbs

To know the instrumentation involved Robot Dynamics and Kinematics

To learn the applications of Robot controls

Course Outcome:

Design Robot Control System for positioning and movement

Learn the basic sensor and actuators and applications of robots.

Develop Robotic applications as assist devices for limbs.

Definition - Classification - History - Robots components - Degrees of freedom - Robot joints coordinates -

Reference frames - Workspace - Robot languages - Actuators - Sensors - Sensor characteristics - and electric

actuators - Trajectory planning- motion control - Non-linear control-Image Processing And Vision Systems-

PROSTHESIS, Introduction to Prosthesis, -Gait Analysis in Transtibial Amputees, Prosthesis in Knee

Disarticulation- Gait Analysis in Transfemoral Amputees, -Prosthesis for Hand Amputation and Wrist

Disarticulation-Recent Advances in Prosthesis -Ambulatory Aids.

References

1. Saeed B. Niku , ''Introduction to Robotics'', Pearson Education, 2002

2. K.S.Fu, Ralph Gonzalez and C.S.G.Lee, ''Robotics", TATA McGraw Hill, Aug., 2008.

3. R.D. Klafter, TA Chmielewski and Michael Negin, "Robotic Engineering, An Integrated approach",

Prentice Hall of India, 2003.

4. Millee Jorge, “Orthotics and Prosthetics in Rehabilitation”, third edition, Saunders Elsevier publishing,

Missouri, 2013

5. Chinnathurai R, Sekar P, Kumar M Ramaa, Manoj K Nithya, Kumar C Senthil, “Short Textbook of

Prosthetics and Orthotics”, Jaypee Digital publishing, 2010.

6. Michelle Lusardi, Millee Jorge, Caroline Nielsen, “Orthotics and Prosthetics in Rehabilitation”, Third

edition, Elsevier, Saunders publishing,2012.

14E3057 INDUSTRIAL ELECTRONICS AND INSTRUMENTATION

Credits: 3:0:0

Course Objective

• To understand the concepts of Conventional and Digital Transducers

• To study the concepts of Industrial heating, Photoelectric devices and Smart Transducers

• To study the Microprocessor based instrumentation

Course Outcome

• Select the type of transducer for the Industrial application.

• And apply in case studies and mini projects in industries.

• Design the Microprocessor based Controllers.

Review of variable resistance, inductance capacitanceand piezoelectric transducers - Direct digital transducers,

Absolute and incremental displacement transducers, Moiré Fringe transducers, Force and Pressure measurement, IC

sensors - Dielectric heating, Photoelectric devices and PLC - Detection of zero crossing of an alternating waveform,

Microprocessor based: triggering of a Thyristor, Voltmeter and Ammeter, Speed monitoring Unit, phase difference

and power factor monitoring Unit, over and under voltage protection and over current protection - Smart transducer,

Measurement of flow, pH with smart transducers.

References

1. Biswas S.N, “Industrial Electronics”, Dhanpat Rai & Company Private Ltd., New Delhi, 2nd

Edition, 2008.


2. Murty.D.V.S., “Transducers and Instrumentation”, PHI Learning, New Delhi, 2nd

Edition, 2009.

3. Paul Biswanath., “Industrial Electronics & Control: Including Programmable Logic Controller”, PHI

Learning, New Delhi, 2nd

Edition, 2009.

4. Doebelin E.O, “Measurement Systems, Application and Design”, Mc-Graw Hill Publishing Company Ltd.,

New Delhi, 5th

Edition, 2002.

5. Webb, John W.Reis, Ronald A., “Programmable Logic Controllers Principles and Application”, PHI

Learning, 5th

Edition, 2009.

6. Ram. B., “Fundamentals of Microprocessors & Microcontrollers”, Dhanpat Rai (P) Ltd., New Delhi 2008.


Credits: 3:0:0

Course Objective:


To give basic knowledge in obtaining decomposition of transfer function from state model.

To understand the concepts of Controllability and Observability

To provide adequate knowledge in the Lyapunov stability analysis.

Course Outcome:

Very good knowledge in the basic concepts of linear control theory and design of control system.

Gained the knowledge about the controllability & Observability.

Solve the stability analysis problems.

State model for linear time invariant systems: State space representation using physical - Phase and canonical

variables - Solution of state equation - State transition matrix - Transfer function from state model - Transfer matrix

- Decomposition Methods – State space representation of linear time invariant discrete time systems - Solution of

discrete time state equation. - Discretization of continuous time state equations - Eigen Values and Eigen Vectors –

diagonalization - Concepts of Controllability and Observability - State Estimators - Lyapunov Stability Analysis of

linear time invariant system.

References

1. Katsuhiko Ogata, “Modern Control Engineering”, Prentice Hall of India Private Limited, New Delhi, 4th

Edition, 2002.

2. Nagrath I.J, & Gopal M, “Control System Engineering”, New Age International Publishers Limited, New

Delhi, 5th

Edition, 2007

3. Nise S. Norman, “Control Systems Engineering”, John Wiley & Sons Inc, New Delhi, 3rd

Edition, 2000.

4. John J. D'Azzo, Constantine H. Houpis, “Linear Control System Analysis and Design”, CRC Press, USA ,

5th

Edition,2003

5. Shankar P. Bhattacharyya, Aniruddha Datta, Lee H. Keel, “Linear Control Theory: Structure, Robustness

And Optimization” CRC Press, USA , 2009

14EI3059 TRANSDUCERS AND ACTUATORS

Credits: 3:0:0

Course Objective

• To understand different sensor systems used for process parameters.

• To understand signal conversion and conditioning.

• To understand sensor signal transmission.

Course Outcome

• Selection of sensor based on process parameter and application.

• Interconnection of sensors with Controller.

• Prevent data loss or noise during sensor signal transmission.


Electrical Transducers: Variable resistance type – Potentiometers, strain gauges, RTD, thermistors-Variable

inductance type – self and mutual inductance, pulse transducer-Variable capacitance transducers-Special

Transducers: Semiconductor temperature sensors, thermo-electric sensors, piezoelectric sensors, smart sensors-

Electromechanical Transducers: Electrodynamic, eddy current, force balance transducers. Basics of MEMS devices-

Other Transducers: Limit Switches, Proximity Switches, Pressure, Temperature, Level, Flow, Speed-Power System

Transducers: Analogue and digital transducers for measurement of voltage, current, power factor, frequency, power

– active and reactive. RTU for tariff calculation-Analogue Signal Conditioning techniques: Bridge amplifier, carrier

amplifiers, charge amplifiers and impedance converters, modulation - demodulation, dynamic compensation,

linearization, multiplexing and demultiplexing-Signal Transmission: Transmitters, V-I, I-V and V-f converters.

Single transmission. Cable transmission of analog and digital signal, fiber optic signal transmission, radio, telemetry,

pneumatic transmission-Actuators: Solenoid Valves, Pneumatic Control Valves, Piston-Cylinder, Motors,

Contactors.

Reference Books

1. Doeblin, E.O. – Measurement Systems: Application and Design, Mc Graw Hill International, 2002

2. Patranabis, D – Sensors and Transducers, Wheeler Pub., New Delhi, 2003.

3. Murthy, D.V.S., Transducers and Instrumentation, PHI, New Delhi, 2008.

4. Newbert, H. K. – Instrument Transducers, Oxford University Press, 1999.

14EI3060 AUTOMATED TEST AND MEASUREMENT

Credits: 3:0:0

Course Objective

• To understand the difference between classical measurement and microprocessor based measurement.

• To understand Real Time signals.

• To understand standard IEEE buses used for smart measurement.

Course Outcome

• Differentiate industrial instrumentation buses.

• Sensors and transducers with smart data transfer.

• Process, analyze and log the sensor values

Measurement automation, Comparison with classical measurement and microprocessor based measurement,

Measured data base and data base management, Real time signals, Calculated signals-Digital signal processing,

Processed signals, Data flow and graphical programming techniques, Virtual instrumentation (VI), Advantages, VIs

and Sub Vis-Data acquisition methods, DAQ hardware, Instrumentation buses, IEEE 488.1 and IEEE 488.2, Serial

interfacing-RS 232C, RS 422, RS 423, RS 485, CAMAC, VXI, SCXI, PXI -Industrial drives and interface, Sensors

and transducers, Interfacing signal conditioning, Signal-analysis techniques, Networking methods and their

applications in instrumentation.

References

1. N. Mathivanan, PC-based Instrumentation-Concepts and Practice, Prentice-Hall, 2007.

2. M, Chidambaram, Computer Control of Processes, CRC Press, 2002

3. B. G. Liptak, Instrumentation Engineers Handbook, Philadelphia: Chilton Book Company, 4th

Edition,

2003.

14EI3061 REMOTE SENSING AND CONTROL

Credits: 3:0:0

Course Objective

• To understand methods for remote sensing.

• To understand remote control techniques and its application in Industry


Course Outcome

• Classify characteristics of objects.

• Ground data acquisition.

• Importance of remote control in Industry.

Electromagnetic radiation: Classification and nature, spectral, spatial and temporal characteristics of objects-

Atmospheric interaction sensors: Photographic, thermal, multi-spectral, passive microwave and active microwave

sensors- Ground data acquisition: Photo-interpretation, image processing techniques, remote sensing applications-

Techniques of remote control: Remote control in industry including oil pipelines, rocket motion and satellite

movements.

References

1. Gupta - Remote Sensing Ecology, 2nd edition, Springer, 2005

2. Jensen - Remote Sensing of the Environment, Pearson, 2003

3. Barett, E.C. and Curtis, L.F. Introduction To Environmental Remote Sensing, 3/e, Chapman Hall, New

York 1992.

4. Lo, C.P. Applied Remote Sensing, Wiley, New York 1986.

14EI3063 ROBOT PROGRAMMING

Credits: 3:0:0

Course Objective

• To understand the basics of Robot programming

• To understand the VAL language applications

• To understand the RAPID language applications

• To understand the Practical study of virtual robot software

• To understand the VAL-II and AML language

Course Outcome

Select proper safety interlock needed for robot action

Program the robot for various application specific movements

Developing robot programs in different software packages / languages

Robot programming-Introduction-Types- Flex Pendant- Lead through programming, Coordinate systems of Robot,

Robot controller- major components, functions-Wrist Mechanism-Interpolation-Interlock commands-Operating

mode of robot, Jogging-Types, Robot specifications- Motion commands, end effectors and sensors commands-

Robot Languages-Classifications, Structures- VAL language commands motion control, hand control, program

control, pick and place applications, palletizing applications using VAL, Robot welding application using VAL

program-WAIT, SIGNAL and DELAY command for communications using simple applications-RAPID language

basic commands- Motion Instructions-Pick and place operation using Industrial robot- manual mode, automatic

mode, subroutine command based programming. Movemaster command language- Introduction, syntax, simple

problems-Robot cycle time analysis-Multiple robot and machine Interference-Process chart-Simple problems-

Virtual robotics, Robot studio online software-Introduction, Jogging, components, work planning, program modules,

input 13 RB-2013 SRM and output signals-Singularities-Collision detection-Repeatability measurement of robot-

Robot economics-VAL-II programming-basic commands, applications- Simple problem using conditional

statements-Simple pick and place applications-Production rate calculations using robot. AML Language-General

description, elements and functions, Statements, constants and variables-Program control statements-Operating

systems, Motion, Sensor commands-Data processing.

References

1. Deb. S. R. “Robotics technology and flexible automation”, Tata McGraw Hill publishing company limited,

1994

2. Mikell. P. Groover, “Industrial Robotics Technology”, Programming and Applications, McGraw Hill Co,

1995.


3. Klafter. R.D, Chmielewski.T.A. and Noggin’s., “Robot Engineering : An Integrated Approach”, Prentice

Hall of India Pvt. Ltd.,1994.

4. Fu. K. S., Gonzalez. R. C. & Lee C.S.G., “Robotics control, sensing, vision and intelligence”, McGraw Hill

Book co, 1987

5. Craig. J. J. “Introduction to Robotics mechanics and control”, Addison-Wesley, 1999.

6. Robotcs Lab manual, 2007.

7. www.wpi.edu

14EI3064 KINEMATICS AND DYNAMICS OF ROBOT

Credits: 3:0:0

Course Objective





Course Outcome





Introduction, position and orientation of objects, objects coordinate frame Rotation matrix, Euler angles Roll, pitch

and yaw angles coordinate Transformations, Joint variables and position of end effector, Dot and cross products,

coordinate frames, Rotations, Homogeneous coordinates.

Direct Kinematics-Link coordinates D-H Representation, The ARM equation. Direct kinematic analysis for Four

axis, SCARA Robot and three, five and six axis Articulated Robots- The inverse kinematics problem, General

properties of solutions. Tool configuration, Inverse kinematics of four axis SCARA robot and three and five axis,

Articulated robot-Workspace Analysis, work envelope of a Four axis SCARA robot and five axis articulated robot

workspace fixtures, the pick and place operations, Joint 11 RB-2013 SRM space technique - continuous path

motion, Interpolated motion, straight line motion and Cartesian space technique in trajectory planning-Manipulator

Dynamics-Lagrange's equation kinetic and potential energy-Link inertia Tensor, link Jacobian Manipulator inertia

tensor. Gravity, Generalized forces, Lagrange-Euler Dynamic model, Dynamic model of a Two-axis planar robot,

Newton Euler formulation, Lagrange - Euler formulation, problems.

References

1. Robert J. Schilling, Fundamentals of Robotics Analysis and Control, PHI Learning., 2009.

2. Richard D. Klafter, Thomas .A, Chri Elewski, Michael Negin, Robotics Engineering an

Integrated Approach, Phi Learning., 2009.

3. P.A. Janaki Raman, Robotics and Image Processing An Introduction, Tata Mc Graw Hill Publishing

company Ltd., 1995.

4. Francis N-Nagy Andras Siegler, Engineering foundation of Robotics, Prentice Hall Inc., 1987.

5. Bernard Hodges, Industrial Robotics, Second Edition, Jaico Publishing house, 1993.

6. Tsuneo Yohikwa, Foundations of Robotics Analysis and Control, MIT Press., 2003.

7. John J. Craig, Introduction to Robotics Mechanics and Control, Third Edition, Pearson, 2008.

8. Bijay K. Ghosh, Ning Xi, T.J. Tarn, Control in Robtics and Automation Sensor – Based integration,

Academic Press, 1999.

http://www.wpi.edu/


14EI3065 ADVANCED INSTRUMENTATION AND PROCESS CONTROL FOR FOOD ENGINEERS

Credits: 3:0:0

Course Objective:

To introduce the concept of process instruments for various physical variables, system,

automation.

To gain knowledge of the different controllers

To learn the complex control techniques used in process industries

Course Outcome:

Apply the knowledge of Measurement to various applications.

Analyze the characteristics of Instrumentation systems.

Design controllers for a typical application

Functional Elements of an Instrument, Performance Characteristics, Static and Dynamics CharacteristicsOpen loop

and closed loop systems, Response of First Order and Second order system for Unit Step input, Response of Second

Order system for Unit Step Input.

Pressure measurement: Manometers, Elastic elements, McLeod gauge, Ionization gauge, Thermal Conductivity

Gauge:Pirani Gauge, Thermocouple Gauge, Temperature Measurement: Expansion Thermometer, Filled System

Thermometer, Pyrometers,Thermocouple, RTD, Thermistor, Level Measurement: Direct methods, Radiation Level

Detector, Ultrasonic Level Detector, Flow Measurement: Turbine flowmeter, Rotameter, Electromagnetic

flowmeter, Ultrasonic flowmeter, Measurement of pH , Viscosity, Process Automation: Process Variables– Degrees

of Freedom, Control Modes: P– PI–PID – Final Control element, Actuators, Control Valve characteristics, Control

Valve types, Complex Control Techniques: Cascade control, Ratio control, Feed forward control, Split Range

Control, Inferential Control, Case studies: Distillation column, Chemical reactor, Heat exchanger, Condenser,

Evaporator

References

1. Singh. S. K., “Industrial Instrumentation and Control”,2nd Edition, Tata McGraw– Hill,New Delhi, 2004.


India,2006.

3. Coughanowr, and Koppel,“ Process systems analysis and control” , Tata McGraw– Hill,New Delhi,2004.

4. Seborg. D. E., Edger. T. F, and Millichamp. D. A, “Process Dynamics and Control”,JohnWiley and Sons,

Newyork,2004.

5. Roffle. B., Betlem. B. H. L., “Advanced Practical Control”, Springer, Newyork,2004.

6. Stephanopoulos, “Chemical Process Control”, 2nd Edition, Prentice Hall, NewDelhi,

14EI3066 SENSORS AND DATA ACQUISITION LAB

Credits: 0:0:2

Course Objective:

To learn the characteristics of sensors.

To introduce the concept of data acquisition.

To deal with experiments in data acquisition and analysis

Course Outcome:

Determine the characteristics of sensors.

Acquire real time data for analysis

Analyze acquired signals.


14EI3067 TRANSDUCER ENGINEERING

Credits: 3:0:0

Objective:

To elaborate on basic and advanced concepts of nanosensors and transducers for nanotechnology

applications.

To teach various transducers effects for the best understanding of various nanotransducers.

To elaborate on the various types of nanosensors and actuators.

Outcome:

The students should be able to understand basic and advanced concepts of nanoelectronic devices

The students should be able to understand basic and advanced concepts of sensors

The students should be able to understand basic and advanced concepts of actuators

Course Description: Transducers - capacitive transducers -Acoustic wave transducers -MOS capacitor based transducers – FET based

transducers – Cantilever based transducers - Sensor Characteristics and Physical effects - Static characteristics -

Dynamic characteristic - Photoelectric effect – photodielectric effect – Photoluminescence effect –

electroluminescence effect – chemiluminescence effect –Doppler effect – Barkhausen effect – Hal effect –Nano

based Inorganic sensors - Organic /Biosensors - Signal conditioning and data acquisition - Phase locked loop.

References 1. Nanoelectronics and Nanosystems: From transistors to Molecular and Quantum Devices by K. Goser

(Edition, 2004), Springer. London.

2. Nanotechnology enabled sensors by Kouroush Kalantar – Zadeh, Benjamin Fry, Springer Verlag New

York, (2007).

3. Sensors and signal conditioning, Ramon Pallas-Areny, John G. Webster John,2nd edition, Wiley & Sons

(2001).

4. S.Renganathan “Transducer Engineering” – Allied publishers Limited, 1999.

5. Ernest O. Doeblin “Measurement Systems – Application & Design” McGraw – Hill Publishing company,

1990.

6. Biosensing: International Research and Development, Jerome Schultz, Milar Mrksich, Sangeeta N. Bhatia,

David J. Brady, Antionio J. Ricco, David R. Walt, Charles L. Wilkins, Springer 2006

7. H.Rosemary Taylor, Chapman and Hall, “Data acquisition for sensor systems”, London, 2007

instrumentation › ... › 2019 › instrumentation.pdf3. gendreau, michel and jean-yves potvin...

Documents